Home

Function Reference Manual - DSP Development Corporation

1. gimpulse 1024 1 filteq 1 0 5 0 8 0 2 0 5 W1 1 2 1 2 4 i 0 8 4 0 8 J 0 6 04 4 23 of 0 4 S og h 0 2 4 0 Gan 0 2 mo ods oer aie le Ine 0 8 2 Wl cit Ves dua ah oie le oe 0 200 400 600 800 1000 0 200 400 600 800 1000 Sec spectrum W2 setxlog 1 setylog 1 0 01 A 2 F X mi J IZ 0 0014 L 3 0 0001 T T T T TT TTT T T TER TE Ni T T T 0 001 0 01 0 1 0 4 Hertz calculates 1024 samples of the impulse response of the above difference equation The Spectrum in W3 shows a resonate peak at approximately 0 127 Hertz Ely Oy 05 05 OF filteq 1 0 5 1 0 2 0 5 x y 1 0 0 3 0 44 0 062 0 2076 Because a 1 1 y is the output produced by the difference equation yin xim 0 5 xfn 1 0 2 y n 1 0 5 y n 2 or the equivalent Z transform Y z 1 0 5 z 1 H 2 S sss E santen E X Z Pe OR 2 AZ NEN an Qi GAZ 2 251 Remarks See Also FIND Purpose Format Returns 252 FILTEQ evaluates a linear constant coefficient difference equation of the following form yin a 1 y n 1 al2 y n 2 a N y n N b 1 x n FOLT AnI DEM XEn M 1 for n gt 1 The initial conditions y 0 y 1 y L are specified by the optional series yi If not specified yi is assumed to be 0 If a 1 1 the coefficients are assumed to be in standard Z transform form Y Z EII bl2 z 1
2. 2 Xe gt 1400 1400 1200 12005 1000 1000 5 w 800 4 n 800 I A x 604 x 6004 gt 400 gt 400 i 200 4 Bi 200 g 04 d 04 VW 200 4 Eom al Th ovis T al 200 Pole ge at le ek tlc wal 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 04 05 0 0 1 0 2 03 04 05 Hertz Hertz 583 Remarks 584 max W2 occurs at 0 2 Hz with amplitude 1 0 100 5 2 2 1250 mean W1 W1 12 50 sum W1 W1 1250 sum W2 1250 area W2 8 33 area W3 12 50 The true PSD for the series is continuous Because the PSD function returns samples of the continuous power spectral density we must use more samples for the area to approximate the mean squared power as demonstrated by W3 PSD Power Spectral Density is now a built in function rather than a macro The PSD is normalized so the area of the PSD is ideally equal to the mean of the input series squared Le area PSD s mean s s ideally The PSD is calculated by the FFT and has the following form psd s 2 deltax s mag fft s 2 length s with a total of length s 2 frequency values from 0 to Fs 2 Hz where Fs is the sampling rate of the data i e rate s The first value DC component and the last value at Fs 2 the Nyquist frequency are not scaled by 2 to preserve Parseval s theorem For Fs equal to 1 0 by Parseval s theorem the sum of the PSD terms equals the sum of the series squared i e sum psd s sum s s A sinewave of amplitu
3. 5 068385 1 321041 0 023708 10 073188 0 398369 0 408757 16 474527 0 518261 0 303662 For x lambda eig a the nth entry of the diagonal of the eigenvalue array lambda corresponds to the eigenvector in column n of x Matrix Multiply BALANCE CHOLESKY DIAGONAL EIGVAL EIGVEC MMULT NBEIGVAL NBEIGVEC Computes Eigenvalues of a square matrix EIGVAL matrix matrix An expression resolving to a Real or Complex square matrix A series with as many rows as the input table Each entry in the series is an Eigenvalue The Eigenvalue in row n of EIGVAL corresponds to the Eigenvector in column n of EIGVEC x 1 3 4 15 3 165 S75 18 95 12k eigval x 19 964160 1 473921 0 509760 x eigvec x eigvec x diag eigval x See Also EIGVEC Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also BALANCE DIAGONAL EIG EIGVEC MMULT NBEIGVAL NBEIGVEC Computes the Eigenvectors of a square matrix EIGVEC matrix matrix Real or Complex matrix A square table of the same dimensions as the input matrix Each column of the output table is an Eigenvector The Eigenvector in column n of EIGVEC corresponds to the Eigenvalue in row n of EIGVAL x 1 3 4 45 6 5 7h teg 95 LAK eigvec x 0 25387 0 89628 0 04651 0 50456 0 27028 0 80186 0 82521 0 35162 0 59570 x eigvec x eigvec x diag eigval x BALANCE E
4. 1 5 0 ot 02 03 Od 05 08 07 08 09 quantize W1 10 plotmode W 1 1 154 1 0 54 04 0 5 4 14 1 5 4 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 The cosine is quantized to 10 levels ranging from 1 to 1 W1 is shaded to show the 10 distinct levels The linewidth is thickened to highlight the color shading Remarks QUANTIZE quantizes a series to any number of quantization levels Use BITQUANT to specifically quantize a series to 2 n levels 589 See Also BITQUANT BITSCALE LINSCALE RAINBOW Purpose Generates a colormap of the visible color spectrum Format RAINBOW len len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap Returns A table of RGB triples suitable for the SETCOLORMAP function Example clen length getcolormap density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen rainbow density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen rainbow 250 200 150 lt 100 50 4 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 creates a table of 32 x N where N colormap length RBG values and displays the resulting colors The resulting image is a vertical plot of colors ranging from blue lowest to red highest 590 Remarks See Also RAND Purpose Format Returns Example rainbow by itself sets the colormap and shading a rainbowor setcolormap rainbow returns the RGB values In this case use SETSHADING to make the new col
5. app A string specifying the application name topic A string specifying the topic name item A string specifying the item to retrieve DDELINK appjtopic item server autostart startmode datatype overwrite autoscale app A string specifying the application name topic A string specifying the topic name item A string specifying the item to retrieve server Optional A string specifying the name of server executable autostart Optional An integer 1 Start server 0 Don t start server Defaults to 0 startmode Optional An integer 1 Normal 2 Icon 3 Full size Defaults to 1 datatype Optional An integer or name specifying the type of data to retrieve Defaults to 0 The following are valid data types Name Code Data Type Range ASCII 0 Comma Space delimited data N A SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE BYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10 37 to 10 38 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 10 308 overwrite Optional An integer 0 Append new data to existing data 1 Overwrite existing data with new data Defaults to 0 autoscale Optional An integer 0 Do not automatically scale the Window to the range of the new data 1 Autoscale the Window Defaults to 1 172 Returns A series representing th
6. string Any string series table number or macro enclosed in quotes A string series table or number mvwin n eval sprintf moveto W d n creates an SPL routine that moves to a Window given a Window number mvwin 2 moves to Window 2 MVWIN builds the string moveto W2 and uses EVAL to evaluate the string This has the same effect as typing moveto w2 directly at the command line Multiple statements separated by semicolons are treated as a single unit in DADiSP That is they are evaluated as a group and all macros on the line are expanded before the statements are evaluated EVAL accepts a string as its input argument and evaluates the argument DEFINE Vertical Bar DEFMACRO EVALTOSTR IF MACROS ONPLOT WHILE EVALTOSTR Purpose 224 Evaluates its input argument and places the result in a string Format Returns Example Remarks See Also EVALTOSTR string string Any string series table number or macro enclosed in quotes A string define mx evaltostr max W1 message mx pops up a message with the maximum value of W1 Same as EVAL but the result is placed in a string Useful for numeric results that must be reported in text form EVAL EXIT EXITOS Purpose Format Remarks EXP Purpose Terminates the DADiSP session and returns to the operating system EXIT confirm confirm Optional An integer to confirm exit 1 C
7. reshape such that each column is actual bin values a reshape a h 1 0 1 compute mean of each bin a transpose colmean a return components or full XY graph if outarge gt 1 x y avghist s n return a h else return xy a h RETURN is for use in SPL files It can be used with or without optional return values Unlike C C the SPL RETURN function can return multiple values BREAK FOR IF LOOP SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language WHILE 623 REVERSE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 624 Plots the data points of a given series or table in reverse order REVERSE series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table reverse 1l 2 3 returns a series 3 2 1 Taking the reverse of a 10 point line with equation y 2x 1 reverse gline 10 0 1 2 1 creates a 10 point series line with equation y 2x 1 conv W2 rev W2 2 length W2 creates a new series in the current Window which is the auto correlation of the series in Window 2 This formula will show the periodicity of the series Operates on Real and Complex series or tables REVERSE can be abbreviated REV AUTOCOR CONCAT EXTRACT FLIPLR FLIPUD RGB2MONO Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Converts an RGB image to an 8 bit monochrome image
8. 7 8 9 W2 fliplr W1 W2 3 2 1 6 5 4 9 8 7 Remarks See Also FLIPUD Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also FLIPLR reverses the elements of each row which has the effect of reversing the column order of the array Use REVERSE or FLIPUD to reverse the elements of each column The input is converted to a series if it is not already a series or array FLIPUD RAVEL REVERSE Reverses the elements of each column of an array FLIPUD a a An input array An array of size a where the elements of each column are in reversed order WI 1 2 3 4 5 6 Vg By OE W2 flipud W1 W2 7 8 9 tA Ba O 5 tls 2 Sar FLIPUD reverses the elements of each column which has the effect of reversing the row order of the array Use FLIPLR to reverse the order of the elements in each row The input is converted to a series if it is not already a series or array FLIPLR RAVEL REVERSE 263 FLOAT Purpose Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying single precision data type Format FLOAT Expansion Example writeb MYFILE FLOAT writes the series in the current Window to the file named MYFILE as 32 bit IEEE standard single precision floating point values The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 6 Remarks FLOAT is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB
9. ACORR CONV FACORR FCONV XCORR 285 FXCOV Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 286 Calculates the covariance using the FFT method FXCOV series1 series2 norm series1 A series array or expression resulting in a series or array series2 A series array or expression resulting in a series or array norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 fxcov W1 W2 Performs the cross covariance of two sinewaves The peaks of the result indicate the two waveforms are very similar at the time intervals where the peaks occur W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 fxcov W1 W1 1 W4 fxcov W1 W2 1 W3 displays the cross covariance of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the cross covariance between a sinewave and random noise The normalized maximum of W3 is 1 0 indicating perfect covariance at time t 0 Although the waveform of W4 displays some peaks the normalized maximum is roughly 0 04 indicating little covariance between W1 and W2 For a graphical representation overplot W4 in W3 The cross covariance is used to determine how similar two series are to each other FXCOV performs covariance by computing the FFT s of the input series See Also FXYVALS Purpose Format The output length L is L length sl
10. Example 332 Generates a Hamming Window GHAMMING points spacing alpha points Number of points to generate spacing Spacing between points alpha Optional Scaling parameter Defaults to 0 54 A series ghamming 100 01 generates a 100 point Hamming Window using the following formula w n a l1 a 1 cos 2 mn spacing N 1 where o is the default value 0 54 n is the nth point the spacing is 0 01 and N is 100 the number of points ghamming 100 01 5 creates a similar Window as above except that alpha is now 0 5 and the formula used is w n 1 cos 27n spacing N 1 A Hamming Window with alpha 0 5 is identical to a Hanning Window Remarks See Also References Use the HAMMING macro command to automatically create and multiply a Hamming Window with a series For example HAMMING W1 will multiply Window 1 with a Hamming Window calculated to the same length and spacing as the series in W1 Hamming Hanning and Kaiser Windows are useful in creating FIR filters and in preprocessing series for FFT calculations FFT GHANNING GKAISER PSD SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 GHANNING Purpose Format Returns Example Generates a Hanning Window GHANNING points spacing alpha points Number of points
11. Example Remarks See Also A real the estimated condition number WI 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 O cond W1 8 579581E 016 cond W2 35 105870 COND uses SVD to compute the singular values of a matrix The result is the ratio of the maximum and minimum singular values The condition number is infinite for a singular matrix thus a large condition number indicates an ill conditioned matrix NORM RANK SVD CONFORMITY Purpose Format 122 Defines how DADiSP deals with series with the same delta x but different x offsets CONFORMITY mode mode Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 The series are aligned by point values with zeros padded on the end of the shorter series 1 The union mode The series are aligned by x values and the x values that are in only one series are padded with NAVALUE The resulting series has all the x values that are in either of the input series 2 The intersection mode The x values are aligned and the resulting series has only those x values that are in both the input series Example Remarks CONFX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Wl 1 5 W2 2 4 W3 conformity 0 W1 W2 W4 conformity 1 W1 W2 W5 conformity 2 W1 W2 results are as follows W3 3 5 7 4 5 W4 NA 4 6 8 NA WS 4 6 8 If the delta x values in the input seri
12. POWFIT fits a power curve of the form y A x b The fit is accomplished by fitting a line to the following equation In y In A b ln x Note that both x and y must be positive 573 See Also PRINTF Purpose Format 574 The fitted power curve fit coef powfit s returns both the fit and the coefficients as a series The fitted power curve fit A B powfit s returns the fit as a series and the coefficients as separate scalars EXPFIT POLYFIT TREND Performs formatted output to the screen PRINTF control arg1 arg2 argn control argn Format control string Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications The ordinary characters are copied to the output string in order of their appearance Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash Format specifications in the control string are introduced by a percent sign and are matched to the specified arguments in order If there are more arguments than there are format specifications the extra arguments are ignored Scalar or string value that matches control string Format Specification Fields flags width precision type Flags are optional character s that control justification of output and printing of signs blanks decimal points and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag can appear in a format specifica
13. Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators Serves as logical operators lt expr1 gt op lt expr2 gt OPERATOR expr1 expr2 lt expri gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table lt expr2 gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table containing ones and zeros True or False Wiss BO AS 20s ks epee We tL Ais Oh 953553 OF W1 amp amp W2 gt 3 returns the series 0 1 0 1 0 1 containing ones wherever W1 and W2 gt 3 are non zero and zeros elsewhere W1 W2 4 returns aseries 0 1 1 1 1 1 containing ones wherever W1 is non zero or wherever W2 equals 4 and zeros elsewhere The returned series of ones and zeros is called a Binary Series and is useful for identifying points that meet a given condition amp amp is functionally equivalent to AND but the syntax is different is functionally equivalent to OR but the syntax is different is functionally equivalent to NOT but the syntax is different lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators AND FLIPFLOP NOT NOTEQUAL OR XOR lt lt gt Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also gt Conditional Operators Determines conditional relationships between expressions lt expr1 gt op lt expr2 gt lt expril gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar serie
14. Remarks See Also FIRSAMP Purpose Format Returns Example FINITE always returns a series FINITE returns an empty series if the input is an empty series INF ISEMPTY ISINF ISNAN Designs an arbitrary FIR filter using frequency sampling FIRSAMP f m f An XY series specifying the desired frequencies in Hertz and magnitudes of the filter or an explicit series specifying the frequencies only m Optional A series the explicit desired magnitudes A series Wl 0 1 10 20 30 W2 1 1 2 0 0 W3 xy W1 W2 W4 firsamp W3 W5 mag fft W4 bestpow2 length W4 259 W1 0 1 10 20 30 W2 1 1 2 0 0 W3 xy W1 W2 35 25 254 30 4 Yt 2 2 254 56 P 154 154 15 4 A 14 14 195 0 5 0 5 54 Papaes 04 0 4 a 05 aaa 05 tt 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 6 12 18 24 30 W4 firsamp W3 W5 mag fft W4 bestpow2 length W4 15 2 54 0 85 25 s 0 6 4 i ee 0 47 14 0 24 04 0 54 0 24 0 0 4 T T T T T T T T 0 5 aa T TT T T Toor TT T T 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 W4 contains a 61 point linear phase FIR filter The filter has unity gain from at 0 and 1 Hz and a gain of 2 at 10 Hz W5 shows the magnitude response of the filter firsamp W1 W2 same as above except the frequencies and magnitudes are specified explicitly Remarks FIRSAMP sorts the input frequencies in ascending ord
15. Remarks See Also HILO Purpose Format See Also HISTEQ Purpose Format W1 gnorm 1000 0 1 W2 hilb W1 W3 real W2 W4 imag W2 The real part of HILB is the same as the input series The imaginary part of HILB is the Hilbert Transform HILB uses the FFT and IFFT to calculate the Hilbert transform DEMODFM Displays the data points of a series as horizontal dashes HILO BARS ERRORBAR POINTS STEPS STICKS Performs histogram equalization of an image HISTEQ array intflag array An input image intflag Optional An integer Cast result to integer values 1 Yes 0 No Defaults to 0 367 Returns An array Example W1 density ravel gsin 400 1 400 4 20 W2 histeq W1 returns an equalized image W1 density ravel readb baboon dat ubyte 128 W2 histeq W1 equalizes the black amp white mandrill image W1 Baboon W2 histeq W1 a a P ee ee Remarks HISTEQ expects an image of integer values See Also AMPDIST HISTOGRAM PARTSUM HISTOGRAM Purpose Macro Creates a histogram of the input series Format HISTOGRAM series nbins series Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table nbins An integer number of bins 368 Returns Example Remarks A histogramcTs Ss Ly 2 45 55 75 Se 21sec OY series or table 10 returns a series 2 0 2 1 2 0 0 2 0 1 dis
16. Returns Example 612 CEILING FIX FLOOR MOD ROUND Removes points from a series on a periodic basis or by explicit indices REMOVE series interval start blocksize REMOVE series idxseries series Optional Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table Defaults to the current Window interval An integer specifying the remove interval start Optional An integer starting point Defaults to 1 blocksize Optional An integer the number of points to remove at every interval Defaults to 1 idxseries Optional Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table Specifies the indices of the points to remove A series or table remove W1 64 4 removes every 64th point starting at the 4th point remove W1 64 4 8 removes a block of eight points every 64 points starting at the 4th point Wl 10 1 W2 remove wl 1 5 8 W2 contains the series 5 4 2 1 Remarks See Also remove series idxseries explicitly defines the indices of the points to be removed DECIMATE DELETE DELETECOL DELETEROW EXTRACT INSERT MERGE RAVEL REPLACE REMOVENA Purpose Format Returns Examples See Also Removes the NAVALUEs from a series or array REMOVENA s s An input series or array A series or array with all of the NAVALUEs removed W1 5 navalue navalue 1 W2 removena W1 W2 5 0 1 0 DELETE FIND ISNAVALUE NAFILL
17. S Ta 0 5 4 0 2 4 VV 0 0 4 J T T T T T T T T T 0 5 Pl f e A gh rm Poe le 0 4 0 2 0 0 2 0 4 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 W4 contains a 61 point linear phase FIR filter The filter has unity gain from at 0 and 1 Hz and a gain of 2 at 10 Hz W5 shows the magnitude response of the filter freqsamp W1 W2 Same as above except the frequencies and magnitudes are specified explicitly Wi Stile Wi Zs TL 03 6 04 W2 freqsamp W1 W3 mag fft W2 overp W1 lred An arbitrary magnitude response is created in W1 and the magnitude response of the resulting frequency sampling filter is compared in W3 277 Remarks See Also FSEEK Purpose Format Returns 278 W1 hamming gsinc 100 1 2 pi 5 2 pi setxoffset 5 0 W2 mag fft Wl1 W3 freqsamp W2 1 W4 W1 W3 W1 creates a simple 1 Hz low pass filter with a gain of 5 0 The impulse response using the frequency sampling method is compared to the original impulse response in W4 The entire magnitude response is used to design the filter The FIR filter is designed by performing the IFFT of the given magnitude response after adding a linear phase component The resulting FIR filter has linear phase FREQSAMP sorts the input frequencies in ascending order If a frequency of 0 Hz is not specified a 0 Hz term equal to the magnitude of the frequency nearest 0 is added to the list IFFT DADiSP Filters Module XYINTERP Moves the file pointer to the location
18. See Also SETVPORT also works properly on arrays and images and is useful when visually comparing data CUT EVAL ONPLOT SETVUNITS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Sets the vertical units for the first series in the current Window SETVUNITS Window name Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window name String identifying the units in quotes setvunits Volts sets vertical units of the series in the current Window to Volts See UNITS for a list of units recognized by DADiSP DADiSP attempts to reduce subsequent vertical unit calculations in terms of the above units If the unit string is not one internally defined by DADiSP such as Grams the string is still assigned to the vertical unit string but further unit reduction is not performed however unit expansion e g Grams 2 will still occur GETHUNITS GETVUNITS SETHUNITS SETXLABEL SETYLABEL UNITS 691 SETWFORM Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Sets the formula for a Window SETWFORM Window formula Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window formula Any valid DADiSP formula in quotes A formula can be any DADiSP command function or macro setwform reverse W1 calculates the expression reverse W1 in the current Window and stores the formula in the current Window setwform W2 reverse W1 explicitly sets the formula
19. b gnorm 10 1 setplotstyle b 3 Wl a Wl b The series variable a has the stem plotting style set and variable b is set to a bar plot By default a window displays a series in plotting style of the series so Window 1 plots variable a as a stem plot and variable b as a bar plot inhserstyle wl 0 Wl a Wl b Window 1 no longer inherits the series plotting style so each series is plotted in the Window s plotting style in this case a line plot 389 Remarks Explicitly setting the Windows plotting style with LINES POINTS BARS inhserstyle See Also INHWINSTYLE SETPLOTSTYLE Purpose Causes series to inherit not inherit its plotting style from the Window Format INHWINSTYLE Window n sernum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window n Optional An integer 0 OFF 1 ON Defaults to 1 sernum Optional Index origin 1 specifying which data series to set Defaults to 1 the primary series Remarks In general use INHSERSTYLE to control window style inheritance Explicitly setting the Windows plotting style with LINES POINTS BARS inhwinstyle See Also INHSERSTYLE SETPLOTSTYLE Purpose 390 Computes the table inner or dot product Format INNERPROD table1 table2 0p1 op2 tablel1 A rectangular table table2 A table with as many rows as table has columns op1 The first binary operator in quotes op2 The second binary operator in quotes Returns
20. image An array the input image r An array the output red values g An array the output green values An array the output blue values Up to three arrays W1 readbmp mandrill bmp r g b getrgb wl g 1 2 W2 rgbimage r g b W2 has a new RGB image formed by increasing the green component of W1 by 20 Each RGB value ranges from 0 0 to 1 0 311 See Also IMAGE24 RGBIMAGE READBMP Purpose Returns an integer corresponding to the scales used by the current focus of the specified Window Format GETSCALES Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window Returns An integer Example W1 gsin 100 01 scales 16 getscales W1 returns the value 16 scales 16 yields x axis on top with labels Remarks GETSCALES applies to the current focus of the specified Window See Also FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES Purpose Returns the nth column of a table which is equivalent to the nth series of an overplotted Window 312 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GETSERIES table n table Any table or expression resulting in a table n An integer Column number A series Wl ravel gline 100 1 1 1 10 W2 getseries W1 3 returns a series in Window 2 consisting of the numbers 21 through 30 which is the third column of Window 1 getseries W1 4 returns the fourth column or third overplot i e the fourth series in Window
21. BIM z M 1 A a a A a a e A X z E af 2 z 1 af N z N 1 FIR IIR ZFREQ Returns indices of non zero elements or NA if none found FIND s row col FIND s row col val FIND s s A series array or expression resulting in a series or array A series or array row col FIND s returns the row and column indices of the non zero elements row col val FIND s returns the row and column indices and the non zero elements of s Example Remarks See Also 1 0 5 find a find a gt 1 a b a r S e E Il returns the following b 1 3 C 3 d 1 5 E A She 145 5 a E b find a 2 c alb og and c return b 3 4 8 CIES Ae L E The following statement r c find a 2 returns r 3 1 2 CSS ANE r c v find a gt 5 a PR EZR 3a 3 c 2 2 3 v 5 8 9 As indicated by the second example FIND returns the indices of the non zero elements of the array as a single unraveled series These indices can be used to address arrays DELETE FINDMAX FINDMIN FINDVAL RAVEL REMOVE UNRAVEL 253 FIND PEAKS AND VALLEYS Purpose Format Remarks See Also 254 Sets the crosshair cursor to the first previous or next Peak or Valley from a specified threshold FUNCTION Window threshold width Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window threshold Area
22. Example Assigns the value of an expression to a variable variable lt expr gt variable A variable lt expr gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series table or string Nothing the result of the expression is assigned to the variable a 5 b 10 a returns 50 CE ths 25 34 awe returns the series 5 10 15 Assigning elements to the empty series removes data points For example a 1 2 3 4 5 a 3 returns the series 1 2 4 5 Remarks 10 Multiple return assignments are support For example the expression u w v svd a assigns the variables u w and v The operator can assign a series to a Window however the Window formula remains unchanged For example Wl 1 100 W2 integ w1 W1 gnorm 100 1 The original ramp data in W1 is replaced with random data The formula of W1 is unchanged but W2 automatically recalculates because the series in W1 changed This behavior is very useful with cyclical Worksheets For example W1 W2 W2 W1 delay W1 10 If your Calculation Settings has Cyclical Window Formulae enabled the mutually dependent Windows will recalculate as many times as specified by the Iteration Count However since W1 is initially empty there is no data to evaluate To start the iteration simply assign a series to W1 Wl 1 10 The operator assigns both a formula and series to a Window For example W1 gnorm 100 1
23. Purpose 746 STEPCTR only effects 2D step charts STEPCTR is a Window property All step plots plotted in the Window will be drawn in the current STEPCTR mode BARCTR BARS STEPS Displays a series as a step plot STEPS grand 10 0 1 steps generates a 10 point series of random numbers and displays the data points as a step plot A step plot produces a staircase like effect where each point is connected to the subsequent data point by a horizontal and vertical line rather than by the shortest straight line as with a line plot BARS LINES POINTS STEPCTR STICKS Displays the data points of the series as very thin vertical bars Format Example Remarks See Also STRCAT Purpose Format Returns Example STICKS grand 10 1 sticks generates a 10 point series of random numbers and displays the data points as vertical sticks STICKS is equivalent to the third mode of the F7 key or Graph Style toolbar button and SETPLOTSTYLE BARS LINES POINTS SETPLOTSTYLE TABLEVIEW Concatenates two or more strings STRCAT str1 strN stri strN Two or more strings or string variables A string strcat DADiSP is pronounced Day Disp results in the string DADiSP is pronounced Day Disp W1 1 0 5 6 5 strcat The max of Window 1 is strnum max W1 displays The max value of Window 1 is 6 5 on the status line message strcat The max of Window 1 i
24. Returns 394 gsin input 2 Number of Points Enter Value Between 10 and 1000 100 10 1000 1 prompts the user to input the number of points used to generate the sine wave The string Number of Points displays at the beginning of the text entry line followed by a colon The string Enter Value Between 10 and 1000 appears at the bottom of the screen 100 is written in the text enter line above as a default value The user can erase this value and enter any value between 10 and 1000 or press Enter to accept the default value When Enter is pressed a sine wave of the specified length is generated in the current Window strcat MY STRING input 3 Your String prompts the user with the words Your String to enter characters on the text entry line INPUT adds quotes around the user s input string before passing it to DADiSP This command prints MY STRING input_string at the bottom of the screen where input_string is the characters typed in on the input line GETSTRING Inserts values into a series as specified by explicit indices INSERT series values idxseries insertflag series A series the series to insert into values A series the values to insert idxseries A series of integers Specifies the indices of where to insert the new values insertflag Optional An integer specifying how to insert the new values 0 insert before index insert after index Defaults to 0 A series or table
25. SETFORMAT Purpose Format Example Remarks Sets the display type for numerical values including table listings and scales SETFORMAT mode mode An integer Format mode Valid arguments are Mode Resulting Format 1 Auto Format default Regular Floating Notation Exponential Notation with Uppercase E Picks Most Concise of Mode 0 or 1 Exponential Notation with Lowercase E Picks Most Concise of Mode 0 or 3 User Specified Format String oa KRW DNY O Hex Format setformat 0 sets the display type to regular floating notation Use in conjunction with SETPRECISION to control the appearance of numerical values This function affects the display of numerical values everywhere in the Worksheet not just the current Window 667 See Also SETPRECISION SETGCOLOR Purpose Dynamically sets a global DADiSP color parameter Format SETGCOLOR color_param color color param An integer Corresponds to the color related parameters in the file dspcolor color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP Example setgcolor 17 red sets the 17th parameter Window color in dspcolor to RED To see the change use REDRAWALL Remarks To see the entire list of color parameters view dspcolor To list the colors supported by DADiSP use the MACROS function See Also GETGCOLOR REDRAWALL SETHATCH Purpose Turns 3D cross hatching On or Off Format SETHATCH win mod
26. STRFIND Purpose Format Returns Example A string strfile symbols txt 1 1 returns the contents of the file symbols txt asa single string with embedded newlines and the lines of the file in reverse order Expressions in braces are not interpreted Useful with annotation functions such as TEXT for placing the contents of text files in Windows For example 0 1 2 text 1 1 strfile ascii txt STRLIST TEXT Returns a portion of a string that is located in another string STRFIND string1 string2 string String to search for in quotes string2 String to search in quotes A string strfind XINC YOR 12 3 XINC 1 0 YREF 120 0 returns the string XINC 1 0 YREF 120 0 Load the series RUN1 ANALOGI into Window 1 Press F8 choose RUN1 then choose ANALOG1 Typing strfind AN getwformula W1 returns ANALOG1 753 See Also STRFTIME Purpose Format 754 STRCAT STRCMP STREXTRACT STRGET Converts a time value to a string STRFTIME format timeval format Optional A string Defaults to c Valid arguments are a A b B c d D h H I j m M n p r S t T U Locale s abbreviated weekday name Locale s full weekday name Locale s abbreviated month name Locale s full month name Locale s appropriate date and time representation Day of month as a decimal number 01 31 Date in the format mm d
27. Then if the series length is greater than 600 x dsp is executed without returning to the original command file and the original command file can be written so as to deal only with cases where ength W1 lt 600 See Also CALL RUN LOADDATASET Purpose Loads an entire Dataset into a Worksheet from a starting Window Format LOADDATASET Window dsetname overwrite onewin usecolor Window Optional Starting Window Defaults to the current Window dsetname Name of Dataset to load in quotes overwrite Optional Overwrite flag 1 overwrite any existing series in a Window 0 do not overwrite Defaults to 0 onewin Optional Flag to load the entire Dataset into the current Window or to load each series into consecutive Windows 0 Loads each series into consecutive Windows beginning at the Starting Window If there are not enough Windows verifies to add the required amount of Windows up to the maximum Default 1 Loads all the series into the specified or default Windows The result is a multi column Window The overwrite flag is ignored 2 Loads each series into consecutive Windows beginning at the Starting Window If there are not enough Windows automatically adds the required amount of Windows up to the maximum without verification 3 Loads each series into consecutive Windows beginning at the Starting Window If there are not enough Windows prompts the user to specify the number of Windows
28. W1 5 3 gsin 100 01 10 gline 100 01 20 0 W2 sintrend W1 overp W1 lred overplots the original data with the calculated sin fit fit coef sintrend W1 fit is the same series as in W2 coef 5 2742 19 4460 2 9830 62 8319 0 0019 Note since D coef 4 2 pi F in this case F 62 8319 2 pi 10 0 SINTREND first calculates and removes the linear trend in the data fits a sine then adds in the calculated linear trend SINTREND uses SINFIT to find the dominant frequency present in the series FFT LSINFIT SINFIT TREND 717 SIZE Purpose Format Returns Example 718 Returns a 2 point series containing the dimensions of an array SIZE s n nrows ncols SIZE s s A series or array n Optional An integer the dimension to return Valid inputs 1 return numrows 2 return numcols If n is unspecified size returns the 2 point series numrows numcols A series of 2 values the number of rows and the number of columns nrows ncols size s returns the number of rows and columns in separate variables a 1 10 s size a s 10 1 b ravel a a size b displays the string 10x2 since the result from SIZE was not assigned SIZE also supports multiple return values nr nc size b nr 10 nc W1 rand 10 3 size displays 10x3 in the status area Remarks See Also SLP Purpose Format Returns Example
29. Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Example unpopwindow W3 returns W3 to its normal size Remarks Use UNPOP WINDOW to unzoom hidden Windows that have been zoomed by using the POPWIN function See Also POPWINDOW UNZOOM ZOOM UNRAVEL Purpose Create a single vector from the columns of a table Format UNRAVEL table table A table or expression evaluating to a table Returns A series Example W1 rand 10 3 W2 unravel wl W1 contains a 10x3 table of random values W2 contains a single 30 point series that is constructed by appending the rows of W1 If W1 contains a 3 by 3 table this expression returns a series with 9 observations the elements of column 1 of W1 followed by the elements of column 2 of W1 followed by the elements of the last column of W1 Remarks The AL syntax is equivalent to unravel A For example a rand 10 b unravel a c al b c 801 See Also UNZOOM Purpose Format Example See Also UPDATE Purpose Format Returns Example 802 CONCAT MERGE RAVEL UNMERGE Returns a zoomed Window to its normal size UNZOOM unzoom returns an enlarged Window back to its normal size POPWINDOW UNPOPWINDOW ZOOM Updates each formula in a Worksheet UPDATE The entire Worksheet is re evaluated just as if each formula were to be re typed update DADiSP sequences through each Window in the Worksh
30. b gcos 100 01 4 c a b Wl a W2 xy a b W3 xyz a b c itemtype W1 returns O itemtype W2 returns 1 itemtype W3 returns 8 XY Symbol Plot By combining one or more series new data items can be represented The most common items are simple series and multiple series or lists SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE IVSNORMPB Purpose Format Returns the corresponding z value for the input a probability value based on the normal probability distribution function See the preferred INVPROBN function IVSNORMPB prob prob Probability value a number between 0 and 1 0 419 Example Remarks See Also JN Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 420 ivsnormpb 0 1 returns 0 2533 the z value for a probability of 0 10 The preferred INVPROBN function employs a faster and more accurate algorithm of calculating the inverse normal cumulative distribution function For 0 5 lt z lt 1 0 invprobn z ivsnormpb z 0 5 approximately A2STD CNF2STD INVPROBN PDFNORM PROBN Performs the Bessel function on an entire input series or a single scalar input JN expr order expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table order Integer order Scalar series or table jn 3 0 1 returns the scalar 0 3390 YN JULSTR Purpose Format Returns Example See Also JULYMD Purpose Format Returns Example Con
31. erf x 2 sqrt n integral from 0 tox of exp t 2 dt ERFC ERFINV PROBN Computes the complementary error function ERFC expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table erfc 1 returns 0 15729921 erfc W1 returns a series or table where each point in the complementary error function of the corresponding point in Window 1 erfcinv erfc 2 returns 0 2 indicating that ERFC and ERFCINV are inverse functions 219 Remarks The complementary error function is defined as erfc x 1 erf x erfc x 2 sqrt mn integral from x to infinity of exp t 2 dt See Also ERF ERFCINV ERFCINV Purpose Returns the inverse incomplete error function Format ERFCINV y y Areal or series Returns A real or series the inverse incomplete error function x where y erfe x for 0 lt y lt 2and inf lt x lt inf Example erfcinv 2 returns 0 90619381 the inverse incomplete error function of 0 2 erfc erfcinv 2 returns 0 2 indicating that ERFC and ERFCINV are inverse functions Remarks ERFCINV uses the built in INVPROBN function to find the Z value for a given probability value of a normal distribution erfc erfcinv x x erfcinv x invprobn x 2 sqrt 2 220 See Also ERFINV Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ERF ERFC ERFINV INVPROBN PROBN Returns the inverse error
32. imports the file data dat into the current Labbook If the data file does not contain a DADiSP header the standard importing defaults are used importfile data2 dat data2 hed 1 imports the file data dat using the header file data2 hed into the current Labbook and automatically loads the Dataset into the current Window IMPORTFILE is simply a non GUI version of the built in import facility EXPORTFILE LOADDATASET IMPORTWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns Example 386 Loads an external Worksheet file DWK IMPORTWORKSHEET wname wname The name of the Worksheet to load in quotes A 1 if the specified Worksheet is loaded successfully 0 otherwise If the Worksheet does not exist DADiSP returns a 0 importworksheet My Worksheets Runl dwk loads a the worksheet My Worksheet Runl dwk overwriting the current Worksheet Remarks See Also IMPULSE Purpose Format Returns Expansion Example Remarks See Also The specified Worksheet name is case sensitive EXPORTWORKSHEET SAVEWORKSHEET Macro Generates a discrete unit impulse series IMPULSE start length start An integer Point location of the impulse length An integer Total length of the series A series EXTRACT GSERIES 1 2 START LENGTH impulse 10 20 creates a series of 20 points where the 10th point of the series has a value of 1 0 and the other points are zero Impulse
33. length s2 1 For series of equal lengths and offsets the zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the maximum length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M 7 1 1 where i is the index of the result See XCOV for the time domain implementation ACORR CONV FACORR FCONV XCORR XCOV Creates 2D XY values x y FXYVALS xI xu xine yl yu yinc xl Areal The lower x value xu Areal The upper x value xine Areal The x increment yl Areal The lower y value yu Areal The upper y value yine Areal The y increment 287 Returns Two arrays of X and Y values Example x y fxyvals 2 2 2 2 2 2 cos x y setplottype 4 rainbow generates an interesting 2D cosine plot W1 cos x y setplottype 4 rainbow Remarks FXYVALS is used by the Generate 2D data creation function See MESHGRID to generate XY values from two input series See Also GLINE MESHGRID RAVEL SETPLOTTYPE FZINTERP Purpose Interpolates a series by a factor using FFT zero insertion 288 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GAMM Purpose FZINTERP s n s An input series or array n Areal the interpolation factor N gt 1 0 Defaults to 2 0 A series or array W1 gsin 64 1 64 3 W2 fzinterp W1 4 W1 contains 64 samples of a 3 Hz sine wa
34. series Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table order Optional An integer 0 descending 1 ascending order Defaults to 0 Returns Example Remarks See Also A sorted series or table Whe t25 0 1 45 25 35 164 W2 sort W1 0 returns the series 6 5 4 3 2 1 W3 sort W1 1 returns the series 1 2 3 4 5 6 SORT returns a table with each column sorted in ascending descending order To sort a table based on a column see REORDER GRADE LOOKUP REORDER SPANX SPANY Purpose Format Example Restricts the scale display to a subrange of the plotting Window SPANX Window min max SPANY Window min max Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window min Areal the minimum x or y value for displayed range max Areal the maximum x or y value for displayed range W1 gsin 100 01 setvunits Volts W2 gcos 100 01 setvunits Amps W3 wl staggery 0 staggerx 0 Scales 2 sety 4 1 5 spany 1 1 overlay w2 red focus 2 staggery 0 staggerx 0 scales 13 sety 1 5 4 spany 1 1 Window 3 contains the 2 curves overlayed with flush scales with a defined y axis span which is a portion of the entire plot range 723 Remarks See Also SPANX and SPANY require scales to be flush with the plotting area that is STAGGERX 0 and or STAGGERY 0 must be used first SPANX and SPANY apply to the scales associated with the cu
35. specfile Optional A string the name of summary statistics file to create in quotes Defaults to polyN fit A series of coefficients W1 gline 100 01 1 0 1 0 2 W2 polyfit Wl1 3 returns a 4 point series with values 1 0 2 0 1 0 5 89E 14 as the resulting 3rd order coefficients a 1 a 2 a 3 a4 W3 polygraph W2 xvals W1 graphs the fit POLYFIT also works with XY data For example W1 xy gexp 100 0 01 gsin 100 0 01 W2 polyfit Wl 5 W3 polyfit W1l xvals W1 5 W4 polygraph W2 xvals W1 1 W2 and W3 produce the same coefficients The last parameter of 1 in the POLYGRAPH function creates an explicit XY graph polyfit series N performs a least squares fit of a series to y all al2 x a 3 x 2 a N 1 x N where y is the input series and N is the order of the fit POLYFIT returns the coefficients a k of the above power series See Also If form is 1 then Y all x nN al2 x N 1 afN x alN 1 For a tabular view of the coefficients use the TABLEVIEW function in the Window containing the results of the POLYFIT operation See PFIT to fit a polynomial with error statistics INTERPOLATE LFIT LINREG LINREG2 PFIT POLYGRAPH POLYROOT SPLINE TREND XYINTERP POLYGRAPH Purpose Format Returns Graphs polynomial coefficients such as those generated by POLYFIT using the x values in the second series POLYGRAPH coef xdata xy form
36. 0 166667 0 000000 0 166667 0 305556 0 055556 0 194444 a Pp ga 1 4 7 TAE 3 6 9 P a P 0 638889 0 055556 0 527778 0 166667 0 000000 0 166667 0 305556 0 055556 0 194444 Remarks PINV use SVD to compute the pseudo inverse The pseudo inverse P of a matrix m has the same size as transpose m such that m P m m P m P P See Also A INVERSE NORM RANK SVD Purpose Creates a true perspective plot of multi column data with XYZ axes Format PLOT3D table table Any table or expression evaluating to a table 563 Example plot3d spline2 rand 5 6 hot plot3d spline2 rand 5 6 hot E3 creates a true perspective plot of the cubic spline interpolated random surface Remarks The resulting graph can be rotated with the ROTATE3D and MOUSEROTATE functions SETPLOTTYPE can also converts a table into a 3D plot See Also MOUSEROTATE ROTATE3D SETPLOTTYPE WATERFALL Purpose Enables or Disables a Window from drawing a graph 564 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also PLOTMODE Window mode plotnow Window Optional Window Reference Defaults to the current Window mode An integer The plotting mode 0 Plotting disabled 1 Plotting enabled default plotnow An integer Force immediate replot if mode is 1 0 Plot when ready 1 Plot immediately default An integer 1 if plotting is enabled el
37. 1 Si 85 ce by tla 3s AF balance W1 1 0 4 0 1 5 6 0 5 0 2 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 W2 0 8i 0 1 i 0 1001 0 3i 90 O i 200 balance W2 0 8i1 0 8 8i 0 1001 0 1 5i 11 25 0 2i 200 EIGVAL and EIGVEC first perform a balancing step where the rows and columns are transformed to have root mean squares as close as possible while leaving the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors unchanged In most cases this improves the accuracy of EIGVAL and EIGVEC but in some cases it does not BALANCE can be used to check that relatively small table elements have not become unduly magnified by the balancing step If they have then NBEIGVAL and NBEIGVEC are likely to yield better results EIGVAL EIGVEC NBEIGVAL NBEIGVEC Sets the centering of a 2D bar plot 55 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also BARGAP Purpose Format 56 BARCTR win on_off win Optional A Window Defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Valid inputs are 0 bars begin on values 1 bars centered on values default If on_of not specified returns 1 if bar centering is on else 0 W1 gnorm 10 1 bars barctr 1 W2 Wl bars barctr 0 The bars in W1 are centered around the data values the default while the bars in W2 begin at the data values the default BARCTR only effects 2D bar charts BARCTR is a Window property All bar plots plotted in the Window will be drawn in the current BAR
38. 3 9 27 81 4 16 64 256 541 Remarks OUTERPROD results in a table built by interposing the outerproduct operator between every possible pair from series and series2 If Qj represents the Jth entry in series2 then the Jth column of the output table is equivalent to series OP 1 Qj Binary operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR See Also Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve INNERPROD INTERPOSE MMULT REDUCE TRANSPOSE OUTPORT Purpose Output 1 2 or 4 bytes to a port Format OUTPORT port value datatype port An integer the output port value An integer or real value to output datatype Optional An integer The type of data to input Defaults to SBYTE signed byte Returns An integer the actual value written to the port Example outport 0xll 32 SBYTE outputs the single byte value 32 to port 17 0x11 outport 0x11 32 SINT outputs the two byte value 32 to port 17 0x11 outport 0x11 32 LONG outputs the four byte value 32 to port 17 0x11 542 Remarks See Also OVERLAY Purpose Format The datatype parameter may be SBYTE UBYTE SINT UINT LONG FLOAT or DOUBLE CASTBYTE DOUBLE FLOAT INPORT LONG SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT Overlays a series onto another in a specified Window OVERLAY series Window color sync_type series Window color sync_type Any serie
39. A series or array ampflag Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 do not correct amplitude default 1 correct amplitude 2 correct RMS amplitude A series or array 361 Example Remarks See Also W1 gsin 1000 001 45 W2 spectrum hanning W1 W3 spectrum hanning W1 1 The MAX of W2 0 4995 and the MAX of W3 1 0 The amplitude of the spectrum in W3 has been corrected to take into account amplitude effects of the Hanning window HANNING was implemented as a macro in versions prior to DADiSP 2000 You may need to remove the macro definition with undefmacro hanning from old Worksheets If anpflag 1 the correction factor is the mean of the spectral window This assures that the spectrum of a sinusoid of amplitude A has a peak of A If ampflag 2 the correction is applied as follows w hanning s rms s rmsChanning s This assures that sqrt area psd w rms s approximately GHANNING HAMMING KAISER PSD SPECTRUM WINFUNC HATCHCOLOR Purpose 362 Sets the color of 3D cross hatching Format Returns Example Remarks See Also HELP Purpose Format Example HATCHCOLOR win color win Optional A window reference Defaults to the current Window color An integer The color index Nothing x y fxyvals 2 2 0 1 2 2 0 1 cos x y setplottype 4 hot hatchcolor LBLUE creates a shaded 3D plot of cos
40. A series with as many rows as the input table Each entry in the series is an Eigenvalue The Eigenvalue in row n of NBEIGVAL corresponds to the Eigenvector in column n of NBEIGVEC W1 8i 0 Leth 0 1001 3i 90 i 200 nbeigval W1 0 43153 7 53481 200 44 0 465251 1001 0 0 0i EIGVAL and EIGVEC first perform a balancing step in which the rows and columns are transformed to have root mean squares as close as possible while leaving the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors unchanged In most cases this improves the accuracy of EIGVAL and EIGVEC but in some cases it does not BALANCE can be used to check that relatively small table elements have not become unduly magnified by the balancing step If they have then NBEIGVAL and NBEIGVEC are likely to yield better results BALANCE EIGVAL EIGVEC NBEIGVEC NBEIGVEC Purpose Format Returns 514 Computes the Eigenvectors of a square table without a preliminary balancing step NBEIGVEC x x A Real or Complex square table A square table of the same dimensions as the input table Each column of the output table is an Eigenvector The Eigenvector in column n of NBEIGVEC corresponds to the Eigenvalue in row n of NBEIGVAL Example Remarks See Also NEATEN Purpose Format Remarks See Also W1 8i 0 1 i 0 1001 O 3i 90 O 1 200 nbeigvec W1 0 911 0 0481 0 006 0 0051 0 000 0 0007 0 000
41. Enable Disable a Window from drawing a graph Display un interpolated series as individual points Zoom window whether displayed or not PROTECT REDRAW REFRESH SCREENOPT SERCOLOR SETCOLHEADER SETCOLOR SETDATE SETGCOLOR SETHATCH SETLINE SETLINEWIDTH SETPLOTMETHOD SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE SETTIME SETVPORT SETWFORM SETWINCURSORINFO SETWLAB SETWLIKE SPANX SPANY STACK STEPCTR STEPS STICKS SYNC TABLEVIEW TILE TOOLBAR UNACTIVATE UNITS UNOVERLAY UNOVERPLOT UNPOPWINDOW UNZOOM UPDATE WINCOLOR WINLOCK WINNAME ZOOM Protect window from propagation Redraw all windows Reevaluate worksheet Select Worksheet elements to be visible or hidden in display Specify series color only Set the text of a column header in a Window Set series color Set series date acquired Set global color parameter Turn 3D cross hatching On or Off Set line style Set thickness of line in graph Specify method to use when drawing plots Specify plot style Specify plot type Set series time acquired Set the viewport of the current window to the input window Set formula for a window Set the level of information displayed in the Window formula line Set the label of a Window Copy attributes of one window to another Restrict the scale display to a subrange of the Window Create a vertical stacked bar chart from a series Set the vertical reference of a 2D bar plot Display the series as step line graph Display the series as thin vertical
42. FREADB READA READB READTABLE 601 READTABLE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 602 Reads an ASCII file with multiple columns of data from disk and returns a series or table READTABLE filename startrow startcol collist numrows del filename Name of ASCII file to read as a multi column table in quotes If no path is given READTABLE looks for the file in the current working directory startrow Optional An integer Number of first ASCII line of data to accept Defaults to 1 startcol Optional An integer Number of first column of data to accept Defaults to 1 collist Optional List of integers indicating which columns of data to accept Defaults to all columns 1 numrows Optional An integer The number of rows to accept Defaults to all rows 1 del Optional A string Column delimiters Defaults to space A series or table readtable mytable dat 1 1 12 17 returns a table with two columns of data as found in columns 12 and 17 of mytable dat a readtable table dat 1 1 1 10 assigns the first 10 rows of the file table dat to variable a readtable data tab 5 1 2 3 1 10 returns the first 10 rows starting at row 5 and only accepting columns 2 and 3 READTABLE translates the NA or NULL without quotes in a file to NA ina DADiSP table However na and null are translated into 0 s The collist argument precedes the numrows argument for backward c
43. Format SCROLLL amount amount Optional A real the number of x axis units to scroll the Window left Defaults to 1 3 of the Window width Remarks With the default argument SCROLLL has the same effect as the key in an active Window 649 See Also SCROLLR Purpose Format Remarks See Also SCROLLU Purpose Format Remarks 650 SCROLLD SCROLLR SCROLLU Scrolls the current Window right over the series SCROLLR amount amount Optional A real the number of x axis units to scroll Window right Defaults to 1 3 of Window width With the default argument SCROLLR has the same effect as the lt key in an active Window SCROLLD SCROLLL SCROLLU Scrolls the current Window up over the series SCROLLU amount amount Optional A real the number of y axis units to scroll the Window up Defaults to 1 3 of the Window height With the default argument SCROLLU has the same effect as the T key in an active Window See Also SCROLLD SCROLLL SCROLLR SEEDRAND Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Sets the seed value for the random number generator SEEDRAND value value Optional An integer used as the seed value A string message indicating seed value has been set seedrand 4242 DADiSP sets a seed value of 1 every time it is started up Every random number in DADiSP is calculated in a deterministic way using a standard formula
44. MEAN works with Real or Complex series COLMEAN can be used to determine the means of each column of an array AVGS COLMEAN STATS STDEV SUM SUMS Finds the median value of a series MEDIAN series series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window Returns A scalar Example median 2 8 4 32 16 returns 4 because there are two observations greater than four and two lower median 2 8 4 32 returns 6 0 the average of the two middle values Remarks MEDIAN must sort its input which can be slow for large amounts of data COLMEDIAN should be used with tables See Also COLMEDIAN MEAN STDEV MENUCLEAR Purpose Clears menus from the screen Format MENUCLEAR num num Optional The number of menus to clear If num is positive a corresponding number of menus are cleared from the screen If num is negative all but that number of menus are cleared The default clears all menus Example menuclear clears all menus from the screen menuclear 2 clears all but 2 menus from the screen See Also INPUT MENULIST MENUFILE 485 See Also MENUFILE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 486 MENUPRINT VIEWFILE Reads a text menu file and returns the menu on the screen in accordance with the specified parameters MENUFILE x y text_color bg_color filename x Optional The x coordinate in text columns Defau
45. Moves the cursor position by an offset in x axis units from the current cursor location Format CURMOVE Window deltax item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window deltax A scalar The offset in x axis units to move the cursor item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a cursor location in the item Defaults to 1 Remarks If the sum of delta index implied by the specified deltax and the cursor location is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the sum of delta index implied by the specified deltax and cursor location is greater than the number of points in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of points in the item See Also COLNMOVE COLNPUT COLPOS CURNMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON 143 CURNMOVE Purpose Moves the cursor position by a specified number of points from the current cursor location Format CURNMOVE Window delta item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window delta An integer The number of points to move the cursor item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a cursor location in the item Defaults to 1 Remarks If the sum of delta and the cursor location is less than one then the cursor will be set to one
46. Optional Window reference or DADiSP expression evaluating to a series or multi series table Defaults to the current Window An integer sercount ravel grand 100 01 10 returns 10 the number of series columns created by RAVEL See Also SERIES H Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also GETWCOUNT NUMCOL S NUMITEMS SIZE Contains d efinitions of global data types variables and miscellaneous macros for including in SPL function files include SERIES H The following are examples of definitions within SERIES H type of define U define G argume define I define R define C variab define define define series define define define variables SPECIFIED_VARIABLE 0 temporary unspecified type LOBAL_VARIABLE 1 global t and variable value types TEGER_VALUE 1 EAL_VALUE 2 OMPLEX_VALUE 3 le type tests S_INTEGER v Cargtype v INTEGER_VALUE S_REAL v Cargtype v REAL_VALUE S_COMPLEX v Cargtype v COMPLEX_VALUE item types TEM_TYPE_SERIES 0 TEM_TYPE_XY 1 TEM_TYPE_LIST 2 There are many more definitions within SERIES H It is a system file shipped with each version of DADiSP DEFINE INCLUDE 653 SERSIZE Purpose Determines the length of a series as the number of data points Format SERSIZE series series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series De
47. RGB2MONO inwin inwin A series or Window The source image An array an 8 bit monochrome image W1 density spline2 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 8 rainbow W2 image24 W1 W3 rgb2mono W2 W1 contains an image of a random surface shaded with the colors of the spectrum ranging from red to blue W2 converts the image into a 24 bit color image W3 contains the monochrome image displayed in the current colormap The monochrome image contains values ranging from 0 to 255 RGB2MONDO converts the 24 bit image into 8 bit integer values ranging from 0 to 255 The resulting image is displayed using the current colormap For each RGB pixel the converted pixel is determined as follows mono 0 56 r 0 33 g 0 11 b where r g b are the red green and blue components of the original RGB image DENSITY GETCOLORMAP GETRGB IMAGE24 IMINTERP INTERP2 RGBIMAGE SPLINE2 625 RGBIMAGE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 626 Creates a 24 bit image from red green and blue components RGBIMAGE g b r An array of red values g An array of green values b An array of blue values An array a 24 bit color image W1 density spline2 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 8 rainbow r g b getrgb W1 W2 rgbimage r g 1 1 b W1 contains an image of a random surface shaded with the colors of the spectrum ranging from red to blue W2 converts the image into a 24 bit color image with the green intensi
48. SO ei X X 4 Starts Excel and creates a new workbook The string 1 11 58 is placed in cell Al and the same string is converted into date form and placed in cell B1 Al contains a string and B1 contains the time value 1 11 58 AM a 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 xl range C1 C5 value castvariant a 2 The cells C1 through C5 contain the values 1 1 2 2 3 since the series in variable a was converted to an array of 2 byte integers CASTVARIANT is helpful with ActiveX Automation when an object of an explicit type is to be transferred The data is converted only when transferred Normally a series is transferred as an array of doubles As shown in the second example CASTVARIANT can convert the series to an array of almost any type supported by Automation Use CASTVARIANTARRAY to convert a series to an array of variants CREATEOBJECT CASTVARIANTARRAY CASTVARIANTARRAY Purpose Format Returns 78 Explicitly converts a series to an array of variants for Automation CASTVARIANTARRAY series series A series or table The series The series is marked so that it is converted to an array of variants when used with ActiveX Automation Example a 1 5 xl createobject Excel Application xl workbooks add xl range Al A5 value a xl range B1 B5 value castvariantarray a xl visible 1 Starts Excel and creates a new workbook The series in variable a is transferred to cells Al through A5 The s
49. Yes 143 t 0 0 01 1 loop n 1 101 y n sin 2 pi 1l0 t n can be performed much faster more intuitively and concisely with t 0 0 01 1 y sin 2 pi l0 t or even faster with y gsin 101 01 10 See Also LOTRI Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language BREAK CONTINUE FOR WHILE Returns the lower triangle of a matrix including the main diagonal LOTRI m m An array An array of size m consisting of the lower triangle of m including the main diagonal with the other elements set to 0 W1 ones 3 W2 lotri W1 w2 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 LOTRI includes the main diagonal Use LOTRIX to exclude the main diagonal See TRIL to return the lower matrix below a specified diagonal COLNOS LOTRIX ROWNOS TRIL UPTRI UPTRIX 463 LOTRIX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also LSINFIT Purpose 464 Returns the lower triangle of a matrix excluding the main diagonal LOTRIX m m An array An array of size m consisting of the lower triangle of m excluding the main diagonal with the other elements set to 0 W1 ones 3 W2 lotrix W1 W2 0 0 O 1 0 O Ale dg OFF LOTRIX excludes the main diagonal Use LOTRI to include the main diagonal See TRIL to return the lower matrix below a specified diagonal COLNOS LOTRI ROWNOS TRIL
50. layout 1 4 rearranges the Windows into 1 column by 4 rows layout 1 1 restores automatic layout COLLAYOUT ROWLAYOUT SETALLWMARGIN Calculates the derivative of a series or series expression using a left to right slope algorithm LDERIV series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table lderiv Wl creates a new series from the contents of Window and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the slope of the series in Window at that point Remarks See Also LEGCUR Purpose Format The formula used to compute derivatives with the LDERIV function for each point i is as follows Iderivli seriesli seriesfi 1 deltax series The derivative of the first point is computed using the method of RDERIV INTEG DERIV RDERIV Inserts a legend for all the series in the Window LEGCUR target fg_color bg_color font box margin_flag focus target An integer Defines the manner in which the text should scroll with the series Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Moves with the series 1 GLASS Remains in place as the series is scrolled 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Glass style plotting over the entirety of the Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Glass style plotting over the Window s entire vertical dimensions but only over the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area fg_color Optiona
51. seriesN Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table waterfall Wl W2 places the series from Window and 2 into the current Window and creates a Waterfall plot Use WFSET to change the plot attributes once this plot has been created WATERFALL can be obtained by using the F7 key the Graph Styles toolbar button or SETPLOTTYPE 1 CONTOUR DECIMATE DENSITY RAVEL SETPLOTTYPE SPLINE2 TABLEVIEW WFSET Sets the attributes of a Waterfall plot 813 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 814 WFSET hide hatch_style hatch_int h_exp v_exp hide hatch_style Optional An integer 0 No line hiding 1 Line hiding Defaults to 1 Optional An integer 0 No cross hatch 1 On X axis tics 2 On every point 3 User defined interval Defaults to 2 hatch_int Optional A real number Meaningful only when hatch_style is User defined h_exp Fraction 0 used to shift traces horizontally v_exp Fraction 0 used to shift traces vertically Nothing Effects are seen when Window is next plotted ravel grand 100 1 10 setplottype 1 wfset 1 1 1 0 01 reduces the horizontal shift to 1 percent ravel grand 100 1 10 setplottype 1 wfset 0 0 0 0 1 removes the horizontal shift and line hiding so the surface becomes 2 dimensional with each column vertically shifted up the screen wfset 1l 4 turns off the grids in a waterfall plot The expansio
52. start Optional An integer specifying where to start the decimation Returns A series Example Wl 1 5 W2 decimate W1 3 reduces the series in Window by a factor of 3 by keeping every third point The resulting series contains the values 1 4 decimate W3 4 10 decimates the series from Window 3 by a factor of 4 starting from the 10th point of the series and places the result in the current Window Decimate is useful for extracting individual series from an interlaced source series 1 gsin 100 01 2 gtri 100 01 3 gnorm 100 01 4 merge Wl W2 W3 5 decimate w4 3 1 6 decimate W4 3 2 7 decimate W4 3 3 W5 W6 and W7 contain the original interlaced series of W1 W2 and W3 Remarks The decimation factor automatically adjusts the sampling rate 1 deltax of the resulting series See Also DELETE EXTRACT INSERT INTERPOLATE MERGE RAVEL REMOVE DECONV Purpose Performs deconvolution of two series in the time domain 181 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 182 DECONV b a q r DECONV b a a An input series or expression evaluating in a series b An input series or expression evaluating in a series A series such that b conv a q r a ee eo x 41 0 1 24 b conv a x q r deconv b a b 1 2 2 0 1 6 QS Al OG Let r 0 0 0 0 0 0 q r deconv 1l 5 1 2 a q 1 3 r 0 0 8 7
53. 0 0011 0 000 0 0047 1 000 0 005i 0 409 0 0061 1 090 0 0961 0 000 0 0017 EIGVAL and EIGVEC first perform a balancing step in which the rows and columns are transformed to have root mean squares as close as possible while leaving the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors unchanged In most cases this improves the accuracy of EIGVAL and EIGVEC but in some cases it does not BALANCE can be used to check that relatively small table elements have not become unduly magnified by the balancing step If they have then NBEIGVAL and NBEIGVEC are likely to yield better results BALANCE EIGVAL EIGVEC NBEIGVAL Arranges the Worksheet Windows in a uniform manner NEATEN NEATEN is particularly useful to straighten out the Window layout after resizing Windows with the mouse MOVEWIN SETWSIZE 515 NEGATE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Multiplies an expression by 1 NEGATE expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table negate 1 2 3 4 0 returns aseries 1 2 3 4 O Equivalent to expr the arithmetic negative of expr amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators NOT NEWWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns 516 Creates a new empty Worksheet NEWWORKSHEET numwin verify numwin Optional An integer Number of Windows for the new Wo
54. 0 does not pause default shell 1 pauses DADiSP and enters the operating system at the current directory level Remarks See Also To return to DADiSP from the operating system type Exit Setting pause to 1 is useful if an error occurs while DADiSP attempts to enter the operating system DOS UNIX or VMS macros RUN SHOWCMAP Purpose Format Returns Example Displays the current colormap as a density plot SHOWCMAP s len s Optional A series to scale colormap len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap A table of values graded from 0 to 255 displayed as an image Ifa series is specified the Y values of the colormap is scaled to the series setcolormap rainbow showcmap sets the colormap to colors ranging from blue to red and displays the colors as a density plot See below 711 Remarks See Also SHP Purpose Format 712 W1 showcmap 250 4 200 7 150 5 Index 100 7 50 7 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 Range Wl spline2 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 3 W2 showcmap wl Shows the colormap in W2 scaled to the Z values of W1 Use SETSHADING to make a new colormap take effect on an existing density plot GETCOLORMAP SAVECMAP SETCOLORMAP SETCRANGE SETSHADING Emulates a single pole analog high pass filter SHP s fc s An input series fc The cutoff frequency in Hertz Returns
55. 001 4 W3 xcorr W1 W2 performs the cross correlation of two sinewaves The peaks of the result indicate the two waveforms are very similar at the time intervals where the peaks occur W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 xcorr W1 W1 1 W4 xcorr W1 W2 1 gsin 1000 001 4 gnorm 1000 001 DE iii UY UY V Y 3 T T T T T T T T T 44 T T T T T T T T T T 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 8 04 0 0 4 0 8 0 8 0 4 0 0 4 0 8 W3 displays the cross correlation of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the cross correlation between a sinewave and random noise The normalized maximum of W3 is 1 0 indicating perfect correlation at time t 0 Although the waveform of W4 displays some peaks the normalized maximum is roughly 0 04 indicating little correlation between W1 and W2 For a graphical representation overplot W4 in W3 The cross correlation is used to determine how similar two series are to each other XCORR performs correlation by computing the direct convolution of the input series The output length L is L length sl length s2 1 For series of equal lengths and offsets the zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series See Also XCOV Purpose Format Returns Example The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the maximum length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the re
56. 2 Write only hidden functions splwrite testdata spl 1 25 writes functions through 25 as defined by the list of functions generated by the FUNCTIONS command to the ASCII file testdata spl An SPL file is a simple ASCH text file you can create with any text editor The file contains SPL functions that can be used just like any BUILTINS function INCLUDE BUILTINS FUNCTIONS SPLCOMPILE SPLLOAD SPLREAD Produces an output string in the format of the C C language printf function 735 Format SPRINTF control arg1 arg2 argN control Format control string Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications The ordinary characters are copied to the output string in order of their appearance Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash Format specifications in the control string are introduced by a percent sign and are matched to the specified arguments in order If there are more arguments than there are format specifications the extra arguments are ignored argN Scalar or string value that matches control string Format Specification Fields flags width precision type Flags are optional character s that control justification of output and printing of signs blanks decimal points and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag can appear in a format specification Flag Meaning
57. 3 5 11 8 7 10 E Tr W2 sobel W1 5 1 w2 0 0 0 0 0 4 3 O 0 8 7 O 0 0 0 O W3 sobel W1 3 0 W3 0 0 0 0 10 15 15 O 0 15 0 O 0 0 0 0 Remarks If the absolute value difference between pixels is less than the threshold a black pixel is produced in the output image Otherwise a white pixel is produced If overlay is 1 then the actual image value is substituted for resulting black pixels See Also CONV2D NONLIN2D Purpose Calculates the 2D Spectrogram as a B amp W image 721 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SORT Purpose Format 722 SONOGRAM series len lap swin series An input series len An integer The FFT length lap Optional An integer the overlap length Defaults to len 2 swin Optional An integer the windowing function Valid arguments include 0 Hamming default 1 Hanning 2 Rectangle none 3 Kaiser A table of Amplitude values in Frequency vs Time format sonogram W1 128 divides W1 into columns of 128 points that overlap by 64 points Each segment is multiplied by a Hamming window The Spectrum i e magnitude of the FFT of each column is calculated and the result is displayed as a Black on White image See the related SPECGRAM function for more details FFT RAVEL SPECGRAM SPECTRUM Rearranges the y values of a series in ascending or descending numerical order SORT series order
58. 4 4 36 28 13 0 16 19 12 0 tils 103 Ay UFa 0 0 0 O This is a two dimensional linear convolution CONV Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 Generates a colormap of shades of blue COOL len len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap 13 Returns Example Remarks See Also 132 A table of RGB triples suitable for the SETCOLORMAP function clen length getcolormap density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen cool density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen cool 250 4 200 150 5 100 4 50 4 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 creates a table of 32 x N where N colormap length RBG values and displays the resulting colors The resulting image is a vertical plot of colors ranging from aqua lowest to violet highest cool by itself sets the colormap and shading a cool or setcolormap cool returns the RGB values In this case use SETSHADING to make the new colormap take effect on an existing density or 2D plot COPPER GRAY HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING SHOWCMAP COPPER Purpose Generates a brownish colormap Format COPPER len len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap
59. A calculates A B as an approximation to B inv A For scalars B A B A For example 10 2 10 2 5 See Also Matrix Multiply Matrix Power Matrix Solve INVERSE MDIV MMULT Matrix Transpose Purpose Swaps the rows and columns of a specified array Format array array Any array or expression evaluating to an array or series Returns A NxM array where the input is an MXN array Example W1 1 2 3 Ll ieee Ss Alig CON Sey W2 W1 W2 1 1 1 RAA E Loi Oe ao by 26 Remarks See Also The postfix operator is equivalent to TRANSPOSE For example a transpose b a b are equivalent See the postfix operator to perfom a complex conjugate transpose Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve Matrix Conjugate Transpose Macros in matrix mac MMULT RAVEL TRANSPOSE A Matrix Conjugate Transpose Purpose Format Returns Example Complex conjugate of the matrix transpose array array Any array or expression evaluating to an array or series An NxM array where the input is an MxN array Wie dEi EZ OF La ZiR ts AE Ak 31 W2 W1 w2 0 li 1 0i 1 0i 2 O15 0 S205 e F OIF 3 01 3 01 0 3i 27 W3 WI W3 0 li 1 0i 1 Oi 2 01 0 21 2 Oi 1307 In 01 OF STF Remarks The postfix A operator is equivalent to conj transpos
60. A scalar constant W1 gsin 1000 1 1000 4 W2 quantize W1 8 effbit w2 4 returns 2 81 indicating the number of effective bits at a frequency of 4 Hertz is slightly less than 3 the ideal number of bits for 8 levels of quantization This routine uses the LSINFIT spl to match a sine wave to the input data The input is assumed to be a sinusoid The number of effective bits is calculated as log2 rms input data fitted sin wave sqrt 12 Fs BITQUANT LSINFIT QUANTIZE IEEE Std 1057 1994 EIG Purpose Format Returns Example Computes Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a square matrix EIG a vec val ElG a a An expression resolving to a Real or Complex square matrix A single column real or complex series that contains the eigenvalues vec val ElG a returns both the eigenvector array and the eigenvalues as the diagonal of an array a 1 3 4 155 br DFs 8 9 12 val eig a val 19 964160 1 473921 0 509760 a 1 3 4 5 6 7 18 9 12 x lambda eig a x 0 253874 0 504564 0 825205 0 896277 0 270278 0 351621 lambda 19 964160 0 0000 0 0000 0 0000 00 1 4739 00 0 0000 0 046508 0 801862 0 595697 00 0 000000 21 0 000000 00 0 509760 213 Remarks See Also EIGVAL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 214 a x x lambda
61. An integer the number of neighbors to average For point i average points i n through itn exclusive of point i Defaults to 1 i e for point i average points i 1 and i 1 gval Optional A real the greater than threshold at which to replace a point Point i is replaced if point i gt gval current average i Defaults to 1 0 i e replace each point if it is greater than the average of the neighbors lval Optional A real the less than threshold at which to replace a point Point i is replaced if point i lt lval current average i Defaults to unspecified i e do not use a lesser than threshold A series Example Remarks See Also AVGS Purpose W1 gnorm 100 01 W2 avgfilt W1 replaces each point of W1 with the average of the previous and next point if it exceeds the average W3 avgfilt W1 2 replaces each point of W1 with the average of the two previous and two next points if it exceeds the average W3 avgfilt W1 1 1 2 replaces each point of W1 with the average of the previous and next point if it exceeds the average by 20 W4 avgfilt W1l 1 1 2 1 3 replaces each point of W1 with the average of the previous and next point if it exceeds the average by 20 or is less than the average by 30 W5 avgfilt W1l 1 0 0 replaces each point of W1 with the average of the previous and next point unconditionally Wo avgfilt W1 1 1 2 replaces each point of W1 with
62. DOUBLE FLOAT LONG READB SINT UBYTE UINT ULONG WRITEB Sets the type of scales SCALES Window scale_type Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window scale_type Integer specifying type of scales Valid arguments are 0 No scales 1 X bottom Y left 2 Xbottom Y left with labels 3 X bottom Y right with labels 4 X bottom Y right 5 X top Y right 6 Xtop Y left 7 X top Y left with labels 8 X top Y right with labels 9 Y left 10 Y right 11 X bottom 12 X top 13 Y left with labels 14 Y right with labels 15 X bottom with labels 16 X top with labels 645 Example scales W3 6 places the X axis scales along the top and the Y along the left hand side of Window 3 See Also FOCUS OVERLAY SCALESOFF SCALESON SYNC Purpose Removes x y scales from the current Window Format SCALESOFF Remarks This function is equivalent to SCALES 0 See Also SCALES SCALESON Purpose Displays x y scales in the current Window Format SCALESON Remarks This function has the same effect as pressing the F5 key or scales toolbar button See Also 646 SCALES SCALESOFF SCHUR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Computes the Schur form of a table SCHUR matrix u s SCHUR matrix matrix An expression resolving to a Real or Complex square table A matrix u s schur matrix returns the Uni
63. Defaults to 1 Remarks If the index implied by the xvalue is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the index implied by the xvalue is greater than the number of points in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of points in the item See Also COLNMOVE COLNPUT COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURSORON CURRENT Purpose Reference series in the current Window It is used only to overwrite the current series with a modified version of that series Format CURRENT Returns A scalar series or table Example If Window 3 the current Window contained a 200 point series generated by a test instrument but only the first 128 points were useful you could type extract current 1 128 to replace the original series with an extracted portion of it 148 Remarks See Also grand 1000 1 curr mean curr creates a uniformly random noise series with amplitude between 0 5 to 0 5 by removing the DC offset of original random series CURR is an abbreviation for CURRENT CURRENT allows you to process a series continuously in one Window without taking up Worksheet space The disadvantage of using CURRENT is the previous series in the Window is usually overwritten A series can be saved from a Worksheet to a Dataset with the F9 key the menus or the SAVESERIES function Use WO to refer to the current Window Wo CURSORON Purpose Format Returns Example Places
64. Defaults to the current Window value Areal the value used to replace the current value index An integer specifying the point index ao tls 25 8H a setpt a 10 3 sets the third point in the series a to 10 This is equivalent to a 3 10 An index n refers to the nth point in the series therefore the new value is assigned to the nth point in the series You may also use the following syntax to set values in a series Wnlindex value For example W3 2 10 SETPT is useful when using expressions containing CURR For example Wl 1 8 setpt curr 0 2 creates the series 1 0 3 4 5 6 7 8 CURRENT GETPT SETRADIAN Purpose Format 682 A global system operation changing the mode of DADiSP trigonometric functions to radians default mode SETRADIAN Example Remarks See Also setradian sin pi 2 yields 1 If setdegree is invoked then sin pi 2 yields 02741213 This function has no effect unless SETDEGREE has been invoked OFF ON SETDEGREE SETSHADING Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Sets the range of colors used in shading on systems which support dynamic color assignment SETSHADING color1 color2 colorN color A string representing a color in quotes W1 spline2 rand 10 5 setplottype 4 setshading Ired yellow Igreen creates a 3D surface and shades the surface with smoothly graded palette of colors rangin
65. Example Remarks See Also INT Purpose Format Returns Expansion Example Wl 1 5 W2 insert W1l 10 11 12 1 3 5 W2 contains the series 10 1 2 11 3 4 12 5 W3 insert W1 10 11 12 1 3 5 1 W3 contains the series 1 10 2 3 11 4 5 12 If an index is larger than the number of points INSERT pads the intervening values with Zeros DECIMATE DELETE EXTRACT MERGE RAVEL REMOVE REPLACE Macro Calculates the integer value of an expression INT expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table FLOOR ARG int 5 73 returns the integer value 5 395 Remarks See Also INTEG Purpose Format Returns Example 396 int W1 returns a new series by applying INT to each value of the W1 series The data values of this new series will range between 32768 and 32767 INT does not round to the nearest integer If you want to round to the nearest integer use round expr CEILING FLOOR ROUND Calculates the integral of a series or series expression INTEG series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table W1 gsin 1000 001 W2 integ wl W3 1 cos 2 pi xvals wl 2 pi W4 w2 w3 W2 contains the integral of the 1 Hertz sinewave in W1 over one period The value of each point in W2 is the definite integral of W1
66. Format specifications in the control string are introduced by a percent sign and are matched to the specified arguments in order If there are more arguments than there are format specifications the extra arguments are ignored argn A scalar value that matches control string Format Specification Fields flags width precision type Flags are optional character s that control justification of output and printing of signs blanks decimal points and octal and hexadecimal prefixes More than one flag can appear in a format specification Flag Meaning Left justify Explicit sign or before number 0 If width is prefixed with 0 zeros are added until the minimum width is reached If 0 and appear the 0 is ignored If 0 is specified with an integer format i u o d the 0 is ignored blank Insert blank before positive number 518 When used with the o format the prefixes any nonzero output value with 0 When used with the e E or f format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases When used with the g or G format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases and prevents the truncation of trailing zeros Width is an optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output Precision is an optional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed for all or part of the output field or minimum number of digits printed
67. IF LOOP WAITKEY WHILE Cursor Functions COLNMOVE COLNPUT COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURPOS2 CURPUT CURSORON ITEMNPUT ITEMPOS MAGNIFY MOVE NMOVE NPUT PUT Vili Combine two input expressions into complex Polar Magnitude Phase form Calculate the phase angle of a Complex expression Convert to Polar Extract Real part Terminate the immediately enclosing FOR or WHILE loop Terminate the execution of statements in a FOR or WHILE loop Provide FOR loop iterative statements Allow branching to labeled statements in SPL functions Evaluate if true Execute simple FOR Loop iterative statements Pause execution of an SPL function Evaluate while expression is true Move the column cursor by a specified number of points Reset the column cursor position Return the item or column number of the last cursor position Move the cursor position by a specified offset in x axis units Move the cursor position by a specified number of points Reset the cursor position Return last position of point cursor Return position of second cursor Reset the cursor position at the specified x axis location Turn cross hair cursors on Reset the item cursor position Return the item number of the last position of the crosshair cursor Enable the cursor to select a region in a window to magnify Move cursor by time Move cursor n points Move cursor to nth point Put cursor on time in series Curve Fitting EXPFIT INTERP2 LFIT L
68. ISVARIABLE Returns 1 for each element that is a NA value ISNAN ser ser A series A series where each element is 1 where the input series is an NA value and 0 where the input series is not an NA value 409 Example Remarks See Also a 1 2 nan 3 b 5 co isnan a returns 0 0 1 0 isnan b returns 0 isnan c returns ISNAN always returns a series ISNAN returns an empty series if the input is an empty series Use NAN or NAVALUE to create an NA value FINITE INF ISEMPTY ISINF NAN ISNAVALUE Purpose Format Returns Example 410 Returns data of the same type as its input with ones wherever the input is NA zeros elsewhere ISNAVALUE series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table W1 3 6 9 12 navalue 15 18 isnavalue wl1 returns the series 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 isnavalue W1 100 generates a series with a 100 where there is an NAVALUE and 0 otherwise See Also NAVALUE READTABLE SETNAVALUE ISNUMBER Purpose Format Returns Example See Also Tests whether the input is a number ISNUMBER expr expr Any expression An integer 1 or 0 If a macro GAIN were defined as define gain mean W1 isnumber gain returns 1 since gain expands to mean W1 which evaluates to a scalar If the macro GAIN were defined as define gain
69. Load a specified Worksheet Create a new empty Worksheet Open an entire Labbook Save data as a DADiSP Series Save the Worksheet Logical Operators amp amp AND amp amp FLIPFLOP NOT OR XOR Logical Operators Logical AND Combine binary series inputs Logical NOT Logical OR Logical XOR Macro and Command File Functions DEFAULT DEFINE INCLUDE UNDEFALL UNDEFINE Semicolon Vertbar ALLMACROS CALL COMFILESTATUS xviii Restore default macros Define a macro Include macro files in other macro files Undefine all macros Undefine a macro Combine several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole Combine several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole Display all macros Call a command file n times Return the execution status of a command file COMMAND FILE FUNC COMMAND FILE KEYS COMMANDS DEFMACRO DSPMACREAD DSPMACVIEW EVAL EVALTOSTR FUNCS GETMACRO ISMACRO JUMP LOAD MACREAD MACROS MACWRITE MESSAGELOG NOP OFF ON SETMACDEPTH VIEWFILE Matrix Math Array Construction Matrix Multiply Matrix Power Matrix Solve Matrix Right Div Matrix Transpose Matrix Conj Trans BALANCE CHOLESKY COLNOS COND DET DIAGONAL EIG EIGVAL EIGVEC EXPM FLIPLR Execute a command file function Represent non standard keystrokes Display list of commands available a
70. Purpose Format Example See Also Sets the line thickness for line plots SETLINEWIDTH width index width An integer Line width Defaults to 0 index Optional An integer Index of series to set Defaults to the primary series setlinewidth 3 accentuates the plot by setting the line thickness to 3 lines SETLINE SETPLOTSTYLE SETLOCALVARIABLE Purpose Format Example Remarks 672 Sets a local variable SETLOCALVARIABLE name value name A string The name of the variable value Any string scalar series table or expression resulting in a string scalar series or table setlocalvariable Gain Min Curr sets the local variable Gain to the minimum value of the current Window SETLOCALVARIABLE and GETLOCALVARIABLE are very useful for storing and retrieving intermediate results when working from the command line in the Worksheet For example if you had to calculate some value and wanted to use it later in the Window formula you could set it as a local variable with SETLOCALVARIABLE then retrieve it later with GETLOCALVARIABLE Remarks Local variables are deleted after the function in which they are used terminates SETLOCALVARIABLE can be abbreviated SETLOCALVAR See Also Variable Assignment DELALLVARIABLES DELVARIABLE GETLOCALVARIABLE GETVARIABLE LOCAL SETHOTVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SPLREAD VARS Purpose Sets the maximum macro depth i e the number of macr
71. Returns The NxN or NxM identity matrix Example eye 3 creates the 3x3 matrix 1 0 O L050 2 Os 0 0 LFF eye 3 2 creates the 3x2 matrix 1 0 0 1 0 0 Remarks EYE uses DIAG to create the identity matrix See Also DIAGONAL ONES ZEROS FACORR Purpose Calculates the auto correlation using the FFT method 233 Format Returns Example Remarks 234 FACORR series norm series A series table or expression resulting in a series or table norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 acorr wl performs the auto correlation of a sinewave The peaks of the result indicate the waveform is very similar to itself at the time intervals where the peaks occur i e the waveform is periodic W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 facorr W1 1 W4 facorr W2 1 W3 displays the auto correlation of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the normalized auto correlation of random noise The normalized maximum of both results 1 0 at time t 0 indicating the expected perfect correlation at time t 0 true for all series The waveform of W4 displays only one distinct peak at t 0 indicating that W2 is not correlated with itself and is non periodic Both waveforms display a triangular envelope due to the assumption that t
72. SETVUNITS SETXLABEL SETYLABEL Modifies the points in a series or table according to specified maximum and minimum y values CLIP series maxthresh minthresh series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table maxthresh Optional Real number or expression resolving to a Real number Sets the upper y limit Defaults to the maximum of the series minthresh Optional Real number or expression resolving to a Real number Sets the lower y limit Defaults to the minimum of the series A series or table W1 gsin 100 0 01 clip W1 0 5 0 5 modifies the series in Window 1 so that all points equal to or above the maxthresh value are set to 0 5 and all points equal to or below the minthresh value are set to 0 5 9 Remarks See Also CLOCK Purpose Format 92 W2 1 2 3 4 5 4 3 2 1 clip W2 4 modifies the series in Window 2 so that all points equal to or above the maxthresh value are set to 4 The resulting series is 1 2 3 4 4 4 3 2 1 clip W3 4 5 3 0 modifies the series in Window 3 so that all points equal to or above the maxthresh value are set to 4 5 and all points equal to or below the minthresh value are set to 3 0 clip W4 max W4 2 0 effectively sets only a minthresh of 2 0 because the maxthresh is the highest peak of the series in W4 W5 clip W5 1 0 1 0 performs an inverse CLIP by modifying those points between the threshold
73. SIZE returns the series 1 1 for scalar inputs SIZE with no arguments displays the size of the current Window in the status area If the output from SIZE is not assigned the size of the input is displayed as a string To return the size as a series and place it in the current Window use size x LENGTH NUMEL Emulates a single pole analog low pass filter SLP s fc s An input series fe The cutoff frequency in Hertz A series W1 gsqrwave 100 01 4 W2 slp W1 10 Lowpass filters the squarewave in W1 with a cutoff frequency of 10 Hz The sample rate is set to the sample rate of the input data 719 Remarks See Also SOBEL Purpose Format 720 gsqrwave 100 01 4 1 27 0 84 0 6 4 0 44 0 2 4 0 2 4 1 2 4 0 8 7 0 6 5 0 4 0 25 0 2 4 The single pole analog lowpass filter is implemented in the digital domain using the impulse invariance technique HR SHP Performs a nonlinear 2D Sobel edge detection SOBEL table thresh overlay table Any image table or expression evaluating to a table thresh Optional A real the threshold for edge detection Defaults to mean of image overlay Optional An integer overlay pixel flag 0 do not overlay 1 overlay pixels Defaults to 0 Returns A table Example If 15 represents White and 0 Black WI 5 2 9 1 1 4
74. STDEV series first number series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window first Optional An integer The first point to include in the calculation of standard deviation Defaults to 1 number Optional An integer The number of points to take for the standard deviation calculation Defaults to all points from first to the end of the series A real Example Remarks See Also STEPCTR Purpose Format Returns Example stdev gsin 100 0 01 5 20 returns the standard deviation value 0 240361 1 stdev W3 5 10 returns the standard deviation of 10 points of the series in Window 3 starting with the Sth point STATS provides both STDEV and MEAN COLSTDEV can be used to determine the standard deviations of each column in a table COLSTDEV MEAN MOVSTD STATS STDERR Sets the centering reference of a 2D step plot STEPCTR win on_off win Optional A Window defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Valid inputs are 0 steps begin on values default 1 center steps on values If on_of not specified returns 1 if step centering is on else 0 W1 gnorm 10 1 steps stepctr 1 setsym 14 W2 W1 steps stepctr 0 setsym 14 The steps in W1 are centered around the data value W2 begin at the data value the default 745 Remarks See Also STEPS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also STICKS
75. See Also MAGIC Purpose Format Returns Example 470 macwrite ALLMACS 1 1 1 writes all macros including those which begin with an underscore _ to the file named ALLMACS MACWRITE writes the current macro list one macro per line as displayed by the MACROS command to the specified file as ASCH text The macro file name may be any legal filename e g 8 alphanumeric characters followed by an optional 3 character alphanumeric extension under DOS The MACROS command displays the macro number in the status area DEFINE MACROS MACREAD Creates an NxN magic square MAGIC n n Aninteger The number of output rows and columns A square matrix a magic 3 a 8 1 6 3505 CESS 4 9 2 colsum a 15 15 15 colsum a 15 15 15 sum diag a 15 Remarks See Also A magic square is a square matrix where the sum of each row equals the sum of each column and also equals the sum of the main diagonal MAGIC 2 does not produce a true magic square since a 2x2 magic square does not exist For n lt 0 MAGIC returns the empty matrix COLSUM DIAGONAL MAGNIFY Purpose Format Returns Remarks Enables the cursor to select a region in a window to magnify MAGNIFY mode x1 y1 x2 y2 MAGNIFY mode mode Optional An integer the operation mode 0 resize window region and return coordinates of dragged rectangle default 1
76. W4 D 1 S1 D 1 82 D 1 S3 D 1 S4 1 loads the series in W1 through W4 and automatically overwrites the previous series in the Windows if they exist The specified series name is case sensitive If a specified Window already contains a series LOADSERIES by default prompts the user for overwrite permission LOADSERIES also accepts an optional overwrite flag to automatically overwrite existing series in a Window without prompting DELETESERIES LOADDATASET OPENLABBOOK SAVESERIES LOADWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Loads a specified Worksheet LOADWORKSHEET wname wname The name of the Worksheet to load in quotes A 1 if the specified Worksheet is loaded successfully 0 otherwise If the Worksheet does not exist DADiSP returns a 0 loadworksheet runl loads a previously saved Worksheet overwriting the current Worksheet The specified Worksheet name is case sensitive DELETEWORKSHEET IMPORTWORKSHEET SAVEWORKSHEET 453 LOCAL Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also LOCALS Purpose Format Returns 454 Declares a variable local to a function LOCAL var1 var2 varn varn A variable name my fun x local j fft for j fft 0 j lt x j fft j return fft SPL recognizes j and fft as local variables The symbol fft is treated as a local variable not the FFT function The LOCAL decla
77. XCORR Creates a binary fractal 141 Format Returns Example Remarks 142 CTREE stages cangle cindex stages Optional An integer the depth of fractal recursion Defaults to 6 cangle Optional A real the angle increment per radians Defaults to 4 cindex Optional An integer the starting color index Defaults to 15 white Multiple overplotted XY series ctree displays a depth 6 binary C Tree W1 ctree ctree 12 displays a depth 12 binary C Tree CTREE draws a binary fractal called the Pythagorean Tree created by A E Bosman The fractal is produced by starting with a square of width W Two smaller squares of widthW sqrt 2 2 are connected to one side of the first square to form a 45 45 90 triangle The process is repeated with each of the smaller squares over and over again Because each new stage creates twice as many squares as the preceding stage the Pythagorean Tree is considered a binary fractal The SPL code is based on an algorithm by Hans Lauwerier See Also OVERPLOT XY References Hans Lauwerier Fractals Endlessly Repeated Geometrical Figures Princeton University Press 1991 p111 112 CURMOVE Purpose
78. XV IDFT IFFT IFFTP IMPULSE KAISER LINSCALE LOG2 NEXTPOW2 NONLIN2D OASFILT PADFILT POLY PSD QUANTIZE RCEPS RESCALE SHP SINC SLP SOBEL SONOGRAM SPECGRAM SPECTRUM STARMS TF2SS WINFUNC XCORR XCOV ZEROFLIP ZFREQ ZINTERP ZPFCOEF Inverse DFT Real Imaginary Inverse FFT Real Imaginary Inverse FFT Magnitude Phase Generate discrete unit impulse series Kaiser window Linearly rescales an input series Calculate Log base 2 of the input Determine the exponent for the next power of 2 Perform nonlinear 2d filtering with filter kernel Filter data using the overlap and save method FIR filtering with optional endpoint padding Calculate coefficients of the characteristic polynomial Power spectral density Magnitude2 Quantize an input series to N levels Calculate the real cepstrum Linearly rescales an input series Emulate a single pole analog high pass filter Calculate sin x x Emulate a single pole analog low pass filter Perform nonlinear 2D Sobel edge detection Calculate the 2D Spectrogram as a B amp W image Calculate the 2D Spectrogram as an image Magnitude of a normalized FFT Calculate the short time averaged RMS series Calculate the state space representation Multiplie a series with a spectral window Cross correlation using the convolution method Cross covariance using direct convolution Pad the ends of a series with endpoint reflections about 0 0 Evaluate the frequency response of a Z transform
79. color An integer Color parameter Defaults to color of primary series style An integer Style parameter 1 show the point 0 do not show the point Defaults to 1 The coordinates are in absolute or world coordinates those of the data displayed in the Window A style parameter of 0 is useful for anchoring a line drawing for DPTABS The function also relocates the cursor to the endpoint of the line Unlike LINECUR this formula has no effect if executed when the Window is activated It must be part of the Window formula to have an effect DLNABS LINEANN LINECUR 207 DSPMACREAD Purpose Format Remarks See Also Reads an external file of macro definitions from the macros sub directory DSPMACREAD filename filename The name of the external macro text file located in the macros sub directory in quotes DADiSP includes several helpful macro files located in the macros sub directory To load any of the DSP supplied macro files use the DSPMACREAD function DSPMACVIEW MACREAD MACROS MACWRITE DSPMACVIEW Purpose Format See Also See Also 208 Displays the contents of a macro file in the macros sub directory DSPMACVIEW filename filename The name of the external macro text file located in the macros sub directory in quotes Function form DSPMACVIEW filename filename The name of the external macro text file located in the macros sub directory without quotes Comma
80. elliptic 1 1000 0 200 0 3 0 40 0 250 0 W2 clogmag Wl 1024 93 Remarks See Also 94 W1 elliptic 1 1000 0 200 0 3 0 40 0 250 0 1 No Units 1 0 068231 2 1 000000 3 1 339368 4 1 000000 5 1 168010 6 0 553014 W2 clogmag W1 1024 205 Gia a EES 20 bS S 40 ee pae 604 A7 80 100 T T T 250 300 350 Hertz T T T 0 50 100 150 200 T T 400 450 W1 contains the bi quad cascade coefficients of an elliptical low pass filter W2 contains 1024 uniformly spaced samples of the log magnitude squared frequency response of the filter in W1 CLOGMAG employs ZFREQ to evaluate N uniformly spaced samples of the complex frequency response of the filter The cascade coefficients are converted to direct form and the complex frequency response is evaluated using the FFT The log magnitude squared of the complex frequency response is returned CLOGMAG is appropriate for calculating the magnitude response of Butterworth Chebyshev1 Chebyshev2 and Elliptic IIR filters designed by DADiSP Filters CPHASE FFT ZFREQ CNF2STD Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also COL Purpose Converts a confidence level to a standard deviation range CNF2STD alpha alpha Areal or series The confidence level s in Defaults to 99 a 99 confidence level A real or series The standard deviation
81. faster than CONV for large series See CONV for the time domain implementation ACORR CONV DECONV FACORR FILTEQ FDECONV FXCORR XCORR FDECONV Purpose Format Returns Performs deconvolution of two series in the frequency domain FDECONV b a q r FDECONV b a a A series or expression resulting in a series b A series or expression resulting in a series A series such that b conv a q r 239 Example Remarks See Also FFLUSH Purpose 240 a 0 3 2 3 ESTs EFS b conv a x q r fdeconv b a b 0 3 8 10 8 3 q 1 2 1 r 0 0 0 0 0 0 gnorm 1000 001 gsin 1000 001 3 b conv x a x o Il q fdeconv b a recovers the 3 Hertz sinewave Q FDECONV is appropriate for recovering a series from a convolution process FDECONV uses the FFT to compute the deconvolution with real ifft fft b fft a If the denominator series a contains a zero the FFT quotient value is replaced by DEFAULT_MATH_VALUE See DECONV for a time domain implementation that also calculates the polynomial quotient CONV DECONV FCONV FFT Clears the buffer of input from or output to the specified file Format Returns Remarks See Also FFT Purpose Format Returns Example FFLUSH filename filename The name of the file in quotes A 1 if successful otherwise it returns nothing If the file w
82. from the previous random number except for the first random number which is calculated from the seed In calculating the next random number DADiSP does not refer to the clock or anything other than the previous random number or the seed The random numbers generated cannot be distinguished from actual random numbers by statistical methods However because the formula is deterministic such random numbers are sometimes called pseudo random numbers Since DADiSP uses a seed of every time it starts up all the random numbers are duplicated in every DADiSP session You can vary this pattern by setting a seed of your choosing When the seed is reset with this function all random numbers are henceforth calculated from the new seed seedrand without an input argument sets the seed to a value determined by the current date and time SEEDRAND can be abbreviated SEED GNORMAL GRANDOM 651 SERCOLOR Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Modifies the series color in a Window without changing the Window color SERCOLOR color color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP sercolor green sets the current Window s series color to green For a list of colors use the MACROS function SETCOLOR SETGCOLOR WINCOLOR SERCOUNT Purpose Format Returns Example 652 Returns the number of series or columns in a Window or DADiSP expression SERCOUNT series series
83. function key F5 or toolbar button then any rotations set explicitly by rotation functions will be replaced by the rotation values inferred from orientation and vertical default rotation FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAORIX SETAORIY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY 657 SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 658 Sets the default rotation for labels on x and y axis SETAVDEFX Window rotation SETAVDEFY Window rotation Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window rotation Aninteger Valid arguments are 0 ie 2 ww 1 p 1 90 degree rotation of entire string all sides 270 degree rotation of entire string i e 90 degrees CW all sides Horizontal characters laid out in vertical sequence all sides Horizontal leftmost letter becomes vertical topmost letter 90 degree rotation of entire string for left and bottom sides 270 degree rotation of entire string for right and top sides 270 degree rotation of entire string for left and bottom sides 90 degree rotation of entire string for right and top sides W1 grand 100 5 1 scales 2 setaoriy 2 setavdefy 4 Click on the scales button in the toolbar or F5 and see how the y axis labels change their rotation as the scales move from the left side to the right side of the window SETAVDEFX and SETAVDEFY set the vertical default rotation for axis
84. grand 100 1 10 text 6 0 3 0 0 1 YELLOW 1 1 0 Temp over Time In this example TEXT prints the text Temp over Time at axis coordinates 6 0 3 0 of the Window The 0 as the target indicates that the text will scroll with the data PAPER The 1 Yellow instruct DADiSP to use the color of the primary series and yellow for the background The text will be drawn using the small font 1 and it will be surrounded by a box W1 gsin 100 01 setsymb SQUARE 1 10 1 W2 Wl overlay gcos 100 01 RED setsymb 9 2 10 5 text 0 5 0 2 1 Sampled Data places text that remains fixed as the data scrolls GLASS in the current Window text W2 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 3 Sine Cosine puts a legend in the left window margin of W2 In general TEXT replaces the older TEXTANN function All GLASS coordinates are normalized to the specified rectangular regions in the Window or Worksheet where the upper left corner is 0 0 0 0 and the lower right corner is 1 0 1 0 GLASS annotations stick to the Window like the viewfinder in a camera while PAPER annotations scroll with the data TEXT can be used directly from the command line or as part of an SPL routine to annotate a Window that contains data The result is identical to adding text via the Text Toolbar and the text can subsequently be manipulated with the mouse To use the default value for any integer parameter from target to focus use 1 as the argument to TEXT If the
85. image Anarray The input image factor Optional An integer the interpolation factor Defaults to 2 method Optional An integer the interpolation method Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 linear Default 1 cubic spline An array W1 readbmp windows circles bmp W2 iminterp W1l 4 0 W3 iminterp W1 4 1 W2 produces a linearly interpolated image and W3 contains a cubic spline interpolated image The both images are interpolated by a factor of 4 If the image is an RGBIMAGE i e a 24 bit image IMINTERP automatically interpolates each R G B component GETRGB INTERP2 READBMP SPLINE2 IMPORTFILE Purpose Format Imports a data file from the command line IMPORTFILE filename headerfile autoload overwrite onewin filename A string Import file name in quotes headerfile Optional A string Import header file name in quotes autoload Optional An integer Defaults to 0 0 do not load into Window 1 automatically load into Window Defaults 0 385 Example Remarks See Also overwrite Optional An integer Overwrite flag if loading 1 overwrite any existing series in a Window 0 do not overwrite Defaults to 0 onewin Optional An integer 1 load all the series in the specified file into the current window 0 do not load into one window If onewin 1 the overwrite argument has no effect the data in the current window is overwritten importfile data dat
86. or expression evaluating to a series or table Returns A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table Example colmedian ravel 1 2 3 2 3 4 returns 2 3 See Also COL COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMIN COLSTDEV TRANSPOSE COLMIN Purpose Produces a row of the minimum values of each column of the input table Format COLMIN table table Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Returns A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table Example colmin ravel 1 2 3 2 3 4 returns 1 2 104 Remarks Use COLMINIDX to find the indices of each column of an array See Also COL COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMINIDX COLSTDEV COLSUM TRANSPOSE Purpose Returns a row of indices for the minimums of each column of the input table Format COLMINIDX table unravel table Any series or expression resulting in a table unravel Optional An integer indicating if unraveled i e sequential indices should be returned 0 Normal indices default 1 Unraveled indices Returns A row series Example LAS 2s 2 1 3 3 2 1 2 colminidx wl 2 2 3 a colminidx Wl 1 b colmin W1 c WlLa a 1 5 9 b c 1 1 1 105 Remarks See Also COLMINIDX finds the index of the minimum value for each column in an array If more than one minimum exists per column the fi
87. setplotty 2 W1 rainbow colorbar 2 2 2 1 1 8 0 9 0 8 1 6 0 7 0 6 j 1 4 1 2 W2 contains a shaded 3D surface A vertical color bar scaled to the values of W2 is overlayed onto W2 109 Remarks See Also COLPOS Purpose Format Returns 110 setcrange 0 2 W3 Wl colorbar 1 W4 W1l colorbar 0 The color range is now scaled to Z values from 0 0 to 2 0 The colorbar added in W3 shows the full color range while the colorbar of W4 is scaled to the values of W4 The colorbar is an overlay Use the FOCUS command to directly manipulate the colorbar and UNOVERPLOT to remove the colorbar FOCUS OVERLAY SETCOLORMAP SETCRANGE SETSHADING SHOWCMAP UNOVERPLOT Returns the item or column number of the last position of the crosshair cursor in a Window COLPOS Window item cursor_num Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window item Optional An integer specifying the item number i e series in the window Defaults to 1 cursor_num Optional An integer specifying the cursor number 1 First Cursor 2 Second Cursor Defaults to 1 The item or column number in the specified Window where the cursor was most recently placed If the cursor was never activated in the given Window the column number returned is 0 Example Remarks See Also region W1 1 length W1 colpos W1 1 1 numcols W1 colpos W1 1 1 extracts a rectangular region from the table in Window 1 s
88. slope yoffset islope iyoffset filename vunits hunits filetype numseries start offset byteswap Windows deltax slope yoffset islope iyoffset Example gsin 100 gsqr 100 gtri 100 AUNE Name of the input binary file in quotes If no path is given MULTIREADB looks for the file in the current working directory Optional String containing vertical units Optional String containing horizontal units Binary data type An integer Number of series Optional An integer First series to be read as data Defaults to all series Optional An integer The number of bytes to skip Defaults to 0 Optional An integer Swap the order of the bytes read 1 swap 0 do not swap default Optional List of destination Windows Defaults to current Window Optional A real number specifying spacing between points Optional A real number specifying the y multiplier Defaults to 1 Optional A real number specifying y offset Defaults to 0 Optional An integer specifying y multiplier to apply to raw data Defaults to 1 Optional Integer specifying y offset to apply to raw data Defaults to 0 01 1 01 2 01 3 merge W1 W2 W3 writeb merged dat double W4 ultireadb merged dat double 3 W4 merges a sine square and triangle wave The interlaced series is written to the file merged dat The three original series are demultiplexed into W5 W6 and W7 s
89. vertical grids or both by using GRIDH GRIDV or GRIDHV respectively via the menus or command line See Also GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV 351 GRIDDOT Purpose Places a dotted grid over the series in the current Window This is equivalent to using the F6 toggle key Format GRIDDOT Returns A dotted grid in the Window display Remarks To turn grids on press the F6 key or specify horizontal grids vertical grids or both by using GRIDH GRIDV or GRIDHV respectively via the menus or command line See Also GRIDDASH GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV Purpose Sets grid orientation horizontal Format GRIDH Example gridsol gridh displays horizontal solid grids when a series is displayed Remarks GRIDH does not automatically set the grids to be visible GRIDH must be used in conjunction with GRIDSOL GRIDDASH GRIDDOT the menus or the F6 toggle key 352 See Also GRIDHV Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also GRIDOFF Purpose Format GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV Sets grid orientation horizontal and vertical GRIDHV griddash gridhv displays horizontal and vertical dashed grids when a series is displayed GRIDHV does not automatically set the grids to be visible GRIDHV must be used in conjunction with GRIDSOL GRIDDASH GRIDDOT the menus or the F6 toggle key GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV Turn
90. y Generate a uniformly distributed random array Generate a normally distributed random array Set seed for random number generation Integer Bessel function Generate an array of all zeros Image Processing BRIGHTEN DCT2 FFT2 FFTP2 HISTEQ IDCT2 IFFT2 IFFTP2_ IMAGE24 IMINTERP INTERP2 RGB2MONO RGBIMAGE SPLINE2 Brighten or darkens an image Calculate the 2D Discrete Cosine Transform Calculate the 2D FFT of an array Calculate the 2D FFT of an array in polar mag phase form Perform histogram equalization of an image Calculate the 2D Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform Calculate the 2D IFFT of an array Calculate the 2D IFFT in polar magnitude phase form Convert an image with a colormap to a 24 bit color image Interpolate an image Perform two dimensional linear interpolation Convert an RGB image to 8 bit monochrome Create a 24 bit image from red green and blue components Perform two dimensional cubic spline fitting xvii Datasets Worksheets and Labbooks COPYDATASET COPYSERIES DELETEDATASET DELETELABBOOK DELETESERIES DELETEWORKSHEET LOADDATASET LOADSERIES LOADWORKSHEET NEWWORKSHEET OPENLABBOOK SAVESERIES SAVEWORKSHEET Copy a Series from a Dataset Copy a Series from a Dataset Delete an entire Dataset of the current Worksheet Delete an entire Labbook Delete one or more Series from a Dataset Delete one or more Worksheets from a Labbook Load entire Dataset into Worksheet Load a specified Series
91. 120 140 0 100 200 300 400 500 W2 adds a synthesized echo at 60 seconds to the data of W1 W3 displays a small peak at t 60 indicating the presence of the echo W4 performs the same calculation with the data padded to 512 samples Wl 1 4 0996 8 4057 10 1765 7 7801 3 5142 0 7939 W2 cceps W1 1024 returns the example listed in 2 The complex cepstrum of a series is essentially if ft log fft s However the complex log calculation requires the evaluation of the continuous phase component CCEPS unwraps the phase using Shafer s Algorithm A line is subtracted from the unwrapped phase to remove the integer lag component References See Also CEILING Purpose Format Returns Example c d cceps s returns both the cepstrum and the lag used to unwrap the phase such that icceps c d ideally returns s ifmean s gt 0 CCEPS was tested successfully against the output from 2 1 Oppenheim amp Shafer Discrete Time Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1989 pp 788 792 2 IEEE Press Programs for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Press 1979 Section 7 a4 ICCEPS RCEPS Finds the smallest integer greater than or equal to the input value CEILING expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table ceiling 2 4 returns 3 whereas round 2 4 returns 2 ceiling 2 4 7 21 returns 2 0 8 01 8l ceiling W2 create
92. 2 W3 contains the single column series 9 10 11 12 The columns to removed specified by the columns series can be in any order Values can also be deleted by assigning the empty series For example See Also a ravel 1 16 4 al 3 a 1 5 13 2 6 14 3 Za 153 4 8 16 See DELETEROW to delete rows DECIMATE DELETE DELETEROW EXTRACT MERGE RAVEL REMOVE DELETEDATASET Purpose Format Returns Example Deletes an entire Dataset of the current Worksheet DELETEDATASET dsname1 dsname2 dSnameN confirm dsetnameN Name of Dataset s to delete in quotes confirm Optional Confirmation flag 1 confirm deletion 0 do not confirm Defaults to 1 An integer 1 if successful else lt 0 deletedataset RUN1 1 deletes all the series in Dataset RUN1 1 Ifa version number is not specified it is defaulted to version 1 deletedataset RUN1 1 RUN1 2 1 deletes both RUN1 1 and RUN1 2 with confirmation 189 Remarks See Also The specified Dataset names are case sensitive COPYDATASET DELETELABBOOK DELETESERIES DELETEWORKSHEET IMPORTFILE LOADDATASET LOADSERIES SAVESERIES DELETELABBOOK Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 190 Deletes an entire Labbook DELETELABBOOK labname confirm labname A string the name of the Labbook to delete in quotes or a string variable confirm Optional Co
93. 2 12 8 and length W1 2 12 8 values Wl 1 10 W2 reshape Wl 3 0 4 returns the table 1 5 2 6 10 3 7 8 62 Remarks See Also RETURN Purpose Format Example 622 The 0 length column is removed W1 1 10 W2 reshape W1l 3 0 4 1 0 1 returns the table 1 0 4 8 2 5 3 6 10 7 The zero length column is preserved with a value of 0 RESHAPE creates a table of values by splitting series into multiple columns where the length of each column is specified by the 1engths series Any remaining values are placed in the final column Unlike RAVEL RESHAPE can divide the series into columns of varying lengths COLEXTRACT EXTRACT RAVEL Terminates an iteration or a function and optionally returns a value RETURN val1 val2 valN val Optional Any string scalar series or table IntgVal s ival max integ s return ival The SPL function IntgVa1 returns the max of the integral of the series s Remarks See Also AVGHIST is an example of an SPL routine to calculate a histogram where the X values are the average of the points within a bin Either the histogram as a whole or the separate X and Y components can be returned avghist s n local h a if argc lt 2 if argc lt 1 error avghist input required n 10 first get normal histogram h hist s n sort original data in ascending order a sort s 1
94. 3 returns 10 the number of rows created by RAND See Also LENGTH NUMCOLS SERSIZE SIZE NUMSTR Purpose Converts a string into a scalar Format NUMSTR string string Character string to be converted into a scalar in quotes Returns A scalar Example numstr strfind XINC YOR 12 3 XINC 1 0 YREF 120 0 returns 1 0 530 Remarks NUMSTR is a simple string to numeric converter See SPRINTF for more conversion options See Also STREXTRACT STRFIND STRGET STRNUM NUMSTRS Purpose Converts a string that contains a list of scalars into a series Format NUMSTRS string string Character string containing scalars in quotes Returns A series Example numstrs 1 2 3 returns the series 1 2 3 See Also NUMSTR NUMVWINS Purpose Returns the number of displayed Windows in the Worksheet Format NUMVWINS Returns An integer number of visible Windows 531 Example See Also newworksheet 6 0 display W1 W4 numvwins creates a 6 Window Worksheet displays W1 through W4 NUMVWINS returns 4 NUMWINDOWS WINSTATUS NUMWINDOWS Purpose Format Example See Also OASFILT Purpose Format 532 Returns the total number of Windows in the Worksheet NUMWINDOWS addwin 10 numwindows adds the necessary amount of Windows to equal 10 If Windows are hidden it may not be obvious how many are in the Worksheet GETWNUM Filt
95. 8 36468 0 434583 2 20074 Because matrix a is positive definite the eigenvalues of a are all positive v 1 10 20 conj v a v 1123 also demonstrating that a is positive definite DS tt3 2a She tej Ag Cs 3 2 1 C p chol b p 1 indicating b is not positive definite and C was not fully computed eig b 7 44241 1 21371 1 7713 Because matrix b is not positive definite the eigenvalues of b are not all positive conj v b v 77 also demonstrating that b is not positive definite 85 Remarks See Also CLEAR Purpose Format Example 86 Matrix a is positive definite if conj v a v gt 0 for any vector v with the same number of rows as the number of columns of a The eigenvalues of a positive definite matrix are all positive For a positive definite matrix a the Cholesky factor C is an upper triangular matrix such that conj C C a If the input matrix is not positive definite an error results unless ef 1ag is 1 However for C p cholesky a no error message is printed regardless of the ef lag argument Testing for p gt 0 is one method of determining if the input is positive definite without returning an error CHOLESKY can be abbreviated CHOL Matrix Multiply DIAGONAL EIG LU SVD QR Clears the Window contents and formula CLEAR W1 WN W1 WN Optional A range or list of Windows Defaults to the curren
96. BINARY data file from disk and returns a series Format Returns Example READB filename filetype numpts offset byteswap filename The name of the input file in quotes If no path is given READB looks for the file in the current working directory filetype The binary format type of the data file described by either its name or integer code Valid arguments are Name Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10 37 to 10 38 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 4 byte Unsigned O to 4 294 967 295 Integer numpts Optional An integer The number of points to read Defaults to all points 1 offset Optional An integer The number of bytes to skip Defaults to 0 byteswap Optional An integer Swap the order of the bytes read 1 swap 0 do not swap default A series writeb test bin SINT 1 2 3 4 Wl readb test bin SINT returns the series 1 2 3 4 readb myfile FLOAT 1024 18 reads 1024 floating point numbers starting at the 19th byte in the file a readb myfile FLOAT 1 18 reads all floating point numbers in the file starting at the 19th byte and assigns the series to variable a 599 Remarks See Also
97. CURRENT window Write the configuration table to an ASCII file Worksheet Functions Variables DEFFUN Variable Assignment gt gt lt lt amp ALLFUNCTIONS Define a single line DADISP function Assign the value of an expression to a variable Hot Variable Assignment Assign a formula to a hot variable or Window Assignment Operators Operate and assign the value of an expression Display a list of all available functions defined within the current Worksheet XXXV ARGTYPE ARGV DEFVAR DELALLFUNCTIONS DELALLVARIABLES DELFUN DELVARIABLE FUNCTIONS GETARGV GETLOCALVARIABLE GETVARIABLE HELP LOCAL SETHOTVARIABLE SETLOCALVARIABLE SETVARIABLE VALUETYPE VARS XY Functions XVALS XY XYINTERP XYLOOKUP YVALS XXXVI Return the data type of the input argument Specify variable arguments in an SPL routine Set the value of a variable if the variable is undefined Delete the functions associated with the current Worksheet Delete all the variables associated with current Worksheet Delete a function from the current Worksheet Delete the specified variable from the current Worksheet Display the SPL functions that have been defined Return a variable argument from an SPL routine Return information about a local variable Return information about a variable Access the on line help file dspfun hlp Declare a variable local to a function Set a hot variable Set a local variable Set a g
98. DBCLEAR DBCONT DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS DBQUIT Purpose Quits the debugger Format DBQUIT Returns Nothing Example dbstop myfunc bcont Q y func 10 dbstep locals dbquit sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called and the debugger stops at the first executable line in myfunc DBSTEP steps to the next line and LOCALS displays the local variables of myfunc Finally DBQUIT exits the debugger Remarks Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached See Also DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS 155 DBSTACK Purpose Displays the status of the debugger callstack Format DBSTACK Returns The status of the debugger callstack Example Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y y x x y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y Now consider the following debugger session Q bstop myfunc bcont Q ycall 10 dbstack locals dbup locals A breakpoint is set in the routine myfunc and the function mycall is executed Since mycall calls myfunc the debu
99. Defaults to mode Optional An integer 0 All files in listbox are shown in normal font enabled 1 All files in listbox are shown grayed out 1 pick directory only Defaults to 0 A string representing the selected path and filename or directory Under Windows pickfile c dsp2000 macros Pick a Macro File strescape Macro Files mac O mac O A11 Files O 0 Under Unix pickfile home4 dadispapps macros Pick a Macro File mac brings up a dialog box that has Pick a Macro on the title bar prompts you for Macro File Name and only list files given in the given directory that end in the mac extension MESSAGE PICKLIST PICKLIST Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Displays a list and returns the item selected by the user using the native GUI PICKLIST titlebar prompt defaultvalue pickonly multi list1 listN titlebar Character string to be placed on the titlebar in quotes prompt Character string used to prompt in quotes defaultvalue String representing the default value in quotes pickonly An integer 1 specifies whether the user can only pick from the provided list 0 specifies the user can type a new value multi An integer 1 return multiple values as a comma separated string 0 return a single value default list1 listN List of items to select in quotes The item selecte
100. Each entry of the output table is computed from a row of table1 and a column of table2 For an entry in the ith row and the jth column in the output table the value is equivalent to reduce transpose row tablel 7 op2 col table2 j opl The number of columns in table1 must be equal to the number of rows in table2 The number of rows in the output table is equal to the number of rows in table1 and the number of columns in the output table is equal to the number of columns in table2 Example 140 Dy 27 13 4 BY m ll b 4 0 3 2 0 1 innerprod a b returns a table with the values 3 4 24 13 innerprod a b returns a table with the values If W1 and W2 contain conforming matrices this expression results in their table product That is innerprod W1 W2 is equivalent to w1 W2 391 Remarks See Also INPORT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 392 Binary operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve INTERPOSE MMULT OUTERPROD REDUCE TRANSPOSE Retrieve 1 2 or 4 bytes from a port INPORT port datatype port An integer the output port datatype Optional An integer The type of data to input Defaults to SBYTE signed byte An integer the value read from the port inport Oxll sbyte
101. Format Example Remarks See Also DLNABS x y color style x X coordinate of point Defaults to 1 y Y coordinate of point Defaults to 1 color An integer Color parameter Defaults to the color of the primary series style An integer Style parameter Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 0 No visible line 1 Solid default 2 Dashed 3 Dotted gsin 100 0 01 dlnabs 0 2 1 1blue dlnabs 0 3 1 blue dinabs 0 25 0 1blue draws a triangle connecting the three x y pairs The coordinates are in absolute or world coordinates those of the data displayed in the Window The style parameter controls how the line is drawn The function also relocates the cursor to the endpoint of the line Unlike LINECUR this formula has no effect if executed when the Window is activated It must be part of the Window formula to have an effect DPTABS LINEANN LINECUR DOS UNIX VMS Purpose Format Macro Leaves DADiSP temporarily via the DADiSP shell and enters the operating system at the current working directory DOS UNIX VMS pause save pause Optional An integer 1 forces DADiSP to pause before returning to the last Worksheet screen This pause is useful if a error occurs while DADiSP attempts to enter the operation system e g insufficient memory 205 Expansion Remarks See Also DOUBLE Purpose Format Expansion Example Remarks 206 save Optional An in
102. INHWINSTYLE LINES MARKMAX MARKMIN ONPLOT OVERLAY OVERPLOT PLOTMODE POINTS POPWINDOW xii Activate a window Add to a window formula Add a command to a worksheet formula Set window autoscaling Set the centering of a 2D bar plot Set the gap drawing between bars of a 2D step plot Display series as thick vertical bars Set the vertical reference of a 2D bar plot Set coloring of the top face of a 3D bar plot Set automatic recalculation On Off Clear any window Clear all windows Clear the data from every Window in the Worksheet without removing the Window formulae Clear data in the window without clearing the window formula Compress series horizontally Compress series vertically Display specified windows Display all windows Expand series horizontally Expand series vertically Set input focus for overlaid series Return integer corresponding to the number of the curve in focus Allow you to set a plot style Return the plot type for a table of data Return integer corresponding to the scales used Return the x axis label Return the y axis label Hide a range of windows Display graph as hi lo values Inherit plotting style from data series Inherit plotting style from window Connect graph points with lines Mark the maximum of a series with a symbol Mark the minimum of a series with a symbol Execute statements when a Window is plotted Overlay one series onto another in a given window Plot additional series in window
103. If the input data is a series i e a single column a 1D IFFT is performed See Also FFT2 IFFT 378 IFFTP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References Calculates the Inverse Fast Fourier Transform of a series with the result in polar magnitude phase form IFFTP series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A complex series or table in Polar form W1 gsin 128 0 01 1 4 W2 ifftp W1 displays the inverse Fourier Transform in magnitude and phase form W1 gsin 100 0 001 50 0 W2 fftp W1 W3 ifftp W2 returns a rectified waveform because the magnitude in W2 is always positive W4 ifft W2 returns a sine wave that looks like W1 because DADiSP first converts W2 to cartesian coordinates then takes the IFFT Uses the same algorithm as the IFFT but is slower because it calculates magnitude phase FFT FFTP IFFT Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 379 IFFTP2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also IGRID Purpose 380 Calculates the 2D IFFT in polar magnitude phase form IFFTP2 array rlen clen array A multi column series rlen Optional An integer The IFFT row size Defaults to numrows a clen Optional An integer The IFFT colu
104. LN PHI PI SETDEGREE Purpose Deletes all the functions associated with the current Worksheet Format DELALLFUNCTIONS Remarks Use CLEAROPL to delete the associated OPL files See Also DEFFUN DELFUN 185 DELALLVARIABLES Purpose Format Remarks See Also DELAY Purpose Format Returns Example 186 Deletes the entire list of variables associated with the current Worksheet DELALLVARIABLES Use SPLLOAD to restore variables in SPL files DELALLVARIABLES can be abbreviated DELALLVAR DELALLFUNCTIONS DELFUN DELVARIABLE GETVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SPLLOAD SPLREAD Offsets a series by n number of points along the x axis DELAY series n series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table n An integer number of points to offset series A series or table W1 1 3 W2 delay wl 2 offsets W1 by two points by prepending two zeros to the beginning of the series The resulting series contains the values 0 0 1 2 3 Remarks See Also DELETE Purpose Format Returns Example W1 delay W1 1 returns a series containing the difference in y values between each point and the previous point DELAY effectively moves a series n points to the right by setting the first n points of the new series to zero The remaining point values of the new series are set according to the following relation newseries xX oldseries x n In other words
105. NAVALUE 613 REMOVEWINDOW Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 614 Removes the indicated number of Windows from the Worksheet starting with the current Window REMOVEWINDOW win n win Anoptional Window the Window from which to begin removing Defaults to the current Window n An integer representing the number of Windows to remove from the Worksheet removewindow 3 removes three Windows starting with the current Window If Window 6 is current then Windows 6 through 8 are removed from the Worksheet removewindow W2 3 removes three Windows starting with Window 2 removewindow 1 removes all the Windows in a Worksheet The current Window is indicated by the position of the Window cursor REMOVEWINDOW can be abbreviated REMOVEWIN ADDWINDOW NEWWORKSHEET REORDER Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Arranges a series or table based on a list of indices REORDER series indices series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table indices Series of indices i e sample numbers on which to reorder A series or table reorder W1 grade Wl returns a the same result as sort W1 Whe 25 55 95 Ly 3 reorder W1 3 1 2 4 5 returns the series 9 2 5 1 3 To reorder a table based upon the values in the first column Whe 25 be 35 Vly Ly als 4 1 OF reorder W1 grade col W1 1 1 ret
106. READB ignores any header information in the data file To retain header info use the Import Utilities You can write any series to disk with WRITEA or WRITEB EXPORTFILE FREADB FWRITEB IMPORTFILE MULTIREADB READA READTABLE WRITEA WRITEB WRITETABLE READBMP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 600 Reads a Microsoft BMP bitmap file READBMP filename filename Astring The name ofa BMP file An array readbmp mandrill bmp reads and displays the bitmap file mandrill bmp image cmap readbmp mandrill bmp reads the bitmap file into the variable image and copies the colormap into the variable cmap READBMP currently supports only uncompressed BMP files If the image is a 24 or 32 bit bitmap it is automatically read as an RGBIMAGE i e 24 bits READBMP SPL is based on LOADBMP M Copyright 1993 written by Ralph Sucher Dept of Communications Engineering Technical University of Vienna Gusshausstrasse 25 389 A 1040 Vienna AUSTRIA See Also GETRGB IMAGE24 RGBIMAGE WRITEBMP READMAT Purpose Reads a Matlab mat file Format READMAT fname fname A string A file name in quotes Returns A series or array Example readmat mymat mat reads the matrix file mymat mat and creates global array variables with the same names as each of the stored matrices Remarks If the matrix is an image the image is displayed using the saved colormap if any See Also
107. SETAORIX SETAORIY Purpose Sets the orientation of the axis labels 655 Format Example Remarks See Also SETAORIX Window orient SETAORIY Window orient Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window orient An integer value 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical Defaults to 1 W1 gsin 100 01 setvunits Volts W2 gcos 100 01 setvunits Amps W3 wl staggery 0 staggerx 0 Scales 2 sety 4 1 5 spany 1 1 overlay w2 red focus 2 staggery 0 staggerx 0 scales 13 sety 1 5 4 spany 1 1 focus 1 setaoriy 1 focus 2 setaoriy 2 Window 3 contains the 2 overlayed curves with flush scales and different axis label orientations The axis labels for the sine wave are horizontal while those for the cosine wave are vertical SETAORIX and SETAORIY apply to the scales associated with the current focus of the specified Window By setting the orientation the label will be drawn horizontally or vertically i e succeeding characters in a label string will be drawn below or above vertical or to the right or left horizontal of preceding characters If the axis label is vertically oriented then its rotation is defined to be the vertical label default rotation for its label type and axis FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAROTX SETAROTY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY SETXTIC SETYTIC SETAROTX SETAROTY Purpose 656 Sets the rotati
108. T 0 50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 Hertz W1 contains the bi quad cascade coefficients of an elliptical low pass filter W2 contains 1024 uniformly spaced samples of the phase response of the filter in W1 Remarks CPHASE employs ZFREQ to evaluate N uniformly spaced samples of the complex frequency response of the filter The cascade coefficients are converted to direct form and the complex frequency response is evaluated using the FFT The phase of the complex frequency response is returned CPHASE is appropriate for calculating the phase response of Butterworth Chebyshev 1 Chebyshev2 and Elliptic IIR filters designed by DADiSP Filters See Also CLOGMAG FFT ZFREQ 139 CREATEOBJECT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns a handle to an ActiveX server object CREATEOBJECT objname objname A string the name of the ActiveX object A handle to the object or 1 if an error occurs Word createobject word application Word visible 1 creates MS word as an ActiveX server and makes Word visible CREATEOBJECT starts an ActiveX object as a server Once connected any methods or properties supported by the object can be invoked set or queried Use GETOBJECT to connect to a server that is already running See the SPL ACTIVEX directory for more examples of ActiveX routines CASTVARIANT CASTVARIANTARRAY GETOBJECT RELEASE CROSSCOR Purpose Format 1
109. The binary format type of the data file described by either its name or integer code Valid arguments are Name Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 1038 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 104307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 Unsigned Long Integer 0 to 4 294 967 295 byteswap Optional An integer Swap the order of the bytes to write 1 swap 0 do not swap default series Optional A series the values to write Defaults to the current Window Returns Nothing 283 Example Remarks See Also FXCORR Purpose Format Returns 284 fopen test bin w fwriteb test bin sint 1 5 fclose test bin a readb test bin sint a 1 2 3 4 5 FWRITEB writes 5 signed integer values to the file READB returns the values as a series in variable a File must be opened with FOPEN before using FWRITEB FWRITEB operates like WRITEB once FOPEN is used to open the file FCLOSE FOPEN FWRITEB FWRITEA WRITEB Calculates the cross correlation using the FFT method FXCORR series1 series2 norm series1 A series array or expression resulting in a series or array series2 A series array or expression resulting in a series or array norm Optional An i
110. UPTRI UPTRIX Performs known frequency sine curve fitting using the least squares method Format LSINFIT s freq mode s A series the input sinusoid freq A real the known frequency of the input signal mode Optional An integer Defaults to 1 Specifies output in one of the two following forms 0 Returns the fitted curve and optionally the coefficients and rms error for the equation f t Al cos 2 pi freq t Bl sin 2 pi freq t C If the output is directed to variables fit coef lsinfit s freq mode Mode 0 returns coefficients in the form coef Al Bl C RmsError 1 Default Returns the fitted curve and optionally the coefficients and rms error for the equation f t A cos 2 pi freq t theta C If the output is directed to variables fit coef lsinfit s freq mode Mode returns coefficients in the form coef A theta C RmsError Returns A series and optionally the coefficients and rms error of the fitted curve Example W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 Isinfit wl 4 0 fits the generated data to the function f t Al cos 2 pi freq t B1 sin 2 pi freq t C W1 gsin 1000 001 4 fit coef lsinfit wl 4 1 W2 fit W3 coef fits the generated data to the function f t A cos 2 pi freq t theta C 465 Remarks See Also References LU Purpose Format Returns Example 466 W2 will contain the fitted curv
111. Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window GLASS_WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area 4 GLASS _ WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area N 1 i Optional An integer that sets the line color to match the color of the selected overplot Defaults to 1 primary series focus Optional An integer specifying 1 based focus offset for PAPER annotations Example Remarks See Also LINEDEL Purpose linecur 1 3 0 2 brings up a dotted crosshair cursor with the color of the second series i e the first overplot LINECUR brings up a crosshair cursor in the middle of the Window To move the cursor use the mouse the arrow keys or use the CTRL arrow key combinations for higher speed Pressing the mouse button or Enter will anchor the first line segment After moving to a new spot pressing Enter or clicking the mouse button again will draw the line from the anchor to the current position and then reset the anchor Successive moves and carriage returns will leave a trail of connected line segments The key or the middle mouse button on some platforms can be used at any time to drop the anchor without drawing a line from the prior position All polylines created with a single call to LINECUR o
112. Window until the maximum value is greater than 10 0 while max CURR lt 25 curr 2 multiplies the current window by 2 until the resulting value is greater than 25 f 1 0 W1 gsin 100 01 f label sprintf Frequency g f W2 spectrum W1 1024 f l while f lt 100 f W2 displays a remarkably simple demonstration of aliasing errors due to undersampling the sinewave in W1 Versions of DADiSP prior to 3 0 required quotes around do_exp For the sake of backward compatibility DADiSP allows do_exp to be quoted or not quoted However whenever possible do not quote do_exp as future versions of DADiSP may not support this syntax See LOOP for a faster but less flexible iteration construct 817 Remarks For best performance try to avoid loops altogether by exploiting the vectorized nature of SPL For example ya es t 0 0 01 1 n 1 while n lt 101 y n sin 2 pi 10 t n can be performed much faster more intuitively and concisely with t Ore OTIS y sin 2 pi 10 t or even faster with y gsin 101 01 10 See Also BREAK CONTINUE FOR IF LOOP RETURN WINCOLOR Purpose Modifies the background Window color Format WINCOLOR Window win_color ser_color Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window win_color Background Window color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP ser_color Optional Series color Any p
113. a Window contains a table the number of series is equal to the number of columns SERCOUNT GETWFORMULA Purpose Format Returns Example Returns the formula of a Window in string form GETWFORMULA Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A string W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 W1 deriv W1 32 getwformula W2 returns the string W1 deriv W1 Remarks GETWFORMULA may be abbreviated GETWFORM See Also ADDWFORM SETWFORM Purpose Returns the setting for the level of information displayed in a Window formula line Format GETWINCURSORINFO Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Returns An integer that represents the level of information displayed in the window formula line where 0 Shows Worksheet Cursor Info Setting 1 Shows Window Label 2 Shows Nothing 3 Shows Window Formula See Also SETWINCURSORINFO SETWSCURSOR Purpose 322 Returns the margin setting for the specified Window Format Returns Example See Also GETWMARGIN Window margin Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window margin Optional Window margin to return Defaults to 1 Valid argument are 1 Left 2 Right 3 Top 4 Bottom A real number getwmargin W2 4 returns the current bottom margin setting for Window 2 SETALLWMARGIN SETWMARGIN GETWNUM Purpose Format Returns Example Rema
114. a series i e a single column a 1D FFT is performed See Also FFT FFT2 FFTP IFFT2 IFFTP2 FFTSHIFT Purpose Shifts a 1D or 2D FFT so the 0 frequency is the midpoint 247 Format Returns Example 248 FFTSHIFT series series A series array or an expression resulting in a series or array A series or array Wi pth Zipw ise lt 2 IS W2 fft W1 W3 fftshift W2 The zero frequency i e DC value of W2 is the first point The zero frequency of W3 is the 3rd point and appears in the middle of the resulting graph W1 gcos 100 01 10 W2 fftp wl 8 1024 W3 fftshift w2 W1 gcos 100 01 10 1 54 17 A A A A N N A TAS N rA 2 0 54 k D 04 e Zz 0 55 p V V V V VU V VV V V VV 1 5 T T T T T T T T T 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 Sec W2 fftp W1 8 1024 W3 fftshift W2 605 605 50 50 40 404 n 2 304 2 301 z D g 204 g 204 7 th i 1 jh 0 Jel Wh 0 _Iremeremernevnvoenil Ive Hts 10 o ah ae le SR te ol 10 Chae de el ed oe ed 0 20 40 60 80 100 50 30 10 10 30 50 Hertz Hertz The frequency peaks in W3 appear at 10 Hertz Remarks See Also FGETS Purpose Format Returns Example FFTSHIFT also works on 2D FFT array FFT FFT2 Returns the next line from the specified input file FGETS filename filename The n
115. a series ranging from 5 to 5 By default LINSCALE automatically clips out of range input values BITSCALE RESCALE QUANTIZE 447 LINSPACE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also LLU Purpose Format 448 Create a series of n equally spaced values from lo to hi inclusive LINSPACE lo hi n lo Optional A real the start range Defaults to 0 0 hi Optional A real the end range Defaults to 1 0 n Optional An integer the number of samples Defaults to 100 A series of n equally spaced values linspace 1 5 5 returns 1 2 3 4 5 W1 cos linspace pi pi 1000 W2 gcos 1000 2 pi 999 1 2 pi pi setxoffset pi W1 W2 within the machine precision The DELTAX values of the resulting series is hi 10 n 1 and the XOFFSET is set to lo Range Specifier GLINE LOGSPACE Computes a permutation of a lower triangular table in LU decomposition LLU matrix matrix A Real or Complex square matrix Returns Example Remarks See Also LN Purpose Format Returns A matrix ka HR Ana E AE e PAR Os 7 8 10 Tlu x 0 143 1 000 0 000 0 571 0 500 1 000 1 000 0 000 0 000 The LU decomposition of a matrix A A llu A ulu A also A lu A 0 1 lu A 1 1 LLU matrix is a permutation of a lower triangular matrix that has ones on the diagonal To get the non permuted version of the lowe
116. a set of crosshairs or cursor on the current series and returns point values at the bottom of the screen same as using the F9 key in an activated Window CURSORON stick stick An optional integer 1 cursor sticks at the initial value 0 cursor moves with the mouse Defaults to 0 Changes to cursor mode arrow keys are active and current point value is displayed at bottom of screen W1 gsin 128 1 128 4 cursoron activates the crosshair cursor The cursor will immediately track mouse movements Wl gsin 128 1 128 4 cursoron 1 Same as above except the cursor does not track the mouse until the mouse has been left clicked 149 Remarks See Also CUT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 150 The cursor is a set of crosshairs placed on the series When the cursor mode is on the command line is disabled If stick is set to 1 the cursor initially ignores mouse movements Left clicking the mouse causes the cursor to respond to mouse movements when the window is active CURPOS CURPOS2 Cuts the displayed contents of a Window CUT win win Optional A window reference Defaults to the current Window A series or array W1 gnorm 1000 01 setx 2 5 W2 cut W1 W2 contains the data actually displayed in W1 Cut works properly on arrays and images EXTRACT REGION SETVPORT DBCLEAR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Clear
117. a table op Optional A string the binary operator in quotes opcode Optional An integer the binary operator function code A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table colreduce ravel 1 2 3 2 3 4 returns 6 24 colreduce ravel 1 2 3 2 3 4 3 returns 6 24 Binary operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR See Also The function also accepts an explicit function code instead of an operator string Either an operator string or function code must be supplied The following function codes are supported g a Operator OMDNOANRWNH AV gt x 10 s 11 12 amp amp 13 14 XOR 15 FLIPFLOP 16 ATAN2 17 amp 18 lt lt 19 gt gt 20 21 22 BITXOR 23 ed 24 MAKECART 25 MAKEPOLAR 26 MAX 27 MIN Function ADD SUB MULT DIV ADD GREATER LESS GREATEREQ LESSEQ EQUAL NOTEQUAL AND OR XOR FLIPFLOP ATAN2 BITAND BITLSHIFT BITRSHIFT BITOR MOD BITXOR BITCOMP MAKECART MAKEPOLAR MAX MIN Arithmetic Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators INNERPROD INTERPOSE OUTERPROD REDUCE ROWREDUCE TRANSPOSE Description add subtract multiply divide raise to power greater than less than greater or equal to less or equal to equal to not equal to logical and logical or logical exclusive or du
118. a table from a single vector Extract a rectangular region of a table Reorder based on rank values Replicate an array down and across Create a table with different length columns Extract a row of a table Apply REDUCE function to each row of a matrix Determine number of series in a window Set the text of a column header in a Window Turn table mode on off Sort a table Display point values of one series Display point values of n series Display as a table Unmerge demultiplexes an interlaced series Create a single vector from multiple columns Trigonometric Functions ACOS ArcCosine ACOSH Hyperbolic ArcCosine ACOT ArcCotangent ACOTH Hyperbolic ArcCotangent ACSC ArcCosecant ACSCH Hyperbolic ArcCosecant ASEC ArcSecant ASECH Hyperbolic ArcSecant ASIN ArcSine ASINH Hyperbolic ArcSine ATAN ArcTangent ATANH Hyperbolic ArcTangent COS Cosine COSH Hyperbolic Cosine COT Cotangent COTH Hyperbolic Cotangent CSC Cosecant CSCH Hyperbolic Cosecant DEG Degrees per radian 360 2 pi SEC Secant SECH Hyperbolic Secant SIN Sine SINC Sin x x SINH Hyperbolic Sine TAN Tangent TANH Hyperbolic Tangent Trigonometric Series Generation GACOS Generate ArcCosine GACOSH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCosine GACOT Generate ArcCotangent GACOTH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCotangent GACSC Generate ArcCosecant GACSCH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCosecant GASEC Generate ArcSecant GASECH Generate Hyperbolic ArcSecant GASIN Generate ArcSine GA
119. always returns a series To return a scalar use GETPT or the CAST functions For example to read a single integer from a file fopen test dat r iser freadb test dat SINT 1 ival castint iser CASTBYTE CASTINT CASTREAL FCLOSE FCLOSEALL FOPEN FREADA FWRITEB READB WRITEB FREQSAMP Purpose Format 276 Designs a FIR filter from a given magnitude response using the frequency sampling method FREQSAMP f m full f An XY series specifying the desired frequencies in Hertz and magnitudes of the filter OR an explicit series specifying the frequencies only m Optional A series the explicit desired magnitudes full Optional An integer specifying if f and m represent the entire magnitude response 1 full response 0 response from 0Hz to the Nyquist frequency Defaults to 0 Returns Example A series the impulse response of the filter Wl 0 l W2 1 1 2 W3 xy W1 W2 W4 freqsamp W3 10 20 30 0 0 W5 mag fft W4 bestpow2 length W4 W1 0 1 10 20 30 W2 1 1 2 0 0 W3 xy W1 W2 35 4 2 5 2 5 F 24 24 A 25 4 a ps 20 4 if 1 54 A 1 54 y 15 14 11 ai 0 5 4 0 5 4 54 0 0 4 04 i 364 HO 4 FO FE 0 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 6 12 18 24 30 W4 freqsamp W3 W5 mag fft W4 bestpow2 length W4 14 2 5 0 8 4 24 0 6 I 15 0 4 4 EP 14 J i 0 2 4 Ya J 9 9
120. an external file See TABLEVIEW to set a Window to tabular display See TABLES to display multi column tables EDIT TABLES TABLEVIEW Lists the values of n number of series This allows you to scroll through point values and compare them TABLES series 1 seriesN seriesl seriesN Optional Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table Defaults to the current Window tables W2 gsin 100 0 1 returns a table of point values for the series in Window 2 and a 100 point sine wave W1 integ gnorm 100 1 W2 polyfit W1l 10 W3 polygraph W2 xvals W1 tables W1 W3 W1 W3 displays the original data the 10 order polynomial fit and the difference between the data and the fit in tabular form 767 Remarks See Also To change point values in any series use the EDIT or TABLEVIEW functions When the table is displayed press the F2 key to write the table to an external file TABLES accepts up to 6 series for the display See TABLEVIEW to set a Window to tabular display EDIT TABLE TABLEVIEW TABLEVIEW Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 768 Displays the first few data points of the Window in an ASCII table format This display allows you to scroll through the point values TABLEVIEW Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window tableview W3 places Window 3 in a tabular mode Each series is in a separate column if
121. and K b a bilinear NUM DEN Fs creates the series containing the numerator and denominator transfer function coefficients for the discrete equivalent of the filter defined by the difference equation coefficients a and b The resulting coefficients are in linear difference form such that yln a 1 y n 1 a 2 y n 2 a N y n N b 1 x n b 2 x n 1 b M x n M A B C D tf2ss NUM DEN Ad Bd Cd Dd bilinear A B C D Fs creates the four matrices for the z transform discrete equivalent of the filter defined by A B C and D the same one defined by NUM and DEN Make sure that Z and P are series if your inputs are in Z P K Fs form Similarly make sure that NUM and DEN are series if your inputs are in NUM DEN Fs form ADSGN CDSGN FILTEQ ZFREQ 63 BITQUANT Purpose Format Returns Examples Remarks See Also 64 Quantizes an input series to 2 bits levels BITQUANT s bits xl xh s An input series or scalar bits Optional An integer the number of quantization bits Defaults to 8 i e 256 levels xl Optional A real the low value input range Defaults to min s xh Optional A real the high value input range Defaults to max s A series or real bitquant 1 100 3 stem quantizes the series to 2 3 8 levels and returns a 100 point series with quantized values of 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 bitquant 1 100 3 100 100 stem The inp
122. and convolution data provides a comparison of the effects of the padding on the ramp up and ramp down transient implicit in the filtering process Straight convolution assumes the data is zero prior to the start and after the end of the data W5 padfilt W1 W2 2 Same as W4 except the start and end points are padded by flipping the start and end point segments about 0 0 PADFILT uses time domain convolution to perform the filtering PADFILT automatically sets the XOFFSET of the resulting data to the correct value For non causal filters of even length the XOFFSET of the output may be larger i e more positive than the XOFFSET of the input data CONV ENDELIP FILTEQ FIR ZEROFLIP Returns the number of Windows the specified Window depends on i e the number of its parents PARENTS Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window An integer Example See Also For the following Worksheet W1 gsin 1000 1 W2 grand length W1 1 W3 spectrum W1 W2 parents W3 displays a message indicating that W3 has two parent Windows W1 and W2 CHILDREN PARTPROD Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Calculates the partial cumulative product of a series PARTPROD series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table partprod 2 4 7 returns the series 2 14 119 The pa
123. and the function mycall is executed Since mycall calls myfunc the debugger stops in myfunc DBSTATUS shows the debugger has stop at line 5 in myfunc DBSTACK shows the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 At this point the LOCALS command shows that the myfunc local variable x is 20 the value set by the calling mycall routine 179 Remarks See Also The DBUP command moves up the call stack to the mycall function Now the LOCALS command shows x has the value 10 the value specified when mycall was executed at the command line Use DBCONT to start the debugging process DBSTOP sets a breakpoint Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint and DBSTACK for information on the current call stack Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Use DBSTEPI to step into an SPL routine and DBSTEPO to step out of the current SPL routine DBCLEAR clears a breakpoint Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS DECIMATE Purpose Format 180 Linearly decimates reduces the sampling rate and the number of points in a series by a factor n DECIMATE series n start series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table n An integer factor by which to decimate the series
124. another SETWLIKE srewin deswin1 deswin2 deswinN coords level srewin Source Window deswin Optional Zero or more Destination Windows Defaults to the current Window coords Optional An integer indicating coordinate setting 0 do not alter coordinates of destination windows 1 set coordinates of destination windows to source window Defaults to 0 level Optional An integer indicating level of similarity 0 Copy only static attributes like color 1 Copy computed attributes like tic interval as well Defaults to 0 setwlike W3 sets the color and other static Window attributes of the current Window to the values in W3 setwlike W3 W1 W2 W5 1 1 sets the coordinates colors plot styles and other static attributes of W1 W2 and W5 to be the same as W3 SETCOLOR SETXY SETWMARGIN Purpose Format Example See Also Sets the plotting margin for a given Window of a Worksheet SETWMARGIN Window margin size Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window margin Optional An integer Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 Left 2 Right 3 Top 4 Bottom size Ascalar Size is specified in terms of percent of the plotting margin of a Window It ranges from 0 0 no margin to 100 0 full margin or no plotting area If size is negative then the margin is sized automatically setwmargin W3 2 10 0 sets the right side plotting margin of each W
125. are entered labels are drawn on an axis from x1 y1 to x2 y2 If eight label points are entered labels are drawn on two axes one axis from x1 y1 to x2 y2 and the second axis from x3 y3 to x4 y4 Defaults to no labels interval Optional An integer Specifies the labeling interval Defaults to 1 label each crossing W1 contour spline2 rand 10 5 cool contourset 10 1 0 0 0 0 9 0 9 0 shows the contour plot as a 10 level contour with labels drawn wherever the contour lines cross an imaginary line with endpoints of 0 0 and 9 9 i e a diagonal that spans from the lower left to the upper right of the plot The background of the plot is filled according to the magnitude of the data with colors as defined by the COOL colormap 127 See Also CONV Purpose Format Returns Example 128 W2 contour spline2 rand 10 5 cool contourset 10 1 0 0 0 0 9 0 9 0 2 same as above except every other diagonal crossing is labeled CONTOUR Convolves two series or series expressions CONV series1 series2 start length interval series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table series2 Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table start Optional integer Starting point Defaults to the first point of the series length Optional integer Number of points to process Defaults to the length seriesl length
126. coef Any series or expression resulting in a series containing polynomial coefficients xdata Any series or expression resulting in a series containing x values Optional An integer the series output form 1 output XY series X data irregularly spaced 0 output interval series regularly spaced X data Defaults to 0 xy form Optional An integer form of the polynomial coefficients 0 ascending powers 1 decreasing powers Defaults to 0 A series 569 Example Remarks See Also W1 gline 100 01 1 0 1 0 3 W2 polyfit W1 3 returns a 4 point series with values 1 3 3 1 as the resulting 3rd order coefficients W3 polygraph W2 xvals wl1 graphs the fit If y 3 is the j th point in the series generated by POLYGRAPH using the coefficients of an Nth order POLYFIT then YEG afl a 2 x j a N 1 x j N where a k is the k th point in the coefficient series and x 7 is the j th point in the x value series If form is 1 then YEG a 1 x j N a N x j a N 1 The x offset is set to the first point of the x series and the x interval is set to the difference of the first two points in the x series LINREG LINREG2 PFIT POLYFIT POLYROOT TREND POLYROOT Purpose Format 570 Finds the roots of a polynomial using the companion matrix POLYROOT coef form coef Any series or expression resulting in a series containing polynomial coefficients fo
127. column of the input table COLLENGTH table unravel table Any series or expression resulting in a table unravel Optional An integer indicating if unraveled i e sequential lengths should be returned 0 Normal indices default 1 Unraveled indices A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table v l ravel 1 2 6 4 5 1 3 b collength a a 1 1 2 3 6 4 5 b 5 2 c collength a 1 d alc c 5 7 d 5 3 Remarks See Also COLMAX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also COLLENGTH table 1 returns the lengths in sequential unraveled order equivalent to a running total of the column lengths This form is useful in array reference expressions COL COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLSTDEV LENGTH SIZE TRANSPOSE Produces a row of the maximum values of each column of the input table COLMAX table table Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table colmax ravel 2 4 6 8 10 12 returns 6 12 Use COLMAXIDxX to find the indices for each column of an array COL COLLENGTH COLMAXIDX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLSTDEV TRANSPOSE 10 COLMAXIDX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 102 Returns a row of indices for the maximums of each column of the input tab
128. conditional expression If the conditional expression is TRUE non zero the true exp is evaluated if the conditional expression is FALSE zero the optional false exp is evaluated True exp and false exp can be any DADiSP expression IF cond true exp false exp cond Any expression resolving to a number true exp Expression to evaluate if condition is TRUE non zero false exp Optional Expression to evaluate if condition is FALSE zero Alternative SPL compound syntax if expr statements if expr statements1 else statements2 expr Any valid expression resolving to a number statement One or more valid expressions separated by semicolons The result of evaluating the true exp or false exp if max W1 gt max W2 gsin 100 01 1 0 grand 200 1 0 Functional form If the maximum value of W1 is greater than the maximum value of W2 then generate a sine wave in the current Window If not generate a random series in the current Window if length W1 gt 25 deriv W1 SPL form If the length of the series in W1 is greater then 25 calculate the derivative and return it to the current Window Remarks See Also IFFT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also The compound IF ELSE statement applies to SPL files Versions of DADISP prior to 3 0 required quotes around true exp and false exp For the sake of backward compatibility DADiSP accepts the true and false expressions with
129. conv q a r 1 5 1 2 If a and b represent polynomial coefficients q will contain the quotient of the polynomial and r the lowest order remainder polynomial DECONV implements deconvolution by using FILTEQ to find the impulse response of the system BEZI A z Where B z is the Z transform of b and A z is the Z transform of a See FDECONV for the frequency domain implementation CONV FCONV FDECONV FILTEQ DEFMACRO Purpose Format Example Creates or defines a DADiSP Macro DEFMACRO name expr quotes name Name of the macro with optional arguments in quotes expr Macro body A quoted string or any expression evaluating to a scalar quotes Optional Integer value indicating quote characters to be used Valid arguments are 1 The macro body is evaluated and used as is the macro definition will be silent i e it won t display default 2 Put single quotes around the macro body and cause the macro definition to be silent 3 Put double quotes around the macro body and cause the macro definition to be silent W1 0 9 defmacro ml mean W1 creates a macro M1 containing the value of the mean of Window 1 4 5 This construction is identical to define m1 mean W1 To create a macro with arguments the argument list must be included in the macro name as in defmacro mymac a b c d a b max c d W1 0 9 W2 1 4 7 W3 mymac 2 4 W1 W2 W3 contains the ser
130. creates an RGB colormap that can be used to shade images surface and 2D plots and is preferred over SETPALETTE Palette colors are specified in the file PALETTE MAC See Also COLORBAR GETCOLORMAP GETCRANGE SETCOLORMAP SETPALETTE SETSHADING 680 SETPRECISION Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also SETPT Purpose Sets the number of significant digits after the decimal place to display for numerical values including tabular listings and scales SETPRECISION prec prec An integer number of digits of precision after the decimal point setprecision 3 sets the number of digits after the decimal place to 3 setprecision 1 resets the display precision to the internal default SETPRECISION affects only the display of a value It does not affect the internal precision used for calculations Use setprecision with no arguments to display the current precision Because the tabular view of data automatically conforms to the specified precision this function can be extremely useful for formatting a table Window SETPRECISON affects all numerical displays in each Window of a Worksheet including Window annotation To observe the change in precision the Window must be redrawn SETPRECISION can be abbreviated SETPREC SETFORMAT Modifies the value of a single point in a Window 681 Format Example Remarks See Also SETPT Window value index Window Optional Window reference
131. cross covariance is used to determine how similar two series are to each other XCOV performs covariance by computing the direct convolution of the input series Remarks The output length L is L length sl length s2 1 For series of equal lengths and offsets the zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series 834 See Also XLCLEAR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the maximum length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M i 1 1 where i is the index of the result See FXCOV for the frequency domain implementation ACORR CONV FACORR FCONV FXCOV XCORR Clears ActiveX connection to Excel established by XLGET or XLPUT XLCLEAR A 1 ifa connection existed else 0 W1 rand 10 3 xTput A1l C10 W1 W2 xlget Al C10 xlclear W1 W2 is all ones that is W1 and W2 are equivalent The data is retrieved from the current Sheet of the current Workbook The Excel connection is terminated If Excel is visible XLCLEAR does not terminate Excel though the variables used by DADiSP are still cleared XLINIT XLGET XLPUT 835 XLGET Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 836 Returns a range of values from Excel via ActiveX Automation XLGET rangestr bookname sheet rangestr A string in quotes Excel input range Defaults t
132. curr getlocalvariable A multiplies the series in the current window curr by the local variable A SETLOCALVARIABLE and GETLOCALVARIABLE are very useful for storing and retrieving intermediate results when working from the command line in the Worksheet For example if you had to calculate some value and wanted to use it later in the window formula you could set it as a local variable with SETLOCALVARIABLE then retrieve it later with GETLOCALVARIABLE Local variables are deleted after the function in which they are used terminates GETLOCALVARIABLE and SETLOCALVARIABLE can be abbreviated GETLOCAL and SETLOCAL DELALLVARIABLES DELVARIABLE SETVARIABLE VARS GETMACRO Purpose Format 304 Returns information about the make up of a macro GETMACRO macro_name form macro name The name of the macro in quotes form Optional An integer representing the form in which the macro is displayed Defaults to 0 Returns Example See Also Valid form arguments are 0 body 1 name 2 arguments 3 name arguments 4 name body arguments A string getmacro AUTOCOR 0 returns the string CONV s REVERSE s 2 SERSIZE s which is the body of the macro getmacro AUTOCOR 2 returns the string s the macro arguments DEFMACRO MACREAD MACROS MACWRITE GETOBJECT Purpose Format Returns Example Returns a handle to a running ActiveX server object GETOBJEC
133. device The palette color is a long integer constructed from three shorter integers that range from 0 to 63 each controlling the levels of red blue and green the long integer is red 256 green 65536 blue Sets the tic spacing on the x axis SETXTIC Window xtic Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window xtic Areal the desired X tic interval setxtic 01 sets the x tic interval on the current Window to 0 01 setxtic sets the tic intervals of the current Window to the default values The GETXTIC and GETYTIC functions return the current tic intervals setxtic W2 getxtic Wl sets the tic interval of W2 to the interval of W1 If you do not specify an interval or if you specify a negative interval the tic intervals are scaled automatically GETXTIC GETYTIC SETYTIC SETX SETXY XTIC YTIC 701 SETXY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 702 Specifies the overall coordinate range of a Window SETXY Window xleft xright ybottom ytop Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window xleft Areal Left hand Window boundary xright Areal Right hand Window boundary ybottom Areal Bottom Window boundary ytop Areal Top Window boundary setxy 0 0 100 0 1 0 1 0 sets the x axis from 0 0 to 100 0 and the y axis boundaries from 1 0 to 1 0 If Window 1 contained a 1024 point series then setxy 0 0 100 deltax 0 0 max W1 wo
134. digital filter conversion is performed using the bilinear transform The cascade format is used for speed and accuracy in the digital filtering process The number of poles must equal or exceed the number of zeros BILINEAR CASCADE DADISP FILTERS MODULE Returns the z axis tic interval of a Window ZTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window setztic 5 ztic shrinks the z tic interval by a factor of 2 GETXTIC GETYTIC GETZTIC 859
135. e Z surface density or contour FINDMIN returns an XYZ series x y findmin s returns the first occurrence of the maximum in s FIND FINDMAX FINDVAL MARKMAX MARKMIN MAXVAL MINVAL Returns the X and Y values of a series from a specified Y value FINDVAL s val s A series array or expression resulting in a series or array val Areal or series The values to search An XY series or separate scalars b findval s val returns an XY series x y findval s val returns the X and Y values as separate scalars a 1 12 0 5 b findval a 0 x y findval a 0 257 Remarks See Also FINITE Purpose Format Returns Example 258 b xy 2 0 x 2 0 y 0 0 W1 gnorm 100 1 overp findval curr max lred setsym CIRCLE 2 marks the MAX of W1 with a red circle FINDVAL returns an XY series with the same units as the input series Multiple x values can be returned if val occurs multiple times in the series x y findval s val returns the first occurrence of val in s FIND FINDMAX FINDMIN Returns for each element that is not infinite inf FINITE series series A series array or expression evaluating to a series or array A series where each element is 1 where the input series is not inf and 0 where the input series is inf a 1 2 inf 3 b 5 c finite a returns 1 1 0 1 finite b returns 1 finite c returns
136. e upside down 3 270 degree rotation i e 90 degrees clockwise 4 Horizontal characters laid out in vertical sequence Horizontal leftmost letter becomes vertical topmost letter W1 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 0 label No Rotation W2 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 1 label 90 deg Rotation W3 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 3 label 270 deg Rotation W4 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 4 label Character Rotation Show the x axis tic labels in various modes of rotation The combination of orientation SETTORIX SETTORIY and vertical default rotation SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY covers most cases desired by users Setting rotation explicitly via SETTROTX SETTROTY rotation functions is meant for users who want to fine tune a plot presentation for printing 687 See Also It is recommended that you use the SETTORI SETAORI SETTVDEF and SETAVDEF functions SETTROTX and SETTROTY apply to the scales associated with the current focus of the specified window If scales change via execution of the SCALES command function key F5 or toolbar button then any rotations set explicitly by rotation functions will be replaced by the rotation values inferred from orientation and vertical default rotation FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAORIX SETAORIY SETAROTX SETAROTY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY SETXTIC SETYTIC SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY Purpose Format 6
137. embedded newline characters STRLIST str1 strN stri strN Two or more strings or string variables A string 757 Example strlist One Two returns the string One Two with embedded newlines W1 1 100 message strlist sprintf Mean of W d getwnum strnum mean Displays a message box with the text Mean of W1 50 5 Remarks STRLIST is useful in custom dialog boxes that include pull down combo boxes or list boxes See Also MESSAGE SPRINTF STRFILE STRNUM Purpose Converts a number into a string Format STRNUM num num Real to convert into a string Returns A string Example strcat The number strnum 11 is prime returns The number 11 is prime W1 1 100 strcat The mean value is strnum mean W1 results in The mean value is 50 5 758 strcat The max to min difference is strnum max W1 min W1 displays The max to min difference is 99 0 Remarks See SPRINTF for a numeric conversion function offering more formatting options See Also NUMSTR SPRINTF STRCAT Purpose Reverses the order of characters in a string Format STRREVERSE string string Any valid string of characters in quotes Returns A string Example strreverse abcdefg returns gfedcba Remarks STRREVERSE can be abbreviated STRREV See Also STRCMP STRFIND STRGET STRLEN 759 STRTOD Purpose Format Returns Example
138. expands each Window in the Worksheet to full screen for print preview After each Window is previewed hit any key to advance to the next Window for previewing and finally back to the Worksheet previewinfo W3 Spectacular Results expands Window 3 and its Information Box for print preview previewws print previews the current Worksheet as displayed for a one page printout PREVIEW PREVIEWALL and PREVIEWINFO use the current Printing Options set with PRINTOPT Hit any key to exit the print preview mode PREVIEWWS uses the current screen options set with SCREENOPT PRINTING AND PLOTTING FUNCTIONS PRINTOPT SCREENOPT 579 PROBN Purpose Format Returns Example 580 Returns the probability of X lt z for a normal distribution PROBN z mean std Zz Areal or series The z value mean Optional A real the mean of the distribution Defaults to 0 0 std Optional A real the standard deviation of the distribution Defaults to 1 0 A real or series the probability that a value is less than or equal to the input z value for a normal distribution with the given mean and standard deviation For the input value z returns the probability p where P X lt z p probn 0 returns 0 5 the probability that a value is less than or equal to 0 0 for a normal distribution with a mean of 0 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 In probabilistic terms given the normal distribution N 0 1 i e mean of 0
139. explicit Window formulae SETHOT VARIABLE can be abbreviated SETHOTVAR Hot Variable Assignment Window Assignment DELALLVARIABLES DELVARIABLE GETVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SETLOCALVARIABLE SPLREAD VARS SETHUNITS Purpose Format Example 670 Sets horizontal units for the series in the current Window SETHUNITS Window name Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window name String identifying the unit in quotes sethunits Hz sets the horizontal units of the series in the current Window to Hz or Hertz Remarks See Also SETLINE Purpose Format Example See Also See UNITS for a list of units recognized by DADiSP DADiSP attempts to reduce subsequent horizontal unit calculations in terms of known units If the unit string is not a known such as LIGHTYEARS the string will be assigned to the horizontal unit but further unit reduction will not be performed however unit expansion e g LIGHTYEARS 2 will still occur GETHUNITS GETVUNITS SETVUNITS SETXLABEL SETYLABEL UNITS Sets the line style of the series curve SETLINE linetype sernum linetype An integer value indicating line type Valid arguments are 1 Solid 2 Dashed 3 Dotted sernum Optional An integer the index of the series to set Defaults to 1 setline 1 2 sets the line type of series 2 to solid lines SETLINEWIDTH SETPLOTSTYLE 671 SETLINEWIDTH
140. expression resulting in a series or table threshold Optional Specifies the minimum value above which peaks will be accepted Defaults to the minimum of the series width Optional An integer that specifies the minimum number of points that comprise a peak Defaults to 1 size Optional Specifies the minimum acceptable peak to valley height of a peak Defaults to 0 0 padmode Optional Determines whether the values between the peaks in the resulting series will be padded 0 do not pad 1 pad 2 linear interpolation Defaults to 1 fillval Optional The padding value to use when padmode is on Defaults to 0 0 A series or table getpeak W1 finds all the peaks of Window 1 W2 gsin 128 1 128 4 getpeak W2 finds the four peaks associated with the peak of each sine wave getpeak W1 min W1 1 0 0 1 0 0 does the same thing Note that because the default fillval is 0 0 it is possible that peaks and valleys of height 0 0 will be indistinguishable from the fillval If this is a problem set the fillval to be the minimum of the input series for GETPEAK and the maximum value of the input series for GETVALLEY If padmode is set to 0 do not pad GETPEAK returns an XY series where the x values are set to the location of the peaks and the Y values are set to the amplitude of the peaks 307 See Also If padmode is set to 1 non peak values are set to 0 0 If padmode is set to 2 GETPEAK performs envelope dete
141. for W2 SETWFORM is useful in SPL routines and custom menus executed by the MENUFILE function The operator can also set a window formula For example W2 reverse wl Is equivalent to setwform W2 reverse W1 Hot Variable Assignment Window Assignment ADDWFORM GETWFORMULA MENUFILE SETWINCURSORINFO Purpose 692 Sets the level of information displayed in a Window formula line Format Example See Also SETWLAB Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks SETWINCURSORINFO Window level Window Optional Window reference Can be a list of Windows Defaults to the current Window level Optional Integer specifying the display level Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Show Worksheet Cursor Info Setting default 1 Show Window Label 2 Show Nothing 3 Show Window Formula setwincursorinfo Ww4 1 sets W4 to display only the Window label in the formula line GETWINCURSORINFO SETWSCURSOR Sets the label of a Window SETWLAB win label win Optional A Window defaults to the current Window label A string 1 if label was changed else 0 setwlab This is my label sets the label of the current Window to This is my label SETWLAB SETHLAB and SETVLAB are used by the menu system 693 See Also SETWLIKE Purpose Format Example See Also 694 LABEL SETXLABEL SETYLABEL Copies the attributes of one Window to
142. formula used to compute derivatives with the RDERIV function for each point i is as follows rderiv i series itl seriesli deltax series The derivative of the last point is computed using the method of LDERIV INTEG LDERIV DERIV Reads an ASCII data file from disk and returns a series 597 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also READB Purpose 598 READA filename col_num num_points offset filename The name of input file in quotes If no path is given READA looks for the file in the current working directory col_num Optional An integer The column of data to accept Column number index begins at zero Defaults to 0 num_ points Optional An integer The number of points to accept Defaults to all the points in the column 1 offset Optional An integer The first point of data to accept Defaults to 1 A series reada STRAIN TS reads the ASCII file STRAIN TS without a header from disk into the current Window READA ignores any header information in the data file To retain header info use the Import Utilities You can write any series back to disk with WRITEA or WRITEB To bring multiple columns of a multi column data file into the Worksheet use the Import Utilities or the READTABLE function READA ignores any NA values in a file READTABLE will read NA values in a file EXPORTFILE IMPORTFILE READB READTABLE WRITEA WRITEB WRITETABLE Reads a
143. from the Worksheet to disk WRITETABLE filename series overwrite row col collist del prec filename Name for output file in quotes If no path is given WRITETABLE puts the file in your current working directory series Optional Any series or multi series table Defaults to the series in the current Window overwrite Optional 0 prompt before overwriting file 1 overwrite file if it exists without prompting 2 append data to the specified file Defaults to 0 row Optional An integer The starting row Defaults to 1 col Optional An integer The starting column Defaults to 1 collist Optional Integer s The column list Defaults to 1 all columns del Optional A string Column delimiters Defaults to space prec Optional An integer Digit precision Defaults to 1 automatic 827 Example Remarks See Also WRITETB Purpose Format 828 writetable table dat ravel gsin 100 0 1 10 10 puts the generated sine wave into an ASCII text file named table dat without a header writetable table dat ravel gline 15 1 1 0 5 produces the following comma separated file 0 000000 5 000000 10 000000 1 000000 6 000000 11 000000 2 000000 7 000000 12 000000 3 000000 8 000000 13 000000 4 000000 9 000000 14 000000 WRITETABLE exports a table to an ASCII file It does not export a header with series information WRITETABLE can be abbreviated WRITET EXPORTFILE I
144. function ERFINV y y Areal or series A real or series the inverse error function x where y erf x for 1 lt y lt 1 and inf lt x lt inf erfinv 2 returns 0 17914345 the inverse error function of 0 2 erf erfinv 2 returns 0 2 indicating that ERF and ERFINV are inverse functions ERFINV uses the built in INVPROBN function to find the Z value for a given probability value of a normal distribution erf erfinv x x erfinv x invprobn x 1 2 sqrt 2 ERF ERFC ERFCINV INVPROBN PROBN 221 ERROR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 222 Aborts an SPL routine and optionally displays a message ERROR message guiflag message An optional string Error message to display guiflag Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 Display error message in lower message area default 1 Display message using a pop up GUI box Nothing invnum x if x 0 error invnum input must be non zero else return 1 x invnum 0 aborts and displays the message invnum input must be non zero sqrt invnum 0 aborts and displays the message invnum input must be non zero ERROR aborts further SPL processing As shown in the second example nested functions or SPL routines also terminate as a result of ERROR ECHO FPRINTF PRINTF SPRINTF WAITKEY ERRORBAR Purpose Format Example Remarks
145. if the defined start or length require points beyond the end of the series Remember The area below the origin on the y axis is negative area If you want to include area below y 0 as positive area take the absolute value of the series first e g area abs W1 ABS INTEG ARGCOUNT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ARGV Purpose Returns the number of arguments specified in an SPL function ARGCOUNT A real myfun a b c d return argcount myfun 1 returns 1 myfun 1 1 10 returns 3 Arguments to SPL functions are optional ARGCOUNT is a simple method for checking if an argument was specified ARGCOUNT can be abbreviated ARGC ARGC returns the total number of input arguments See ARGV to specify variables arguments in an SPL routine See OUTARGC for a count of output arguments ARGV GETARGV ISVARIABLE OUTARGC Specifies variable arguments in an SPL routine 47 Format Returns Example Remarks 48 ARGV Nothing maximum of one or more inputs vmax argv local i s 0 or 1 arg if argc lt 2 if argc s case lt 1 4 axval else initia s maxva axval getargv 1 lize l getargv 1 getargv 2 compare input args for i 3 i lt argc i s maxval s getargv i returns s ARGV in the argument list of an SPL routine specifies a variable number
146. in a Worksheet Any errors detected during the compile and read are written to an ASCII file f ilename err To automatically read in function files at start up time include the filenames in the dadisp sp1 file If you specify a filename with an SPL extension DADiSP will compile and load the SPL file If you specify a filename with an OPL extension DADiSP will read the compiled OPL file If you do not specify an extension for the filename DADiSP will look first for filename OPL a compiled version and try to load it into the Worksheet If there is no OPL file DADiSP will look for filename SPL and compile and read the functions into the Worksheet The compiled functions will be placed in filename OPL If both OPL and SPL files exist for the specified filename DADiSP will check the dates on the files if the SPL file is more recent than the OPL file it will recompile the SPL file creating a new OPL file and then load it into the Worksheet The command form does not accept optional arguments INCLUDE FUNCTIONS SPLCOMPILE SPLREAD SPLWRITE 733 SPLREAD Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 734 Reads an external SPL file into the Worksheet SPLREAD filename overwrite filename The name of the external SPL file in quotes or a string variable Function form overwrite Optional An integer 0 do not replace macro of same name 1 replace macro if it exists Defaults to 1 SPLRE
147. indicated by the specified origin and modified by the specified offset FSEEK filename offset mode filename The name of the file in which to move the pointer in quotes offset An integer Position to seek in bytes relative to the mode mode An integer The position from which the offset is calculated Valid arguments are 0 Seek relative to the beginning of the file 1 Seek relative to the current file position 2 Seek relative to the end of the file A 1 if the pointer move is successful otherwise it returns nothing Example Remarks See Also FSTAT Purpose Format If the file myheader hdr contains the following DATASET Pressure SERIES PTop PBottom then the commands fopen myheader hdr r fseek myheader hdr 18 0 fgets myheader hdr displays the string SERIES PTop PBottomon the status line fseek filename 0 2 moves the pointer to the end of the file File must be opened with FOPEN before using FSEEK FSEEK changes the read write position of the file specified by filename FTELL can be used to determine the byte position of the file pointer FCLOSE FOPEN FREADB FTELL Returns selected information about a file FSTAT filename infofield filename A string Name of the file in quotes infofield Optional An integer specifying the file information to return Defaults to 8 279 Returns Example Remarks See Also FTELL Purpos
148. inputs a single byte from port 17 0x11 inport Oxll sint inputs two bytes from port 17 0x11 inport 0x11 long inputs four bytes from port 17 0x11 The datatype parameter may be SBYTE UBYTE SINT UINT ULONG LONG FLOAT or DOUBLE See Also CASTBYTE DOUBLE FLOAT LONG OUTPORT SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT ULONG INPUT Purpose Allows the user to input values to functions Format INPUT type prompt help msg default_val low_lim high_lim type Optional Data type to enter Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 Real default 2 Integer 3 String in quotes 4 Series 5 Series Expression or Window prompt Optional String which is written at the beginning of the text entry line in quotes The string is followed by a colon Defaults to Input help msg Optional String which is written at the bottom of the screen in quotes Defaults to Enter Number default_val Optional String which is written on the text enter line as a default input value in quotes Defaults to nothing low_lim Optional Low limit on the enter value or the smallest number of characters to enter if type 3 Defaults to no low limit high_lim Optional High limit on the enter value or the largest number of characters to enter if type 3 Defaults to no high limit Returns The string scalar series expression or Window reference entered by the user 393 Example See Also INSERT Purpose Format
149. integer the transform length Defaults to length s A series or array idct dct gcos 100 1 100 20 returns a 20 Hz cosine wave The transform is applied to each column if the input is an array The IDCT is often used in conjunction with DCT to perform image compression DCT DCT2 IDCT2 IFFT IDCT2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References Calculates the 2D Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform IDCT2 s nr nc s An input array nr Optional An integer the number of rows Defaults to row length of input array nc Optional An integer the number of columns Defaults to column length of input array An array W1 ravel gcos 100 1 100 3 10 W2 dct2 W1 W3 idct2 W2 returns the original array within roundoff error IDCT2 is often used in conjunction with DCT2 to perform image compression DCT DCT2 IDCT IFFT 1 Jae S Lim Two dimensional Signal and Image Processing pp 148 162 Implements an even symmetrical DCT 2 Jain Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing pp 150 153 3 Wallace The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard Communications of the ACM April 1991 373 IDFT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References 374 Calculates the inverse Discrete Fourier Transform of any series or series expression in Real Imaginary form IDFT series series Any series multi series tab
150. item where the cursor was most recently placed If the cursor was never activated in the given Window the point number returned is 0 extract Wl curpos W1 10 extracts 10 points from the series in Window 1 starting from wherever the cursor was last placed curpos W1 1 2 returns the index number of the second cursor location for the first series in Window 1 CURPOS allows you to simply move the cursor to an interesting part of a series without referencing a specific point number Changes in cursor position do not propagate through the Worksheet If you want to update a Window dependent on a new cursor position use the Line Editor F3 key to re enter the line so that the cursor position is re evaluated The x axis value at the cursor location is CURPOS 1 deltax xoffset A series or an XY plot are considered an item DADiSP remembers the last position of the cursors when a cursor is placed on the series it is drawn at the most recent location which may mean that the window is redrawn to display that x or y range To disable this feature use setconf CURSOR1 MEMORY 0 and setconf CURSOR2 MEMORY 0 In an XY plot the crosshair cursor follows the data points but the mouse pointer icon is not linked to the crosshair cursor COLNMOVE COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURPUT CURSORON dadisp cnf configuration file NUMITEMS CURPOS2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See
151. log Y axis YSUBTIC win on_off win Optional A Window defaults to the current Window on_off An integer 0 Off 1 label subtics Defaults to 0 Nothing 849 Example Remarks See Also YTIC Purpose Format Example See Also YVALS Purpose 850 W1 abs gnorm 200 1 setylog 1 ysubtic 0 W2 W1l setylog 1 ysubtic 1 Only the decades of the log plot in W1 are labeled the default where each subtic of W2 is labeled if there is enough room Some subtics may not be labeled if there is not enough room between tics SETXLOG SETYLOG XSUBTIC Returns the y axis tic interval of a Window YTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window setytic 5 ytic shrinks the y tic interval by a factor of 2 GETXTIC GETYTIC XTIC Returns the Y values from a Window Format YVALS series series Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Returns A new series or table containing the y values of the series Example yvals Wl returns a series that consists of the Y values of W1 See Also XVALS ZEROFLIP Purpose Pads the ends of a series with endpoint reflections about 0 0 Format ZEROFLIP s padlen s An input series padlen Optional An integer the length of segment with which to pad Defaults to length s 10 Returns A series Example W1 integ gnorm 1000 1 1000 W2 zeroflip W1 200 overp W1l
152. log magnitude of Cascade form coefficients Convolution Two dimensional convolution Calculate the covariance matrix of an array Evaluate the phase response of Cascade form filter coefficients Cross correlation time domain Calculate the Discrete Cosine Transform Perform deconvolution of two series in the time domain Remove the mean or DC value from a series Demodulate an FM waveform using the Hilbert Transform Digital Fourier Transform Real Imaginary Calculate the number of effective bits possible at a given frequency for a quantizing device Pad the ends of a series with endpoint reflections Auto correlation using the FFT method Auto covariance using the FFT method Return the prime factors of a scalar Convolution using the FFT method Perform deconvolution of two series in the time domain Fast Fourier Transform Real Imaginary Fast Fourier Transform Magnitude Phase Shift a 1D or 2D FFT so the 0 frequency is the midpoint Evaluate a Linear Constant Coefficient Difference Equation Design an arbitrary FIR filter using frequency sampling Design a FIR filter from a given magnitude response using the frequency sampling method Cross correlation using the FFT method Cross covariance using the FFT method Interpolate a series by a factor using FFT zero insertion Hamming window Hanning window Calculate a simple Hilbert transform of a real series Calculate the inverse complex cepstrum Calculate the Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform
153. lred The simulated data in W1 is padded at the beginning and end with segments of length 200 that are reflections of the beginning and end segments about 0 The original data is overplotted to provide a comparison Remarks ZEROFLIP is useful in FIR filtering operations where the input data is padded at the beginning and end to diminish the ramp up and ramp down transients implicit in the filtering process The transients occur because the input data is assumed to be zero prior to the start and after the end of the data See PADFILT for more information 851 See Also ENDFLIP FIR PADFILT ZEROS Purpose Creates an array of all zeros Format ZEROS numrows numcols numrows An integer The number of output rows numeols Optional An integer the number of output columns Defaults to numrows Returns A series or array Example zeros 3 1 returns the series 0 0 0 zeros 3 returns the 3x3 array 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 OF Remarks zeros size A returns a array of all zeros with the same dimension as A See Also GLINE ONES RAVEL SIZE 852 ZFREQ Purpose Format Returns Example Evaluates the frequency response of a Z transform ZFREQ b a N rate whole b Aseries The numerator i e zero coefficients a Aseries The denominator i e pole coefficients If the first coefficient is not 1 0 the coefficients are assumed to be in difference equation form N
154. method 1 The FFT is calculated 855 See Also 856 2 N zeros are inserted into the FFT starting at the Nyquist frequency Fn 5 rate s N is determined such that L R length s rate s where L is the length of the output series Since L length s N we have N CR length s rate s length s 3 The inserted series is IFFTed to produce the interpolated time domain series The zero insertion step is equivalent to convolving the input series with a symmetric continuous periodic sinx sin window of the same length as the output series and then sampling this continuous waveform at the new rate This is the precise definition of ideal sinx sin interpolation for a periodic time series If the input series is band limited that is if the series can be thought of as having been obtained by sampling a continuous time signal at rate Fs and X f 0 for f gt 5 Fs where X is the Fourier Transform of the continuous time signal then the interpolation will be exact within numerical roundoff errors Although the output rate R is NOT required to be an integer multiple of the input sample rate the relation R rate s L length s must hold so the actual output rate might differ from R Sinx sin interpolation can be thought of as periodic sinx x interpolation i e for periodic waveforms sinx x interpolation is identical to sinx sin interpolation The sinx sin function acts as a periodic versio
155. norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series Wl gsin 1000 001 4 W3 acorr W1 performs the auto correlation of a sinewave The peaks of the result indicate the waveform is very similar to itself at the time intervals where the peaks occur i e the waveform is periodic W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 acorr W1 1 W4 acorr W2 1 W3 displays the auto correlation of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the normalized auto correlation of random noise Remarks See Also ACOV Purpose The normalized maximum of both results is 1 0 at time t 0 indicating the expected perfect correlation at time t 0 true for all series The waveform of W4 displays only one distinct peak at t 0 indicating that W2 is not correlated with itself and is non periodic Both waveforms display a triangular envelope due to the assumption that the input series is zero before the first sample and after the last sample The auto correlation is used to determine how similar a series is to itself or if a series is periodic ACORR performs correlation by computing the direct convolution of the input series The output length L is L 2 lJength s 1 The zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the length of the input series The UNBIASED norm
156. number of digits in output padded left with zeros if necessary Number of digits after decimal point last digit rounded Maximum number of significant digits Number of characters copied from string to output Required character that determines whether the associated argument is interpreted as a character string or a number Output Format Signed decimal integer Unsigned decimal integer Unsigned hex integer using abcdef or ABCDEF Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits Returns Example Remarks See Also Type Characters Output Format e Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or E Identical to the e format except that E rather than e introduces the exponent g Signed value printed in f or e format whichever is more compact or the given value and precision The e format is used only when the exponent of the value is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision argument Trailing zeros are truncated and the decimal point appears only if one or more digits follow it G Identical to the g format except that G rather than g introduces the exponent c Single character s String Characters printed up to the first null character or until the precision value is reached valn Scalar or string valu
157. or without quotes However if possible do not include quotes around these expressions as future versions of DADiSP may not support this syntax SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language WHILE Calculates the Inverse Fast Fourier Transform of a series or series expression with the result in Cartesian Real Imaginary form IFFT series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A complex series or table in Cartesian form W1 1 5 W2 fft wl W3 real ifft W2 W3 contains the series 1 2 3 4 5 DADiSP uses a mixed radix IFFT Series with lengths that are a power of 2 will be processed faster than other series Use the LENGTH function to find out if a series is a power of 2 points long Use IFFTP to get magnitude phase output IFFT returns a complex result Use REAL to obtain the real part FFT FFTP IDFT 377 See Also LENGTH REAL References Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 IFFT2 Purpose Calculates the 2D IFFT of an array Format IFFT2 array array A multi column series Returns A complex array Example ifft2 fft2 1 2 3 4 returns the complex array 1 0i 2 0i 3 0i 4 0i Remarks Since IFFT2 returns a complex result the result can be converted into real form using the REAL function
158. picklist Open Dataset 1 objectlist 3 0 1 returns a dialog box with a sorted list of all available Datasets in the current Labbook When the user selects one and clicks OK the name of the Dataset is returned by the PICKLIST function menulist objectlist 2 1 1 returns a menu of available Worksheets The objects can be selected from the menu and are listed in alphabetical order menulist Windows Dir objectlist 6 1 1 windows returns a menu of the files located in the windows directory sorted in alphabetical order MENULIST PICKLIST Macro Specifies the value 0 OFF The integer 0 setdegree off is the same as setdegree 0 which toggles the trigonometric functions from degree to radian mode The OFF Macro is simply a more descriptive method of specifying the value 0 ON ON Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ONES Purpose Format Returns Example Macro Specifies the value 1 ON The integer 1 setdegree on is the same as Setdegree 1 which toggles the trigonometric functions from radian to degree mode The ON Macro is simply a more descriptive method of specifying the value 1 OFF Creates an array of all ones ONES numrows numcols numrows An integer The number of output rows numcols Optional An integer the number of output columns Defaults to numrows A series or array ones 3 1 returns the ser
159. range for the given confidence level s cnf2std 99 returns 2 5758 the standard deviation range for a confidence level of 99 W1 99 98 97 96 95 W2 cnf2std wl W2 2 5758 2 3263 2 1701 2 0537 1 9600 the standard deviation ranges for confidence levels 99 98 97 96 and 95 CNF2STD uses the built in INVPROBN function to lookup a Z value for a given probability A2STD INVPROBN PDFNORM PROBN Extracts a column of data from a table 95 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also COL table column table Any table or expression evaluating to a table column An integer Column number to extract A series Whe Add Ay cobs 205 TF Sey Oy Bb col Wl 2 returns 4 5 6 The COL function may be used with any graph style not only the table view to extract a particular series of data from a multi series set To extract more than a single column at a time use the REGION function NUMCOLS REGION ROW SERCOUNT COLEXTRACT Purpose Format 96 Extracts a portion of each column of a table COLEXTRACT table start length offset table Any table or expression resulting in a table start A series A list of integer starting points length A series A list of integers specifying the number of points to be extracted from each column 1 implies extract to the end of the column offset Optional A series A list of real values specifying the x off
160. samples Abbreviation mSec uSec nSec kHz MHz GHz Cnts dB Min Hr Day Min Wk Mo Qrt Day Hr Yr Yr Ohm Wb F H T um mm cm Km in ft yd mi Ib Sm hp np Samples 797 Returns Remarks See Also A table of the engineering units in DADiSP DADiSP attempts to perform appropriate scaling and reduction given the axes horizontal and vertical units string For example if a series is imported with horizontal units SEC and you change the units to MSEC DADiSP automatically scales the X axis by a factor of 1000 Of course Nerd Power is defined as Np Sm 1b Sec Where Smoots Sm is a unit of distance SCALESON SCALESOFF SETHUNITS SETVUNITS UNMERGE Purpose Format Returns Example 798 Unmerges demultiplexes an interlaced series UNMERGE s n s An interlaced merged series or array n An integer The number of interlaced series Defaults to 2 A series or array W1 merge gsin 100 01 gnorm 100 01 gsqr 100 01 4 W2 unmerge W1 3 W1 contains one column of three interlaced series W2 contains three columns where col w2 1 gsin 100 01 col w2 2 gnorm 100 01 col w2 3 gsqr 100 01 4 Remarks See Also UNMERGE demultiplexes an interlaced series Each of the interlaced components must be of the same length DECIMATE MERGE RAVEL UNRAVEL UNOVERLAY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Re
161. scalar series or table Complex scalar series or table polar gsin 20 05 1 creates a 1 Hz sine wave consisting of 20 points spaced every 0 05 radians apart The value of each point in the sine wave is a Complex number in magnitude phase form Example Remarks See Also POLY Purpose Format Returns Example See Also POLYFIT Purpose polar 1 produces a Complex scalar where the magnitude 1 0 and the phase x radians Returns a Complex value regardless of the input value CARTESIAN Calculates coefficients of the characteristic polynomial POLY x x A matrix Coefficients from highest degree to lowest A series poly 1 3 returns the series 1 6 11 6 POLYFIT Performs a Least Squares Polynomial fit 567 Format Returns Example Remarks 568 POLYFIT yseries xseries order overwrite form specfile yseries Any series multi series table or expression evaluating to a series or table xseries Optional A series the explicit X values Defaults to the X values of the Y series order An integer the order of the polynomial fit overwrite Optional An integer the overwrite flag for existing specfile 0 prompt to overwrite file 1 does not prompt to overwrite file 1 does not write a file Defaults to 0 form Optional An integer form of the polynomial coefficients 0 ascending powers 1 decreasing powers Defaults to 0
162. semicolon is used as an expression separator Semicolons are required to terminate expressions in SPL routines Vertical Bar VERTBAR Purpose Format Combines several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole This command form may be used at the command line or within a macro lt formula1 gt lt formula2 gt lt formulan gt lt formula gt Any valid DADiSP formula A formula can be any DADiSP command function or macro The following are examples of valid formula types 1 Any expression evaluating to a series or scalar e g W1 W1 2 Commands that return nothing but manipulate a series or Window display e g EXPANDH 2 FREAK CURSORON or PLOTMODE 0 3 DADiSP or user defined functions or macros e g AUTOCOR or PSD 29 Example Remarks See Also A2STD Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 30 gsin 100 0 01 2 0 expandv scroll1 cursoron generates a 2 Hz sine wave 100 points expands it vertically scrolls it left and finally places a cursor on the series The vertical bar is an alternate syntax for combining multiple commands The semicolon is now the preferred and recommended syntax The is supported only for backwards compatibility with legacy systems Semicolon Converts an alpha confidence level to a standard deviation range A2STD alpha alpha Areal or series The confidence level s Defaults
163. series2 start interval Optional integer Convolution interval Defaults to 1 A series or table conv 3 1 1 2 1 yelds the series 6 5 3 1 producing the coefficients of the following polynomial multiplication 3 x 2 xX 1 2 x 1 6 x 3 5 x 2 3 x 1 conv W1 reverse W1 yields the auto correlation of the series in W1 W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 rev wl W3 conv W1 W2 W4 conv W1 W2 900 200 Remarks W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 rev w1 47 47 35 35 mm i ian 147 14 ji N Ki ii J my f i iM i i hi a i Mi 4 Wl 2 Be 35 35 4 T T T T T T T T T 4 T T T T T T T T T T 0 200 400 600 800 900 700 500 300 100 W3 conv W1 W2 W4 conv W1 W2 900 200 1200 5 1200 1000 1000 800 800 600 5 600 5 400 400 200 200 0 200 T T T T T T T T T 200 T T T T T T T T 800 400 0 400 800 100 60 20 20 60 W3 contains the raw auto correlation of W1 W4 starts calculating the convolution when the first point in W2 reaches the 900th point of W1 the Start point and continues calculating until 200 points have been processed The resulting series length is 200 In this example the resulting series is a 200 point window around the mid point of the full auto correlation CONV computes convolution directly in the time domain and is optimized for real data Use FCONV to perform convolution via the Fou
164. style target match focus width x1 yl xn yn color Optional An integer or macro color name e g RED specifying line color Defaults to color of primary series 437 Example Remarks 438 style target match focus width xl yl XN yn Optional An integer specifying line style Defaults to solid Valid arguments are 1 Solid 2 Dashed 3 Dotted Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the line to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area 4 GLASS _WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area Optional An integer that sets the line color to match the color of the selected overplot Defaults to 1 primary series Optional An integer specifying 1 based focus offset for PAPER annotations Optional An integer specifying the line width in pixels Defaults to 1 Real number coordinates representing endpoints of line segments gtri 100 01 2 lineann purple 2 1 1 0 09 0 04 0 9 0 5 creates a purple dashed 2 line in glass mode 1 The color of the line is purple and is unrelated to any overplots 1 the line s
165. surface is further interpolated by a factor of 3 using cubic spline interpolation IGRID also accepts a single XYZ series as input xyzser xyz x y Z xyz3 igrid xyzser Same as first example xyz3 igrid xyzser 20 Same as second example xyz3 igrid xyzser 20 30 3 Same as third example xyz4 igrid xyzser 20 30 3 0 1 Same as above except the classical inverse squared distance weighting function is used instead of the default IGRID uses INVDISTANCE the inverse distance method of griding irregularly spaced data If GRIDSIZE is a series the first element specifies the output number of columns and the second element specifies the output number of rows The optional WEIGHTS series specifies the weighting of the radius terms A aE EN E E ALG Re ACS SO The default of 0 0 1 1 1 specifies a linear combination of r 3 r 4 r 5 terms and 0 1 specifies the classical inverse squared distance weighting function See INVDISTANCE for algorithmic details INTERP2 INVDISTANCE SPLINE2 IMAGE24 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Converts an image with a colormap to a 24 bit color image IMAGE24 inwin inwin Optional A Window containing the source image Defaults to the current Window An array a 24 bit color image W1 density spline2 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 8 rainbow W2 image24 W1 W1 contains an image of a random surface shaded with th
166. the OK button to define the macro To edit a macro select the macro and click on the Edit button The macro name argument list and body can be edited To delete a macro select the macro and click on the Delete button DADiSP will prompt you before deleting the macro To find a macro click on the Find button and enter the macro name DADiSP will place the cursor on the macro or the closest match 468 See Also ALLMACROS COMMANDS FUNCS MACREAD MACWRITE MACWRITE Purpose Writes the current macro list to an external file Format MACWRITE filename start end all filename Name of external macro text file in quotes start Optional An integer The macro number appearing in the current macro table to begin writing from Defaults to 1 end Optional An integer The macro number appearing in the current macro table to end writing Defaults to 1 all macros all Optional Specifies what types of macros to include Valid arguments are 0 Write only normal macros 1 Include hidden macros gt 1 Write only hidden macros Example macwrite THREE MAC would write the following lines to the file named THREE MAC NORMALIZE S S MIN S MAX S MINCS SQUARE S S S CONSTANT 12 85 if these were the only macros currently defined To write a subset of the macro list use the start and end parameters macwrite MYMAC 4 15 writes macros 4 through 15 to the file named MYMAC 469 Remarks
167. the nth point of the delayed series is equal to the first point of the original one The delay amount can only be specified as an integer number of points For example delay W1 floor 4 2 deltax W3 DELAY is useful for creating finite impulse response FIR filters See EXTRACT to prepend a series with zeros and preserve the original origin EXTRACT Deletes points from the input series if the corresponding point in the binary control series is non zero DELETE series condition series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table condition Binary control series table or expression resulting in a series or table to determine which points to delete A series or table Wl 1 5 W2 delete Wl 1 0 1 deletes the first and third point from W1 resulting in 2 4 5 187 See Also W3 delete W1 W1 gt 2 0 deletes all the points from W1 that are larger than 2 0 DELETECOL DELETEROW DECIMATE INSERT REMOVE REPLACE DELETECOL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 188 Deletes one or more columns from a table DELETECOL series columns series A series table or expression resulting in a series or table columns A series of integers specifying the columns to remove A series or table W1 ravel 1 16 4 W2 deletecol W1l 2 W2 contains the table 1 9 13 2 10 14 43 115 15 4 12 16 W3 deletecol W1l 1 4
168. the number of points to be extracted 1 implies extract to the end of the series offset Optional A real value specifying the x offset of the resulting series Default is the x value of the starting point A series or table extract W1 1 512 extracts the first 512 point subset series from Window 1 This is equivalent to W1 1 512 231 Remarks See Also EYE Purpose 232 Ws 41 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 103 extract W2 4 3 results is the series 4 5 6 The deltax remains the same while the xoffset is equal to 3 the x value of the 4 point extract W5 1 2 lTength W5 copies the series from Window 5 to the current Window and pads it with enough zeros to equal two times the original series length extract W5 10 1 extracts from Window 5 points 10 through the end of the series extract W5 10 1 0 0 Same as above except the XOFFSET of the result is set to 0 0 If Start is negative zeros are prepended to the result If the number of points to extract is greater than the series or table length the result is padded with zeros See COLEXTRACT to extract a column specific number of points from each column of an array COLEXTRACT CONCAT CUT DECIMATE LENGTH RAVEL REGION REMOVE REVERSE Generates an identity matrix Format EYE nunrows numcols numrows An integer The number of output rows numcols Optional An integer the number of output columns Defaults to numrows
169. to generate spacing Spacing between points alpha Optional Scaling parameter Defaults to 0 5 A series ghanning 100 01 creates a 100 point Hanning Window with points spaced with an interval of 0 01 by the following formula 333 Remarks See Also References w n 1 cos 2mn spacing N 1 where n is the index and N is the number of points to generate Use the HANNING macro command to automatically create and multiply a Hanning Window with a series For example hanning W2 multiplies Window 2 with a Hanning Window calculated to the same length and spacing as the series in W2 Hamming Hanning and Kaiser Windows are useful in creating FIR filters and in preprocessing series for FFT calculations FFT GHAMMING GKAISER PSD SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 GIMPULSE Purpose Format 334 Generates an impulse with an optional spacing and delay GIMPULSE points spacing offset points An integer the number of points to generate spacing Optional A real the spacing between points Defaults to 1 0 offset Optional A real the location of the impulse Defaults to 0 0 Returns Example A series W1 gimpulse 100 creates a 100 point impulse with a spacing of 1 0 such that W1 1 land W1 n Ofori lt n lt
170. to operating system from a Worksheet Write a series to an ASCII file Write a series to a Binary file Write a Microsoft BMP bitmap file Automated Import Header File Creation Write a table from the Worksheet into an ASCII file Write a binary table to a file Data Manipulation and Editing Window Assignment gt gt lt lt amp bitor gt gt lt lt amp CLIP COL COLEXTRACT CONCAT COPYDATA CUT DECIMATE DELAY DELETE DELETECOL DELETEROW EDIT EXTRACT INSERT INTERPOLATE ISNAVALUE MERGE NAFILL PASTEDATA RAVEL REGION REMOVE REMOVENA REORDER REPLACE REPLICATE REVERSE ROUND ROW SETDELTAX SETNAVALUE SETPT SETXOFFSET TRANSPOSE UNMERGE UNRAVEL VALFILL Assign a formula to a Window Bit Operators Bit left shift bit right shift bit and bit complement bit or operators Assignment Operators Operate and assign the value of an expression Set outlier to min and max y values Extract a column of data from a table Extract a portion of each column of a table Concatenate series end to end Copy data in current window to clipboard Cut the displayed contents of a Window Linearly remove points from a series Delay a series by n number of points Eliminate points based on condition Delete one or more columns from a table Delete one or more rows from a table Edit y values point by point Cut pieces of series Insert values into a series as specified by explicit indices Lin
171. to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Sets a debugger breakpoint DBSTOP function DBSTOP lineno Returns Example Remarks See Also DBSTOP function DBSTOP lineno function Name ofthe SPL routine lineno Optional An integer the line number Defaults to the first executable line of the function Nothing a bstop myfunc dbcont myfunc 10 dbstop 7 dbcont sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called and a new breakpoint is established at line 7 Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached Both the command form dbstop function and functional form dbstop function are supported DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBUP LOCALS VARS 163 DBUP Purpose Format Returns Example 164 Moves up the debugger callstack DBUP Nothing Assume the following two SPL routine
172. to the same set of scales and move together during scrolls magnification expansion and compression When the cursor is on you may switch the cursor between overplotted series and the original by using the up and down arrow keys In order for an overplot to be updated automatically when the current Window is updated it must be part of the Window formula See OVERLAY to plot multiple series with independent scales OVERLAY UNOVERLAY UNOVERPLOT FIR filtering with optional endpoint padding PADFILT s h pad s An input series h A series The FIR filter coefficients i e impulse response pad Optional An integer to specify start and end point padding method O none 1 flip about end points 2 flip about 0 0 Defaults to 0 no padding padlen Optional An integer the length of segment with which to pad Defaults to length h 2 A series W1 integ gnorm 1000 001 10 1 W2 klpass 1000 0 50 0 60 0 70 0 W3 padfilt W1l W2 0 W4 padfilt W1l W2 1 overp W3 lIred overp W1 lIgreen W1 consists of simulated data with a low frequency trend W2 contains an FIR lowpass filter with a cutoff frequency of 50 Hertz The data is filtered by straight convolution in W3 545 Remarks See Also PARENTS Purpose Format Returns 546 Before filtering the beginning and end points of the data are padded by flipping the end segments in time and amplitude in W4 The overplot of the original
173. up to the corresponding point in W1 W4 displays the difference between the calculated integration and the analytical result in W3 Remarks See Also INTERP2 Purpose gsin 1000 001 1 cos 2 pi xvals w1 2 pi 0 34 fans ba 0 254 N integ w1 0 35 0 25 0 2 0 15 5 0 1 0 05 0 05 ve 7 y X 1 5e 006 1e 006 5 5e 007 gt 04 5e 007 5 1e 006 1 5e 006 The INTEG function uses Simpson s rule to compute the integral This method fits a quadratic function to three points of the series for area calculations If the input is an XY series INTEG employs the trapezoidal rule See TRAPZ for an implementation of the trapezoidal rule The input series can be Real or Complex AREA DERIV LDERIV PARTSUM RDERIV TRAPZ Performs 2 dimensional linear interpolation 397 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also INTERP2 array numrows numcols array An input array to interpolate numrows An integer the row interpolation factor numcols Optional An integer the column interpolation factor Defaults to numrows An array W1 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 W2 interp2 W1 4 W2 contains a 37x37 array of linearly interpolated values W1 density interp2 rand 10 10 produces a 91x91 array of linearly interpolated values plotted as a density image plot The interpolated result from INTERP2 always p
174. zeros are prepended to the result If the number of points to extract is greater than the series or table length the result is padded with zeros CONCAT CUT EXTRACT RAVEL Returns the indices for each column of the input table COLIDX table unravel table Any series or expression resulting in a table unravel Optional An integer indicating if unraveled i e sequential indices should be returned 0 Normal indices default 1 Unraveled indices An array or series Example 1 gnorm 5 1 2 colidx W1 2 1 2 3 4 5 ATE 2 Shy 125 Ls Bh 3 52 TE colidx wl N N 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 a colidx Wl 1 WiLa ion Il a 1 4 7 12e Dy Bh 3 6 9 b W1 Remarks COLIDX table 1 returns the indices in sequential unraveled order This form is useful in array reference expressions Use XVALS to return the X axis values See Also COLLENGTH IDX XVALS Purpose Arranges Worksheet Windows into the indicated number of rows per column Format COLLAYOUT row1 row2 row3 rowN rowN Number of rows for column N 99 Example See Also collayout 1 3 2 creates three columns of Windows where the first column has 1 row the second column has three rows and the last column has two rows LAYOUT ROWLAYOUT SETALLWMARGIN COLLENGTH Purpose Format Returns Example 100 Produces a row of the lengths of each
175. 0 200 W4 clogmag W3 4096 setxlog 1 W5 integ gnorm 1000 1 10000 W6 cascade W5 W3 5 s 40 2 pi s 30 2 pi s 20 2 pi s 3 20 log10 mag W 1 setxlog 1 eos eea 14 2 45 10 ra J 64 27 2 7 eee 04 T T T T T T T T 2 TOT TTT TOT TTT TOT TTT TOT TTT 0 2000 4000 6000 8000 1 10 100 1000 zpfcoef 40 30 20 300 5 10000 200 clogmag W3 4096 setxlog 1 6 ait 4 J AN S 1 4 a4 pe oA ace EEN 2 K NS 10 4 nd 2 4 N F 6 y 6 4 Mf 2 J ee 4 10 T T T li T T T T T 2 TIIN TIIT Per EERTNI TEET 0 0 00015 0 0003 0 00045 2 10 100 1000 3000 integ gnorm 1000 1 10000 cascade W5 W3 0 006 0 004 0 0023 fll A m dit a DARA hk al vy wy oll 0 J N s iy al at Au WA Vii a woe 9 002 y 0 002 T T T T T T T T T T 0 004 T T T T T T T T T 0 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 0 0 02 0 04 0 06 0 08 W1 contains the original S domain transfer function The magnitude of the transfer function is displayed in W2 W3 contains the resulting digital filter coefficients in 2nd order cascade form The sample rate of the digital filter is 10000 Hz and the response is set to match the analog filter at 200 Hz The entire frequency response of the digital filter is displayed in W4 W5 contains synthesized data and W5 filters the data with the resulting digital filter in W3 Remarks See Also ZTIC Purpose Format Example See Also The
176. 0 indicating the values that have the lowest bit set b b 1 2 3 4 x01 Variable b contains the series 1 3 3 5 The following assignment operators are supported Operator Description add then assign subtract then assign multiply then assign See Also Operator Description divide then assign modulo then assign gt gt bit right shift then assign lt lt bit left shift then assign amp bit and then assign bit or then assign If e and e2 are expressions then el op e2 is equivalent to el el op e2 except that e is computed only once Notice the parenthesis x ytl is equivalent to x x y 1 not x x yt Assignment operators are not only fast and concise they correspond better to the way people think We say add 2 to j or increment j by 2 not take j add 2 then put the result back into j Thus j 2 Hot Variable Assignment Variable Assignment Bit Operators Logical Operators A Matrix Multiply Purpose Multiplies two matrices Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 20 matrix1 4 matrix2 matrixl A matrix matrix2 A matrix A matrix WI 1 3 4 53 Ja 9 8 9 12 W2 1 3 2 2 4 5 1 2 OF W1 W2 11 23 17 28 61 45 38 84 61 W2 W1 32 42 55 62 79 104 ills Lh LAF The number of columns in matrix1 must be equal to the num
177. 1 Works on Real and Complex series COL OVERLAY OVERPLOT ROW GETSPLPATH Purpose Format Returns Example Returns the directory path to search for SPL files GETSPLPATH A string message getsplpath displays the current SPL search directory list 313 Remarks See Also The SPL search path can be set using the SPLPATH configuration parameter The default path includes the directory that contains the DADiSP executable the current Labbook directory and any sub directories contained within the SPL sub directory GETHOME GETLABNAME GETLABPATH GETWORKSHEETNAME GETSTRING Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 314 Prompts for textual input via input panel with OK and Cancel buttons GETSTRING label message default label A string used to label the top of the input panel message A string used as a message within the input panel default A string placed as a default in the input panel User input string getstring Label Column Header Column 1 pops up the input panel and prompts for a string The default value column 1 is displayed in the input panel The value entered in the panel is displayed on the status line mylabel Getstring Label Column Header Col 1 setcomment mylabel pops up the input panel and prompts for a string The text entered into the panel is stored in the variable mylabel then is set to the comment for the series GETSTRIN
178. 1 See Also PROTECT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 582 COLPROD SUM Protects a Window from the effects of series propagation by isolating it from any dependence on other Windows PROTECT Window name Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window name The new title replacing the Window formula in quotes W3 W1 W2 protect W3 Ultimate Sum replaces the formula in Window 3 with the name Ultimate Sum and if W1 or W2 are altered W3 will not be affected To avoid confusion protect a Window with a genuinely new name rather than re using the Window formula e g protect W3 WI W2 This would make W3 look like a normal Window Instead use protect W3 PROTECTED W1 W2 However sometimes it is useful to protect the Window using the original formula In this case the Window does not automatically update so the results are preserved until the formula is manually re evaluated with the F2 or F3 key CALC UPDATE WINLOCK PSD Purpose Format Returns Example Calculates the power spectral density PSD ser len ser Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table len Optional An integer Input series length Defaults to the length of the input series A series or table W1 gsin 100 1 0 0 2 5 setvunits V W2 psd W1 W3 psd W1 1024 gsin 100 1 0 0 2 5 setvunits V
179. 1 gt 0 4 W1 W3 valfill W2 The zeros of W2 are replaced with the last known value by first searching forward in each column and then searching backwards VALFILL is based on NAFILL NAFILL VALUETYPE Purpose Format Returns 806 Returns the type of data stored in the specified variable VALUETYPE var vartype var Variable name vartype Optional An integer specifying the type of variable Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 Global Variable default 2 Local Variable 3 User Function 4 Hot Variable 5 Formal Variable An integer representing the type of the variable s data The return integer can be one of the following 1 Integer Real Complex String Series Function ON WNY Example See Also VARS Purpose Format See Also VERSION Purpose Format Returns a 10 b 20 0 c integ wl valuetype a returns 1 valuetype b returns 2 valuetype c returns 5 ISVARIABLE ISMACRO Displays the list of all SPL variables which have been defined in the current Worksheet Lists variables and allows variables to be created and edited VARS DELALLVARIABLES FUNCTIONS GETVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language SPLREAD SPLWRITE Reports full version information of the active DADiSP VERSION VERSION returns a string containing the 1 product name 2 version number 3 product type 4 target OS s
180. 10 5 getplottype Wl returns 2 a contour map 309 Remarks See Also GETPT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 310 a spline2 rand 12 4 setplottype a 5 getplottype a returns 5 an image plot Use SETPLOTTYPE the menus the Graphical Styles toolbar button or the F7 key to see different styles of a particular plot type For example a waterfall plot could be viewed as a surface line or point plot a 3 D bar graph or a table of values CONTOUR DENSITY GETPLOTSTYLE PLOT3D SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE TABLEVIEW WATERFALL Displays the value of the nth point of a Series in any Window GETPT series index series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window index An integer referencing the point index A scalar getpt gsin 20 05 5 displays the value 951056 because the sine function has a y value of at 1 4th of a period An index n refers to the nth point in the series GETPT works on Real and Complex series Remarks See Also GETRGB Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks You can also use the following syntax to retrieve a value from a series or table W3En returns the nth point from Window 3 W4Er c returns the element in the table in W4 at row r and column c CURSORON FIND PEAKS AND VALLEYS FMAX FMIN Returns the separate RGB components of an image r g b GETRGB image
181. 100 Wl gsin 200 01 1 W2 gimpulse 200 01 W3 gimpulse 200 01 5 W4 conv W1 W2 W5 conv W1 W3 gsin 200 01 1 gimpulse 200 01 gimpulse 200 01 5 1 57 1 24 1 27 THA A 14 14 pee 0 8 4 0 8 4 0 6 0 6 5 04 0 4 0 4 5 US 0 2 0 2 1 4 04 04 1 5 7 a a m a a a D E 0 2 4 a a a a S O E E 0 2 4 a a m a E O S E 0 0 4 08 1 2 1 6 conv W1 W2 0 04 08 1 2 16 0 04 08 1 2 1 6 conv W1 W3 W1 contains 200 samples of a 1 Hertz sinewave sampled at 100 samples per second W2 contains a 200 point impulse and W3 contains the same impulse delayed by 0 5 seconds W4 and W5 demonstrate the delay effect by convolving the sinewave with each impulse 335 Remarks See Also GKAISER Purpose Format Returns Example 336 Unlike IMPULSE GIMPULSE generates an impulse with a given Delta X and delay If specified 0 0 lt offset lt length deltax EXTRACT IMPULSE ONES Generates a Kaiser Window GKAISER points spacing beta points Number of points to generate spacing Spacing between points beta Optional Scaling factor Defaults to 7 865 A series gkaiser 100 01 generates a 100 point Kaiser Window using the following formula Io B N D 2 2 n 1 N 1 2 2 0 5 Io B N 1 2 where i is the modified zeroth order Bessel function Default beta is 7 865
182. 100 0 01 min W1 returns 1 0 v idx min W1 v 1 0 idx 76 in 10 20 returns 10 in 2 3 4 3 returns the series 2 3 3 in 1 2 3 0 4 2 returns the series 0 2 2 COLMIN can be used to determine the minimums of array columns See VMIN to compare more than two expressions See MINLOC to obtain the location of the minimum COLMIN FIND FMAX FMIN MAX MINIDX MINLOC VMAX VMIN Finds the index of the minimum value of a series Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MINIDX series series Any series or expression resulting in a series An integer W2 gsin 100 0 01 minidx W2 returns 76 the index of the location of the minimum W2Eminidx W2 min W2 1 0 verifies that minidx returns the index of the minimum x y fxyvals 2 2 1 2 2 1 Z sin x y mi minidx z mi 320 z mi min z 0 999942 For tabular or XYZ data MINIDX returns the index in unraveled form such that zEminidx z min z See MINLOC to obtain the location of the minimum See COLMINIDX to find the indices of the minimums for each column in a table COLMAX COLMINIDX FIND FMAX FMIN MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINLOC 495 MINLOC Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MINVAL Purpose 496 Finds the location of the minimum value of a series x y Z MINLOC series series Any series or express
183. 100 01 setvunits Volts W2 gcos 100 01 setvunits Amps W3 wl staggery 0 staggerx 0 Scales 2 sety 4 1 5 spany 1 1 o0verlay w2 red focus 2 staggery 0 staggerx 0 scales 13 sety 1 5 4 spany 1 1 focus 1 settoriy 1 focus 2 settoriy 2 Window 3 contains the 2 overlayed curves with flush scales and different tic label orientations The tic labels for the sine wave are horizontal while those for the cosine wave are vertical SETTORIX and SETTORIY apply to the scales associated with the current focus of the specified window By setting the orientation the label will be drawn horizontally or vertically i e succeeding characters in a label string will be drawn below or above vertical or to the right or left horizontal of preceding characters If the tic label is vertically oriented then its rotation is defined to be the vertical label default rotation for its label type and axis FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAORIX SETAORIY See Also SETAROTX SETAROTY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY SETXTIC SETYTIC SETTROTX SETTROTY Purpose Format Example Remarks Sets the rotation for tic labels on x and y axis SETTROTX Window rotation SETTROTY Window rotation Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window rotation An integer Valid arguments are 0 No Rotation 1 90 degree rotation of entire string 2 180 degree rotation i
184. 2 SsnameN confirm sname Name of Series to delete in quotes confirm Optional Confirmation flag 1 confirm deletion 0 do not confirm Defaults to 1 Returns An integer if successful else lt 0 Example deleteseries RUN1 1 ANALOG1 deletes the series RUN1 1 ANALOGI deleteseries RUN1 1 ANALOG1 RUN1 1 ANALOG2 1 deletes both RUN1 1 ANALOGI1 and RUN1 1 ANALOG 2 with confirmation Remarks The specified Series names are case sensitive See Also 192 COPYSERIES DELETEDATASET DELETELABBOOK DELETEWORKSHEET IMPORTFILE LOADDATASET LOADSERIES SAVESERIES DELETEWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also DELFUN Purpose Deletes one or more Worksheets from a Labbook DELETEWORKSHEET wsname1 wsname2 wsnameN confirm wsname Name of Worksheet s to delete in quotes confirm Optional Confirmation flag 1 confirm deletion 0 do not confirm Defaults to 1 An integer 1 if successful else lt 0 deleteworksheet Demo5 deletes the Worksheet DemoS deleteworksheet Demo5 Demo6 1 deletes both Demo5 and Demo6 Worksheets with confirmation The specified Worksheet names are case sensitive DELETEDATASET DELETESERIES LOADDATASET LOADSERIES LOADWORKSHEET SAVEWORKSHEET Deletes a function from the current Worksheet 193 Format DELFUN function_name function_name The name of the function to delete Example delfun te
185. 20 Hz dct gcos 100 1 100 20 1024 Same as above but the input is zero padded to length 1024 before the DCT is calculated 165 Remarks See Also DCT2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 166 The transform is applied to each column if the input is an array The DCT is often used in image processing applications to perform image compression DCT2 IDCT IDCT2 FFT Calculates the 2D Discrete Cosine Transform DCT2 series nr nc series An input array or an expression resulting in a table nr Optional An integer the transform row size Defaults to row length of input array nc Optional An integer the transform column size Defaults to column length of input array An array W1 ravel gcos 100 1 100 3 10 W2 dcet2 Wl W3 idct2 W2 returns the original array within roundoff error DCT2 is often used in conjunction with IDCT2 to perform image compression DCT FFT FFT2 IDCT IDCT2 References 1 Jae S Lim Two dimensional Signal and Image Processing pp 148 162 Implements an even symmetrical DCT 2 Jain Fundamentals of Digital Image Processing pp 150 153 3 Wallace The JPEG Still Picture Compression Standard Communications of the ACM April 1991 DDEADVISE Purpose Format Returns Automatically retrieves a series item from a DDE conversation whenever the item changes DDEADVISE chan datatype overwrite autos
186. 4 Ube dav sds UPL 35 2718 uL lt x lt E Il assign the values to the variables u v w x and y as shown below u 1 5 9 13 25 6 10 147 135 ar depe EDFA 4 8 12 16 v 5 9 13 6 10 14 7o deh 5 LS w 1 5 9 t2 264 010 3 7 11 4 8 12 x f 1 5 9 13 2 6 10 14 toy Aa Lly LOR y ssi hs 2 35 45 bs 657 Aa 8595 Le Lbs 125 134 A As indicated by examples the operator without any range specifies implies all rows or columns For tabular data the operator by itself implies all the values of the table unraveled into a single column Assignments are also valid For example from above the statement u 1 3 1 1 assigns the values to variable u as u l Di 93 di Sky l 652 10 Th thy 7s Vhs TSF CAS By 125 Lok Assigning elements to the empty series removes values For example uL2 removes the 2 row and returns the array 1 5 9 13 1 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 The range specifier can be implemented as gline int end start inc 1 1 inc start See Also Array Construction GLINE GNUMBER LINSPACE LOGSPACE RAVEL UNRAVEL Q Array Construction Purpose Creates a series or multiple column array Format a b c a b c d a b c d Any number of expressions resulting in an integer real complex series or string Returns Example R
187. 4 13 gt ooo we norm x y 5 6921 This example solves the following over determined system of equations using least squares x 4y 7z 30 2X 5y 8z 36 3x 6y 15 x 2y Z II N The solution y minimizes the mean squared error IfA b and x are matrices such that A x b thenA b returns the matrix x A b is equivalent to mdiv A b For A b where A is square the system is solved using LU decomposition This is usually numerically more stable than directly calculating the inverse matrix i e x inv A b See Also If matrix A is not square the system is considered a least squares problem and is solved by QR decomposition The resulting matrix is the best solution in the least squares sense For scalars a b a b 10 2 10 2 0 2 Matrix Multiply Matrix Right Division INVERSE LU MDIV MMULT QR Matrix Right Division Purpose Format Returns Example Performs matrix right division matrix1 matrix2 matrix Any matrix matrix2 A non singular usually square matrix A matrix that numerically approximates matrix inv maxtrix2 A 0 1 2 tly Ose ls MCh ag abo x 3 5 4 Athy OLS Zaha 3 2 1 B A x B A 3 5 4 tly OS lt a y ois ee LE a 1 b For example 25 Remarks IfA B and x are matrices such that A x B thenB A returns the matrix x B
188. 4 point sliding window in which the maximum is calculated the first 3 points in the returned series are the maxima from a 1 2 and 3 point window respectively decimate movmax W1 10 10 calculates the 10 point moving maximum of non overlapping blocks Remarks The first N 1 points returned for MOVMAX over an N point window are the max values in consecutively larger windows of size 1 2 3 N 1 See Also MOVAVG MOVMIN MOVMIN Purpose Performs n point moving minimum calculations Format MOVMIN series points series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table points An integer The number of points on which to compute the minimum 505 Returns Example Remarks See Also MOVRMS Purpose Format Returns 506 A series or table W1 2 3 1 5 2 4 5 7 2 W2 movmin W1 4 returns the series 2 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 In this example where there is a 4 point sliding window in which the minimum is calculated the first 3 points in the returned series are the minima froma 2 and 3 point window respectively decimate movmin W1 10 10 calculates the 10 point moving minimum of non overlapping blocks The first N 1 points returned for MOVMIN over an N point window are the min values in consecutively larger windows of size 1 2 3 N 1 MOVAVG MOVMAX Calculates the moving RMS ofa series MOVRMS series n rampflag series An input series n An integer The
189. 40 Macro Performs a time domain cross correlation of a series CROSSCOR series1 series2 series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table series2 Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table Returns Expansion Example Remarks See Also CTREE Purpose A table or series CONV S1 REVERSE S2 SERSIZE S1 SERSIZE S2 W1 gsin 128 1 128 4 0 W2 gsin 128 1 128 4 0 W3 crosscor Wl W2 performs a cross correlation of two sine waves W1 grand 128 1 128 W2 gsin 128 1 128 4 0 W3 crosscor Wl W2 performs the cross correlation of a sine wave with a random series CROSSCOR calculates the cross correlation directly in the time domain via convolution without normalization Use XCORR for a time domain version that supports normalization and FXCORR for a frequency domain implementation The cross correlation function is often used to indicate how similar one waveform is to another The cross correlation of the above sine waves returns a waveform with several distinct peaks indicating that the two series are very similar at each point in time where the peaks occur The cross correlation of the random series with the sine wave results in a waveform with some peaks but the amplitude of the waveform is considerably reduced try OVERPLOT indicating that the two input series are very dissimilar AUTOCOR CONV FFT FXCORR PEARSON
190. 7 tile 0 tile 1 tile 2 tile 3 creates a 7 Window worksheet Each of the tile modes are applied to the Window layout COLLAYOUT NEATEN ROWLAYOUT Returns the number of seconds since the internal timer started TOC A real the number of seconds since the last TIC command tic fft wl b toc sprintf FFT execution time g seconds b prints the approximate time required to calculate and display the FFT of W1 W1 gnorm 1024 32 1 W2 tic fft wl label strnum toc W2 is labeled with the approximate time to calculate the FFT of W1 See Also CLOCK GETTIME TIC TODMSECSTR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also TODSTR Purpose Returns the number of seconds to millisecond precision from a time string TODMSECSTR timestr timestr A string The time in hh mm ss iii format A real the total number of seconds represented by the time string The fractional part represents milliseconds todmsecstr 12 00 00 101 returns 43200 101 A value of 0 seconds represents midnight Since the total number of seconds in a day is 86400 todmsecstr 12 00 00 000 is 43200 0 or noon Use STRTODMSEC to convert seconds into a time string with milliseconds STRJUL STRTOD STRTODMSEC TODSTR Returns the number of seconds from a time string 781 Format TODSTR timestr timestr A string The time in hh mm ss format Returns An integer the total number of seconds re
191. 7 Example sprintf Today is Ss at s The temperature is 3 2f degrees getdate gettime 5 636 returns a string like Today is 6 21 2003 at 14 48 20 30 The temperature is 75 64 degrees sprintf Mean 8 2f Stdev 8 2f Max 8 2f mean stdev max returns a string like Mean 0 52 Stdev 0 28 Max 0 98 sprintf Hex Value x 10 returns Hex value a Remarks SPRINTF produces an output string in the format of the C C language printf and sprintf functions For more detailed information see a C C language function reference See Also ECHO FPUTS MESSAGE PRINTF STRCAT TEXT SQRT Purpose Calculates the square root Format SQRT expr expr Areal series multi series table or expression evaluating to a real series or multi series table Returns A real series or table 738 Example Remarks See Also SSCANF Purpose Format Returns sqrt W1 creates a new series from the contents of Window and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the square root of the corresponding point in Window 1 sqrt 1 returns 0 li sqrt 1 07 yields 0 li SQRT can return a complex series or real if the input value is complex or real and negative Arithmetic Operators Converts an input string by applying a C C style format control string SSCANF string control var1 var2 varN string The input s
192. 736565 164 073803 Remarks The Pad approximation algorithm is used to calculate the matrix exponential See Also EXP INNERPROD References Matrix Computations Gene H Golub and Charles F Van Loan The Johns Hopkins University Press London 1989 Second Edition pp 555 558 EXPORTFILE Purpose Exports a DADiSP series to a data file from the command line Format EXPORTFILE seriesname filename filetype exporttype overwrite seriesname filename filetype Name ASCII SBYTE UBYTE BYTE SINT UINT LONG FLOAT DOUBLE ULONG A quoted string or string result indicating the series name to export Optional A quoted string or string result indicating the export file name Defaults to export dat Optional An integer filetype code Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are Code 0 ak O N N O Data Type Comma Space delimited data Signed Byte Unsigned Byte same as UBYTE Signed Integer Unsigned Integer 4 byte Signed Integer 4 byte Floating Point 8 byte Floating Point 4 byte Unsigned Integer Range N A 128 to 127 0 to 255 0 to 255 32768 to 32767 0 to 65536 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 1037 to 10 38 10 307 to 10 308 0 to 4 294 967 295 229 Returns Example Remarks See Also exporttype Optional An integer Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 Header and Data default 2 Header Only 3 Data Only overwrite Opt
193. 8 PHASE expr expr Any expression resolving to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table ATAN IMAG ARG REAL ARG phase 1 i returns 0 78539816 or is 7 4 PHASE returns a value from r to n ANGLE returns a value from 0 to 27 ANGLE CARTESIAN IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE POLAR REAL Macro Returns the golden mean PHI 1 61803398874989484820 You can derive this constant by solving the following set of equations if a b b a b and a then b PHI Remarks See Also PI Purpose Format Expansion Example See Also PHI is the positive root of the polynomial x 2 x 1 PHI is particularly useful if you happen to be an ancient Greek DEG POLYROOT SETDEGREE Macro Provides the value of n PI 3 1415926535897932384626 cos pi returns 1 0 exp pi i yields MAG 1 0 Angle 3 14 180 00 DEG E GAMMA LN PHI SETDEGREE 559 PICKFILE Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 560 Uses a native GUI system dialog box for selecting a file PICKFILE default_dir title_bar filename_filter mode default_dir Optional The directory where the file to be selected is located in quotes Defaults to DADiSP s working directory title bar Optional Character string to be placed on the title bar in quotes Defaults to File Name filename_filter Optional Displays only files that obey the given wildcard
194. 88 Sets the default rotation for tic labels on x and y axis SETTVDEFX Window rotation SETTVDEFY Window rotation Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window rotation An integer Valid arguments are 0 90 degree rotation of entire string all sides 1 270 degree rotation of entire string i e 90 degrees CW all sides Horizontal characters laid out in vertical sequence all sides Horizontal leftmost letter becomes vertical topmost letter 3 90 degree rotation of entire string for left and bottom sides 270 degree rotation of entire string for right and top sides 270 degree rotation of entire string for left and bottom sides 90 degree rotation of entire string for right and top sides 2 amp 1 Example Remarks See Also W1 grand 100 5 1 scales 2 settoriy 2 settvdefy 3 Now click on the scales button in the toolbar or F5 and see how the y axis tic labels change their rotation as the scales move from the left side to the right side of the window SETTVDEFX and SETTVDEFY set the vertical default rotation for tic labels The default settings are 90 degree rotation for x axis tic labels 90 degree rotation for y axis tics on left and bottom sides 270 degree rotation for y axis tics on right and top sides FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAORIX SETAORIY SETAROTX SETAROTY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETVARIABLE Purpose Format E
195. 99 INTERPOSE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 400 Inserts an operator between every observation in a series then evaluates associatively producing a vector of successive intermediate results INTERPOSE series op opcode series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table op Optional A string the binary operator in quotes opcode Optional An integer the binary operator function code A series or table interpose 2 3 4 produces the series 2 6 24 by expanding to the expression 2 3 4 and evaluating associatively producing one value for each pair of parentheses interpose 2 3 4 3 returns the series 2 6 24 Operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR The function also accepts an explicit function code instead of an operator string Either an operator string or function code must be supplied The following function codes are supported Code Operator Function Description 1 ADD add 2 SUB subtract 3 7 MULT multiply 4 DIV divide 5 A ADD raise to power 6 gt GREATER greater than 7 lt LESS less than 8 gt GREATEREQ greater or equal to 9 lt LESSEQ less or equal to Code See Also INNERPROD OUTERPROD REDUCE INVDISTANCE Purpose Operator I amp amp XOR FLIPFLOP ATAN2 amp lt lt gt gt BITXO
196. A real the low value of the color range hi Optional A real the high value of the color range Nothing Re colors all image windows rgbmap 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 resetmap rgbmap defines a colormap that consists of only three colors pure red pure green and pure blue All windows containing an image are updated with this colormap To create a Worksheet that automatically restores the RGB colormap upon loading try the following 1 Save the colormap to a variable cmap getcolormap 2 Define the macro INITWKS that is automatically run when the Worksheet is loaded define initwks resetmap cmap 3 Save the Worksheet Remarks See Also RESHAPE Purpose Format Returns Example The Worksheet will automatically restore the saved colormap when loaded The SAVECMAP routine performs the above steps COLORBAR FOCUS GETCOLORMAP SAVECMAP SETCOLORMAP Creates a table of values by splitting a specified series into specified lengths RESHAPE series lengths start overlap zeroflag series Any series or expression evaluating to a series lengths Series of lengths start Optional An integer indicating start index Defaults to 1 overlap Optional An integer indicating segment overlap Defaults to 0 zeroflag Optional An integer Allow zero length segments Defaults to 0 A table reshape W1 2 12 8 creates a table by dividing W1 into four segments of length
197. AD filename filename The name of the external SPL file without quotes Command form splread splfiles testdata spl reads the testdata spl file from the spl files subdirectory splread splfiles testdata spl Same as above but expressed in the easier to type command form An SPL file is a simple ASCH text file you can create with any text editor The file contains SPL functions which you can use in a Worksheet Any errors detected during the read are written to an ASCII file fi lename err To automatically read in function files at start up time include the filenames in the dadisp spl file SPLREAD does not generate or read OPL files see SPLLOAD The command form does not accept optional arguments INCLUDE FUNCTIONS SPLCOMPILE SPLLOAD SPLWRITE SPLWRITE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also SPRINTF Purpose Writes SPL functions to an external ASCII file SPLWRITE filename start end all filename The name of the external file in quotes or a string variable start Optional An integer The function number appearing in the function table to begin writing Defaults to 1 end Optional An integer The function number appearing in the function table to end writing Defaults to 1 all functions all Optional An integer Specifies what types of functions to include Valid arguments are 0 Write only normal functions default 1 Write normal and hidden functions
198. AGELOG filename mode filename Optional A string the name of the logfile in quotes into which messages are to be written Defaults to message log mode Optional An integer Valid arguments are 1 Write all messages default 0 Write no messages 1 Write only informational messages 2 Write only errors Example Remarks See Also MIN Purpose Format messagelog 2 user actions messagelog 0 viewfile message txt creates the logfile message txt then closes and displays the file The logfile is automatically closed when DADiSP exits Message logging can also be set in dadisp cnf via the following parameters MESSAGE LOGNAME filename MESSAGE LOGGING 1 ALL 0 off default 1 info 2 errors Turning on message logging via dadisp cnf allows all startup messages to be placed in the logfile dadisp cnf configuration file VIEWFILE Determines the minimum value of a series or two expressions MIN series val idx MIN series MIN expr1 expr2 series Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window expri Any integer real or series expression expr2 Any integer real or series expression 493 Returns Example Remarks See Also MINIDX Purpose 494 A scalar MIN expr1 expr2 can return a series val idx MIN series returns both the minimum value and the index of the minimum W1 gsin
199. Also CURPUT Purpose Returns the position of the second crosshair cursor in the designated Window CURPOS2 Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window The point number in the series where the second cursor was most recently placed If the second cursor was never activated in the given Window the position returned is 0 CURPOS2 can be used to specify an index in a Window expression extract W1 curpos2 W1 10 extracts 10 points from the series in Window 1 starting from wherever the second cursor was last placed CURPOS2 allows you to simply move the second cursor to a desired part of a series without referencing a specific point number Changes in second cursor position do not propagate through the Worksheet If you want to update a Window dependent on a new second cursor position use the Line Editor F3 key to re enter the line so that the second cursor position is re evaluated Note CURPOS also allows you to reference the second cursor in a Window CURPOS CURSORON Resets the cursor position at a specified x axis location 147 Format CURPUT Window xvalue item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window xvalue Areal number The x value for desired cursor location item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a column cursor in the item
200. B 197 DENSITY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also DERIV Purpose Format 198 Displays table data as a density plot DENSITY table table Any multi series matrix or expression resulting in a table density ravel grand 100 1 10 fills the current Window with a colored ten by ten checkerboard Each square of the checkerboard is filled according to the magnitude of the data with colors as defined by the current shading scheme DENSITY can be obtained by pressing the F7 key the Graph Styles toolbar button or executing setplottype 3 CONTOUR MAPPALETTE SETPALETTE SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE SETSHADING SHADEWITH TABLEVIEW WATERFALL Calculates the derivative DERIV series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table Returns Example Remarks See Also DET Purpose Format Returns Example A series or table Wee i153 25 73 W2 deriv wl W2 contains the derivative with values 2 0 5 2 5 representing the slope of W1 at each point DADiSP calculates the derivative by taking points n n and n finding the quadratic curve to fit those three points and using the slope of the curve at point n as the derivative of point n GRADIENT INTEG LDERIV RDERIV Computes the determinant of a square matrix DET matrix matrix Optional A real or complex square table or expression resulting in a real
201. BSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Calculates the natural logarithm of the specified expression LOG expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table log W1 creates a new series from the contents of Window 1 and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the natural logarithm base e of the corresponding point in Window 1 log 1 returns 0 the natural log of 1 LOG and LN are identical See LOG10 for log base 10 LOG LOG10 LN LOG10 Purpose Format Returns Example See Also LOG2 Purpose Format Returns Calculates the common base 10 logarithm of the specified expression LOG10 expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table log10 W3 creates a new series from the contents of Window and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the base 10 logarithm of the corresponding point in Window 3 log 10 returns 1 the common log of 10 LN LOG Returns Log base 2 of the input LOG2 expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A real series or table 457 Example Remarks LOG is useful for manipulating the lengths of FFT calculations See Also FFT LOG LOG10 Purpose Creates a series ofn log spaced values from 10 lo to 10 hi inclu
202. CREAD MACWRITE INCLUDE Purpose Format Example Includes macro files in other macro files and SPL files in other SPL files INCLUDE filename filename A string identifying the filename including the path to the file In the dadisp mac file include macros cursor mac include macros matrix mac reads the macros in the cursor mac and matrix mac files automatically at startup If the macro file myfile mac resides in the same directory as the DADiSP executable the following statement in the dadisp mac file reads the macros inmyfile mac automatically upon startup include gethome myfile mac To load SPL files automatically upon startup include them in the dadisp sp1 file include myfuncs spl Remarks Macros are defined and saved with Worksheets Use MACWRITE to write macros to a file See Also DEFAULT DEFINE HUNDEFALL HUNDEFINE MACREAD MACWRITE Purpose Deletes the entire list of macros associated with the current Worksheet Format UNDEFALL Remarks If you use H UNDEFALL the DADiSP menus will not work until you use 1DEFAULT to re initialize the default macros See Also DEFAULT DEFINE H UNDEFINE Purpose Deletes a macro from the current Worksheet Format UNDEFINE macro_name macro_ name Name of macro to delete Example See Also UNDEFINE autocor deletes the macro autocor DEFAULT DEFINE UNDEFALL Variable Assignment Purpose Format Returns
203. CTR mode BARS BARGAP BARSTYLE STEPCTR STEPS Sets the gap drawing between bars of a 2D step plot BARGAP win on_off win Optional A Window Defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Valid inputs are 0 do not draw gaps 1 draw gaps default Returns Example Remarks See Also BARS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also If on_of not specified returns 1 if bar gaps are on else 0 W1 gnorm 10 1 bars bargap 1 W2 W1l bars bargap 0 The bars in W1 are drawn with gaps between each bar the default while the bars in W2 abut each other with no gaps BARGAP only effects 2D bar charts BARGAP is a Window property All bar plots plotted in the Window will be drawn in the current BARGAP mode BARCTR BARS BARSTYLE STEPS Displays the data points of a Window as thick vertical bars BARS grand 100 0 1 bars generates a 100 point series of random numbers and displays them as thick vertical bars Without a Window reference BARS is equivalent to the fourth mode of the F7 key or Graph Styles toolbar button and SETPLOTSTYLE 3 BARCTR BARGAP BARSTYLE LINES POINTS 57 See Also BARSTYLE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 58 SETPLOTSTYLE STEPS STICKS TABLEVIEW Sets the vertical reference of a 2D bar plot BARSTYLE win on_off win Optional A Window Defaults to the current Window on_off An integer
204. Corporation has been notified in advance of the possibility of such damage About This Manual This manual contains detailed descriptions of each command and function available at the Worksheet level Once you have read The DADiSP Worksheet User Manual and are familiar with the DADiSP environment you should rely on this manual for most of your day to day work The listing of Worksheet functions which appears starting on the next page is organized by the type of operation that each function or command performs The main body of the manual consists of an alphabetical listing of function definitions iii DADiSP Worksheet Function Categories 3D and 4D Graphics CONTOUR CONTOURSET DENSITY GETPALETTE HATCHCOLOR IGRID MAPPALETTE MOUSEROTATE PLOT3D ROTATE3D SETPALETTE SETPLOTMETHOD SETSHADING SETXPAL SGRID SHADEWITH SPIN WATERFALL WFSET XYZ Activex CREATEOBJECT GETOBJECT MSWORD MSWORD2 RELEASE WS2HTML XLCLEAR XLGET XLINIT XLPUT Display matrix as a contour plot Specify display attributes of contour plot Display matrix as a density plot Return a series of the color indices used in palette Set the color of 3D cross hatching Grid XYZ data using the inverse distance method Set color palette for density plot Rotate a 3 D plot with the mouse Plot table in true 3 D perspective Rotate a 3 D plot Define ordered list of shading colors Set plotting method Select the range of shading colors Set RGB value
205. DADiSP FUNCS A list box containing all the built in functions FUNCS displays GUI list of built in function names sorted alphabetically FUNCS does not display the arguments or function descriptions If an item is selected the help page of that item is opened FUNCS and BUILTINS are identical functions BUILTINS COMMANDS FUNCTIONS MACROS 281 FUNCTIONS Purpose Format See Also FWRITEA Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 282 Displays the list of all SPL functions that have been defined in the current Worksheet Lists function definitions and their arguments and allows functions to be created and edited FUNCTIONS DELALLFUNCTIONS DELFUN SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language SPLREAD SPLWRITE Writes a series as an ASCII file directly from the Worksheet without a file header FWRITEA filename col filename The name of the file to write in quotes col Optional Column number Defaults to 1 Nothing fwritea myoutput dat writes the contents of the current Window to an ASCII file named myoutput dat This file contains no header File must be opened with FOPEN before using FWRITEA FWRITEA operates like WRITEA once FOPEN is used to open the file See Also FCLOSE FOPEN FWRITEB WRITEA Purpose Writes a series to a binary file Format FWRITEB filename filetype byteswap series filename The name of the file to write in quotes filetype
206. DIAGONAL can be abbreviated DIAG EIGVAL EIGVEC MMULT DIRPATH Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also DISPLAY Purpose Format Returns the directory component of a path string DIRPATH path path Optional A string a full path string containing a directory component A string the directory name dirpath dsp system mac returns the directory component dsp DIRPATH is used internally to retrieve the last directory in file dialog boxes see system mac If the path string does not contain a directory component the current LABBOOK path is returned EVAL STRFIND STRREV SYSTEM MAC Displays a specified set of Windows in a Worksheet DISPLAY W1 Wn W1 Wn List of Windows to display 203 Example Ifa Worksheet contains 12 Windows display W1 W4 W7 W11 displays only Windows 1 2 3 4 7 and 11 Remarks Be aware that if anything other than two dots separates a defined range of Windows to display e g W1 W4 DADiSP does not perform the command Hidden Windows still automatically recalculate if they are effected by the calculation To redisplay all of the Windows use DISPLAYALL See Also DISPLAY ALL HIDE Purpose Displays all the Windows in a Worksheet Format DISPLAYALL Example displayall redisplays all Windows See Also DISPLAY HIDE Purpose Draws a line from the current cursor position to the specified point 204
207. Defaults to 0 the main diagonal An array consisting of the lower triangle of m where the other elements are zero W1 1 2 3 14 5 6 7 8 9 W2 tril Wl Remarks See Also TRIU Purpose Format Returns W2 1 0 0 4 5 O 7 8 9 W3 w tril Wl 1 W3 1 2 0 4 5 6 7 8 9 W4 tril Wl 1 v w4 0 0 0 4 0 O 7 8 OF TRIL m 1 is equivalent to LOTRIX m See TRIU to return the upper matrix COLNOS LOTRIX ROWNOS TRIU UPTRI UPTRIX Returns the upper triangle of a matrix TRIU m d m An array d Optional An integer the diagonal on and above which to include array elements Defaults to 0 the main diagonal An array consisting of the upper triangle of m where the other elements are zero 791 Example Wis 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 93 W2 triu Wl W2 l 2 3 0 5 6 0 0 9 3 triu Wl 1 3 0 2 3 0 0 6 0 0 OF 4 triu Wl 1 mee rary ar 4 5 6 0 8 9 Remarks TRIU m 1 is equivalent to UPTRIX m See TRIL to return the lower matrix See Also COLNOS LOTRIX ROWNOS TRIL UPTRI UPTRIX Purpose Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying unsigned byte data type Format UBYTE 792 Expansion Example Remarks See Also UINT Purpose Format Expansion Example Remarks writeb MYFILE UBYTE writes
208. Defaults to 1 phase Optional An operand to adjust the phase of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 0 Returns Example Remarks See Also A series gsqrwave 100 0 1 2 5 creates a square wave of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart This waveform will also be shifted by five x units the offset value on the x axis The values of this wave will be either at 1 0 or at zero The square wave is generated by calculating S sin i spacing frequency 2n phase and returns a step function with a line at 1 when S is negative and at 0 when S is positive See GRTSQR to generate a square wave with a specified rise time GTRIWAVE GTRIWAVE Purpose Format Returns Generates a triangular wave in accordance with the specified parameters GTRIWAVE points spacing frequency phase points An integer Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis frequency Optional An operand expressed in cycles per second to adjust the frequency of the waveform Defaults to 1 phase Optional An operand to adjust the phase of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 0 A series 359 Example Remarks See Also gtriwave 100 0 1 2 5 creates a triangular wave of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart This waveform will also be shifted by five x units the offset value on the x axis The values of this will vary between 1 0 and zero The tri
209. E 595 See Also RCEPS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 596 REPLICATE RESHAPE SPECGRAM UNRAVEL WATERFALL Calculates the real cepstrum RCEPS s n Ss n An input series or array Optional An integer the number of samples to use Ifn gt length s the series is zero padded Defaults to length s A real series or array W1 W2 W3 W4 gtri 100 1 1 100 3 W1l delay W1 60 2 rceps W1 rceps W1 512 W2 adds a synthesized echo at 60 seconds to the data of W1 W3 displays a small peak at t 60 indicating the presence of the echo W4 performs the same calculation with the data padded to 512 samples The complex cepstrum of a series is essentially ifft 10og fft s However the complex log calculation requires the evaluation of the continuous phase component RCEPS ignores the phase component and calculates real ifft log mag fft s CCEPS ICCEPS RDERIV Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also READA Purpose Calculates the derivative using a right to left algorithm RDERIV series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table rderiv W3 creates a new series from the contents of Window 3 and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the slope of the series in Window 3 at that point The
210. E GAMMLN Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GAMMP Purpose Format Returns Computes the natural log of the gamma function GAMMLN is often used in place of GAMM when the value of GAMM becomes very large GAMMLN expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table gammIn 1 2 3 returns a series 3 4136E 011 7 8188E 011 6 9315E 001 the natural log of GAMM In practice it is often advisable to recast equations to use GAMMLN instead of GAMM as the GAMM value of arguments greater than 171 62 exceeds the maximum floating point representation GAMM GAMMA Computes the incomplete gamma function GAMMP expr value expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table value A scalar A scalar series or table 291 Remarks GAMMP a x 1 GAMMQ lt a x See Also GAMMA GAMMQ GAMMQ Purpose Computes the complementary incomplete gamma function Format GAMMQ expr value expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table value Ascalar Returns A scalar series or table Remarks GAMMQ lt a x 1 GAMMP a x See Also GAMMA GAMMP GETARGV Purpose Returns a variable argument from an SPL routine Format GETARGV n n An integer specifying the index of the variable argument Returns The value of the variable input argument 292 Example maximum
211. EMNPUT ITEMPOS NUMITEMS SERCOUNT 415 ITEMCOUNT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 416 Returns the number of columns in an item ITEMCOUNT Window item Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 W1 gsin 100 01 W2 gcos 100 01 W3 xy W1 W2 itemcount W3 1 returns the value 2 There are two columns in an XY plot W4 errorbar W1 3 stdev W1 Wl stdev W1 Wl stdev W1 W1 3 stdev W1 1 itemcount W4 1 returns the value 4 If the specified item number is larger than the number of items in the window ITEMCOUNT returns 0 COL ITEMCOL ITEMNPUT ITEMPOS NUMITEMS SERCOUNT ITEMNPUT Purpose Format Remarks See Also ITEMPOS Purpose Format Resets the item cursor position ITEMNPUT Window item Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 If the index is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the index is greater than the number of columns in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of columns in the item COLNPUT COLPOS CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON ITEMCOL ITEMCOUNT ITEMPOS Returns the item number of the last position of the crosshair cursor in a window ITEMPOS Window cursor_num W
212. END CNTL_HOME CNTL_LF CNTL_PG_DN CNTL_PG_UP CNTL_UP CR DEL DN END ESC F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 HOME INS LF PG_DN PG_UP RT SP UP Description Backspace deletes previous character Cntrl Down Arrow Cntrl End Cntrl Home Cntrl Left Arrow Cntrl Page Down Cntrl Page Up Cntrl Up Carriage Return Enter Delete Down Arrow End Escape F1 Function Key F2 Function Key F3 Function Key F4 Function Key F5 Function Key F6 Function Key F7 Function Key F8 Function Key F9 Function Key F10 Function Key Home Insert Left Arrow Page Down Page Up Right Arrow Spacebar Up Arrow Comment 117 See Also COMMAND FILE FUNCTIONS Discussion of Command Files in DADiSP Worksheet Manual COMMANDS Purpose Format Returns See Also Returns a list of commands available from the Worksheet level These include all the commands for creating and managing Macro and Function definitions COMMANDS A list of commands available from the Worksheet level FUNCS FUNCTIONS MACROS COMMENT Purpose Format Example 118 Sets the comment for the first series in a Window COMMENT Window string Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window string Any string of characters enclosed in quotes comment W4 Data as of getdate places a string similar to Data as of 1 11 2003 into the current comment field Press F2 to see the n
213. EVAL Purpose Displays four or five series of data as errorbars ERRORBAR bartop sticktop stickbottom barbottom midpoint tees bartop Any series or rectangular table of four or more columns sticktop Any series or expression evaluating to a series stickbottom Any series or expression evaluating to a series barbottom Any series or expression evaluating to a series midpoint Optional Any series or expression evaluating to a series tees Optional An Integer 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to OFF WIS Ls 25 By 4 SS Ay Bey 28 ey 504 W2 errorbar 1 1 W1 1 2 W1 0 8 W1 0 9 W1 1 W1 is a series of 10 observations therefore this example plots ten errorbars with tees background filled The ordering of the data series is important The observations in STICKTOP should all be greater than the corresponding observations in STICKBOTTOM and so on The MIDPOINT series determines how the bars will be filled Each observation of MIDPOINT should range between the corresponding observations in BARTOP and BARBOTTOM The region of the bar from BARTOP to MIDPOINT is color filled The region from MIDPOINT to BARBOTTOM is background filled If MIDPOINT is missing or equal to BARTOP the bar is completely filled If MIDPOINT is equal to BARBOTTOM the bar is completely empty All data series must have the same length Evaluates its input argument 223 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also EVAL string
214. Example Remarks See Also A series W1 gsqrwave 100 01 4 W2 shp W1 10 Highpass filters the squarewave in W1 with a cutoff frequency of 10 Hz The sample rate is set to the sample rate of the input data gsqrwave 100 01 4 1 27 0 85 0 64 0 4 02 0 2 T T T T T T T T T 0 8 0 6 i I 0 4 4 in a A 0 24 A E 0 24 04 0 6 ji 0 84 The single pole analog highpass filter is implemented in the digital domain using the impulse invariance technique HR SLP 713 SIGN Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SINFIT Purpose Format Returns 714 Returns 1 0 or 1 based on the sign of the input SIGN x x An input real complex or series A real complex or series sign 10 0 10 returns 1 0 1 If the input is complex SIGN returns x mag x For example sign 3 4i returns 0 6 0 81 ABS MAGNITUDE Fits y x A B sin C x D using the FFT SINFIT s fit coef SINFIT s s The input series or array A series the fitted sin curve Example Remarks fit coef sinfit s returns both the fit and the coefficients as a series Wl 5 3 gsin 100 01 4 pi gnorm 100 W2 sinfit wl overp W1 Tred overplots the original data with the calculat
215. FACTORS is particularly useful in determining whether a series length is prime The FFT algorithm runs slowest on series with prime lengths FFT LENGTH Closes a file that was opened using FOPEN FCLOSE filename filename The name of the file to close in quotes A 1 if the close was successful otherwise it returns 0 237 Example Remarks See Also fclose myfile closes myfile an open file and displays a 1 at the bottom of the screen if the close is completed successfully For all files which were opened with FOPEN it is highly recommended to perform an FCLOSE or FCLOSEALL prior to exiting DADiSP FCLOSEALL FOPEN FCLOSEALL Purpose Format Returns See Also FCONV Purpose Format 238 Closes all files that were opened using FOPEN FCLOSEALL A 1 ifall files were closed successfully FCLOSE FOPEN Performs convolution using the FFT method FCONV s1 s2 sl A series table or expression resulting in a series or table s2 A series table or expression resulting in a series or table Returns Example Remarks See Also A series W1 gsin 1000 001 2 W2 gsin 1000 001 4 4 W3 conv W1 W2 W4 fconv W1 W2 performs the convolution of two sinewaves W3 performs direct convolution in the time domain and W4 performs the same convolution using the FFT method FCONV performs convolution by computing the FFTs of the input series This method is
216. G is useful in SPL functions and Command Files for requesting user input See Also INPUT MESSAGE Purpose Returns the type of symbol used for the specified series Format GETSYMBOL Window ser_num Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window ser num Optional Series number Defaults to the series in focus Returns An integer specifying the symbol from the list below Description No symbol Box Triangle Upside Down Triangle x Empty Up Arrow Empty Down Arrow Filled Up Arrow Filled Down Arrow Empty Diamond Empty Square Empty Triangle Empty Upside Down Triangle Circle Empty Circle Macro Equivalent DOTS SQUARE TRIANGLE INV_TRIANGLE CROSS XCROSS CLR_UP_ARROW CLR_DN_ARROW UP_ARROW DN_ARROW CLR_DIAMOND CLR_SQUARE CLR_TRIANGLE CLR_INV_TRI CIRCLE CLR_CIRCLE Integer Value oO ON DOA FR WYN gt 11 12 13 15 315 Example See Also GETTIME Purpose Format Returns Example 316 W1 gcos 100 01 W2 gsin 100 01 W3 Wl setsymbol 2 overlay W2 red setsymbol 4 2 1 10 getsymbol W3 returns the value 2 focus 2 getsymbol W3 returns the value 4 SETPLOTSTYLE SETSYMBOL Returns the system time or the time associated with a Window series GETTIME series usefmt series Optional Any series If no series is specified the system time is returned usefmt Optional An integer Use time format flag 0 use standard format d
217. GETZB Return the bottom z coordinate of a Window GETZT Return the top z coordinate of a Window GETZTIC Return the z axis tic interval of a Window IDX Return the indices of a series or array ISCOMPLX Return 1 if input parameter is complex ISEMPTY Return 1 if the input series is empty ISFUNC Return 1 if input is a loaded SPL function else 0 XXV ISINF ISNAN ISREAL ISSTR ISUNIT ITEMCOL ITEMCOUNT ITEMTYPE LENGTH NUMCOLS NUMITEMS NUMROWS NUMVWINS NUMWINDOWS OBJECTLIST PARENTS PICKUNITS RATE REALMAX REALMIN ROWNOS SERCOUNT SERSIZE SIGN SIZE STRCOLOR TOC UNITS WINSTATUS WRITECNF XOFFSET XTIC YTIC ZTIC Real Time RTREAD RTSPIN RTTINIT RTTPAUSE RTTTERM RTWRITE XXVi Return 1 for each element that is infinite Return 1 for each element that is a NA value Return 1 if input parameter is real Return 1 if the input is a string Return 1 if string is a recognized engineering unit else 0 Return the column number where the specified item starts Return the number of columns in an item Return the item type of a composite series Return length of series Return the number of columns in a Window DADiSP expression Count number of items in window or matrix Return the number of rows in a Window or DADiSP expression Return the number of displayed Windows in the Worksheet Return total number of windows in Worksheet Return a string of available Labbooks Worksheets Datasets Return number of parents of the window Se
218. IG EIGVAL MMULT NBEIGVAL NBEIGVEC 215 ENDFLIP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also EPS Purpose Format 216 Pads the ends of a series with endpoint reflections ENDFLIP s padlen s An input series padlen Optional An integer the length of segment with which to pad Defaults to length s 10 A series W1 integ gnorm 1000 1 1000 W2 endflip W1l 200 overp W1 Ired The simulated data in W1 is padded at the beginning and end with segments of length 200 that are reflections of the beginning and end segments The original data is overplotted to provide a comparison ENDFLIP is useful in FIR filtering operations where the input data is padded at the beginning and end to diminish the ramp up and ramp down transients implicit in the filtering process The transients occur because the input data is assumed to be zero prior to the start and after the end of the data See PADFILT for more information FIR PADFILT ZEROFLIP Returns the minimum positive real value such that 1 0 eps 1 0 EPS Returns Example Remarks See Also EQUAL Purpose Format A real such that 1 0 eps 1 0 1 0 eps 1 0 returns 0 0 1 0 eps 2 1 0 returns 1 0 Consider the following one line statement j 0 epsl 1 while epsl 1 gt 1 epsl 2 j epsl 2 After the calculation j 53 epsl eps 2 2204E 016 The configuration parameter DEFA
219. IN ROTATE3D XYZ SPLCOMPILE Purpose Format Example Compiles an SPL function file into an OPL file SPLCOMPILE filename overwrite expand load verbose filename String The filename of the SPL file in quotes Function form overwrite Optional An integer 0 do not replace macro of same name 1 replace macro if it exists Defaults to 1 expand Optional An integer 0 do not include source code in the OPL file 1 include source code Defaults to 0 load Optional An integer 0 do not load function into memory 1 load function into memory Defaults to 0 verbose Optional An integer 0 do not provide error messages 1 display compile errors Defaults to 1 SPLCOMPILE filename filename The filename of the SPL file without quotes Command form splcompile myfuncs spl compiles myfuncs sp1 and creates the file myfuncs op1 The OPL file does not include the source code and is not loaded into memory 729 Remarks See Also SPLINE Purpose Format Returns Example 730 splcompile myfuncs spl1 same as above The command form is easier to type when using the command line SPLCOMPILE only creates OPL files By default it does not read the functions into the Worksheet Any errors found during compile are written to the ASCII text file filename err The command form does not accept optional arguments FUNCTIONS SPLLOAD SPLREAD SPLWRITE Performs cubic
220. INREG LINREG2 LSINFIT PFIT POLYFIT POLYGRAPH POWFIT SINFIT SINTREND SPLINE SPLINE2 Fit y x A exp B x using linearization Perform two dimensional linear interpolation Fit a line to a series using the end points Fit a line to series Regress two series Least Squares method for fitting sine curves of known frequency Least Squares Polynomial fitting with error statistics Return polynomial coefficients Graph polynomial fit Fit y x A xB using linearization Fit y x A B sin C x D using the FFT Fit y x A B x C sin D x E using the FFT Cubic spline interpretation Perform two dimensional cubic spline fitting Data Input Output Functions EXPORTFILE EXPORTWORKSHEET IMPORTFILE IMPORTWORKSHEET INPORT MULTIREADB OUTPORT READA READB READBMP READMAT READTABLE READTB RUN SHELL WRITEA WRITEB WRITEBMP WRITEHED WRITETABLE WRITETB Export a DADiSP series to a data file Save the current Worksheet to an external Worksheet file dwk Import a data file Load an external Worksheet file dwk Retrieve 1 2 or 4 bytes from a port Read a multi channel Binary data file into a Worksheet Output 1 2 or 4 bytes to a port Read an ASCII file into a Worksheet Read a Binary data file into a Worksheet Read a Microsoft BMP bitmap file Read a binary Matlab mat file with colormap Read an ASCII table file Read a binary table from a file Run an external program from a Worksheet Exit
221. ISER HAMMING HANNING PSD SPECTRUM WINFUNC Returns the Kronecker tensor product of two arrays KRON a b a An array b An array An array aS tg 2E T L 2F b 10 20 30 40 50 60 c kron a b c 10 20 20 40 30 40 60 80 90 60 100 120 10 20 20 40 30 40 60 80 50 60 100 120 ANAK A Remarks See Also LABEL Purpose Format Example See Also LAYOUT Purpose Form numrows a andn numcols b kron the following product Lally Ld by abl 2 Ds eer abl a 2 1 b alz 2 b alz a m 1 b alm 2 b alm Matrix Multiply Matrix Power Sets the label for a Window LABEL Window string b returns the array formed by b b b Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window string Character string enclosed in quotes label W4 strcat Acquisition Date getdate places Acquisition Date 11 11 11 into the label of Window 4 if today s date is November 11 2011 GETLABEL Arranges Worksheet Windows into the specified number of columns and rows 425 Format Example Remarks See Also LDERIV Purpose Format Returns Example 426 LAYOUT cols rows cols An integer Number of Windows oriented horizontally in new layout rows An integer Number of Windows oriented vertically in new layout
222. ITHMETIC 4 ARITHMETIC 4 ARITHMETIC ABS ALL ANY AVGS BESTPOW2 CEILING COLPROD CURRENT DEG E EXP FACTORS FIND FINDMAX FINDMIN FINDVAL FIX FLOOR INT INTERP2 LN LOG LOG10 MAXIDX Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division Exponentiation Absolute value Return 1 if all elements of the input are non zero Return 1 if any element of the input is non zero Average of n series Find the power of 2 greater than or equal to the input value or length of the input series Round to closest integer Calculate the product of each column of an array Reference series in current window Return degrees per radian Euler s number e Exponential base e Return the prime factors of a scalar Return indices of non zero elements or NA if none found Return X and Y value of the maximum of a series Return X and Y value of the minimum of a series Return X and Y values of a series from a specified Y value Round a value towards zero Truncate to closest integer below Cast scalar as integer Perform two dimensional linear interpolation Logarithm base e Calculate natural logarithm Logarithm base 10 Find the index of the maximum value of a series xxvii MAXLOC MAXVAL MINIDX MINLOC MINVAL MOD NEGATE NIBBLE PHI PI PROD REDUCE REM REPLACE ROOTS ROUND RTHROOT SQRT SUM SUMS VMAX VMIN wo Find the location of the maximum value of a series Return the maximum of one or two input argumen
223. Ifthe sum of delta and cursor location is greater than the number of points in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of points in the item See Also COLNMOVE COLNPUT COLPOS CURMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON CURNPUT Purpose Resets the cursor position 144 Format Remarks See Also CURPOS Purpose Format CURNPUT Window index item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window index An integer The index in the item item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a column cursor in the item Defaults to 1 If the index is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the index is greater than the number of points in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of points in the item COLNMOVE COLNPUT COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON Returns the last position of the crosshair cursor in a Window CURPOS Window item cursor_num Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window item Optional An integer specifying the item number i e series in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor num Optional An integer specifying the cursor number 1 First Cursor default 2 Second Cursor 145 Returns Example Remarks See Also 146 The point or index number in the specified series or
224. LL with any files opened with FOPEN before exiting DADiSP The rb and wb modes are required under Windows to prevent the FREADB and FWRITEB functions from translating a CR into a CR LF when reading or writing a binary file 1 e these modes prevent a 10 from being translated into a 10 and a 13 See Also FOR Purpose Format Example FCLOSE FCLOSEALL Performs FOR Loop iterative statements FOR expr1 expr2 expr3 statements FOR expr1 expr2 expr3 statements expri An expression initializing the counter variable expr2 A conditional expression used to test the counter variable before each iteration If non zero statement is evaluated expr3 An expression evaluated after each iteration of statement statements Any valid DADiSP statements separated by semicolons The statements to execute after each iteration for j 1 j lt 10 j echo j sets j equal to 1 and increments j by 1 until j equals 10 while echoing j to the status line The SPL function WinSines WinSines local i N N numwin for i 1 7 lt N i eval sprintf W d gsin 100 01 d i i increments local variable i and fills each Window in the Worksheet with a sinewave of the same frequency as the Window number Note since i is declared as a local it does not conflict with the built in constant i sqrt 1 269 Remarks See Also 270 The FOR function uses the same an
225. LOTRI LOTRIX LU MAGIC MDIV MMULT NBEIGVAL NBEIGVEC NORM NULL NUMCOLS NUMROWS ORTH OUTERPROD PARTPROD PINV QR RANK REPMAT ROWNOS SCHUR SIZE SVD TRACE TRANSPOSE TRIL TRIU ULU UPTRI UPTRIX USCHUR XX Reverse the elements of each column of an array Find the Hessenberg form of a matrix Apply REDUCE associatively Matrix Inner Product Invert a matrix Return the Kronecker tensor product of two arrays Lower triangular matrix in LU decomposition Return the lower triangle of a matrix including the main diagonal Return the lower triangle of a matrix excluding the main diagonal LU decomposition Create an NxN magic square Matrix Division Matrix Multiplication Get Eigenvalues without balancing step Get Eigenvectors without balancing step Calculate the norm of a series or array Compute an orthogonal basis for the Null space of an array Return the number of columns in a Window or DADiSP expression Return the number of rows in a Window or DADiSP expression Compute an orthonormal basis of an array using SVD Outer Product of two vectors Partial Product of two vectors Calculate the pseudo inverse of a matrix using SVD QR decomposition Estimate the number of independent rows or columns of an array Replicate an array down and across Return an array of row numbers Generate the SCHUR form of a matrix Return a 2 point series containing the dimensions of an array Generate Singular Value Decomp
226. Left justify Explicit sign or before number 0 If width is prefixed with 0 zeros are added until the minimum width is reached If 0 and appear the 0 is ignored If 0 is specified with an integer format i u x X 0 d the 0 is ignored blank Insert blank before positive number When used with the o x or X format the prefixes any nonzero output value with 0 0x or 0X When used with the e E of f format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases When used with the g or G format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases and prevents the truncation of trailing zeros Width is an optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output Precision is an optional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed for all or part of the output field or minimum number of digits printed for integer values Types Behavior d I u 0 x X Precision specifies the minimum number of digits to be printed If number of digits in the argument is less than precision the output value is padded on the left with zeros The value is not truncated when the number of digits exceeds precision 736 Returns A string e E g G Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point The last printed digit is rounded Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point If a decimal point ap
227. MINATE chan1 chan2 chan3 chanN chanN An integer list of DDE channel numbers Returns 176 Channel number of the last terminated conversation Example Remarks See Also chan ddeinit Excel Sheetl dderequest chan R1C1 ddeterm chan establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cell in row 1 column 1 as a string and then terminates the conversation ddeterm 1 3 2 terminates the conversations with channel numbers 1 3 and 2 All DDE conversations that were initiated by DADiSP are automatically terminated upon exit from DADiSP DDEINITIATE DDEUNADVISE Purpose Format Returns Example Ends a previous DDEADVISE operation DDEUNADVISE chan item chan An integer specifying the DDE channel number item A string specifying the item A 1 if successful otherwise it returns 0 indicating an error chan ddeinit Excel Sheet1 ddeadvise chan R1C1 R100C1 perform other operations ddeunadvise chan R1C1 R100C1 establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cells in row 1 column 1 through row 100 column 1 as a series in the current window Whenever a cell changes the new series is appended to the existing series Lastly the link is terminated 177 Remarks See Also DDEUNADVISE only terminates the advise operation the DDE channel is still valid for other DDE operations DDEADVISE DDELINK DDEU
228. MOVE LINEDRAW Purpose Format 442 Draws a polyline between specified coordinates LINEDRAW color style target match focus width x1 yl xn yn color Optional An integer or macro color name e g RED specifying line color Defaults to color of primary series style Optional An integer specifying line style Defaults to solid Valid arguments are 1 Solid 2 Dashed 3 Dotted target Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the line to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS _WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area 4 GLASS _ WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area Example Remarks match Optional An integer that sets the line color to match the color of the selected overplot Defaults to 1 primary series 1 implies use color parameter focus Optional An integer specifying 1 based focus offset for PAPER annotations width Optional An integer specifying the line width in pixels Defaults to 1 xl yl xn yn Real number coordinates representing endpoints of line segments gtri 100 01 2 linedraw purple 2 1 1 0 09 0 04 0 9 0 5 creates a purple
229. MPORTFILE READA READB READTABLE WRITEA WRITEB Writes a binary table WRITETB filename type data filename A string A filename in quotes type Aninteger The file data type Valid inputs are Returns Example Remarks See Also Type Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 1038 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 104 307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 4 byte Unsigned O to 4 294 967 295 Integer data A series or array Nothing writetb bin dat SINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 mydata readtb bin dat writes the 2x3 array t 1 2 3 4 5 63 to the file bin dat as signed integers and reads the array into the variable mydata WRITETB does not currently handle DELTAX XOFFSET or Units READA READB READTB WRITEA WRITEB 829 WS2HTML Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also XCONF Purpose Format 830 Converts the current Worksheet to HTML using MS Word and ActiveX WS2HTML fname fname Optional A string containing the filename in quotes Defaults to dadisp htm An HTML file suitable for the Web ws2html converts the current Worksheet to the HTML file named dadisp htm The conversion is accom
230. Meaning Double Quote Backslash ddd d is an octal digit ASCII character with corresponding octal ASCII code A back slash followed by any other character simply writes the character FCLOSE FGETS FOPEN STRESCAPE Reads an ASCII data file and loads it directly into the current Window FREADA filename chan filename The name of the file to read in quotes chan Optional Channel number Defaults to 0 A scalar or series 273 Example Remarks See Also FREADB Purpose Format 274 If the file sonar dat contained the following data OANANNDNBRWN KR fopen sonar dat rt freada sonar dat 2 reads the third channel and returns the following series 3 6 9 File must be opened with FOPEN before using FREADA FREADA is like READA once FOPEN is used to open the file FREADA assumes multiple channels are interlaced FCLOSE FOPEN FREADB READA Reads a binary data file and returns the values as a series FREADB filename filetype length byteswap filename The name of the file in which to read in quotes filetype The binary format type of the data file described by either its name or integer code Valid arguments are Returns Example Name Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Sign
231. NDN SEEDRAND Generates a black amp white colormap GRAY len len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap A table of RGB triples suitable for the SETCOLORMAP function clen length getcolormap density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen gray creates a table of 32 x N where N colormap length RBG values and displays the resulting colors The resulting image is a vertical plot of colors ranging from black lowest to white highest 347 Remarks See Also GREATER Purpose Format 348 density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen gray 250 4 200 4 150 5 100 4 50 4 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 gray by itself sets the colormap and shading a gray or setcolormap gray returns the RGB values In this case use SETSHADING to make the new colormap take effect on an existing density or 2D plot COOL HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING SHOWCMAP Determines the greater of two expressions GREATER expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Returns Example Remarks See Also A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the same type as the higher of the two expressions 1 TRUE 0 FALSE Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or bo
232. NERPROD OUTERPROD ROWREDUCE Causes the entire Worksheet to be re calculated REFRESH Refresh re calculates each Window in the correct dependency order Window formula which have the form DATASET VER SERIES e g RUN1 1 ANALOGI1 are not re evaluated with REFRESH If you want these Windows to re evaluated with REFRESH change the Window formula to load the series with the LOADSERIES command e g LOADSERIES RUN1 1 ANALOG1 See Also REGION Purpose Format Returns Example See Also UPDATE Copies a rectangular region from a table REGION table row rowlen col collen nopad table Any table or expression resulting in a table row An integer Number of first row of data to copy rowlen An integer Number of rows to copy If nopad 0 the rows are padded with zeros as needed col An integer Number of first column of data to copy collen An integer Number of columns to copy If nopad 0 the columns are padded with zeros as needed nopad Optional An integer the zero padding flag 0 pad with zeros 1 do not pad with zeros Defaults to 0 A table WI 44 25 Ar 6 8h 8 10 12 14 14 16 18 20 region Wl 3 1 2 2 returns the table 16 18 MACROS in matrix mac READTABLE 609 RELEASE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 610 Releases an ActiveX server object RELEASE object object A handle to an ActiveX ob
233. NLINK Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 178 Ends a previous DDELINK operation DDEUNLINK app topic item DDEUNLINK app topic item app A string specifying the application name topic A string specifying the topic name item A string specifying the item to retrieve A 1 if successful otherwise it returns 0 indicating an error ddelink Excel Sheet1 R1C1 R100C1 perform other operations ddeunlink Excel Sheet1 R1C1 R100C1 establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cells in row 1 column 1 through row 100 column 1 as a series in the current window Whenever a cell changes the new series is appended to the existing series Lastly the link is terminated The app optional topic and optional item strings can also be placed in one string of the following format app topic item For example DDEUNLINK Excel Sheet1 R1C1 R100C1 DDEADVISE DDEGETDATA DDELINK DEBUG Purpose Format Returns Example Debugger summary DEBUG Nothing displays this help page Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y y x x y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y Now consider the following debugger session Q bstop myfunc bcont Q ycall 10 dbstatus dbstack locals d bup ocals A breakpoint is set in the routine myfunc
234. ONFIRM 0 DO NOT CONFIRM Defaults to 1 Use exit 0 to exit DADiSP without prompting Raises the constant e 2 71828 to the specified power 225 Format Returns Example See Also EXP expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table exp W2 creates a new series from the contents of Window 2 and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be e raised to the value of the corresponding point in Window 2 exp 1 returns the scalar 2 71828182 LN LOG EXPANDH Purpose Format Remarks See Also 226 Expands a series horizontally in the current Window EXPANDH factor factor Optional A ratio of the current series horizontal dimension to the desired dimension Defaults to 2 3 which makes the series appear 3 2 of its original size To return the Window to its original display use the reciprocal ratio of your original argument COMPRESSH with the same argument or press CTRL HOME The default argument accomplishes the same result as pressing CTRL when the current Window is active COMPRESSH COMPRESSV EXPANDV EXPANDV Purpose Format Remarks See Also EXPFIT Purpose Format Returns Example Expands a series vertically in the current Window EXPANDV factor factor Optional A ratio of the current series vertical dimension to the desired di
235. ORMAL can be abbreviated GNORM See Also GRANDOM HISTOGRAM PDFNORM PROBN RAND RANDN SEEDRAND GNUMBER Purpose s consisting of a range of numbers Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GOTO Purpose Format 342 GNUMBER start end increment start end increment A series Areal Starting value for the range Areal Ending value for the range Optional A real Step size for the range Defaults to 1 0 gnumber 1 5 returns a series 1 2 3 4 5 gnumber 1 5 8 returns a series 1 1 8 2 6 3 4 4 2 5 This is equivalent to 1 0 8 gnumber start end inc can be implemented as gline int end start inc 1l 1 inc start Range Specifier GLINE Allows branching to labeled statements in SPL functions GOTO identifier identifier A string which is used as the target of a GOTO 5 Example See Also In an SPL file use the GOTO to jump to statements labeled by the identifier TestVal a if a gt 1000 goto BadValue return 1 BadValue return 99 The SPL function TestVal returns a if the value is less than 1000 and returns 99 if the value is greater than or equal to 1000 BREAK IF SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language WHILE GOTOURL Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Starts Web browser and opens the specified URL GOTOURL url url URL string in quotes got
236. Optional An integer the number of output samples defaults to 2048 rate Optional A real the sample rate of data Defaults to 1 0 whole Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 evaluate the transform only over the upper half of the unit circle 1 evaluate the transform over the entire unit circle A complex series Wl zfreq 1 1 0 5 0 6 setxlog wl 1 setylog wl 1 gridsol gridhv scales 2 zfreq 1 1 0 5 0 6 No Units 0 1 ie ee ee 0 01 _ _ 0 001 0 01 0 1 0 3 Hertz 853 Remarks 854 W1 contains 2048 uniformly spaced samples of the frequency response of the Z transform 1 EA a e a a 1 0 5 z 1 0 6 z 2 The frequency samples range from 0 to 0 5 Hz W2 zfreq 1 0 5 0 6 Since the leading pole coefficient is not 1 0 the coefficients are assumed to be in difference equation form i e the coefficients represent the system y n 1 0 x n 0 5 y n 1 0 6 y n 2 The Z transform of this difference equation is identical to the previous example so ZFREQ yields the same result W1 zfreq 1 1 0 5 0 6 1024 1 0 1 Same as the first example except the 1024 samples of the frequency response are evaluated over the entire unit circle i e the frequency samples range from 0 0 to 1 0 Hz ZFREQ uses the FFT method to evaluate N uniformly spaced samples over the unit circle of a Z transform in direct form Y z bli
237. PLICATE RESCALE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Linearly rescales an input series RESCALE xi yl yh xl xh clip xi Input series or scalar yl Optional A real low value output range Defaults to 0 0 yh Optional A real high value output range Defaults to 1 0 xl Optional A real low value input range Defaults to minval xi xh Optional A real high value input range Defaults to maxval xi clip Optional An integer 1 clip input to xl and xh 0 do not clip Defaults to 1 A series or real rescale 10 1 1 0 100 returns 0 8 the corresponding output for an input value of 10 0 on a 0 to 100 input range and a corresponding 1 0 to 1 0 output range rescale 0 100 returns a series ranging from 0 to 1 This is equivalent to rescale 0 100 0 1 0 100 rescale 0 100 5 5 returns a series ranging from 5 to 5 This is equivalent to rescale 0 100 5 5 0 100 rescale 0 100 5 5 200 200 returns a series ranging from 0 to 2 5 By default RESCALE automatically clips out of range input values RESCALE uses LINSCALE to linearly convert the input values 619 SEE Also BITSCALE LINSCALE QUANTIZE RESETMAP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 620 Sets color shading to a specific range RESETMAP cmap lo hi cmap Optional An array specifying an RGB colormap Defaults to the current colormap lo Optional
238. R MAKECART MAKEPOLAR MAX MIN Function EQUAL NOTEQUAL AND OR XOR FLIPFLOP ATAN2 BITAND BITLSHIFT BITRSHIFT BITOR MOD BITXOR BITCOMP MAKECART MAKEPOLAR MAX MIN Description equal to not equal to logical and logical or logical exclusive or dual pad flip flop inverse tangent bit and bit shift left bit shift right bit or modulo bit exclusive or bit complement convert to cartesian convert to polar maximum minimum Interpolates XYZ data to arbitrary XY coordinates using the inverse distance method Format INVDISTANCE xy z ri weights radius xy A2 column series X horizontal and Y vertical input values Zz A single column series the Z input height at coordinates X Y ri A 2 column series the desired output XY coordinates weights Optional Any series or expression evaluating to a series containing the weights of distance function Defaults to 0 0 1 1 1 radius Optional A real number representing the maximum radius to include in the interpolation Defaults to all 401 Returns Example Remarks 402 A series the interpolated Z heights for the specified output coordinates xi grand 100 1 2 1 yi grand 100 1 2 1 zi cos xi yi x y fxyvals 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 xo x yo yl zl invdistance ravel xi yi zi ravel xo yo z2 invdistance ravel xi yi zi ravel xo yo 0 1 W1 xyz xi yi zZi points s
239. ROW Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Produces a table of the n th point of each column from a given table ROW table rownum table A table or expression resulting in a table rownum An integer Row number A row row W1 3 returns a row containing the elements in the third row of the table in Window 1 transpose row W1l 3 converts the row into a column of data To perform series operations on a single row of data first use the TRANSPOSE function to convert the row into a column or series To select more than one row of data use the REGION function COL REGION TRANSPOSE ROWLAYOUT Purpose Format 630 Arranges Worksheet Windows into the indicated number of columns per row ROWLAYOUT col1 col2 col3 coln coln An integer Number of columns for row n Example rowlayout 1 3 2 creates three rows of Windows where the first row has column the second row has three columns and the last row has two columns See Also COLLAYOUT LAYOUT SETALLWMARGIN ROWNOS Purpose Returns an array of row numbers Format ROWNOS m m An array Returns An array of size m Example W1 ones 3 W2 rownos W1 w2 1 1 1 cy aay ame a a toy Og OPT W1 W2 zeros 3 2 rownos W1 N W2 1 1 TLS REY 13 5 34 Remarks ROWNOS is used by several of the matrix dissection routines to select specific regions of an ar
240. Returns A table of RGB triples suitable for the SETCOLORMAP function Example clen length getcolormap density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen copper density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen copper 250 4 200 4 150 5 100 4 50 5 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 creates a table of 32 x N where N colormap length RBG values and displays the resulting colors The resulting image is a vertical plot of colors ranging from brown lowest to white highest 133 Remarks See Also copper by itself sets the colormap and shading a copper or setcolormap copper returns the RGB values In this case use SETSHADING to make the new colormap take effect on an existing density or 2D plot COOL GRAY HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING SHOWCMAP COPYDATA Purpose Format Example 134 Copies the data from a DADiSP Window into the Microsoft Windows clipboard COPYDATA Window COPYDATA series COPYDATA text Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window if series or text not specified series Optional series text Optional string copydata W4 copies the series in W4 into the clipboard as ASCII and also copies the plot of the series as a bitmap and metafile copydata integ gnorm 100 1 copies the generated series to the clipboard as ASCII data Remarks See Also copydata clipboard text copies the strin
241. SINH Generate Hyperbolic ArcSine GATAN Generate Arctangent GATANH GCOS GCOSH GCOT GCOTH GCSC GCSCH GSEC GSECH GSIN GSINC GSINH GTAN GTANH Generate Hyperbolic ArcTangent Generate Cosine Generate Hyperbolic Cosine Generate Cotangent Generate Hyperbolic Cotangent Generate Cosecant Generate Hyperbolic Cosecant Generate Secant Generate Hyperbolic Secant Generate Sine Generate SINC function sin x x Generate Hyperbolic Sine Generate Tangent Generate Hyperbolic Tangent Window Sizing amp Layout ADDWINDOW COLLAYOUT REMOVEWINDOW GETWSIZE LAYOUT MOVEWIN NEATEN ROWLAYOUT SETALLWMARGIN SETWMARGIN SETWSIZE TILE Insert windows in worksheet Specify number of rows of windows per column Remove windows from Worksheet Get the window dimensions Specify number of rows and columns of windows Specify which corners of windows will move and resize Tile windows after resizing Specify number of columns of windows per row Set percentage of window for margin Specify window margin Change size of windows in worksheet Arrange the screen into equal sized windows Worksheet Control Semicolon Vertbar ADDWINDOW BEEP CALC CHILDREN CHKFILES XXXIV Combine several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole Combine several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole Insert windows in worksheet Turn Beep on of Turn worksheet calculations
242. Second 301 Remarks See Also FOCUS GETVUNITS SETHUNITS SETVUNITS UNITS Purpose Returns the label of the specified Window Format GETLABEL Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Returns A string Example getlabel W3 returns the label of the series in Window 3 Remarks If a label has not been set for the Window GETLABEL returns the Window formula See Also LABEL Purpose 302 Especially useful in custom menu and report panels When using GETHUNITS without the Window argument GETHUNITS returns the horizontal units of the series in focus Returns the current Labbook name Format GETLABNAME Returns A string Example strcat getlabpath getlabname returns the full path name of the current Labbook See Also GETHOME GETLABPATH GETWORKSHEETNAME Purpose Returns the directory of the current Labbook Format GETLABPATH Returns A string Example strcat My directory is getlabpath returns the statement My directory is C DSP or the directory of your Labbook See Also GETHOME GETLABNAME GETWORKSHEETNAME Purpose Returns information about a local variable 303 Format Example Remarks See Also GETLOCALVARIABLE variable_name element variable_name The name of the variable element Optional The element within the variable if it is a series Defaults to the entire series setlocalvariable A 25 41 33
243. See Also STRWIN Purpose Format Returns Example 760 Returns the time form of any integer number of seconds STRTOD seconds seconds An integer The number of seconds from which to calculate the time A string in hh mm ss format strtod 3660 returns 1 01 00 STRJUL Converts a Window argument into a string STRWIN Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A string strwin W9 produces the string W9 strceat strwin W5 is correct returns the string W5 is correct Remarks See Also SUM Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SUMS Purpose STRWIN can be useful when creating custom menus and input panels GETWNUM WINNAME Calculates the sum of a series SUM series series A series A real or complex scalar sum 1 10 returns 55 sum 1 10 i 1 10 returns 55 55i NA values in a series are skipped over by SUM MEAN PARTSUM SUMS Creates a series that is the arithmetic sum of the input series 761 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SVD Purpose Format 762 SUMS series1 seriesN seriesl seriesN Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table sums W1 W2 W6 W9 creates a new series by adding the series in Window 1 Window 2 Window 6 and Window 9 The result is placed in
244. Sinx sin interpolation of periodic band limited waveforms Design a digital filter from a set of analog zeros and poles Generated Series Range Specifier Generate a series consisting of a range of numbers Array Construction Create a series or multiple column array Window Assignment Assign a formula to a Window EYE Generate an identity matrix FXYVALS Generate 2D XY values GEXP Generate Exponential series GHAMMING Generate Hamming window GHANNING Generate Hanning window xvi GIMPULSE GKAISER GLINE GLN GLOG GLOG10 GNORMAL GNUMBER GRANDOM GRTSQR GSERIES GSQRT GSQRWAVE GTRIWAVE JN LINE LINSPACE LOGSPACE MESHGRID ONES PEAKS RAND RANDN SEEDRAND YN ZEROS Generate an impulse with an optional spacing and delay Generate Kaiser window Generate line Generate logarithmic base e series Generate logarithmic base e series Generate logarithmic base 10 series Generate normal series Generate a series consisting of a range of numbers Generate random series Generate a squarewave with a specified rise time Generate series from points Generate square root series Generate square wave Generate triangle wave Bessel function Generate a line Create a series of n equally spaced values from lo to hi inclusive Create a series of n log spaced values from 10 to 105i inclusive Create 2D XY values from X and Y input series Generate an array of all ones Generate a Gaussian function of two variables z f x
245. T objname objname A string the name of the ActiveX object A handle to the running object or 1 if an error occurs Word getobject word application Word visible 1 connects to the running MS word as an ActiveX server and makes Word visible 305 Remarks See Also GETOBJECT connects to a running ActiveX object as a server Once connected any methods or properties supported by the object can be invoked set or queried Use CREATEOBJECT to connect to a server that is not already running CREATEOBJECT GETPALETTE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 306 Returns a series that contains the color palette entries GETPALETTE Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A series of color indices If the palette in Window 2 is set to blue red green getpalette W2 returns the series 1 4 2 where 1 4 and 2 are the color indices of blue red green To set the palette of W3 to the same as that of W2 use the following command in W3 mappalette getpalette W2 Because GETPALETTE returns a series you should call this function from a Window other than the one specified as the function argument MAPPALETTE SETPALETTE GETPEAK Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Finds the peaks of a series or table GETPEAK series threshold width size padmode fillval series Any series multi series table or
246. TCOMPLEX expr expr A scalar series table or expression returning a scalar series or table A complex number If the imaginary part of the complex value is zero only the real part is returned W1 gline 10 1 5 2 i gline 10 1 5 8 castcomplex W1 returns the value 0 2 81 CASTCOMPLEX is helpful when writing SPL functions that require a specific type of input and you don t know whether the variable being passed into the function will be of that type If you pass CASTCOMPLEX a series it will only operate on the first point of the series If you pass CASTCOMPLEX a table it will only operate on the first point in the first column of the table CASTINTEGER CASTREAL CASTSERIES CASTSTRING CASTINTEGER Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Explicitly casts the input to an integer CASTINTEGER expr expr A scalar series table or expression returning a scalar series or table An integer castinteger 1 9 returns the integer 1 castinteger 2 2 returns the integer 2 castinteger 3 7 8i returns the integer 3 CASTINTEGER truncates real values to integers CASTINTEGER is helpful when writing SPL functions that require an explicit integer input and the type of the variable passed into the function may not be an integer If you pass CASTINTEGER a series it will only operate on the first point of the series Use INT FLOOR CEIL or ROUND to convert an entire series or
247. TRFTIME STRGET STRLEN STRLIST STRNUM STRREVERSE STRTOD STRWIN TODSTR TODMSECSTR TOLOWER TOUPPER Format a list of strings or scalars Find the ASCII code for the specified character Find the ASCII codes for the specified string Return the directory component of a path string Perform formatted output to a file Prompt for textual input via input panel with OK and Cancel buttons Test whether input string is a number Format a list of numbers Convert a string into a scalar Convert a string that contains a list of scalars into a series Return the separator character used in the file path names by the operating system Perform formatted output to the screen Format a list of strings Produce an output string in the format of the C C language printf function Converts an input string by applying a C C style format control string Concatenate two or more strings Convert numbers to 8 bit ASCII characters Compare two strings Convert escape characters in a string Extract a part of a string Turn an ASCII text file into a string Find a position within a string Convert a time value to a string Return the nth substring Return the length of a string Convert a list of several strings into one string Convert a number into a string Reverse order of characters in a string Return the time form of integer in seconds Return the window number as a string Return the number of seconds from a time string Return the seconds to mi
248. TUS indicates the debugger is at line 6 Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTATUS or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Steps the debugger to the next line DBSTEP Returns Example Remarks See Also DBSTEPI Purpose Format Nothing a bstop myfunc dbcont myfunc 10 dbstep sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called and DBSTEP steps the debugger to the next line Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Use DBSTEPI to step into the SPL routine at the current line number Use DBSTEPO to step out of the current function Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Steps into the next SPL routine DBSTEPI 159 Returns Example Remarks 160 Nothing Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y YS HG y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y Now consider the
249. The DADiSP Worksheet Data Analysis and Display Software Function Reference Manual July 2003 Copyright 2003 DSP Development Corporation The DADiSP Licensing Agreement It is important to read and understand the DADiSP Licensee Agreement prior to opening the disk envelope By opening this envelope you indicate your acceptance of the following terms and conditions e The Licensee has non exclusive rights for use of the supplied software e The supplied programs may not be copied except as described by the Installation Procedure listed in Chapter 1 of the DADiSP Worksheet Manual e The Licensee may not disclose or resell any part of the program or documentation to unlicensed parties Disclaimer of Warranties and Liability The information contained in this document is believed to be reliable and accurate However DSP Development Corporation assumes no responsibility whatsoever for errors omissions or inaccuracies DSP DEVELOPMENT CORPORATION DISCLAIMS ANY AND ALL WARRANTIES EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED INCLUDING THE WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE WITH RESPECT TO THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS MANUAL AND THE SOFTWARE DESCRIBED THEREIN The buyer or user assumes all risks as to the quality and performance of this product DSP development shall not be liable for any damages including special or consequential damages arising out of the use of such information and software even if DSP Development
250. ULT _MATH_ VALUE determines the result of expressions such as 1 0 EPS is often used as a tolerance value for matrix calculations INF REALMAX REALMIN SVDDIV Determines if two expressions are equal EQUAL expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table 217 Returns Example Remarks See Also ERF Purpose Format Returns Example 218 A scalar series or table containing a 1 when the condition is true and 0 when the condition is false equal W1 W2 returns a series containing a 1 for every observation where W1 is equal to W2 or a 0 if they are not equal 1 5 3 2 max 1 5 returns a series 0 1 0 0 This is equivalent to 1 5 3 2 max 1 5 The is the operator equivalent of EQUAL lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators Computes the error function ERF series series Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table erf 1 returns 0 84270079 Remarks See Also ERFC Purpose Format Returns Example erf W1 returns a series or table where each point is the error function of the corresponding point in Window 1 erfinv erf 2 returns 0 2 indicating that ERF and ERFINV are inverse functions The error function is defined as
251. UT MOVETO Purpose Moves the Worksheet cursor to a specific Window Format MOVETO Window Window Window reference Example moveto W3 moves the input cursor to Window 3 Remarks MOVETO is particularly useful in command files This function will only work at the initial Worksheet level i e not if a Window is active You cannot MOVETO a Window that is not displayed 503 See Also The discussion of Command Files in the User Manual GOTOWIN SETWFORM MOVEWIN Purpose Moves or sizes a Window within a Worksheet using keyboard or mouse input Format MOVEWIN Window corner Window Any Window ina Worksheet to move or size corner The side or corner of the Window to resize or move Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 All corners i e move Window default 2 Lower right 3 Lower left 4 Upper right 5 Upper left 7 Bottom side 8 Left side 9 Right side 10 Top side Example movewin W2 10 resizes W2 by allowing the top side of that Window to slide up or down See Also NEATEN MOVMAX Purpose Performs n point moving maximum calculations 504 Format MOVMAX series points series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table points An integer The number of points on which to compute the maximum Returns A series or table Example Wie t2535 1 5525455 3752 W2 movmax W1 4 returns the series 2 3 3 5 5 5 5 7 7 In this example where there is a
252. V to compute the pseudo inverse See SVD for an alternate computation of the matrix inverse INVERSE can be abbreviated INV Matrix Multiply DET MDIV MMULT PINV SVD TRANSPOSE INVPROBN Purpose Format Returns 404 Returns z value of the probability of X lt z for a normal distribution INVPROBN p mean std p Areal or series The probability value mean Optional A real The mean of the distribution Defaults to 0 0 std Optional A real The standard deviation of the distribution Defaults to 1 0 A real or series the z value of the inverse normal cumulative distribution function with the given mean and standard deviation For the input probability p returns the z value where P X lt z p Example Remarks invprobn 5 returns 0 0 the z value where 50 of the values are less than or equal to for a normal distribution with a mean of 0 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 In probabilistic terms given the normal distribution N 0 1 i e mean of 0 variance of 1 P X lt 0 0 0 5 invprob 2 10 2 returns 8 31675753 the z value where 20 percent of the values are less than or equal to for a normal distribution with a mean of 10 0 and a standard deviation of 2 0 In probabilistic terms given the normal distribution N 10 4 i e mean of 10 variance of 4 P X lt 8 31675 53 0 2 probn invprobn 35 returns 0 35 indicating that PROBN and INVPROBN ar
253. Valid inputs are 0 reference bars to 0 0 default 1 bar bottoms start at the Window bottom If on_of not specified returns 1 if bars drawn to the Window bottom else 0 W1 gnorm 10 1 bars barstyle 1 W2 Wl bars barstyle 0 The bars in W1 are drawn from a vertical reference of 0 0 the default while the bars in W2 begin at the bottom of the Window BARSTYLE only effects 2D bar charts BARSTYLE is a Window property All bar plots plotted in the Window will be drawn in the current BARSTYLE mode BARCTR BARGAP BARS BARTOP BARTOP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also BEEP Purpose Sets coloring of the top face of a 3D bar plot BARTOP win on_off win Optional A Window Defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Valid inputs are 0 do not color bar tops default 1 color bar tops If on_of not specified returns 1 if top coloring is on else 0 W1 xyz gsin 10 1 gcos 10 1 1 10 bars bartop 1 The tops of the resulting 3D bar plot are colored with the current axes color default black Coloring the tops of the bar plot can help clarify the orientation if the plot is rotated BARTOP is a Window property All 3D bar plots plotted in the Window will be drawn in the current BARTOP mode BARCTR BARGAP BARS BARSTYLE ROTATE3D SPIN XYZ Turn automatic error beeper ON or OFF 59 Format BEEP mode mode An integer 1 ON 0 OFF Defau
254. WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments See Also DOUBLE LONG READB SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT ULONG WRITEB FLOOR Purpose Finds the greatest integer less than or equal to the input value Format FLOOR expr expr Any scalar series multi series table or expression evaluating to a scalar series or table 264 Returns Example See Also FMAX Purpose Format Example Remarks A scalar series or table floor 3 4 returns the scalar value 4 floor 2 2 7 81 yields a value of 2 0 7 01 floor W2 creates a new series in the current Window by applying FLOOR to each element of W2 The integer value returned by FLOOR is converted to a floating point value CEILING FIX INT Places the cursor on the maximum value of the series FMAX Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window W1 gsin 100 0 01 fmax places the cursor on the 26th point of that sine wave where y 1 0 To display the crosshair cursor type Cursoron If there is more than one peak of the same height FMAX will find the first one FMAX sets the cursor position to the maximum point of the series but does not display point values nor does it provide an active cursor Use CURSORON to activate the cursor 265 See Also FMIN Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 266 CURPOS CURSORON FMIN FIND PEAKS AND VALLEYS MAX MIN Places th
255. Y GETXLABEL GETYLABEL Purpose Returns the x axis or y axis label 325 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GETXR Purpose Format Returns 326 GETXLABEL Window GETYLABEL Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A string getxlabel W3 returns the x axis label of Window 3 If no label has been set GETXLABEL returns the horizontal x axis units and GETYLABEL returns the vertical y axis units This is especially useful in custom menu and report panels In both interactive and printed output an axis label if set will cover whichever units label has been defined for the axis If the user has set an axis label then units will not appear CLEARXLABEL CLEARYLABEL GETHUNITS GETVUNITS SETHUNITS SETVUNITS SETXLABEL SETYLABEL Returns the rightmost x coordinate in a Window GETXR Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number Example See Also GETXTIC Purpose Format Returns Example See Also setx getxl W2 getxr W2 sets the current Window s x axis range to be the same as that of Window 2 GETXL GETYB GETYT SETX SETXY SETY Returns the x axis tic interval of a Window GETXTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number setxtic getxtic W2 2 sets the current x axis tic interval to be twice th
256. a Use DDEUNADVISE to terminate a DDEADVISE operation DDEADVISE uses an explicit DDE channel number DDELINK is similar to DDEADVISE but the channel number is managed internally DDEGETDATA DDELINK DDEUNADVISE DDEEXECUTE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 168 Executes a command in another application DDEEXECUTE chan command chan An integer specifying DDE channel number command A string specifying the command to execute A 1 if successful otherwise it returns 0 indicating an error chan ddeinit winword ddeexecute chan LInsert This is a DDE string ddeterm chan establishes a DDE conversation with Word inserts the text This is a DDE string at the current cursor location then terminates the conversation When DADiSP acts as the server the command string can be any valid DADiSP command For example Integ W1 See Also DDELINK DDEPOKE DDEREQUEST DDESTATUS Purpose Retrieves a series item from a DDE conversation Format DDEGETDATA chan datatype item chan An integer specifying DDE channel number datatype Optional An integer or name specifying the type of data to retrieve Defaults to 0 The following are valid data types Name Code Data Type Range ASCII 0 Comma Space delimited data N A SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE BYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signe
257. a new cursor in the Window Until you set the cursor s position the Window is frozen at that point LEGCUR derives the text it uses in the legend from the comments associated with each series in the window You can manipulate comments using the SETCOMMENT GETCOMMENT and COMMENT functions See Also LEGEND Purpose Format The colors available to you for the text and background colors are pre defined in palette mac Refer to this file for numbers associated with your desired color selections You can perform the standard editing functions on a legend with the TEXTMOVE TEXTEDIT and TEXTDEL functions These functions are easily accessed from the Drawing pull down COMMENT GETCOMMENT LEGEND SETCOMMENT Sets the attributes and location for a standard legend LEGEND win x y target fg_clr bg_clr font box_flg margin_flg focus s1 sn win Optional Target Window Defaults to the current Window Real numbers that designate the upper left anchor coordinate pair for annotation text XY target Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the text to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of the Window 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within
258. a row array if the input is an array with more than row and column any 3 returns 1 0 any 0 0 1 0 returns 1 0 any zeros 3 1 returns 0 0 any zeros 3 3 returns the 1x3 array 0 0 0 0 0 0 The input is cast to a series if it is a scalar or a string ALL FIND ONES ZEROS ANYFORMAT Purpose Produces an output string in the format of the C C language printf function 43 Format 44 ANYFORMAT control val1 val2 val3 control Format control string Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications Ordinary characters are copied to the output string Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash Format specifications in the control string are matched to the values and are introduced by a percent sign The form is as follows flags width precision type Flags blank Width Precision Integers Types e E f Types g G String Type Type Characters d I u o x X f Meaning Left justify Explicit sign or before number Insert blank before positive number With type o prefixes 0 With type x prefixes 0X With type X prefixes 0X Optional Minimum number of characters in output Optional Maximum number of characters printed for all or part of the output field or minimum number of digits printed for integer values Minimum
259. a series table integer real or complex number DADiSP assumes operation is in radians unless you have invoked the SETDEGREE function Real input values must be in the range 1 to 1 inclusive for the arc inverse functions The following trigonometric functions are supported by DADiSP ACOS ACOSH ACOT ACOTH ACSC ACSCH ASEC ASECH ASIN ASINH ATAN ATANH COs COSH COT COTH CSC CSCH 788 Calculates ArcCosine Calculates Hyperbolic ArcCosine Calculates ArcCotangent Calculates Hyperbolic ArcCotangent Calculates ArcCosecant Calculates Hyperbolic ArcCosecant Calculates ArcSecant Calculates Hyperbolic ArcSecant Calculates ArcSine Calculates Hyperbolic ArcSine Calculates ArcTangent Calculates Hyperbolic ArcTangent Calculates Cosine Calculates Hyperbolic Cosine Calculates Cotangent Calculates Hyperbolic Cotangent Calculates Cosecant Calculates Hyperbolic Cosecant DEG SEC SECH SETDEGREE SETRADIAN SIN SINC SINH TAN TANH See Also SETDEGREE SETRADIAN Calculates Degrees per radian 360 2 pi Calculates Secant Calculates Hyperbolic Secant Calculates Trig functions using degrees Calculates Trig functions using radians Calculates Sine Calculates Sin x x Calculates Hyperbolic Sine Calculates Tangent Calculates Hyperbolic Tangent TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION GENERATORS TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTION GENERATORS Purpose Generates trigonometric functions in a specified Window Format FUNCTION points
260. acing GETZB GETZT SETZTIC Sets the tic spacing on the z axis SETZTIC Window ytic Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window ztic Areal the desired Z tic interval setztic 01 sets the z tic interval on the current Window to 0 01 setztic sets the ytic interval of the current Window to the default values The GETZTIC function returns the current tic interval setztic W3 0 5 getztic shrinks the z tic interval of W3 by a factor of 2 If you do not specify an interval or if you specify a negative interval the tic intervals are scaled automatically See Also SFORMAT Purpose Format GETXTIC GETYTIC GETZTIC SETXTIC SETXY SETY XTIC YTIC ZTIC Formats a list of strings SFORMAT control arg1 arg2 argn control argn Format control string containing only string field specifiers Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications The ordinary characters are copied to the output string in order of their appearance Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash Format specifications in the control string are introduced by a percent sign and are matched to the specified arguments in order If there are more arguments than there are format specifications the extra arguments are ignored A string value that matches control string Format Specification Field
261. aiser This assures that sqrt area psd w rms s approximately HAMMING HANNING KAISER WINLOCK Purpose Format Example 820 Locks a Window so it s formula cannot be cleared or edited WINLOCK Window mode Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window mode Optional Mode 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 winlock W3 1 locks the formula of Window 3 Remarks See Also Locked Windows cannot be removed If no mode is specified WINLOCK reports the lock status of the Window Locked Windows can be useful when creating analysis template worksheets Unlike PROTECT WINLOCK allows the Window to be updated CLEAR CLEARDATA PROTECT WINNAME Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Creates a Window name that can be used as an alternative to the Window number WINNAME Window name Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window name Window name in quotes winname W1 Pressure fft Pressure is now equivalent to fft W1 If new data is put into the Window the Window name remains the same To reset the Window name in the above example type winname W1l W1 When resetting the Window name be sure to specify both the Window and name arguments DEFMACRO GETWNUM STRWIN 82 WINSTATUS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also WRITEA Purpose 822 Returns status of cu
262. al pad flip flop inverse tangent bit and bit shift left bit shift right bit or modulo bit exclusive or bit complement convert to cartesian convert to polar maximum minimum 113 COLSTDEV Purpose Format Returns Example See Also COLSUM Purpose Format Returns 114 Produces a row of the standard deviations of each column in the input table COLSTDEV table table Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table colstdev ravel 1 2 3 2 3 4 returns 1 1 COL COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLSTDEV TRANSPOSE Produces a row of the sums of each column of the input table COLSUM table table Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table Example See Also a 2 4 6 8 10 12 b colsum a o 10 14 18 COL COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLSTDEV TRANSPOSE COMFILESTATUS Purpose Format Returns Example Returns the execution status of a command file COMFILESTATUS An integer 0 no command file running 1 command file is running 3 command file suspended 5 command file paused Example of DADiSP as an ActiveX Server in Visual Basic Set DADiSP CreateObject DADISP Application DADiSP Execute Load comfile ds
263. alar series or table lt expr2 gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table Wis Whe Zy Ss 4F W2 W1 gt gt 1 returns the series 0 1 1 2 The bits of each value in the series are shifted one place to the right resulting in an integer divide by 2 W3 W1 amp 0x01 returns the series 1 0 1 0 indicating the values that have the lowest bit set W4 bitor W1 0x01 returns the series 1 3 3 5 The following bit operators are supported Operator Function Description gt gt BITRSHIFT bit shift right lt lt BITLSHIFT bit shift left BITAND bit and BITCOMP bit complement BITOR bit or The symbol is not currently used as the BITOR operator since is the pipe operator Assignment Operators Conditional Operators Logical Operators gt gt lt lt amp Assignment Operators _ Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Operate and assign the value of an expression lt expr1 gt op lt expr2 gt lt expril gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table lt expr2 gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table j 103 jt 2 Variable j contains the value 12 W1s 41 23 354 WI 2 W1 contains the series 3 4 5 6 Each value of the series is incremented by the value 2 0 a 1 2 3 4 a amp 0x01 Variable a contains the series 1 0 1
264. alent to W1 exp i W2 for W1 and W2 real series Returns a Complex value regardless of the input value If at least one of the input arguments is a series MAKEPOLAR returns a Complex series makepolar a b is equivalent toa exp i b For complex inputs makepolar a b is equivalent to real a exp i real b See Also CARTESIAN IMAGINARY MAKECARTESIAN PHASE POLAR REAL MAPPALETTE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Sets the color palette for shading in the current Window MAPPALETTE series series Any series specifying the color indices mappalette 3 12 4 0 sets the current Window s palette to cyan lred red and black To assign specific RGB values for a color number refer to the palette mac file MAPPALETTE is identical to SETPALETTE in function However because MAPPALETTE accepts a series as the color indices it can be more useful when creating larger or complicated color palettes GETPALETTE SETPALETTE MARKMAX Purpose Marks the maximum of a series with a symbol 475 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MARKMAX s color symbol s Optional A series defaults to the current Window color Optional An integer the color for the maximum marker Defaults to RED symbol Optional An integer the symbol for the maximum marker Defaults to DN_ARROW Nothing Overplots the series with a symbol W1 gnorm 1000 01 markmax
265. algorithm as the FFT but is slightly slower because it calculates magnitude phase Use SPECTRUM to get a normalized magnitude plot DFT FFT2 FFT IFFTP PSD SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 245 References FFTP2 Purpose Format Returns Example 246 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 Calculates the 2D FFT of an array in polar magnitude phase form FFTP2 array rlen clen array A multi column series or expression resulting in a multi column series rlen Optional An integer The FFT row size Defaults to numrows a clen Optional An integer The FFT column size Defaults to numcols a A complex array fftp2 1 2 3 AFF returns the complex polar array 10 exp i 0 2 exp i PI 4 exp i PI O exp i 0 x y fxyvals 2 2 1 2 2 1 W1 cos x y setplottype 3 rainbow W2 fftp2 W1 W3 fftshift logl0 mag W2 W4 fftshift phase W2 Produces interesting 2D magnitude and phase images W1 cos x y setplottype 3 rainbow W2 fftp2 W1 2 1 5 1 0 5 0 05 1 15 2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W3 fftshift log 10 mag W2 W4 fftshift phase W2 Remarks FFTP2 is often used in image processing applications Use FFTSHIFT to flip the output so the 0 frequency is in the center of the plot If the input data is
266. alization divides the result by M abs M 7 1 1 where i is the index of the result See FACORR for the frequency domain implementation ACOV CONV FACORR FACOV FCONV FXCORR XCORR Calculates the auto covariance using the convolution method 33 Format Returns Example Remarks 34 ACOV s norm s An input series norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 acov W1 performs the auto covariance of a sinewave The peaks of the result indicate the waveform is very similar to itself at the time intervals where the peaks occur i e the waveform is periodic W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 acov W1 1 W4 acov W2 1 W3 displays the auto covariance of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the normalized auto covariance of random noise The normalized maximum of both results is 1 0 at time t 0 indicating the expected perfect covariance at time t 0 true for all series The waveform of W4 displays only one distinct peak at t 0 indicating that W2 is not correlated with itself and is non periodic Both waveforms display a triangular envelope due to the assumption that the input series is zero before the first sample and after the last sample The auto covariance is used to determine how similar a series is to itself or if a series
267. ame of the input file in quotes A string If the file myheader hdr contains the following ASCII data file Interval 20 then the commands fopen myheader hdr r fgets myheader hdr fclose myheader hdr display ASCH data file at the bottom of the screen before closing the file fopen myheader hdr r stri fgets myheader hdr str2 fgets myheader hdr fclose myheader hdr sets the variable strl to ASCII data file and str2 to Interval 20 249 Remarks See Also FILTEQ Purpose Format Returns Example 250 FGETS must be used with FOPEN and FCLOSE The file name must be in quotes or otherwise in string form When the file is first opened FGETS returns the first line Subsequent calls to FGETS return the line following the line previously returned FCLOSE FCLOSEALL FOPEN FPUTS Evaluates a Linear Constant Coefficient Difference Equation FILTEQ b a x yi b A series x n coefficients a A series y n coefficients x A series the input yi Optional A series the initial conditions A series x Il TLs T050 04 0 filteq 1 0 5 0 8 0 2 0 5 x Se Il y 1 0 0 3 0 04 0 528 0 5804 y is the output produced by the difference equation y n x n 0 5 x n 1 0 8 y n 1 0 2 y n 2 0 5 y n 3 W1 gimpulse 1024 1 W2 filteq 1 0 5 0 8 0 2 0 5 W1 W3 spectrum W2 setxlog 1 setylog 1
268. ame series is converted to an array of variants and placed in cells B1 through B5 Because Excel internally converts both arrays in the same manner the results are identical Remarks CASTVARIANTARRAY is helpful with ActiveX Automation when a series must be transferred as an array of variants instead of the normal array of doubles Use CASTVARIANT to convert a series to an array of almost any type supported by Automation See Also CREATEOBJECT CASTVARIANT CCEPS Purpose Calculates the complex cepstrum Format CCEPS s n c d CCEPS s s An input series or array n Optional An integer the number of samples to use If n gt length s the series is zero padded Defaults to length s Returns A real series or array c d CCEPS s returns the cepstrum in and the lag used to unwrap the phase in d 79 Example Remarks 80 W1 gtri 100 1 1 100 3 W2 Wl delay W1 60 2 W3 cceps W2 W4 cceps W2 512 W4 gtri 100 1 1 100 3 W2 W1 delay W1 60 2 1 27 1 24 14 A 14 0 8 5 EN 0 8 06 4 EO 0 6 044 044 l 0 24 p A po 0 2 J ean o 04 ee 0 2 5 T T T T T T T T T 0 2 4 TT TTT TTT TTT TTT 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 W3 cceps W2 W4 cceps W2 512 14 7 14 0 5 i 054 04 3 rues oo J 0 5 4 0 5 4 14 14 1 5 4 1 5 4 2 2 2 5 St 2 54 T T T T T T T T T T 0 20 40 60 80 100
269. ample Opens a Labbook OPENLABBOOK labname wrkname confirm create Jabname A string the name of the Labbook to open in quotes or a string variable wrkname Optional A string The name of the Worksheet to load in quotes or a string variable Defaults to a new Worksheet confirm Optional An integer Confirmation flag 1 confirm new open 0 do not confirm Defaults to 1 create Optional An integer Creation flag 1 create Labbook if it does not exist 0 do not create Defaults to 0 An integer if successful else lt 0 openlabbook MyBook opens the Labbook MyBook with confirmation and loads a new Worksheet openlabbook NewBooks MyBook Work1 0 opens the Labbook MyBook in the directory NewBooks and loads the Worksheet Work1 without confirmation 537 Remarks See Also OR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 538 openlabbook NewBooks MyBook2 0 1 creates the Labbook MyBook2 in the directory NewBooks if it does not exist The Labbook is opened with a new Worksheet without confirmation The Labbook name can contain a path DELETEDATASET DELETELABBOOK DELETEWORKSHEET IMPORTFILE LOADDATASET LOADSERIES SAVESERIES Performs a logical OR of two expressions OR expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table o
270. ample Remarks See Also DEFINE Purpose Format deffun normal s s max s defines a function which normalizes a series by its maximum value W1 1 2 3 4 5 normal W1 returns the series 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 deffun minmax max min defines a function minmax equal to the range of the data SPL function names are not case sensitive If a function does not accept arguments the argument list is omitted Multi line functions must be specified in separate ASCII files You can use DEFFUN to redefine existing functions Functions are defined and saved with the Worksheet Use SPLWRITE to write functions to a file ALLFUNCTIONS DELALLFUNCTIONS DELFUN FUNCTIONS SPLREAD SPLWRITE Defines a DADiSP macro DEFINE name arg1 arg2 argn formula name Astring up to 15 characters long naming the macro argn Optional Any argument being passed to the formula formula An equation or macro expansion incorporating those arguments and evaluating to a real string series or table Example Remarks See Also define autocor s conv s reverse s 2 sersize s defines a macro which performs an auto correlation of a series W1 gsin 128 1 128 4 0 autocor W1 calculates the auto correlation of the sine wave You can use DEFINE to redefine existing macros Macros are defined and saved with the Worksheet Use MACWRITE to write macros to a file DEFAULT UNDEFALL UNDEFINE MA
271. and N is the number of points to generate gkaiser 100 01 8 0 generates the same Window as above except that beta equals 8 0 Remarks See Also References GLINE Purpose Format Returns Use the KAISER macro command to automatically create and multiply a Kaiser Window with a series For example kaiser W3 multiplies Window 3 with a Kaiser Window calculated to the same length and spacing as the series in W3 Hamming Hanning and Kaiser Windows are useful in creating FIR filters and in preprocessing series for FFT calculations FFT GHAMMING GHANNING PSD SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 Generates a line in accordance with the specified parameters GLINE points spacing slope y intercept points An integer Number of points in the series spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis slope The slope of the desired line y intercept The point of intersection with the y axis A series 337 Example See Also gline 100 0 1 4 2 creates a line in the current Window The line will be comprised of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart The equation of the line will be y 4x 2 Range Specifier LINE GNUMBER GLN GLOG Purpose Format Returns Example 338 Generates a natural logarithmic curve base e in accor
272. angular wave is generated by calculating S sin 2 i spacing frequency 2n phase and returns a line rising from 0 to 1 where S is positive and a line falling from 1 to 0 where S is negative GRTSQR HAMMING Purpose Format Returns Example 360 Multiplies a series with a Hamming window HAMMING s ampflag s A series or array ampflag Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 do not correct amplitude default 1 correct amplitude 2 correct RMS amplitude A series or array W1 gsin 1000 001 45 W2 spectrum hamming W1 W3 spectrum hamming W1 1 The MAX of W2 0 539 and the MAX of W3 1 0 The amplitude of the spectrum in W3 has been corrected to take into account amplitude effects of the Hamming window Remarks See Also HAMMING was implemented as a macro in versions prior to DADiSP 2000 You may need to remove the macro definition with undefmacro hamming from old Worksheets If anpflag 1 the correction factor is the mean of the spectral window This assures that the spectrum of a sinusoid of amplitude A has a peak of A If ampflag 2 the correction is applied as follows w hamming s rms s rms hamming s This assures that sqrt area psd w rms s approximately GHAMMING HANNING KAISER PSD SPECTRUM WINFUNC HANNING Purpose Format Returns Multiplies a series with a Hanning window HANNING s ampflag s
273. are always clipped to the end point values same as RANGE 1 If xi is a real the result is a real In the example above to return the interpolated Y value at X 1 5 yi xylookup W1 1 5 INTERPOLATE SPLINE XYINTERP XY Creates a 3D XYZ plot XYZ xsig ysig zsig xsig A series The X values ysig A series The Y values zsig A series The Z values An XYZ series 847 Example xyz gsin 100 01 4 gcos 100 01 4 0 0 01 0 99 creates an XYZ spiral W1 xyz gsin 100 01 4 gcos 100 01 4 0 0 01 0 99 0 8 0 6 0 4 0 2 0 5 1 0 5 spin spins the XYZ plot rtspin spins the XYZ plot in the background Use rtspin 0 to cancel the spin Remarks Use ROTATE3D to rotate an XYZ plot The configuration parameters X ROTATE3D Y_ ROTATE3D and Z ROTATE3D set the default rotation angles in degrees for an XYZ plot The default values are X 20 Y 15 Z 35 degrees See Also MOUSEROTATE ROTATE3D RTSPIN SPIN XY 848 YN Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also YSUBTIC Purpose Format Returns Returns an integer Bessel function YN expr order expr Any expression evaluating to a real series or table order Optional An integer specifying order A real series or table yn 3 0 1 returns 0 3246 YN will perform the Bessel function on an entire input series or a single scalar input JN Sets subtic labeling for
274. arguments Find minimum of series Find the index of the minimum value of a series Find the location of the minimum value of a series Return the minimum of on or two input arguments Return the largest positive real number Return the smallest positive real number Return the maximum of one or more input arguments Return the minimum of one or more input arguments Reset x axis label Reset y axis label Allow you to set a plot style Return the plot type for a table of data Set grid color Turn grid to dashed Turn grid to dotted Set grid orientation horizontal Set grid orientation horizontal and or vertically Turn grid off Turn grid to solid Set grid orientation vertical Inherit plotting style from data series Inherit plotting style from window Enable Disable a Window from drawing a graph Set types of scales Set types of scales Turn scales off Turn scales on Scroll display down Scroll display left Scroll display right xxiii SCROLLU SETAORIX SETAORIY SETAROTX SETAROTY SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY SETHUNITS SETLINE SETLINEWIDTH SETPLOTMETHOD SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE SETSYMBOL SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY SETVUNITS SETWLIKE SETX SETXLABEL SETYLABEL SETXLOG SETXOFFSET SETXTIC SETXY SETY SETYLOG SETYTIC SETZ SETZTIC STAGGERX STAGGERY SYNC WFSET WHICHSCALES XSUBTIC YSUBTIC XXIV Scroll display up Set the axis label orientation Set the axis label orientation Set t
275. as open for output the remaining contents of the buffer are written to the file Used with FOPEN and FCLOSE FCLOSE FOPEN Calculates the Fast Fourier transform of a series or series expression in Cartesian Real Imaginary form FFT series len series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table len Optional An integer FFT length Defaults to the length of the input series If len gt length series the series is padded with zeros A complex series or table in Cartesian form W1 fft 1 2 3 returns the complex series 6 1 5 0 86601 1 5 0 86601 W1 gsin 1021 0 01 1 0 W2 gsin 1024 0 01 1 0 W3 fft wl W4 fft w2 241 Remarks 242 W1 gsin 1021 0 01 1 0 W2 gsin 1024 0 01 1 0 2 2 k c D zr fe fe Zz Zz W4 fft w2 400 400 4 300 300 200 5 200 3 gt 1004 2 1004 2 J E 04r a 100 100 T T T T T T T T T 200 T T T T T T T T 0 20 40 60 80 0 20 40 60 80 Hertz Hertz compare the speeds of the two FFTs The 1024 a power of 2 point FFT should be considerably faster W5 fft wl 1024 calculates a 1024 point FFT of W1 by appending 3 1024 1021 zeros before performing the FFT computation W6 fft wl bestpow2 wl calculates a 1024 point FFT of W1 where 1024 is the smallest power of two size based on the length of W1 The FFT result is complex and DADiSP plots the R
276. as the distance from the desired output coordinate increases Thus the Z output values are most strongly influenced by samples located closest to the value being interpolated The classical technique known as Shepard s method uses a single distance term with a typical value of p 2 thus directly computing the inverse squared distance as the weighting function By default DADiSP uses a linear combination of r 3 r 4 r 5 terms for better results The optional WEIGHTS series specifies the weighting of the radius distance terms r 1 r 2 r 3 ra 4 and default of 0 0 1 1 1 specifies a linear combination of r 3 r 4 r 5 terms and 0 1 specifies the classical direct inverse squared distance weighting function See Also IGRID INTERP2 SPLINE2 INVERSE Purpose Computes the inverse of a table Format INVERSE matrix matrix Real or Complex square table Returns A matrix Example actly Sc4k 5 6 7 8 9 12 b inverse a b 0 6 0 0 0 2 0 26667 1 3333 0 8667 aig ears 1 0 0 6 a b 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 to within machine precision 403 Remarks See Also The inverse b of matrix a produces a result such that a b I the identity matrix When matrix is badly scaled or nearly singular the inverse cannot be obtained When det matrix 0 the matrix is singular and the inverse cannot be calculated reliably See PIN
277. asses through the original data points See SPLINE2 for 2D cubic spline interpolation See IGRID to interpolate irregular XYZ data to a uniform grid CONTOUR IGRID INTERPOLATE PLOT3D RAVEL SPLINE SPLINE2 WATERFALL INTERPOLATE Purpose 398 Linearly interpolates n points between existing points in a series and increases the sampling rate by a factor of n Format Returns Example Remarks See Also INTERPOLATE series n series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table n An integer point number used to interpolate the series A series or table Wie As ey aF W2 interpolate W1 2 W2 contains the series 1 1 5 2 2 5 3 interp Wl 5 enlarges the series in Window by a factor of 5 and places the result in the current Window This new series is created by inserting five points between each point of W1 by linear interpolation interp extract W2 10 length W2 10 4 enlarges the series from Window 2 by a factor of 4 starting from the 10th point of the series and places the result in the current Window The interpolation factor automatically adjusts the sampling rate 1 deltax of the resulting series INTERPOLATE can be abbreviated INTERP See SPLINE for cubic spline interpolation See XYINTERP to linearly interpolate XY data a series with arbitrary X values into an interval series constant deltax DECIMATE INTERP2 POLYFIT SPLINE XYINTERP 3
278. atype series A series multi series table or expression evaluating to a series or table datatype An integer code number or name specifying the data type Name Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 10 38 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 4 byte Unsigned O to 4 294 967 295 A series or table byteswap W1 SINT Integer converts W1 into signed 2 byte integers and then reverses the bytes BYTESWAP can be very useful when reading foreign data files via READB All of the datatypes listed above are macros that are described in this manual Turns automatic Worksheet recalculation mode ON or OFF Format Example Remarks See Also CALL Purpose CALC mode mode Optional An integer 0 OFF 1 ON default immediately update changed Windows 2 Step through cyclical calculations 3 ON but do immediately evaluate changed Windows calc 1 specifies automatic Window recalculation calc 0 disables automatic recalculation If the calculation mode is OFF or disabled you can enter Window formulae without immediately calculating new series results Once you type CALC 0 enter new formulae in the desired Windows and then t
279. aveform will also be shifted by five x units the offset value on the x axis and compressed by a factor of two Remarks The formula used to generate each point i in the waveform is as follows logl0 i spacing factor offset See Also GLN GLOG 339 GNORMAL Purpose Format Returns Example 340 Generates a normally distributed random series GNORMAL points spacing mean std points An integer the number of points in the series spacing Areal the spacing between each point of the x axis mean Optional A real the series mean Defaults to 0 0 std Optional A real the series standard deviation Defaults to 1 A series gnormal 100 01 2 0 3 0 creates a 100 point normally distributed random series with a mean of 2 0 and a standard deviation of 3 0 gnormal 100 01 creates a 100 point normally distributed random series with mean near 0 0 and standard deviation near 1 0 W1 gnormal 2000 1 1 3 W2 hist W1 100 rescale curr 0 1 lines W3 pdfnorm 14 0 01 14 1 3 o0verp W2 Ired W3 compares the distribution of a generated normal series to the analytic distribution with a mean of 1 and a standard deviation of 3 gnormal 2000 1 1 3 iy a a a o N ih yin Min iw i ii ih vl M w WA i i Pdfnorm 0 2 __ _ 024 5 4 Remarks See SEEDRAND to set a new seed value for the pseudo random sequence GN
280. b 2 z 1 Fea BEIM z M 1 HATA eee Sei Et canada ee het ean ce oes ek X z 1 a 2 z 1 al N z N 1 where jo aoe Z e unit circle frequency response M number of numerator terms N number of denominator terms If the leading term of the denominator is not 1 0 a 1 1 the coefficients are assumed to be in difference equation form y n a 1 y n 1 al2 y n 2 a N y n N b 1 x n b 2 x n 1 b M x n M 1 for n gt 1 ZFREQ returns a complex series Use MAG or PHASE to obtain the magnitude and or phase components separately See Also ZINTERP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks FFT FILTEQ FIR IR MAGNITUDE PHASE Interpolates a series to a new sample rate by FFT zero insertion ZINTERP s r s An input series or array r Areal The new sample rate of the interpolated series R gt Rate s Defaults to 2 Rate s A series or array W1 gsin 64 1 64 3 W2 zinterp W1 4 rate W1 W1 contains 64 samples of a 3 Hz sine wave sampled at 64 Hz W2 produces a 3 Hz sine wave with an interpolated sample rate of 64 4 256 Hz The length is 253 samples W3 zinterp W1 100 produces a 99 point interpolated 3 Hz sine wave with a sample rate of 100 Hz ZINTERP effectively resamples the input series to the higher rate R using ideal sinx sin interpolation The interpolation is calculated by the following remarkably simple and efficient
281. bars Set syne mode that controls scaling and scrolling Display as a table Arrange the screen into equal size windows Edit the properties of a DADiSP toolbar Inactivate the window Display unit selections Remove one or more overlayed series Remove one or more overplotted series Unzoom a window Compress window size Update each formula in worksheet window Specify background window and series color Lock the window formula Specify a name for the window number Expand window size xiii Dynamic Data Exchange DDE DDEADVISE DDEEXECUTE DDEGETDATA DDEGETLINK DDEINITIATE DDELINK DDEPOKE DDEREQUEST DDESTATUS DDETERMINATE DDEUNADVISE DDEUNLINK File Manipulation ANYFORMAT FCLOSE FCLOSEALL FFLUSH FGETS FOPEN FPRINTF FPUTS FREADA FREADB FSEEK FSTAT FTELL FWRITEA FWRITEB PRINTF SFORMAT SPRINTF SSCANF xiv Retrieve an item from a DDE conversation whenever the item changes Execute a command in another application Retrieve a series item from a DDE conversation Retrieve a DDE link name from the Clipboard Begins a DDE Conversation Retrieve an item from a DDE conversation whenever the item changes Send data to a DDE conversation in string form Retrieve a string item from a DDE conversation Report the error status of the last DDE operation Terminate a DDE Conversation End a previous DDEADVISE operation End a previous DDELINK operation Produce a formatted output string Close a file Close all
282. be an array of N rows by 3 columns where lt N lt 255 Each individual RGB red green blue value is a real number ranging from 0 to 1 0 See Also COOL COPPER GETCOLORMAP GETCRANGE GRAY HOT RAINBOW SETCRANGE SETPALETTE SETPMAP SHOWCMAP SETCOMMENT Purpose Sets the comment for any series in a Window including overlays and overplots 662 Format SETCOMMENT series string item column series Optional A series Defaults to the series in the current Window string Comment for series in quotes item Optional An integer the item number Defaults to 1 column Optional An integer the column number within the specified item Defaults to 1 Example W1 grand 100 01 W2 gnorm 100 01 W3 Wl overplot w2 red tablev setcomment Normal 2 1 pon sets the text at the top of the second column to Normal Remarks The comment is displayed as the column header when in TABLEVIEW See Also COMMENT GETCOMMENT SETCONF Purpose Sets the configuration parameters named in a specified string to a specified value during the current session of DADiSP Format SETCONF param value param Configuration parameter to set in quotes value New configuration setting for the parameter in quotes Returns The value to which the specified parameter was set Example setconf beep 0 turns the beeper off 663 Remarks See Also value is always a string even if the paramete
283. ber of rows in matrix2 The number of rows in the output matrix is equal to the number of rows in matrix1 and the number of columns in the output matrix is equal to the number of columns in matrix2 Matrix multiplication is not commutative the order of the arguments is important a b is equivalent to mmult a b If any argument is a scalar defaults to standard element by element multiplication equivalent to the operator For example 4 5 20 See the Matrix_Power operator to raise a matrix to a scalar power or raise a scalar to a matrix power Matrix Solve Matrix Power INNERPROD INTERPOSE See Also INVERSE MDIV MMULT OUTERPROD REDUCE TRANSPOSE AQ Matrix Power Purpose Format Returns Example Raises a matrix to a scalar power or a scalar to a matrix power arg1 arg2 argl A non singular square matrix or a scalar The base arg2 A square matrix or scalar if arg1 is a matrix The exponent A matrix a 441 23 335 4 5 6 17 gt 85 gt OF b a 3 a 279 360 306 684 873 684 738 900 441 c a l 5 e3 7 245 2 116i 9 115 1 7181 6 304 2 891i 17 096 2 596i 21 508 2 608i 14 875 4 099i 15 465 6 1857 19 456 5 7461 13 457 9 250i d 1 5 a a 24 009 29 166 20 401 54 739 69 769 47 985 49 996 62 783 43 550 21 Remarks See Also 22 A 0 eye size A the ident
284. ble 0 not visible yvis ymax An integer specifying if y axis scales should be on right 1 on right 0 not on right yaxis An integer specifying if y axis labels should be visible 1 visible 0 not visible xvis An integer specifying if x axis scales should be visible 1 visible 0 not visible xmax An integer specifying if x axis scales should be on top 1 on top 0 not on top xaxis An integer specifying if x axis labels should be visible 1 visible 0 not visible An integer that can be used as the argument to the SCALES function to produce the scales with desired properties whichscales 1 0 1 1 0 1 returns the value 2 If you executed the command SCALES 2 you would get the x axis displayed on the bottom and the y axis displayed on the left with labels on both the x axis and y axis whichscales 1 1 1 0 0 0 returns the value 14 y axis on right with labels displayed whichscales 0 0 0 1 1 1 returns the value 16 x axis on bottom with labels displayed SCALES WHILE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Evaluates an expression while the condition is non zero WHILE expr statements WHILE expr statements expr Any valid DADiSP expression that evaluates to a scalar statement Any valid DADiSP statements separated by semicolons to evaluate while expr is non zero Result of statements while max CURR lt 10 0 deriv CURR differentiates the current
285. block size rampflag Optional An integer Valid inputs are 0 down 1 up Defaults to 1 A series or table Example Remarks See Also MOVSTD Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks W1 1 2 4 7 W2 movrms W1 3 returns the series 1 1 581 2 646 4 796 5 701 7 W3 movrms W1 length W1 W3Elength wl rms wl 4 183 For speed this routine uses the built in function MOVAVG MOVAVG RMS Calculates the moving standard deviation of a series MOVSTD series n rampflag series An input series n An integer The block size rampflag Optional An integer Valid inputs are 0 down 1 up Defaults to 1 A series or table Wi 1 2 4 7 W2 movstd Wl1 3 returns the series 0 0 612 1 528 2 517 1 837 0 W3 movstd W1 length W1 W3Elength wl stdev wl 2 645751 For speed this routine uses the built in function MOVAVG 507 See Also MOVAVG STDEV MSWORD Purpose Writes a string to MS Word using ActiveX Format MSWORD str str Optional A string Returns Nothing Starts MS Word and inserts the string Example msword This is some text DADiSP starts MS Word and inserts the string This is some text into the new document Remarks MSWORD is a simple example of how to invoke an external application MS Word as an ActiveX server using SPL SPL uses an ActiveX syntax similar to C C and Visual Basic Here are
286. box_f1g is ON then its background will be filled with the background color and its edges will be drawn as solid lines in the foreground color If legend_flg is ON then the x y parameters refer to the lower left corner of the first symbol in the legend block not to the lower left corner of the first line in the text block Each next line in the legend refers to the next overplot for color line style and symbols Also the interline spacing in legends is greater than in the no legend symbol case See Also LEGEND LINEDRAW TEXTANN TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE TEXTANN Purpose Draws a left justified block of text at a given point Use the newer TEXT function instead Format TEXTANN y target fg_clr bg_clr font box_flg legend_flg stretch_flg margin_flg focus s1 SN x y Real numbers that designate the upper left anchor coordinate pair for annotation text target Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the text to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 771 772 fg _clr bg clr font box_flg legend_filg stretch_flg margin_flg 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plottin
287. cale item chan An integer specifying the DDE channel number datatype Optional An integer or name specifying the type of data to retrieve Defaults to 0 The following are valid data types Name Code Data Type Range ASCII 0 Comma Space delimited data N A SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE BYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 10438 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 104307 to 10 308 overwrite Optional An integer 0 Append new data to existing data 1 Overwrite existing data with new data Defaults to 0 autoscale Optional An integer 0 Do not automatically scale the window to the range of the new data 1 Autoscale the window Defaults to 1 item A string specifying the item to retrieve A series representing the value of the item requested 167 Example Remarks See Also chan ddeinit Excel Sheet1 ddeadvise chan R1C1 R100C1 establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cells in row 1 column through row 100 column 1 as a series in the current window Whenever a cell changes the new series is appended to the existing series If overwrite is set to 1 the new data overwrites the existing data If autoscale is set to 0 the window scales do not automatically adjust to fit the range of the new dat
288. ceat This will display strescape n two lines strescape n TEST TXT fclose TEST TXT viewfile TEST TXT The n is evaluated as a carriage return when the string is written to a file The following escape sequences are recognized n Newline t Horizontal tab b Backspace r Carriage return f Form feed Backslash y Single quote ddd Bit pattern CHARSTR CHARSTRS SPRINTF STRCAT 751 STREXTRACT Purpose Format Returns Example See Also STRFILE Purpose Format 752 Extracts part of a string STREXTRACT string start length string String to extract from in quotes start An integer value for the starting character length An integer value for the number of characters to extract A string strextract One and a two and a three 11 3 returns two STRCAT STRCMP STRFIND STRGET Reads and converts a plain text file into a string with embedded newlines STRFILE filename reverse no_interpret filename Name of file with path that you wish to convert into a string enclosed in quotes reverse Optional An integer The reverse parameter can reverse a file so that it reads from end to beginning rather than from beginning to end 0 OFF 1 ON Defaults to 0 no_interpret Optional An integer Specifies whether or not expressions in braces should be interpreted 0 OFF 1 ON Defaults to 0 Returns Example Remarks See Also
289. ch column Standard deviation of each column Produce a row of the sums of each column of the input table Calculate confidence level for a given density function and x value Creates a binary fractal Calculate derivative Perform a derivative on XY data Return the minimum positive real value Error function Complementary error function Return the inverse incomplete error function Return the inverse error function Add error bars to graph Gamma Function Numeric constant 0 577216 Natural log of the Gamma function Incomplete Gamma function Complementary incomplete Gamma function Calculate the 2D derivative of an array Calculate the frequency of values in a series Grid XYZ data using the inverse distance method Xxix INDEX INF INTEG INVDISTANCE INVPROBN IVSNORMPB LDERIV LENGTH LINREG LINREG2 MAX MEAN MEDIAN MOVAVG MOVAVG2 MOVMAX MOVMIN MOVRMS MOVSTD PARTSUM PDFNORM PEARSON POLYROOT PROBN RDERIV RMS ROWREDUCE SERSIZE SGRID SPLINE2 STATS STDERR STDEV SVD SVDDIV TRAPZ TREND XCONF XXX Normalize series to percentage terms Return the numeric representation of positive infinity Calculate the integral of a series or series expression Interpolate XYZ data to arbitrary XY coordinates using the inverse distance method Return z value of the probability of X lt z for a normal distribution Return z value for input probability based on normal pdf Calculate derivative from the left Ret
290. character or until the precision value is reached printf Today is s at s The temperature is 3 2f degrees getdate gettime 5 636 returns a string like Today is 02 02 2002 at 14 48 20 30 The temperature is 75 64 degrees printf Mean 8 2f returns a string like Mean Stdev 8 2f Max 48 2f mean stdev max Stdev 0 28 Max 0 98 printf argl arg2 args is the equivalent of echo sprintf argl arg2 arg3 PRINTF produces an output string in the format of the C C language printf function For more detailed information see a C C language function reference ECHO FPUTS MESSAGE SPRINTF STRCAT TEXT PRINTING AND PLOTTING FUNCTIONS Purpose Sends the image of a Window all Windows a Window with an information box or the entire Worksheet as displayed to the default printer plotter or PostScript file Format FUNCTION arguments see list below The following printing and plotting functions are supported by DADiSP INFOPLOT Window title INFOPLOTALL title INFOPRINT Window title INFOPRINTALL title INFOPS Window title INFOPSALL title PLOT Window title hpfile colormode PLOTALL hpfile colormode PLOTWS hpfile colormode PRINT Window title colormode PRINTALL title colormode PRINTWS colormode PRNSCREEN PS title psfile colormode PSALL title psfile colormode PSWS colormode Window title Optional Window reference Defaults to
291. cing on the x axis The values specified are Real by default GSERIES can be abbreviated GSER The can also be used to construct a series or array Range Specifier Array Construction GNUMBER Generates a square root waveform based on a positive range of numbers in accordance with the specified parameters 357 Format Returns Example Remarks GSQRT points spacing factor offset points An integer Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis factor Optional An operand to compress or expand the waveform along the x axis Defaults to a factor of 1 offset Optional An operand to adjust the x axis position of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 0 A series gsqrt 100 0 1 2 5 creates a square root curve of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart This waveform will also be shifted by five x units the offset value on the x axis and compressed by a factor of two The formula used to generate each point i in the waveform is as follows i spacing factor offset 1 2 GSQRWAVE Purpose Format 358 Generates a square wave in accordance with the specified parameters GSQRWAVE points spacing frequency phase points An integer Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis frequency Optional An operand expressed in cycles per second to adjust the frequency of the waveform
292. composed into a left singular value matrix U a diagonal matrix W and a right singular matrix V such that A U W conj V The inverse of the matrix can be calculated as V diag 1 diag W conj U 763 See Also References SVDDIV Purpose Format Returns 764 A Matrix Solve COND DIAGONAL HESS INVERSE LU NORM NULL ORTH PINV QR RANK SVDDIV TRANSPOSE 1 Press Flannery Teukolsky Vetterling Numerical Recipes in C Cambridge Press 1988 pp 407 552 Note For reference only the algorithm used by DADiSP is more accurate than the algorithm presented in 1 Solves for x in A x b using singular value decomposition SVDDIV A b tol A An input array b An input array tol Optional A real the threshold at which to zero out singular values If not specified all singular values are used A series or array Example Remarks See Also References SYNC Purpose W1 gnorm 100 01 W2 5 W1 3 sin W1 2 W143 W3 ravel W1 sin W1 W1 3 W4 svddiv W3 W2 W4 5 3 2 the coefficients of W2 SVDDIV solves the set of simultaneous equations as specified by A and b Given the matrix equation A x b SVDDIV calculates x V 1 W transpose U B where A U W transpose V as calculated by SVD By specifying TOL singular values less than TOL are eliminated and SVDDIV essentially calculates a least squares f
293. core character are not included FUNCTIONS SPLREAD SPLWRITE ALLMACROS Purpose Displays a list of all available macros defined within the current Worksheet Lists macro names arguments and definitions and allows macros to be created and edited 39 Format Remarks See Also AMPDIST Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 40 ALLMACROS Displays all macros including those beginning with the underscore character _ When a list of available macros is generated using the MACROS function macros beginning with the underscore character are not included MACREAD MACROS MACWRITE Finds the amplitude distribution of a specific series AMPDIST series delta y series Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table delta y The y increment or bucket size The smaller the delta y value the greater the number of amplitude ranges that will be defined and hence the greater the number of points in the resulting series A series or table Wile t1s 05 1 53 220 2255 3 20 W2 ampdist W1l 0 7 returns a series containing the points 2 0 1 0 2 0 indicating there are e 2 point values between 1 0 and 1 7 e 1 point value between 1 7 and 2 4 e 2 point values between 2 4 and 3 1 HISTOGRAM AND Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ANGLE Purpose Performs a logical AND of two expressions AND expr1 expr2 expri Any
294. creates 1000 samples of uniformly distributed random noise and marks the maximum with a light green up arrow W1 gnorm 1000 01 markmax BLUE CIRCLE Same as above except the maximum is marked with a blue circle W1 randn 100 100 setplotstyle 2 markmax creates a 100x100 image and marks the maximum If the series is XYZ or a LIST i e Z surface density or contour MARKMAX overplots an XYZ series FIND FINDMAX FINDMIN FINDVAL MARKMIN MAXVAL MINVAL MARKMIN Purpose 476 Marks the minimum of a series with a symbol Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MAX Purpose MARKMIQX s color symbol s Optional A series defaults to the current Window color Optional An integer the color for the minimum marker Defaults to LGREEN symbol Optional An integer the symbol for the minimum marker Defaults to UP_ARROW Nothing Overplots the series with a symbol W1 gnorm 1000 01 markmin creates 1000 samples of uniformly distributed random noise an marks the minimum with a light green up arrow W1 gnorm 1000 01 markmin BLUE CIRCLE Same as above except the minimum is marked with a blue circle W1 randn 100 100 setplotstyle 2 markmin creates a 100x100 image and marks the minimum If the series is XYZ or a LIST i e Z surface density or contour MARKMIN overplots an XYZ series FIND FINDMAX FINDMIN FINDVAL MARKMAX MAXVAL MINVAL Finds the maximum of a series o
295. creates an impulse with a sample rate of 1 0 See GIMPULSE to create an impulse with a specified sample rate EXTRACT GIMPULSE GSERIES ONES 387 INDEX Purpose Format Returns Example See Also INF Purpose Format Returns Example 388 Vertically rescales the series to percentiles of the first point INDEX series series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table index 3 4 3 5 creates a new series with values 100 133 100 166 The original shape of the data is maintained by preserving the relative change between each value PARTSUM Returns the numeric representation of positive infinity INF A real representing positive infinity exp 1000 returns inf l inf returns 0 0 Remarks See Also The configuration parameter DEFAULT MATH VALUE determines the result of expressions such as 1 0 DEFAULT _MATH_VALUE defaults to 0 0 but can be set to inf Overflow operations return INF as a result EPS REALMAX REALMIN INHSERSTYLE Purpose Format Example Causes the Window to inherit not inherit its plotting style s from its data series INHSERSTYLE Window n sernum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window n Optional An integer 0 OFF 1 ON Defaults to 1 sernum Optional Index specifying a data series Defaults to 1 the primary series a gnorm 10 1 setplotstyle a 10
296. ction by linearly interpolating between detected peaks The default values for the optional arguments suffice for most applications GETVALLEY GETPLOTSTYLE Purpose Format Returns Example 308 Allows you to set a plot style GETPLOTSTYLE Window n Window Optional Window or series reference Defaults to the current Window n Optional An integer Index of series Defaults to 1 An integer The possible return values are as follows 0 Lines 1 Points 2 Sticks 3 Bars 4 Table View 5 Hilo 6 Reserved 7 Stack 8 Percent Stack 9 Steps 10 Stem Wl 1 5 bars getplotstyle W1 returns 3 indicating a bar plot a gnorm 100 1 setplotstyle a 9 getplotstyle a returns 9 a step plot Remarks See Also BARS GETPLOTSTYLE HILO LINES POINTS SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE SETSYMBOL STACK STEPS STICKS TABLEVIEW GETPLOTTYPE Purpose Returns the plot type for a table of data Format GETPLOTTYPE Window n Window Optional Window or series reference Defaults to the current Window n Optional An integer Index of series Defaults to 1 Returns An integer The possible return values are as follows 0 Series graphs 1 Waterfall plot 2 Contour map 3 Density image plot 4 Z Surface plot3d 5 Image density plot 6 Chart multiple line plots Example See SETPLOTSTYLE to set the plotting style of a series or Window W1 contour spline2 rand
297. ction is equivalent to MAXVAL See VMAX to compare more than two values Divides one matrix by another MDIV matrix1 matrix2 matrix A non singular square matrix matrix2 Any matrix A matrix WI 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 O W2 1 as 3 W3 W1 W2 30 36 15 Remarks See Also MEAN Purpose W4 mdiv W1 W3 f 2 3 W5 inv W1 1 78 1 56 0 11 0 89 0 78 0 22 O 11 0 22 0 11 W6 W5 W3 fi 23 3 Ifa b and x are matrices anda x b thenmdiv a b returns the matrix x mdiv a b isequivalenttoa b MDIV uses LU decomposition to solve for matrix x and is usually more numerically stable than directly calculating the inverse matrix i e x inv a b Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve INVERSE LU MMULT Calculates the mean value of a series 483 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MEDIAN Purpose Format 484 MEAN series first points series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window first Optional An integer The first point to include in the calculation of the mean Defaults to 1 points Optional An integer The number of points to take for the mean calculation Defaults to the number of points from first to the end of the series A real mean gsin 200 0 01 returns 5 592748E 016 mean gsin 200 0 01 1 50 returns 0 636410
298. ctual data point values BARS POINTS SETPLOTSTYLE STEPS STICKS TABLEVIEW Determines the best linear fit to a series LINREG series info series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table info Optional An integer 0 OFF the line is plotted immediately 1 ON the line s slope y intercept and standard error are displayed in an info window and after the OK button is pressed the line is plotted Defaults to 0 The slope m the y intercept b and the standard error in an info window and after the OK button is pressed plots the line linreg gline 100 01 1 0 1 0 3 1 displays the slope and y intercept of the line and after the OK button is pressed plots the line that best fits the data After the slope and intercept are displayed you must press th eOK button to see the display of the generated line 445 See Also LINREG2 Purpose Format Example Remarks 446 This function can be used in DADiSP expressions or as a calculator function See PFIT to fit a polynomial with error statistics LINREG2 PFIT POLYFIT POLYGRAPH Performs a linear regression of one series vs another The y values of each series are used to make an x y plot The line generated is the best fit to this x y data LINREG2 series1 series2 info series First series or expression resulting in a series series2 Second series or expression resulting in a se
299. current setting Wborder specifies the outer border outline of each Window Defaults to 1 wmargin Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Wmargin specifies the border outline on the inner Window separating the inner Window from the Window plotting margin Defaults to 1 screenopt 1 1 0 0 0 leaves legends and titles in the Worksheet display and disables the display of Window bars borders and margins screenopt 1 1 1 leaves all the settings as they currently are and enables the display of the Window bars SCREENOPT and PRINTOPT are particularly useful in formatting the Worksheet display for presentations demonstrations printouts and custom applications All parameters are optional integer arguments defaulting to current values Use 1 to leave a parameter unchanged Changes made to screen options are stored as configuration parameters in the dadisp ses file and will be the default settings in the next session See Also LAYOUT PRINTING AND PLOTTING FUNCTIONS PRINTOPT PRINT PREVIEW FUNCTIONS Purpose Scrolls the current Window down over the series Format SCROLLD amount amount Optional A real the number of y axis units to scroll the Window down Defaults to 1 3 of the Window height Remarks With the default argument SCROLLD has the same effect as the 1 key in an active Window See Also SCROLLL SCROLLR SCROLLU Purpose Scrolls the current Window left over the series
300. d syntax as C C The expression for exprl expr2 expr3 statement is equivalent to exprl while expr2 statement expr3 See LOOP for a faster but less flexible iteration construct For best performance try to avoid loops altogether by exploiting the vectorized nature of SPL For example for n 1 n lt 101 n y n sin 2 pi 10 t n can be performed much faster more intuitively and concisely with 0 0 01 1 sin 2 pi 10 t y or even faster with y gsin 101 01 10 SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language BREAK CONTINUE LOOP RETURN WHILE FPRINTF Purpose Format Returns Example Performs formatted output to a file FPRINTF filename control arg1 arg2 argN filename A string Name of output file The file must have been previously opened with the FOPEN function control A string Format control string Conforms to the C C language SPRINTF specification See SPRINTF for details argN Number or string to format See SPRINTF for details 1 if successful else 0 write out useful series attributes writeval fname series if fopen fname w 1 error sprintf writeval cannot open 4s fname forintf fname Xoffset 4g n xoffset series forintf fname Deltax 4g n deltax series fprintf fname Length 4d n length series forintf fname Mean 4g n mean series forintf fnam
301. d Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 1038 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 104307 to 10 308 item A string specifying the item to retrieve Returns A series representing the value of the requested item Example chan ddeinit Excel Sheetl1 ddegetdata chan R1C1 R100C1 ddeterm CHAN establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cells in row 1 column through row 100 column 1 as a series in the current window and then terminates the conversation 169 Remarks See Also DDEADVISE DDELINK DDEREQUEST DDESTATUS Purpose Retrieves a DDE link name from the Clipboard Format DDEGETLINK Returns A string in the form app topic item representing the DDE link Example Select W1 and from the Edit pull down menu select Copy from Window ddegetlink returns the string DADiSP Commands W1 the link name of W1 Remarks DDEGETLINK and DDELINK can be used to manually establish a DDE link that was copied to the Clipboard The Paste Link menu item essentially performs the following ddelink ddegetlink See Also DDELINK Purpose 170 DDEGETDATA always returns a series Use DDEREQUEST to obtain a string Begins a DDE Conversation Format Returns Example Remarks See Also DDEINITIATE app topic item server autostart DDEINITIATE app topic item server autostart app A string specifying the application name
302. d as a string picklist Open Select 1 A B C creates a picklist with three options A B and C and only one value may be returned pickiiste Open Selects UB 15 Pa MARS SBI ECY Same as above except multiple values can be returned as a comma separated string and the default value is set to B The list can be provided by other functions such as STRFILE and STRLIST The appearance of the PICKLIST is system dependent MESSAGE OBJECTLIST PICKFILE PICKUNITS 561 PICKUNITS Purpose Format Returns Example See Also PINV Purpose Format Returns 562 Selects units from a pop up list PICKUNITS mode mode Optional An integer Format of the units string Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 Long Name Default 1 Abbreviation 2 Both Long Name and Abbreviation The selected units as a string or a string of length 0 if no units were selected pickunits returns the selected units strlen pickunits returns gt 0 if a units was selected else 0 PICKLIST Calculates the pseudo inverse of a matrix using SVD PINV a tol a An input array tol Optional Real Singular value tolerance Defaults to max of rows or cols max singular values eps An array P the pseudo inverse of the input matrix a such that a P a a Example a 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 93 P pinv a P 0 638889 0 055556 0 527778
303. d yy Locale s abbreviated month name Hour 24 hour clock as a decimal number 00 23 Hour 12 hour clock as a decimal number 00 12 Day of the year as a decimal number 001 366 Month as a decimal number 01 12 Minute as a decimal number 00 59 Newline character Locale s equivalent of either AM or PM 12 hour clock time 01 12 using AM PM notation in the format HH MM SS AM PM Seconds as a decimal number 00 59 Tab character 24 hour clock time in the format HH MM SS Week number of the year as a decimal number 00 52 where Sunday is the first day of the week Returns Example See Also STRGET Purpose Format w Weekday as a decimal number 0 6 where 0 is Sunday W Week number of the year as decimal number 00 52 where Monday is the first day of the week x Locale s appropriate date representation X Locale s appropriate time representation y Year without century as a decimal number 00 99 Y Year with century as a decimal number Z Timezone name or no characters if no timezone The character timeval Optional An integer Time value as returned by the STAT function Defaults to the current time Time value formatted as a string strftime returns the current time in the following form Fri Oct 12 21 00 18 2001 strftime D fstat myfile 10 returns the modified time of myf ile in the following form 10 12 01 FSTAT Returns the nt
304. dance with the specified parameters GLN points spacing factor offset GLOG points spacing factor offset points An integer Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis factor Optional An operand to compress or expand the waveform along the x axis Defaults to 1 offset Optional An operand to adjust the x axis position of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 1 A series gin 100 0 1 2 5 creates a logarithmic series of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart This waveform will also be shifted by five x units the offset value on the x axis and compressed by a factor of two glog 100 0 1 2 5 same as above Remarks The formula used to generate each point i in the waveform is as follows log i spacing factor offset GLN and GLOG are identical See Also GLOG10 GLOG10 Purpose Generates a logarithmic curve base 10 in accordance with the specified parameters Format GLOG10 points spacing factor offset points An integer Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis factor Optional An operand to compress or expand the waveform along the x axis Defaults to 1 offset Optional An operand to adjust the x axis position of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 1 Returns A series Example glog10 100 0 1 2 5 creates a logarithmic series of 100 points spaced 0 1 x units apart This w
305. dashed 2 line in glass mode 1 The color of the line is purple and is unrelated to any overplots match 1 the line spans from coordinates 0 09 0 04 to 0 9 0 5 The following lines accomplish the same result gtri 100 0 01 2 linedraw purple 2 1 1 0 09 0 04 0 9 0 5 In general LINEDRAW replaces the older LINEANN functions LINEDRAW can be used directly from the command line or as part of an SPL routine to draw lines in a Window that contains data The result is identical to adding lines via the Line Toolbar and the lines can subsequently be manipulated with the mouse To use the default value for any integer parameter from target to width use 1 as the argument to LINEANN All polylines created with a single call to LINEDRAW or LINECUR are displayed in the same color Specify the color explicitly for a polyline by using the color argument or by supplying an overplot index number The overplot index match lets you associate a polyline annotation with a specific overplot by guaranteeing that the polyline color will be the same as the overplot color When setting an index match use to refer to the color of your primary series use 2 to refer to the color of your first overplot 3 for your second overplot etc The rules for determining the drawing color used for LINEDRAW or LINECUR follow If a color is supplied as the first argument that color will be used to draw all polylines If 1 is specified as th
306. de A frequency F sample rate T and length L yields a PSD with an amplitude of T L A 2 2 at frequency F If the input series is in Volts the resulting PSD has units of V 2 Hz If len is larger than the length of ser the series is zero padded to length 1 en before calculating the PSD If len is less than the series length the series is truncated to length len If not specified 1en defaults to the length of ser The PSD function calculates faster than the macro version Note Worksheets previous to Version 3 01D have the PSD stored as a macro To override the macro definition delete the macro or use undef PSD or use the full name of the new PSD function PSDSPECTRUM See Also References PUT Purpose Format Example DFT FFT SPECTRUM Oppenheim amp Shafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 pp 548 556 Oppenheim amp Shafer Discrete Time Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1989 pp 730 742 Programs for Digital Signal Processing IEEE Press 1979 Section 2 1 1 2 1 10 S Lawrence Marple Jr Digital Spectral Analysis with Applications Prentice Hall 1987 pp 152 158 Places the cursor at a specified value on the x axis PUT x units x units The value of the desired cursor location W1 gsin 100 1 put 5 0 puts the cursor on the point at 5 0 x units In this case the cursor is located on the 51st point in the series 585 See Also PUTENV Purpose Format Exa
307. dient Remarks If the input is a series the derivative is returned See Also DERIV GRANDOM Purpose Generates a random series based on a uniform or flat distribution The optional range arguments let you determine the output range 345 Format GRANDOM points spacing range1 range2 points An integer the number of points in series spacing Areal the spacing between each point of the x axis rangel Optional A real the low end of the range range Optional A real the high end of the range Returns A series Example grandom 100 0 1 1 10 generates a uniformly distributed random series of 100 points spaced every 0 1 x units with values ranging from to 10 W1 grandom 50000 1 W2 hist W1 30 grandom 50000 1 T T T T T T T T T 0 5000 10000 15000 20000 25000 30000 35000 40000 45000 hist W1 30 2000 1500 lt 1000 500 04 500 T T T T T T T T T T T 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 1 The histogram in W2 indicates that the random sequence in W1 is uniformly distributed 346 Remarks See Also GRAY Purpose Format Returns Example If no range is given default is 0 1 If only one range is given range is 0 range or range 0 depending on whether range is positive or negative See SEEDRAND to set a new seed value for the pseudo random sequence GRANDOM can be abbreviated GRAND GNORMAL HISTOGRAM RAND RA
308. dinate in text columns Defaults to 1 centered filename Filename of the menu file in quotes menuprint MENU1 MEN reads the menu file MENU1 MEN and writes the result to a file By default the output file will be named menu1 prn The user is given an opportunity to override the default name before the file is written ECHO INPUT MENUCLEAR MENUFILE MENULIST VIEWFILE Creates a new series or table by splicing input series or tables MERGE ser1 ser2 serN n pad serl serN Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table n Optional An integer number of times to merge the series Defaults to 1 pad Optional An integer the pad flag 0 do not pad unequally sized series with zeros 1 pad unequally sized with zeros Defaults to 1 Returns Example Remarks See Also A new series where the first point is point 1 of series 1 the second point is point 1 of series 2 the third point is point 1 of series 3 etc merge 1 2 3 1 2 3 returns the merged series 1 1 2 2 3 3 merge 1 2 3 1 2 3 2 merges the input series twice to yield 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 merge W1 W2 W6 gcos 100 0 1 0 creates a new series by splicing the series in Window 1 Window 2 Window 6 and a generated cosine wave in the method described above but will not pad unequal sized series with zeros To merge series in Window 3 through Window 8 where W3 s series is 100 points long and t
309. displays the DADiSP configuration file The upper left hand corner of the screen is the origin with coordinates of x 0 y 0 The screen has dimensions of 80 columns by 24 rows The bottom right hand corner of the screen has coordinates x 80 y 24 To center the menu set x and y to 1 DSPMACVIEW MENUFILE VIEW WHICH Returns the maximum of one or more input arguments VMAX val1 val2 valN vall val2 vaIN One or more series or numeric arguments A real or series 809 Example Remarks See Also VMIN Purpose Format Returns Example 810 vmax 10 15 20 returns 20 vmax 1 2 3 0 4 2 0 3 8 returns the series 1 4 8 W1i 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W2 vmax wl returns 7 8 9 the maximums of each column of W1 VMAX with no input arguments uses the current Window VMAX is an SPL routine that accepts a variable number of input arguments ARGV MAX MAXVAL MIN MINVAL VMIN Returns the minimum of one or more input arguments VMIN val1 val2 valN vall val2 vaIN One or more series or numeric arguments A real or series vmin 10 15 20 returns 10 Remarks See Also wo Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also vmin l 2 3 0 4 2 0 3 8 returns the series 0 2 2 Wi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W2 vmin wl returns 1 2 3 the minimums of each column of W1 VMIN wit
310. do not resize return x y coordinates immediately after mouse click 2 do not resize return coordinates of dragged rectangle x1 y1 x2 y2 magnify returns the new magnified coordinates after scaling the plot x y magnify 1 returns the x y coordinates after the mouse click without modifying the plot x1 y1 x2 y2 magnify 2 returns the coordinates of the dragged rectangle without modifying the plot MAGNIFY with no arguments performs the same function as the magnifier button in the toolbar 471 See Also Use x y magnify 1 to return the coordinates of a free roaming cursor after a mouse click If the magnify operation is canceled the returned coordinates are undefined SETXY ZOOM MAGNITUDE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 472 Returns the magnitude component of an expression that is in Polar magnitude angle Cartesian Real Imaginary or other form MAGNITUDE expr expr Any scalar series table or expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table magnitude 3 returns 3 mag 3 0 4 07 yields 5 the hypotenuse length of a 3 4 5 triangle mag W1 returns a new series corresponding to the magnitude component of the original series whether Polar or Cartesian form MAGNITUDE always returns real positive values MAGNITUDE can be abbreviated MAG See Also ABS ANGLE IMAGINARY PHASE REAL MAKECARTESIAN P
311. dow reference Defaults to the current Window onoff An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 1 W1 gsin 100 01 setvunits Volts W2 gcos 100 01 setvunits Amps W3 wl Scales 2 overlay w2 red focus 2 scales 2 label Staggered Scales Window 3 contains the 2 curves overlayed with staggered scales STAGGERX and STAGGERY apply to the scales associated with the current focus of the specified Window Staggered scales are only applicable in OVERLAY plots 74 See Also STARMS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 742 Precede succeed order is defined by the order in which overlays are created in the Windows Overlays created earlier have precedence If onoff is OFF then DADiSP will turn off staggering and the current focus scale will stay flush with the plotting area FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETXY SPANX SPANY Calculates the short time averaged RMS series STARMSG s intv s An input series intv Optional An integer the duration of each RMS segment Defaults to 1 0 second A series the short time averaged RMS series W1 gsin 1000 01 1 W2 starms W1 W2 consists ofa 10 point series where each point has a value of 0 707107 the RMS value of each 1 second segment of W1 W4 starms W1 0 1 W4 consists of a 10 point series where the values now vary since the RMS value of W1 varies over a 0 1 second interval The number of segments used to calculate the RMS va
312. ds a Real Integer gt Series yields a Series Integer gt Integer yields an Integer Real gt Complex yields a Complex Real gt Series yields a Series Complex gt Real Series yields a Complex Series String gt String yields a string greaterequal max W1 20 0 returns a if the maximum value of W1 is greater than or equal to 20 0 or 0 if the maximum value of W1 is not greater than or equal to 20 0 greaterequal 7 5 3 4 min 6 5 returns a series 1 1 0 0 greaterequal a b isequivalenttoa gt b String comparisons use STRCMP lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators GREATER LESSER GRIDCOLOR Purpose Format 350 Sets the color of the grid lines in the current Window GRIDCOLOR color color An integer Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP Example gridcolor RED sets the grid color to red Remarks For a list of supported colors use the MACROS function See Also GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV Purpose Places a dashed grid over the series in the current Window This is equivalent to using the F6 toggle key Format GRIDDASH Returns A dashed grid in the Window display Example griddash sets dashed grids Typing GRIDHV will display horizontal and vertical dashed grids Remarks To turn grids on press the F6 key or specify horizontal grids
313. e Format 280 Valid infofield arguments are 1 st dev Disk drive on which the file resides 2 st_ino Inode number 3 st mode File mode 4 st_nlink Number of hard links 5 st uid User id 6 st gid Group id 7 st_rdev Device type 8 st_size Total file size 9 st atime Last accessed time 10 st_mtime Last modified time 11 st_ctime Last status change time 12 st_btime Last archived time An integer as specified by the infofield or 1 if the file does not exist fstat myfile returns the size of myfile or 1 if it does not exist fstat myfile 10 returns the last time as an integer myfile was modified or 1 if it does not exist FSTAT is a direct implementation of the stat function found in most versions of UNIX Windows and DOS See STRFTIME to convert the file time into a string STRFTIME Returns the current byte location of the file pointer as measured from the beginning of the file FTELL filename filename The name ofthe file in which to locate the pointer in quotes Returns Example Remarks See Also FUNCS Purpose Format Returns Remarks See Also The byte position of the file pointer or nothing if the operation is unsuccessful ftell myheader hdr displays the location of the file pointer at the bottom of the screen A file must be opened with FOPEN before using FTELL FCLOSE FOPEN FSEEK Lists all the built in functions available in
314. e is equivalent to fft W1 if mean phase curr echo Negative echo Positive label Mean Phase In the JUMP statement the label is in string form at the branch point in the macro the label is not quoted and followed by a colon GOTO is preferred in SPL routines See Also KAISER Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks GOTO IF WHILE Multiplies a series with a Kaiser window KAISER s ampflag s A series or array ampflag Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid inputs are 0 do not correct amplitude default 1 correct amplitude 2 correct RMS amplitude A series or array W1 gsin 1000 001 45 W2 spectrum kaiser W1 W3 spectrum kaiser W1 1 The MAX of W2 0 4389 and the MAX of W3 1 0 The amplitude of the spectrum in W3 has been corrected to take into account amplitude effects of the Kaiser window KAISER was implemented as a macro in versions prior to DADiSP 2000 You may need to remove the macro definition with undefmacro kaiser from old Worksheets Ifampflag 1 the correction factor is the mean of the spectral window This assures that the spectrum of a sinusoid of amplitude A has a peak of A Ifampflag 2 the correction is applied as follows w kaiser s rms s rms kaiser s 423 See Also KRON Purpose Format Returns Example 424 This assures that sqrt area psd w rms s approximately GKA
315. e win Optional A Window defaults to the current Window mode An integer Valid inputs are 0 OFF 1 0N 668 Returns Example Remarks See Also Nothing x y fxyvals 2 2 0 1 2 2 0 1 cos x y setplottype 4 hot sethatch 0 creates a shaded 3D plot of cos x y without cross hatching x y fxyvals 2 2 0 1 2 2 0 1 W1 cos x y setplottype 4 hot sethatch 0 W2 deriv wl moveto wl shadewith w2 pon creates a shaded 3D plot of cos x y without cross hatching using the derivative of the surface as the lighting model sethatch 0 is useful for high density 3D plots PLOT3D SETPLOTTYPE SETHOTVARIABLE Purpose Format Example Sets a hot variable SETHOTVARIABLE name value name A string The name of the variable value Any string scalar series table or expression resulting in a string scalar series or table sethotvariable RateOfChange deriv wl sets the hot variable Rate Of Change to the derivative of Window 1 Whenever Window 1 changes the hot variable Rate Of_Change will be updated 669 Remarks See Also Hot Variables are linked such that if the dependent value changes then the value for the hot variable changes Hot variables can also be assigned with the syntax RateOfChange deriv W1 A Window formula can also be assigned with the syntax W1 gnorm 1000 1 This form is useful in SPL routines that must set
316. e Sum 4g n sum series fclose fname Ww 5 iteval test gsin 100 01 1 The file test contains the following text Xoffset 0 Deltax 0 01 Length 100 Mean l Sum 100 271 See Also FPUTS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 272 FCLOSE FCLOSEALL FOPEN FPUTS SPRINTF Writes a specified string to a file FPUTS string filename string String to be written to the file in quotes filename Name of the file to which the string is to be written in quotes A 1 if the write is successful otherwise it returns nothing fopen myheader hdr w fputs DATASET Pressure n myheader hdr fputs SERIES Pressure_l Pressure_2 n myheader hdr fclose myheader hdr creates a file called myheader hdr that contains the following information DATASET Pressure SERIES Pressure_l Pressure_2 If the file myheader hdr already existed its former contents would be lost and replaced by the information shown above Must be used with FOPEN and FCLOSE The last string written to the file must end with n The string may contain other escape sequences as listed below Escape sequences are designed to output non printing characters See Also FREADA Purpose Format Returns Escape Sequence Meaning n New Line t Tab v Vertical Tab b Backspace r Carriage Return f Form Feed a Bell Single Quote Escape Sequence
317. e The Dataset name must also contain the Version number The name string can contain directory and Labbook specifiers separated by the path delimiter COPYSERIES DELETEDATASET DELETEWORKSHEET LOADDATASET LOADSERIES SAVESERIES COPYSERIES Purpose Format Returns 136 Copies a Series from a Dataset COPYSERIES srcname desname verbose srcname A string The source Series to copy from The name can also contain a path and Labbook specifier desname Optional a string The destination Series to copy to Defaults to the same Series name in srcname verbose Optional an integer Verbose flag 1 display error messages and warnings 0 do not display messages Defaults to 1 An integer 1 if the source Series is successfully copied to the destination Series else 0 Example Remarks See Also COVM Purpose Format Returns copyseries Demo4 RUN1 1 ANALOG1 copies the Series RUN1 1 ANALOG1 from the Demo4 Labbook to the Series RUN1 1 ANALOG1 in current Labbook copyseries Dirl Bookl RUN1 1 ANALOG1 Dir2 Book2 Job 2 Data 0 copies the Series RUN1 1 ANALOG1 in the Book1 Labbook located in the Dir1 sub directory to the Series Job 2 Data in the Book2 Labbook located in the Di r2 sub directory The copy is performed silently The specified Series names are case sensitive The Series name must also contain the Dataset and Version number The name string can contain dir
318. e Defaults to 1 Returns An integer 1 if paused else 0 637 Example See Also RTTTERM Purpose Format 638 Start first DADiSP to simulate a real time data source rttinit rtwrite Start second DADiSP to read real time data rtnum rttinit rtread The series generated by the first DADiSP is read synchronously by the second DADiSP The real time data appears in W1 of the second DADiSP Pause the RT reading task rttpause rtnum The task is suspended and no new data is read Continue the RT reading task rttpause rtnum 1 ASCALE RTREAD RTTINIT RTTTERM RTWRITE Removes a real time task from the queue RTTTERM rttasknum rttasknum An integer The task number as returned from a previous RTTINIT function A value of 1 terminates all RT tasks Returns Example See Also RTWRITE Purpose Format Returns An integer indicating the number of terminated tasks Start first DADiSP to simulate a real time data source rttinit rtwrite Start second DADiSP to read real time data rtnum rttinit rtread The series generated by the first DADiSP is read synchronously by the second DADiSP The real time data appears in W1 of the second DADiSP Terminate the RT reading task rttterm rtnum The task is discontinued and no new data is read ASCALE RTTINIT RTREAD RTWRITE Reads real time data from a file RTWRITE len freq len Optional An integer the nu
319. e A For example b conj transpose A b A are equivalent For a real array and are equivalent See Also Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve Macros in matrix mac MMULT RAVEL TRANSPOSE SEMICOLON Purpose Combines several functions commands or macros on a single line for execution as a whole This command form may be used at the command line or within a macro Format lt formula1 gt lt formula2 gt lt formulan gt lt formula gt Any valid DADiSP formula A formula can be any DADiSP command function or macro The following are examples of valid formula types 1 Any expression evaluating to a series or scalar e g W1 W1 2 Commands that return nothing but manipulate a series or Window display e g EXPANDH 2 FREAK CURSORON or PLOTMODE 0 3 DADiSP or user defined functions or macros e g AUTOCOR or PSD 28 Example Remarks See Also W1 gsin 100 01 W2 W1 W1 overplot W1 1red Window 2 contains the square of W1 and the original data is also overplotted in light red Any changes to Window cause a re evaluation of Window 2 W1 gnorm 10 1 W2 spline W1 3 overp W1 lred setsym 4 setsym 14 2 Window 2 performs a cubic spline interpolation of the data in W1 The original data is overplotted onto the resulting interpolation The interpolated data displays cross 4 symbols and the original data is plotted in light red with circles 14 as symbols The
320. e Also NAN Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 512 Wl 2 5 7 9 navalue 13 15 nafill Wl 3 replaces each NA value with the preceding known value The new seriesis 2 5 7 9 5 135 1330 TSR READTABLE will read the strings NA or NULL as NAVALUES ISNAN ISNAVALUE NAN NAVALUE SETNAVALUE The value used to represent NAs in numeric data NAN A real the NA marker Is 2 nan 3 4 generates a series with the third element as an NA value READTABLE will read the strings NA NAN or NULL as NAVALUES NAVALUEs are skipped when plotted The graph of 1 2 nan 3 4 displays a gap between the 2 and 4 data points NAN is equivalent to NAVALUE ISNAN ISNAVALUE NAFILL NAVALUE READTABLE SETNAVALUE NAVALUE Purpose The value used to represent NAs in numeric data Format NAVALUE Returns A real number Example 1 2 navalue 3 4 generates a series with the third element as an NA Remarks READTABLE will read the strings NA NAN or NULL as NAVALUES NAVALUEs are skipped when plotted The graph of 1 2 navalue 3 4 displays a gap between the 2 and 4 data points NAVALUE is equivalent to NAN See Also ISNAVALUE NAFILL NAN READTABLE SETNAVALUE Purpose Computes the Eigenvalues of a square table without a preliminary balancing step Format NBEIGVAL matrix matrix A Real or Complex square table 513 Returns Example Remarks See Also
321. e Also W2 gsin 128 1 128 4 getvalley W2 finds the four valleys associated with the valley of each sine wave getvalley W1 max W1 1 0 0 1 0 0 does the same thing Note that because the default fillval is 0 0 it is possible that peaks and valleys of height 0 0 will be indistinguishable from the fillval If this is a problem set the fillval to be the minimum of the input series for GETPEAK and the maximum value of the input series for GETVALLEY For example to uniquely find all the valleys of a series getvalley W1 max W1 1 0 0 1 max W1 The default values for the optional arguments suffice for most applications GETPEAK GETVARIABLE Purpose Format Example 318 Returns the value of a global variable GETVARIABLE variable_name element variable_name The name of the variable element Optional The element within the variable if it is a series Defaults to the entire series A 25 B 25 41 33 getvariable A returns 25 getvariable B returns the series 25 41 33 Remarks See Also getvariable B 2 returns the value 41 to the status line B 2 also returns 41 All variables in an SPL routine are considered local GETVARIABLE and SETVARIABLE allow SPL routines to explicitly manipulate global variables DELALLVARIABLES DELVARIABLE SETHOTVARIABLE SETVARIABLE VARS GETVUNITS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Returns the ve
322. e and W3 will contain the coefficients in the form coef A theta C rmserror The known frequency approach to sine curve fitting is commonly used in effective bits calculation The output of the function is totally dependant on knowing the frequency of the input series EFFBIT SINFIT IEEE Std 1057 1994 Annex A Derivation of three parameter known frequency sine wave curve fit algorithm Computes an LU decomposition matrix LU matrix type permute matrix A Real or Complex square matrix type Optional An integer specifying the type of matrix Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 0 Lower LU decomposition matrix 1 Upper LU decomposition matrix default 2 Complete LU decomposition matrix permute Optional An integer specifying whether or not to permute 0 No permutation 1 permute Defaults to 1 A matrix A 1 2 3 4 5 6 25 850 LOY lu A 0 0 1 000 0 000 0 000 0 143 1 000 0 000 0 571 0 500 1 000 Remarks The LU decomposition of a matrix A A lu A 0 1 lu A 1 1 or A lu A ulu A For matrices A b and x where A x b and A is square the built in operator uses LU decomposition such that A b produces matrix x See Also Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve CHOLESKY LLU MMULT QR SVD ULU MACREAD Purpose Reads an external file of macro definitions Format MACREAD filename filename The name of ext
323. e colors of the spectrum ranging from red to blue W2 converts the image into a 24 bit color image Unlike standard images a 24 bit image does not reference a separate colormap Instead each pixel of the image is comprised of a composite 24 bit RED GREEN BLUE value packed into a long integer 4 bytes Use r g b getrgb image to retrieve the separate red green and blue values from a composite 24 bit image image rgbimage r g b To construct a 24 bit composite image from separate RGB values Because 24 bit color images do not require a colormap the colors are implicit the image can be saved and restored automatically with the correct colors DENSITY GETCOLORMAP GETRGB IMINTERP RGBIMAGE SPLINE2 INTERP2 383 IMAGINARY Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also IMINTERP Purpose 384 Returns the Imaginary component of a complex expression IMAGINARY expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table imaginary 1 returns the result 0 0 imag 3 0 4 07 returns 4 0 imag gsin 20 0 05 returns a series with twenty zeros because a generated sine wave contains no Imaginary component The series or scalar returned is always Real IMAGINARY can be abbreviated IMAG ANGLE MAGNITUDE PHASE REAL Interpolates an image Format Returns Example Remarks See Also IMINTERP image factor method
324. e cursor on the minimum value of the series FMIN Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window W1 gsin 100 0 01 fmin places the cursor on the 76th point where the y value is 1 0 To display the crosshair cursor type Cursoron If there is more than one valley of the same depth FMIN will find the first one FMIN sets the cursor position to the minimum point of the series but does not display point values nor does it provide an active cursor Use CURSORON to activate the cursor CURPOS CURSORON FMAX FIND PEAKS AND VALLEYS MAX MIN FOCUS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also FOPEN Purpose Sets the input focus for Windows with overlayed series by specifying which series are to respond to the scrolling and scaling commands FOCUS Window sernum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window sernum Optional An integer designating the series Defaults to the first series in the current Window Series are counted starting at 1 W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 integ wl W3 wl w2 overlay W1l lred overlay w2 lgreen focus w3 2 In this example W3 has 2 overlayed series the second one responds to the scrolling and scaling commands The SYNC function can be used to share scrolling and scaling attributes The SCALES function can be used to explicitly set types of scales used for the series GETFOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SYNC Opens a
325. e derivative of the input series s is less than zero then the break statement will break out of the whi 1e loop and return the value BREAK is for use in SPL files CONTINUE FOR IF LOOP RETURN SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language WHILE BRIGHTEN Purpose Format 66 Brightens or darkens an image BRIGHTEN beta cmap beta Optional Areal 1 lt beta lt 1 Default 0 5 cmap Optional A colormap Defaults to current colormap Returns Example Remarks See Also BUILTINS Purpose Format Returns Remarks See Also A colormap or alters the current colormap W1 rainbow showcmap brighten 5 brightens the rainbow colormap brighten 5 restores the brightened colormap to the original colors For beta gt 0 the color map is brightened If beta lt 0 the colormap is darkened GETCOLORMAP SHOWCMAP SETCOLORMAP Lists all the built in functions available in DADiSP BUILTINS A list box of all Worksheet functions BUILTINS displays a GUI list of function names sorted alphabetically BUILTINS does not display the arguments or function descriptions If an item is selected the help page of that item is opened BUILTINS and FUNCS are identical functions COMMANDS FUNCS FUNCTIONS MACROS 67 BYTESWAP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks CALC Purpose 68 Reverses the bytes of an input series BYTESWAP series dat
326. e executed once a breakpoint has been reached See Also DBCLEAR DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK 152 See Also DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS DBDOWN Purpose Move down the debugger callstack Format DBDOWN Returns Nothing Example Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y y x x y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y 153 Remarks See Also 154 Now consider the following debugger session Q bstop myfunc bcont Q ycall 10 dbstack ocals dbup ocals dbdown ocals A breakpoint is set in the routine myfunc and the function mycall is executed Since mycall calls myfunc the debugger stops in myfunc DBSTACK shows the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 At this point the LOCALS command shows that the local variable x is set to 20 the value set by the calling mycall function The DBUP command moves up the call stack to the mycall function Now the LOCALS command shows x has the value 10 the value specified when mycall was executed Finally the DBDOWN command returns to the MYFUNC routine Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached
327. e first argument DADiSP checks the overplot index match the fourth argument If an overplot index is specified DADiSP draws all polylines using the color that corresponds to the index If the color argument is 1 and the overplot index is 1 or omitted DADiSP draws the polylines using the color of the primary series 443 See Also LINECOPY LINECUR LINEDEL LINEMOVE TEXT LINEMOVE Purpose Format Remarks See Also LINES Purpose Format 444 Moves a polyline created with LINECUR or LINEANN LINEMOVE LINEMOVE draws handles at each polyline vertex To move a multi line group move the mouse cursor to the polyline you wish to move Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the polyline to a new location Release the mouse button when you have positioned the polyline You may move polylines repeatedly while in the LINEMOVE mode When you have finished moving polylines press the right mouse button or ESC LINEANN LINECOPY LINECUR LINEDEL LINEDRAW Sets the graph style of the current Window to connect the graph s points with lines LINES Example Remarks See Also LINREG Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 3 5 10 lines generates a series 3 5 10 and connects the data points using lines LINES accomplishes the same result as the first mode of the F7 key and SETPLOTSTYLE 0 The line mode is only a graphical representation It does not affect the a
328. e inverse functions invprobn 0 01 0 01 0 99 displays the inverse normal cumulative distribution function over the range 0 01 to 0 99 INVPROBN uses a minimax approximation by rational functions and the result has a relative error less than 1 15e 9 A last refinement by Halley s rational method is applied to achieve full machine precision The algorithm was originally developed by Peter J Acklam INVPROBN is much faster and more accurate than IVSNORMPB For0 5 lt z lt 1 0 invprobn z ivsnormpb z 0 5 approximately See PROBN to return p for a given z such that P X lt z p INVPROBN is the inverse of PROBN See PDFNORM to generate the normal density function 405 See Also A2STD CNF2STD CONFX ERF ERFINV IVSNORMPB PDFNORM PROBN XCONF ISCOMPLX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 406 Returns 1 if input parameter is complex ISCOMPLX val val A series scalar or string input The scalar if the input is complex or a complex series else 0 iscomp1x 3i returns 1 iscomp1Ix string returns 0 iscompIx fft 1 2 3 4 returns 1 If the input series is empty iscomp1x returns 0 ISREAL ISSTR ISEMPTY Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ISFUNC Purpose Returns if the input series is empty ISEMPTY ser ser Optional A series defaults to the current Window An integer 1 if the input s
329. e length of the XTIC interval in W2 GETYTIC SETXTIC SETYTIC XTIC YTIC 327 GETYB Purpose Format Returns Example See Also GETYT Purpose Format Returns 328 Returns the bottom y coordinate of a Window GETYB Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number sety getyb W2 getyt W2 sets the current Window s y axis range to be the same as that of Window 2 GETXL GETXR GETYT SETX SETXY SETY Returns the top y coordinate of a Window GETYT Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number Example See Also GETYTIC Purpose Format Returns Example See Also GETZB Purpose sety 2 getyb 2 getyt doubles the y range GETXL GETXR GETYB SETX SETXY SETY Returns the y axis tic interval of a Window GETYTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number setytic 2 getytic W2 sets the current Window s ytic interval to be two times that of Window 2 SETXTIC SETYTIC XTIC YTIC Returns the bottom z coordinate of a Window 329 Format Returns Example See Also GETZT Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 330 GETZB Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number setz getzb W2 getzt W2 sets the curren
330. e of m excluding the main diagonal with the other elements set to 0 W1 ones 3 W2 uptrix W1 w2 0 1 1 0 5 05 Lks 0 0 OF UPTRIX excludes the main diagonal Use UPTRI to include the main diagonal Use TRIU to return the upper matrix above a specified diagonal COLNOS LOTRI LOTRIX ROWNOS TRIU UPTRI Computes the Unitary Schur form of a matrix USCHUR matrix matrix A Real or Complex square matrix Returns Example Remarks See Also VALFILL Purpose Format A matrix matrix 1 3 4 5 6 7 18 9 L2 schur matrix 19 964 4 353 2 2431 0 0 1 4739 0 1399 005 0 0 0 50976 uschur matrix 0 25387 0 96612 0 046551 0 50456 0 17334 0 84579 0 82521 0 19124 0 53147 matrix uschur matrix schur matrix transpose uschur matrix transpose uschur matrix uschur matrix returns an identity matrix which is the same size as the input matrix XA MMULT SCHUR TRANSPOSE Replaces a value with previous or next value VALFILL s val mode s An input series or array val Optional A real the value to replace Defaults to 0 0 mode Optional A integer the fill mode 0 no fill 1 fill forward using last known value 2 fill forward then backward default 3 fill backward then forward 805 Returns Example Remarks See Also A series or array Wl ravel gnorm 100 1 10 W2 W
331. e series will be displayed in the type of the Window For example W1 spline2 rand 10 3 setplottype 5 a spline2 rand 10 3 setplottype a 2 Wl a W2 a The plot type of W1 is set to image and all multiple column series placed in W1 will be displayed as an image The variable a plots as an image in W1 even though the plot type was set to contour However because the plot type of W2 was not previously set the series plots as a contour map Use CLEAR to remove the Window plot type clear wl W1 a The series is now displayed as a contour map CONTOUR DENSITY GETPLOTSTYLE GETPLOTTYPE PLOT3D SETPLOTSTYLE TABLEVIEW WATERFALL Converts palette colors to colormap values SETPMAP c 1 c2 c3 CN cN List of integers the palette colors 679 Returns A Nx3 colormap or if no return value is requested shades the current Window with the specified colors Example W1 density spline2 rand 10 5 setpmap blue lblue red lred yellow colorbar W1 density spline2 rand 10 5 1 1 8 1 0 9 0 8 6 0 7 0 6 0 5 4 0 4 0 3 0 2 0 1 0 0 1 04 i 0o 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 creates a 46x46 density plot and shades the image with colors of blue light blue red light red and yellow The image is divided into 5 equal slices and shaded with the specified colors The COLORBAR function adds a color legend to the plot Remarks SETPMAP accepts the same color values as SETPALETTE however SETPMAP
332. e that matches control string String or scalar values in the specified format A string anyformat Max f 4s s max getdate gettime returns a string such as Max 32 7 05 19 94 12 00 37 ANYFORMAT is a constrained version of SPRINTF The SPRINTF function allows more flexibility in the control string NFORMAT SFORMAT SPRINTF 45 AREA Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 46 Calculates the area of a series or portion of a series using Simpson s Rule AREA series start length series Optional Any series or expression evaluating to a series Defaults to the current Window start Optional An integer Index of the point defined as the start of the series section to be used Defaults to 1 length Optional An integer The length of the series portion to be used only valid when start has been specified Defaults to the length from the start value to the end of the series A scalar area gsin 100 0 01 returns the area 0 00042 The area of a sine wave over one period should cancel out to zero but by virtue of a low digital sampling rate which in this example is 100 points per second our curve is a rough approximation of a true sine If we generate a single period sine wave at a rate of 1000 Hz gsin 1000 0 001 DADiSP calculates the area of that curve as 0 0 The AREA function returns a number INTEG returns a series DADiSP will calculate AREA correctly even
333. e value of the item requested Example ddelink Excel Sheet1 R1C1 R100C1 establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cells in row 1 column 1 through row 100 column 1 as a series in the current window Whenever a cell changes the new series is appended to the existing series Remarks Use DDEUNLINK to terminate a DDELINK operation The app optional topic and optional item strings can also be placed in one string of the following format app topiclitem For example ddelink Excel Sheet1 R1C1 R100C1 DDELINK combines DDEINIT and DDEADVISE into one function See DDEINIT and DDEADVISE for a discussion of the optional arguments See Also DDEADVISE DDEGETDATA DDEINITIATE DDEUNLINK DDEPOKE Purpose Sends data to a DDE conversation in string form Format DDEPOKE chan item data chan An integer specifying the DDE channel number item A string specifying the item of the data destination data A string number or series representing the data to send Returns A 1 if successful otherwise it returns 0 indicating an error 173 Example Remarks See Also chan ddeinit Excel Sheetl ddepoke chan RIC1 12 7 ddeterm chan establishes a DDE conversation with Excel sends the value 12 7 as a string to the cell in row 1 column 1 and then terminates the conversation ddepoke chan R1C1 R100C1 W1 10 sends the entire series of W1 10 as a CR LF delimited
334. eal component of the resultant series DADiSP uses a mixed radix FFT however series with lengths equal to a power of 2 will be processed faster than series with lengths that are not equal to a power of 2 Use LENGTH or SIZE to find out if a series is a power of 2 points long If the series length is a power of two and the series is purely real further speed optimizations based on symmetry are employed See Also References FFT2 Purpose Format Returns Use FFTP to get magnitude phase output and SPECTRUM to get a normalized magnitude plot BESTPOW2 DFT FFT2 FFTSHIFT IFFT IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE PHASE PSD REAL SPECGRAM SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 Calculates the two dimensional 2D FFT of an array FFT2 array rlen clen array A multi column series or expression resulting in a multi column series rlen Optional An integer The FFT row size Defaults to numrows a clen Optional An integer The FFT column size Defaults to numcols a A complex array 243 Example Remarks See Also 244 fft2 i1 2 13 4 returns the complex array 10 4 x W1 W2 W3 W4 0i 2 0i Oi 0 0i y fxyvals 2 2 1 2 2 1 cos x y setplottype 3 rainbow fft2 W1 fftshift logl0 mag W2 ff
335. eals ranging from 0 0 to 1 0 N is the number of values for each Red Green and Blue component all 0 255 255 zip zeros 255 1 map ravel all zip all setcolormap map showcmap creates and displays a black to magenta colormap cmap getcolormap cmap map returns all ones The colormap is an array of N rows by 3 columns where 1 lt N lt 255 Each individual RGB red green blue value is a real number ranging from 0 to 1 0 See Also COOL COPPER GRAY HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SHOWCMAP GETCOMMENT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns the comment string for any series in a Window including overplots and overlays GETCOMMENT series item column series Optional A series Defaults to the series in the current Window item Optional Item number Defaults to 1 column Optional Column number within the specified item Defaults to 1 A string getcomment W3 returns the comment of the first series in W3 from the information box The comment field for the primary series is displayed in the information box and can be viewed by pressing F2 or clicking on the T icon The comment is displayed as the column header when in table view COMMENT SETCOMMENT 295 GETCONF Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns the value of the specified configuration parameter GETCONF param param Configuratio
336. early add points to a series Binary series based on NA values in input series Splice several series together Replace NAVALUES with the previous known value Paste data from clipboard into current window Create a multi series table from one or more sources Copy a rectangular region from a table Remove points from a series Remove NAVALUES from a series or array Arrange a series or table based on a series of indices Replace values in a series based on a logical condition Concatenate series with itself Put last point in a series first Round input to nearest integer value Extract a row of data from a table Change delta x values of the series Set NAVALUE in a series Set a point in a series Set starting point of series Swap the rows and columns of a specified table Unmerge demultiplexes an interlaced series Create a single vector from the columns of a table Replace a value with previous or next value Data Type Conversion BYTESWAP CASTBYTE CASTCOMPLEX CASTINTEGER CASTREAL CASTSERIES CASTSTRING CASTVARIANT CASTVARIANTARRAY DOUBLE FLOAT INT JULSTR JULYMD LONG SBYTE SINT STRJUL UBYTE UINT ULONG XYDT Debugging DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP DEBUG LOCALS Reverse bytes of input series Cast the values of a series to a new data type Explicitly casts input as a complex number Cast input as an integer Cast input as a real value Cast input as a
337. eb test bin SINT 1 2 3 4 W1 readb test bin SINT returns the series 1 2 3 4 writeb TEST DAT SBYTE 2 W4 appends the contents of Window 4 to a binary file named TEST DAT in a signed byte format If using READB to bring the file back into a Worksheet be sure to use the same binary format i e in this case SBYTE This is another way to export a file although it does not export a header with series information like the EXPORT Utilities To minimize disk utilization the filetype should be chosen to fit the magnitude and precision of the data You can read the data that you have saved this way with READB See Also EXPORTFILE FREADB FWRITEB IMPORTFILE WRITEA WRITETABLE READA READB Purpose Writes a Microsoft BMP bitmap file Format WRITEBMP filename image colormap filename A string The destination BMP file image Optional An image array Defaults to the current Window colormap Optional A 3xN colormap Defaults to the current colormap Returns 1 if successful Example x y fxyvals 1 1 0 05 1 1 0 05 W1 density cos x y writebmp cos2d bmp W1 writes the image displayed in W1 as a bitmap file Remarks WRITEBMP currently supports only uncompressed BMP files with at most 256 colors The image is automatically scaled to 8 bits per pixel WRITEBMP SPL is based on SAVEBMP M Copyright 1993 written by Ralph Sucher Dept of Communications Engineering Technical Un
338. ectory and Labbook specifiers separated by the path delimiter COPYDATASET DELETEDATASET DELETEWORKSHEET LOADDATASET LOADSERIES SAVESERIES Calculates the covariance matrix of an array COVM m m An array An array 137 Example Remarks See Also CPHASE Purpose Format Returns 138 a 1 00 3 00 2 20 1 10 4 00 2 40 1 20 5 00 2 60 b covm a b 0 01 0 10 0 02 0 10 1 00 0 20 0 02 0 20 0 04 c diag sqrt b colstdev a a i c d The mean is removed from each column before the covariance is computed The standard deviations of each column can be calculated by diag sqrt covm m A COLSTDEV Evaluates the phase response of Cascade form filter coefficients CPHASE c N r c Aseries The filter coefficients in cascade format N Optional An integer the number of output samples Defaults to 2048 r Optional A real the sample rate of the data Defaults to rate of filter A real series The phase response of the filter in radians Example W1 elliptic 1 1000 0 200 0 3 0 40 0 250 0 W2 cphase W1 1024 W1 elliptic 1 1000 0 200 0 3 0 40 0 250 0 1 No Units 1 0 068231 2 1 000000 3 1 339368 4 1 000000 5 1 168010 6 0 553014 W2 cphase W1 1024 4 3 a 24 N 2 1 a Ss 04 Fo ne 2 gt 3 potas 4 T T T T T T T T T
339. ed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 1038 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 104308 ULONG 8 Unsigned Long Integer 0 to 4 294 967 295 length Optional An integer The number of data points to read If length is set to 1 the entire file is read Defaults to 1 byteswap Optional An integer Swap the order of the bytes read 1 swap 0 do not swap default A series writeb mix dat float 1 1 5 2 5 3 5 writeb mix dat sint 2 10 20 fopen mix bin r a freadb mix bin float 3 b freadb mix bin sint 2 fclose mix dat a 1 5 2 5 3 5 b 10 20 The WRITEB function creates a file that contains 3 float values and then appends 2 signed integer values FREADB reads the values into the series variables fopen mix bin r fseek mix bin 8 0 c castreal freadb mix bin float 1 fclose mix dat c 3 5 The FSEEK positions the file at the third float value by skipping the first 8 bytes FREADB reads the float value as a one point series The CASTREAL function converts the series into a real scalar 275 Remarks See Also fopen speech dat r dbser freadb speech dat DOUBLE 1 fcloseall returns a series that contains all the data in speech dat read as doubles File must be opened with FOPEN before using FREADB FREADB is like READB once FOPEN is used to open the file FREADB
340. ed as an image with the rainbow colormap gsin 300 01 20 gsin 300 01 40 gsin 300 01 30 B kibia The image in W3 shows how the frequency of the series in W1 changes over time clearly showing the distinct 20 40 and 30 Hertz components and the times when the components occurred W4 specgram W1 128 120 1024 Same as above but a longer segment overlap is used and the FFT size is zero padded to 1024 points producing a finer resolution image 725 Remarks See Also The SPECTRUM function displays the frequency content of the data where the SPECGRAM functions displays the frequencies and the times at which those frequencies occurs For example when applied to music the spectrum or FFT only indicates the notes and the amplitudes of the notes of a given song The specgram is more like a musical score displaying the notes the amplitudes of the notes and the times at which those notes were played FFT RAVEL SONOGRAM SPECTRUM SPECTRUM Purpose Format Returns Example 726 Returns the normalized magnitude of the FFT SPECTRUM series len series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table len Optional An integer Input series length Defaults to the length of the input series A real series or table W1 gsin 100 0 01 4 5 setvunits V W2 spectrum W1 Max W2 occurs at 4 Hz with an amplitude o
341. ed before returning to DADiSP Useful for programs without a user interface 4 runs the program using showmode if specified and waits until the program has terminated before returning to DADiSP If wait is not specified DADiSP does not wait and continues to run concurrently with the executed program showmode Optional A positive integer specifying the display mode of the application to run 0 hidden 1 normal 2 minimized 3 maximized defaults to 1 Has no effect if wait is 1 run MYPROG runs the program MYPROG without waiting run dir gt tmpfile 1 viewfile tmpfile runs the dir system command without display and waits until the task has completed then returns control to DADiSP The result of the listing is displayed after the command has completed run notepad 3 runs Notepad maximized and does not wait until Notepad is finished run notepad 4 3 runs Notepad maximized and waits for Notepad to finish before returning to DADiSP RUN can call executable programs written in any language The only limitation is the amount of system memory available for the external program An error message is displayed if the program cannot be executed 64 See Also dadisp cnf configuration file DOS VMS or UNIX macro SETCONF SHELL SAVECMAP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 642 Saves and automatically restores the Worksheet colormap SAVECMAP N
342. ed sin fit W1 5 3 gsin 100 01 4 pi gnorm 100 01 01 0 T T T T T T 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 W2 sinfit W1 overp W1 Ired fit coef sinfit W1 fit is the same series as in W2 coef 5 0000 3 0931 25 1327 3 1270 Note since C coef 3 2 pi F in this case F 25 1327 2 pi 4 0 SINFIT uses the FFT to find the dominant frequency present in the series The phase term D coef 4 is in radians 715 See Also FFT LSINFIT SINTREND TREND SINT Purpose Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying signed integer data type Format SINT Expansion Example writeb MYFILE SINT writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 16 bit signed integer point values ranging from 32768 to 32767 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 3 Remarks SINT is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments See Also DOUBLE FLOAT LONG READB SBYTE UBYTE UINT ULONG WRITEB 716 SINTREND Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Fits y x A B x C sin D x E using the FFT SINTREND s fit coef SINTREND s s The input series or array A series the fitted sin curve fit coef sintrend s returns both the fit and the coefficients as a series
343. ed to yellow to white highest 370 Remarks See Also ICCEPS Purpose Format Returns Example hot by itself sets the colormap and shading a hot or setcolormap hot returns the RGB values In this case use SETSHADING to make the new colormap take effect on an existing density or 2D plot COOL COPPER GRAY RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING SHOWCMAP Calculates the inverse complex cepstrum ICCEPS s d s An input series or array d Optional An integer the lag value for phase correction Defaults to 0 A real series or array WI gtri 100 1 17100753 W2 Wl delay W1 60 2 W3 W1 W2 W4 cceps W3 W5 icceps W4 A synthesized echo at 60 seconds is added to the data of W1 The cepstrum is calculated in W4 and the inverse cepstrum in WS The inverse cepstrum is identical to the original data except for a period shift of 50 samples W6 c d cceps W3 c W7 icceps W6 d Same as W5 except the 50 sample period shift is now corrected 371 Remarks See Also IDCT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 372 The complex cepstrum of a series is essentially if ft log fft s Because the log is used some information is lost and ICCEPS cannot always reconstruct the original data For more information see CCEPS CCEPS RCEPS Calculates the Inverse Discrete Cosine Transform IDCT s n s An input series or array n Optional An
344. eet and re evaluates all formulas Unlike REFRESH each formula is re evaluated just as if it were manually re entered into the Window UPDATE is useful for updating Worksheets from prior versions of DADiSP to the latest version This is particularly true if the old Worksheet contains functions that have been revised in the latest DADiSP release Remarks See Also UPTRI Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Window formulas which have the direct series load form DATASET VER SERIES e g RUN1 1 ANALOG1 are now re evaluated with UPDATE You can also use the LOADSERIES command e g oadseries RUN1 1 ANALOG1 CALC LOADSERIES REFRESH Returns the upper triangle of a matrix including the main diagonal UPTRI m m An array An array of size m consisting of the upper triangle of m including the main diagonal with the other elements set to 0 W1 ones 3 W2 uptri W1 w2 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 13 UPTRI includes the main diagonal Use UPTRIX to exclude the main diagonal Use TRIU to return the upper matrix above a specified diagonal COLNOS LOTRI LOTRIX ROWNOS TRIU UPTRIX 803 UPTRIX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also USCHUR Purpose Format 804 Returns the upper triangle of a matrix excluding the main diagonal UPTRIX m m An array An array of size m consisting of the upper triangl
345. efault 1 Detect rising edges only 2 Detect falling edges only edgeout Optional An integer Output value alignment Defaults to 0 The output value will be placed to the left or right of the actual crossing point as specified below 0 Left if input edge rising right if falling default 1 Right on rising left on falling 2 Right whether rising or falling 3 Left whether rising or falling 4 Linearly interpolate the X crossing value if necessary A binary series levelcross gsin 100 01 4 0 0 returns a binary series with values of 1 wherever the sine wave crosses a threshold of 0 0 whether rising or falling and 0 elsewhere Because LEVELCROSS returns a regularly spaced series i e an interval series the actual crossing point may occur between two data points The optional EDGEOUT parameter determines where the detected edge output will be placed LEVELCROSS returns the exact crossing point if EDGEOUT is set to 4 In this case LEVELCROSS returns an XY series where X is the crossing location and Y is 1 0 For example W1 gsin 100 01 W2 xvals levelcross W1l 0 2 0 4 returns the series 0 032058 0 467942 the interpolated X locations of where W1 0 2 435 See Also LFIT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 436 When EDGEOUT 4 LEVELCROSS returns a zero if there is a value in the series identically equal to the crossing threshold To id
346. efault 1 use time axes millisecond precision A string containing the time in the format hh mm ss msec gettime returns the system time gettime W3 returns the time in the series header in Window 3 gettime W3 1 displays the time using the millisecond precision as specified in the Tools Options System Preferences Date Time configuration dialog The millisecond precision can also be specified with the TIME PRECISION configuration parameter Remarks See Also CLOCK GETDATE SETDATE SETTIME GETVALLEY Finds the valleys of a series or table GETVALLEY series threshold width size padmode fillval Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table Optional Specifies the maximum value below which valleys will be accepted Defaults to the maximum of the series Optional An integer that specifies the minimum number of points that comprise a valley Defaults to 1 Optional Specifies the minimum acceptable peak to valley height of a valley Defaults to 0 0 Optional Determines whether the values between the valleys in the resulting series will be padded 0 do not pad 1 pad 2 linear interpolation Defaults to 1 Optional The padding value to use when padmode is on Defaults to 0 0 Purpose Format series threshold width size padmode fillval e Returns A series or table Example getvalley W1 finds all the valleys of Window 1 317 Remarks Se
347. emarks A series or array a 1 2 3 produces a single column 3 element series a 0 a 0 returns the series 0 1 2 3 0 b 1 2 3 4 5 6 creates the 3x2 array 1 2 3 4 5 6 c a string creates the series 97 32 115 116 114 105 110 103 d 1 2i 3 creates the complex series 1 0i 0 2i 3 0i W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 max wl tablev displays the maximum of W1 as a number in W2 W2 contains a single point series displayed as a table Assigning elements to the empty series removes values For example a ravel 1 9 3 al 2 removes the 2 column and returns the array Ge Pra 2 8 3 9 The operator acts as a powerful CONCAT function by combining any number of any kind of data types to produce a single or multi column array See Also Range Specifier CONCAT GLINE GNUMBER GSERIES RAVEL UNRAVEL Purpose Reinitializes all DADiSP macros found in system mac and dadisp mac files Format DEFAULT Remarks Useful after H UNDEFALL is used See Also DEFINE UNDEFALL UNDEFINE Purpose Defines a single line DADiSP function Format DEFFUN name arg1 arg2 argn statement name A string up to 15 characters long naming the function argn Optional Any argument being passed to the function statement The body of the function An equation or expression incorporating the function arguments Ex
348. emarks To configure the x axis to display both date and time values use SETCONF dt_scales_format 1 See Also JULSTR TODSTR JULYMD XY XYINTERP Purpose Linearly interpolates an XY series to a standard interval series that can be numerically processed by DADiSP Format XYINTERP xyseries interval xyseries An XY series or expression resulting in an XY series interval Optional A real number Defaults to the smallest x increment Alternative format XYINTERP xseries yseries interval xseries The series to be used as x values yseries The series to be used as y values interval Optional A real number Defaults to the smallest x increment Returns An interval series i e a series of equally spaced values Example W1 xy 1 3 4 8 1 2 3 2 setsym square W2 xyinterp wl setsym circle linearly interpolates the XY series in W1 using the smallest x interval In this case the x interval is 1 and the resulting series in W2 contains 8 evenly spaced y values 844 Remarks See Also XYINTERP accepts an interpolation interval so xyinterp W1 2 interpolates W1 with an increment of 0 2 resulting in 35 equally spaced values XYINTERP also accepts x series and y series arguments as shown here xyinterp W1 W2 0 1 uses the series in W1 as the x values and the series in W2 as the y values and linearly interpolates them with an increment of 0 1 Once an XY series has been interpola
349. en though the style was set to stem However because the plot style of W2 was not previously set the series is displayed as a stem plot Use CLEAR to remove the Window plotting style clear wl W1 a The series is now displayed as a stem plot See INHSERSTYLE and INHWINSTYLE to control plot style inheritance 677 See Also BARS GETPLOTSTYLE GETPLOTTYPE HILO INHSERSTYLE INHWINSTYLE LINES POINTS SETPLOTTYPE SETSYMBOL STACK STEPS STICKS TABLEVIEW SETPLOTTYPE Purpose Sets the plot type for a table of data Format SETPLOTTYPE Window n Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window n An integer Valid arguments are 0 Series graphs 1 Waterfall plot 2 Contour map 3 Density image plot 4 Z Surface plot3d 5 Image density plot 6 Chart multiple line plots Example 678 setplottype W3 2 sets the graph in Window 3 to be a contour map W1 spline2 rand 10 5 setplottype 4 creates and displays a spline interpolated Z surface Remarks See Also SETPMAP Purpose Format Use SETPLOTTYPE the menus the Graphical Styles toolbar button or the F7 key to see different styles of a particular plot type For example a waterfall plot could be viewed as a surface line or point plot a 3 D bar graph or a table of values If the plot type of a Window has not been set the series will be displayed in the type of the series If the Window type has been set th
350. entify this point as a crossing point use levelcross series level edgedetect series level amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators Fits a line to a series using the end points LFIT s s A series the input data A series W1 integ gnorm 1000 1 W2 1fit W1 overplot W1l Ired W2 contains a linear fit of the data that exactly passes through the first and last point of W1 The resulting line is plotted with the original data W3 xy W1 deriv W1 W4 Ifit W3 overplot W3 Ired W4 contains the end point linear fit to the XY data in W3 The first and last points of the resulting line will always match the first and last points of the input series POLYFIT TREND LINE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also LINEANN Purpose Format Generates a line in accordance with the specified parameters LINE series slope offset series Any series or expression evaluating to a series slope A scalar The slope of the generated line offset A scalar The offset of generated line Wine h 2s Shy 24 3 generates the series 5 7 9 witha sample spacing of 1 gline 3 1 2 5 returns an identical series Equivalent to series slope offset y mx b Range Specifier GLINE LINSCALE RESCALE Draws a polyline between specified coordinates Use the newer LINEDRAW function instead LINEANN color
351. er Ifa frequency of 0 Hz is not specified a 0 Hz term equal to the magnitude of the frequency nearest 0 is added to the list FIRSAMP produces non causal filters with linear phase See Also FFT FFTSHIFT XYINTERP 260 FIX Purpose Format Returns Example See Also FLIPFLOP Purpose Format Rounds a value towards zero FIX val val A real series or expression evaluating to a real or series A real or series fix 3 8 returns 3 fix 3 8 returns 3 fix 1 2 1 2 returns the series 1 1 CEILING FLOOR Combines two binary series into a flipflop output where each output point is a function of two input points and the last output point FLIPFLOP onseries offseries onseries A binary series that flips the output to on offseries A binary series that flips the output to off 261 Returns Example Remarks See Also FLIPLR Purpose Format Returns Example 262 A series flipflop 1 1 1 O 0 0 1 0 returns a series 1 1 0 0 When an off and on signal occur simultaneously the output state will switch This function is also known as a dual pad flipflop amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators AND NOT OR XOR Reverses the elements of each row of an array FLIPLR a a An input array An array of size a where the elements of each row are in reversed order WI 1 2 3 4 5 6
352. eration If array is a multi column array var is assigned the next column of array after each iteration statement Any valid DADiSP commands or expressions separated by semicolons The statements to execute after each iteration loop j 1 10 echo j sets j equal to 1 and increments j by 1 until j equals 10 while echoing j to the status line The SPL function WinSines WinSines local i N N numwin loop i 1 N eval sprintf W d gsin 100 01 4d i i increments local variable i and fills each Window in the Worksheet with a sinewave of the same frequency as the Window number Note since i is declared as a local it does not conflict with the built in constant i sqrt 1 461 Remarks 462 The expression loop j M N statementl statement2 is equivalent to loop j M N statementl statement2 and equivalent to for j M j lt N j statementl statement2 Because LOOP is a simpler and less flexible iteration construct than FOR LOOP generally runs faster than FOR LOOP is preferred for simple iterations where the iteration index is not modified As mentioned unlike for the iteration index cannot be modified However the BREAK and CONTINUE statements can alter the iteration behavior See FOR or WHILE for more flexible iteration constructs For best performance try to avoid loops altogether by exploiting the vectorized nature of SPL For example
353. eries Optional An integer specifying the background color of the annotated text Defaults to 1 the Window background color Optional An integer specifying font Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are NORM_FONT SMALL FONT STATLINE FONT POPBOX_FONT WINLABEL_FONT TOOLBAR FONT LISTBOX_FONT MENU_FONT USER FONT USER2 FONT USER3 FONT PANEL FONT oO 1 OADANDMNABRWNF 1 1 769 Example Remarks 770 box_filg Optional An integer specifying presence or absence of solid line box surrounding the text with margin if legend_flg is ON otherwise no margin 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 1 legend_flg Optional An integer specifying whether legend symbols are present or absent 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 stretch_flg Optional An integer specifying whether to stretch the annotation to fit the rectangular region where the text block resides 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 margin _flg Optional An integer specifying margin to be adjusted Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 No Margin Adjustment 0 Top Margin 1 Right Margin 2 Bottom Margin 3 Left Margin focus Optional An integer specifying focus for PAPER annotations Defaults to 1 the primary focus s1 SN At least one string is required Additional strings are optional This is the text that will be printed at the specified x and y coordinates Annotation lines are in top to bottom order
354. eries is empty i e length 0 else 0 a ELE b Cc a b isempty a returns 0 isempty b returns 1 isempty c returns 1 An empty series has a length of 0 The syntax a creates an empty series ISEMPTY returns 1 if the input is not a series FINITE INF ISINF ISNAN Returns 1 if input is a loaded SPL function else 0 407 Format Returns Example See Also ISINF Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 408 ISFUNC funcname funcname A string specifying the SPL function An integer or 0 zeros 1 1 isfunc zeros returns 1 since DADiSP automatically loaded ZEROS SPL GETSPL Returns for each element that is infinite inf ISINF ser ser A series A series where each element is 1 where the input series has an INF value and 0 where the input series is not INF a 1 2 inf 3 b 5 c isinf a returns 0 0 1 0 isinf b returns 0 isinf c returns ISINF always returns a series ISINF returns an empty series if the input is an empty series See Also FINITE INF ISEMPTY ISNAN ISMACRO Purpose Format Returns Example See Also ISNAN Purpose Format Returns Determines whether a macro is defined ISMACRO name name The name of the macro in quotes A 1 if the macro exists as specified else returns a 0 define square S S S ismacro square returns the value 1
355. ernal macro text file in quotes Example macread macros cursor mac reads the cursor mac macro file from the macros subdirectory Remarks A macro file is a simple ASCII text file you can create with any text editor The file should contain only one macro definition per line This macro definition is similar to the form required by define except that the define string itself is optional For Example 467 NORMALIZE S S MINCS MAX S MINCS define SQUARE S S S CONSTANT 12 85 are all acceptable macro definitions If a macro was previously defined the new definition loaded from the macro file will supersede the old one The macro file name may be any legal filename e g 8 alphanumeric characters followed by an optional 3 character alphanumeric extension under DOS By default DADiSP reads a macro file named dadisp mac when the Worksheet option is first selected By placing your custom macros in dadisp mac you can insure that these macros are always available during your DADiSP session MACREAD can also be invoked in command form macread macros cursor mac See Also ALLMACROS DSPMACREAD MACROS MACWRITE MACROS Purpose Displays the list of Macros defined within the current Worksheet Lists Macro definitions and their arguments and also allows macros to be created and edited Format MACROS Remarks To create a new macro click on the New button Enter the macro name argument list and body Click on
356. ers data using the overlap and save method OASFILT s f blocksize s An input data series f Aseries The filter impulse response blocksize Optional An integer the size of processing block Defaults to the best power of two for the filter length Returns A series Example W1 gnorm 1000 01 W2 gsin 100 01 3 W3 oasfilt W1 W2 Block filters the noise in W1 with the sin filter in W2 The blocksize defaults to 128 Remarks OASFILT uses the overlap and save method of block filtering by computing the FFT of blocks of the input data See Also CONV FFT OBJECTLIST Purpose Returns a string of the available Labbooks Worksheets Datasets or Series in a specified Dataset Format OBJECTLIST type for_menus sorted name type Optional An integer specifying the object type Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Do Nothing default 1 Labbooks 2 Worksheets 3 Datasets 4 Series 5 Units 6 Files for_menus Optional An integer specifying whether the objects in the list can be selected 1 On 0 Off Defaults to 0 sorted Optional An integer specifying whether to sort the objects alphabetically 1 On 0 Off Defaults to 0 name Optional A string representing the name of the Dataset from which to generate a list of series Only applicable when type is 4 533 Example See Also OFF Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 534
357. es bg_clr Optional An integer specifying the background color of the annotated text Defaults to Window background color font Optional An integer specifying font Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are OAMAANDMNAHRWNK 1 pD 1 774 NORM_FONT SMALL_FONT STATLINE_FONT POPBOX_FONT WINLABEL_FONT TOOLBAR_FONT LISTBOX_FONT MENU_FONT USERI FONT USER2 FONT USER3_ FONT PANEL FONT Example Remarks box_flg Optional An integer specifying presence or absence of solid line box surrounding the text with margin if legend_flg is ON otherwise no margin 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 1 legend_flg Optional An integer specifying whether legend symbols are present or absent 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 stretch_flg Optional An integer specifying whether to stretch the annotation to fit the rectangular region where the text block resides 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 margin_flg Optional An integer specifying margin to be adjusted Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 No Margin Adjustment 0 Top Margin 1 Right Margin 2 Bottom Margin 3 Left Margin focus Optional An integer specifying focus for PAPER annotations Defaults to l textcur brings up a free roaming crosshair cursor in the middle of the Window To move the cursor use the mouse the arrow keys or the CTRL arrow keys Pressing the left mouse button the RETURN key or typing in text causes the Input prompt to ap
358. es Annotation lines are in top to bottom order grand 100 1 10 textann 6 0 3 0 0 1 5 1 1 0 Temp over Time In this example TEXTANN prints the text Temp over Time at axis coordinates 6 0 3 0 of the Window The 0 as the target indicates that the text will scroll with the data PAPER The 1 5 instruct DADiSP to use the color of the primary series and color 5 for the background The text will be drawn using the small font 1 and it will be surrounded by a box W1 gsin 100 01 setsymb SQUARE 1 10 1 W2 Wl overlay gcos 100 01 RED setsymb 9 2 10 5 addwf textann 1 8 2 1 1 1 1 1 0 3 Sine Cosine pon puts a legend in the left window margin In general the newer TEXT function replaces TEXTANN All GLASS coordinates are normalized to the specified rectangular regions in the Worksheet where the upper left corner is 0 0 0 0 and the lower right corner is 1 0 1 0 GLASS annotations stick to the Window like the viewfinder in a camera while PAPER annotations scroll with the data To use TEXTANN from the command line you must enclose a call to TEXTANN ina string passed to ADDWF manually or append it to the current Window formula This adds the command to the Window formula You must then call PON to see the effect Because it is a plottime function TEXTANN is re evaluated on every PON redraw The newer TEXT function eliminates the need for ADDWF To use the default value for any integer parameter
359. es a multi series table from one or more sources RAVEL series length start overlap RAVEL series1 series2 seriesN series Any series or multi series table or expression evaluating to a series or table length An integer length of ravel segments start Optional An integer The point in the series at which to begin splitting and copying overlap Optional An integer representing the segment overlap Defaults to 0 Returns Example Remarks See Also A multi column table W1 ravel 1 9 3 returns the 3x3 table 1 4 7 AsO OF 3 6 9 ravel W1 100 1 10 ravels the series in W1 into multiple 100 point long segments where each segment overlaps the previous segment by 10 points The overlap parameter must be less than the segment length a 1 2 3 b 1 0 1 c 9 8 7 d ravel a b c creates a new array d where the columns of d are the series a b and c ASAE LIE 2 0 8 3 1 7 ravel W1l W4 W6 creates a multi series table of Windows 1 4 5 and 6 RAVEL is useful when performing iterative operation or the same operation on multiple series RAVEL returns a multi series table which DADiSP operates on in a column oriented fashion See RESHAPE to divide a series into columns of varying lengths See UNRAVEL to convert a table into a single column series Range Specifier Array Construction CONCAT DECIMATE EXTRACT FLIPLR INSERT REMOV
360. es are different conformity has no effect the delta x of the output series is forced to 1 and the points are aligned by point values Returns confidence level for a given density function and X value CONFX pdens x pdens A series The probability density function or histogram series x Areal the X value Areal W1 gnorm 10000 1 10 W2 histogram W1 1000 confx W2 10 returns 0 496275 a confidence level of approximately 50 The input density function or histogram is normalized between 0 and 1 CONFX returns NA if the X value is out of range 123 See Also FIND GNORMAL GRANDOM INTEG INVPROBN PDFNORM PROBN XCONF CONJUGATE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 124 Calculates the Complex conjugate CONJUGATE expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A series scalar or table conjugate 3 4i results in 3 4i conjugate polar 1 i returns mag 1 41421 angle 0 7854 45 which describes a Complex number in polar coordinates where the magnitude is 1 41421 and the angle is 0 7854 radians or 45 degrees The output is Complex regardless of input CONJUGATE can be abbreviated CONJ IMAGINARY REAL CONTINUE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Terminates the execution of any remaining statements in the body of a FOR or WHILE loop Control is transferred to the end of the body and the
361. es at points where either W1 or W2 is zero but not both Or LO hy 5 7 ho returns a series 1 0 0 0 WL etd 25 3504 53 W2 40 2 0 3 1 W3 xor W1 W2 Window 3 contains the series 1 0 1 0 0 lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators AND FLIPFLOP NOT OR Sets subtic labeling for log X axis XSUBTIC win on_off win Optional A Window defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Valid inputs are 0 OFF 1 label subtics Default to 0 Nothing Example Remarks See Also XTIC Purpose Format Example See Also XVALS Purpose W1 gnorm 200 1 setxlog 1 xsubtic 0 W2 W1l setxlog 1 xsubtic 1 Only the decades of the log plot in W1 are labeled the default where each subtic of W2 is labeled if there is enough room Some subtics may not be labeled if there is not enough room between tics SETXLOG SETYLOG YSUBTIC Returns the x axis tic interval of a Window XTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window setxtic 2 xtic W2 sets the current Windows x tic interval to two times that of Window 2 GETXTIC GETYTIC SETXTIC SETYTIC YTIC Returns the X values from a series 841 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also XY Purpose Format Returns 842 XVALS series series Any series table or expression evaluat
362. es during execution ECHO PRINTF SPRINTF WAITKEY PDFNORM Purpose Format Returns Example Returns the probability density function for a normal distribution PDFNORM z mean std Zz Areal or series The z value mean Optional A real the mean of the distribution Defaults to 0 0 std Optional A real the standard deviation of the distribution Defaults to 1 0 A real or series the value of the normal distribution function for the given mean and standard deviation pdfnorm 0 returns 1 the value of the normal distribution with a mean of 0 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 pdfnorm 8 0 01 8 displays the normal distribution with a mean of 0 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 over the range 8 to 8 pdfnorm 8 0 01 8 0 2 0 Same as above except the standard deviation of the distribution is set to 2 0 W1 hist gnorm 10000 1 10 3 200 lines W2 pdfnorm xvals W1 10 3 overp rescale W1 0 1 lred compares the calculated normal distribution of random values with mean 10 and standard deviation 3 in W1 with the analytic distribution in W2 551 Ww hist gnorm 10000 1 10 3 200 lines 200 4 150 4 100 4 50 7 50 T T T T T T T W2 pdfnorm xvals W1 10 3 overp rescale W1 0 1 Ired Remarks The optional standard deviation input std is set to 1 if it was equal to 0 See PROBN to calculate the normal cumulative dist
363. etsym 14 W2 xyz xo yol zl points setsym 14 W3 xyz xol yol z2 points setsym 14 This example demonstrates the interpolation of random samples of the function cos x y over the XY range of 1 to 1 xi yi and zi contain the original XYZ samples xo and yo specify the desired output interpolation locations z1 contains the interpolated Z values using the default weighting scheme and z2 contains the interpolated result using the classical inverse distance weighting function W1 W2 and W3 display the results as XYZ plots INVDISTANCE grids XYZ data over any arbitrary XY coordinates However a uniform grid is most useful for interpolating XYZ points to a surface See IGRID to directly convert XYZ data to a surface by interpolating to a uniform grid The inverse distance method of gridding irregularly spaced XYZ data computes the new Z value at the specified output coordinates by computing the ratio of the known Z values to their distances from the desired output coordinate Zo F Xo Yo DAWi Zi where the weighting function Wi Ri p XR p and R sqrt X Xi 2 Y Yi 2 the radius or distances from the interpolated value to the known input Z locations The new Z value is computed as a weighted sum of the distances from the desired location to the known locations The weighting function varies from a value of 1 0 if the desired output point is located exactly at an input coordinate to a value approaching 0 0
364. ew comment field Remarks See Also The comment field is displayed in the information box It can be accessed by pressing F2 or by clicking on the I icon Each Dataset has one comment All series within a Dataset have the same comment Changing the comment does not automatically save the new comment with the Dataset You must save the series to save the comment Use GETCOMMENT to return the comment of a series GETCOMMENT SETCOMMENT COMPRESSH Purpose Format Remarks See Also Compresses a series horizontally in the current Window COMPRESSH factor factor Optional A ratio of the current series horizontal dimension to the desired dimension Defaults to 3 2 which makes the series appear 2 3 of its original size To return the Window to its original display use a the reciprocal ratio of the argument you chose before b the EXPANDH with the same argument or c CTRL HOME when the window is active The default argument accomplishes the same result as hitting CTRL lt when the current Window is active COMPRESSV EXPANDV EXPANDH 119 COMPRESSV Purpose Compresses a series vertically in the current Window Format COMPRESSV factor factor Optional A ratio of the current series vertical dimension to the desired dimension Defaults to 3 2 which makes the series appear 2 3 of its original size Remarks To return the Window to its original display use a the recip
365. expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table and W1 W2 returns a series or table with zeros at points where either W1 or W2 contain a zero and ones where both W1 and W2 have non zero values and 0 1 5 9 1 returns a series 0 1 1 1 This is equivalent to 0 1 5 9 amp amp 1 AND can also be performed using the infix operator amp amp The function AND W1 W2 is identical to the expression W1 amp amp W2 lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators FLIPFLOP NOT OR XOR Calculates the phase component of a Complex expression 4 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ANY Purpose 42 ANGLE expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Series scalar or table angle 1 0 returns the scalar 3 14159625 or n angle 5 57 yields 0 78539816 or 71 4 angle W2 returns a new series which corresponds to the angle component of the polar or Cartesian series in Window 2 ANGLE returns a value from 0 to 27 PHASE returns a value from n to 7 CARTESIAN IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE PHASE POLAR REAL Returns if any element of the input is non zero Format Returns Examples Remarks See Also ANY val val A series scalar or string input The scalar 1 0 or 0 0 or
366. f 5 The length of W2 is 51 points W3 spectrum W1 2048 Same as above except a 2048 point FFT is used to calculate the Spectrum resulting in a 1025 point series Remarks gsin 100 0 01 4 5 setvunits V 64 4 fos X 24 po 8 Lo s 04 J 29 4 J wo Wy Ny N Sa oF Nf 6 T T T T T T T T 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 Sec spectrum W1 spectrum W1 2048 64 64 B ci 54 45 4 I 2 34 2 34 Saa S a Tt 15 lV oj Ga RL sane ire i Ea lt 1 A T T T T T T T T T 1 T T T T T T T T T T 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 Hertz Hertz fn 1 0 W1 gsin 100 01 fn label sprintf Frequency g fn W2 spectrum W1 1024 fn l while fn lt 100 fnt W2 displays a remarkably simple demonstration of aliasing errors due to undersampling the sinewave in W1 The SPECTRUM is normalized so that a sinewave of amplitude A and frequency F yields a SPECTRUM of amplitude A at frequency F If the input series is in Volts the resulting SPECTRUM has units of Volts If 1en is larger than the length of series the series is padded with zeros to length 1en before calculating the SPECTRUM If len is less than the series length the series is truncated to length 1 en If not specified 1 en defaults to a length of series The length of the final result is int fftlen 2 1 where the last sample represents
367. f input is a loaded SPL function else 0 Determine if a variable or function is defined as the specified type Return the number of output arguments expected by the current multi value assignment of an SPL function Pause execution of an SPL function Terminate an iteration or a function and optionally returns a value SERIES H SPLCOMPILE SPLLOAD SPLREAD SPLWRITE VIEW WHICH Contain definitions of global data types variables and miscellaneous macros for including in SPL function files Compile an SPL function file into an OPL file Compile and reads an external SPL file into the Worksheet Read an external SPL file into the Worksheet Write SPL functions to an external ASCII file Display the contents of an SPL file Return the path to an SPL file or filename Statistics and Calculus A2STD AMPDIST AREA BETAI CNF2STD COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLREDUCE COLSTDEV COLSUM CONFX CTREE DERIV DYDX EPS ERF ERFC ERFCINV ERFINV ERRORBAR GAMM GAMMA GAMMLN GAMMP GAMMQ GRADIENT HISTOGRAM IGRID Convert an alpha confidence level to a standard deviation range Calculate Amplitude Distribution Calculate area under curve Return the incomplete beta function Convert a confidence level to a standard deviation range Number of samples in each column Maximum value in each column Mean value for each column Median value for each column Minimum value for each column Apply REDUCE function to ea
368. faults to the current Window Returns An integer Example Wl 3 5 7 sersize returns 3 W2 3 41 7 41 2 i sersize W2 returns 3 Remarks Series length is usually available in the information box available by pressing F2 It is listed under Num Samples SERSIZE is the same as the LENGTH macro See Also EXTRACT LENGTH SIZE SETALLWMARGIN Purpose Sets the plotting margin for each Window of a Worksheet 654 Format Example Remarks See Also SETALLWMARGIN margin size margin Window margin Valid arguments are 1 Left default 2 Right 3 Top 4 Bottom size An integer Size of the margin 0 lt size lt 100 Defaults to 1 auto margin sizing setallwmargin 1 20 sets the left plotting margin of each Window to 20 of the plotting area The left axes of all the Windows of the Worksheet will line up setallwmargin 1 1 sets the left side plotting margin to the default Size is specified in terms of percent of the plotting area of a Window where 0 means no margin and 100 means full margin i e no plotting area If size is set to 1 then the margin is sized automatically SETALLWMARGIN can be used to ensure that the axes of all the Windows are aligned It is possible to set a margin so small that no scales appear or to set it so large that no plot appears setallwmargin 1 1 restores the plotting margins to the default GETWMARGIN LAYOUT SETWMARGIN
369. file in a specified mode 267 Format Returns Example Remarks 268 FOPEN filename mode filename The name of the file to open in quotes mode The file mode in quotes Valid arguments are r Open the file for read access if the file does not exist FOPEN fails w Open the file for write access if the file exists its contents are overwritten if the file does not exist it is created a Open the file for appending if the file does not exist it is created r Open the file for read and write access if the file does not exist FOPEN fails w Open the file for read and write access if the file exists its contents are overwritten if the file does not exist it is created a Open the file for read and append access if the file does not exist it is created rb Open the file for binary read access if the file does not exist FOPEN fails wb Open the file for binary write access if the file exists its contents are overwritten if the file does not exist it is created A 1 if the open is successful otherwise 0 fopen header hdr wt opens the file header hdr for read and write access and displays a 1 at the bottom of the screen if the open is successful fopen myfile dat rb opens the file myfile dat for binary read access and displays a at the bottom of the screen if the open is successful It is recommended to use an FCLOSE or FCLOSEA
370. following debugger session Q bstop mycall bcont Q ycall 10 dbstep dbstepi dbstack A breakpoint is set in the routine mycall and the function is executed The debugger stops at line 5 DBSTEP steps the debugger to line 6 and DBSTEPI steps into the myfunc routine DBSTACK indicates the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached If there is no SPL routine at the current line DBSTEPI acts like DBSTEP See Also DBSTEPO Purpose Format Returns Example DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Steps out of the current SPL routine DBSTEPO Nothing Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y y x x y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y 16 Remarks See Also DBSTOP Purpose Format 162 Now consider the following debugger session dbstop myfunc dbcont mycall1 10 dbstepo A breakpoint is set in the routine mycall and the function is executed The debugger stops at line 5 DBSTEPO steps to the last executable line myfunc Use DBCONT
371. for color index Grid XYZ data using spline interpolation Shade 3 D objects with another object Spin a 3D plot Display table as a 3 D waterfall plot Change attributes of waterfall plot Create a 3D XYZ plot Return a handle to an ActiveX server object Return a handle to a running ActiveX server object Write a string to MS Word using ActiveX Insert a metafile of a Worksheet into MS Word using ActiveX Release an ActiveX server object Convert Worksheet to HTML using MS Word and ActiveX Clear ActiveX connection to Excel Return a range of values from Excel via ActiveX Automation Start an ActiveX connection to Excel Transfer a range of values to Excel via ActiveX Automation Annotation COMMENT DFLOOD DLNABS DPTABS LABEL LEGCUR LEGEND LINEANN LINECOPY LINECUR LINEDEL LINEDRAW LINEMOVE NFORMAT SETCOMMENT SFORMAT TEXT TEXTANN TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE Binary Series amp amp lt lt gt gt AND amp amp DELETE EQUAL FLIPFLOP GREATER GREATEREQUAL ISNAN LESSER LESSEREQUAL NOT NOTEQUAL OR REPLACE XOR vi Set comment for the first series in a window Change the color of the area containing specified points Draw a line at specified coordinates Draw a point at specified coordinates Label the window with text Insert a legend for all the series in a window Set the attributes and location for a standard legend Annotate graph with lines at specified coordinates Copy line anno
372. for integer values Types Behavior d I u O Precision specifies the minimum number of digits to be printed If number of digits in the argument is less than precision the output value is padded on the left with zeros The value is not truncated when the number of digits exceeds precision e E Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point The last printed digit is rounded f Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point If a decimal point appears at least one digit appears before it The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits g G Precision specifies the maximum number of significant digits printed If specified as 0 is treated as 1 Type is a required character that determines whether the associated argument is interpreted as a character string or a number Type Characters Output Format d I Signed decimal integer u O Unsigned decimal integer f Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits e Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or E Identical to the e format except that E rather than e introduces the exponent 519 Returns Example Remarks See Also NIBBLE Purpose Format Returns 520 g Signed value printed in f or e fo
373. for macro SPL command files and menu creation as the character also indicates a single line comment 524 See Also lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators AND FLIPFLOP NEGATE NOTEQUAL OR XOR NOTEQUAL Purpose Format Returns Example Determines if two expressions are not equal NOTEQUAL exprl1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the same type as the higher of the two expressions Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer Real yields a Real Integer Series yields a Series Integer Integer yields an Integer Real Complex yields a Complex Real Series yields a Series Complex Real Series yields a Complex Series String String yields a String notequal max W1 10 0 returns a if the maximum value of W1 does not equal 10 0 or 0 if the maximum value of W1 equals 10 0 notequal 1 5 6 1 2 4 returns the series 0 1 1 525 Remarks See Also NPUT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 526 notequal a b isequivalenttoa b NOTEQUAL uses STRCMP
374. for string arguments lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators NOT Places the cursor on the nth point of the series in the current or active Window NPUT point point An integer Point to where cursor will be moved W1 gsin 100 0 1 nput 20 puts the cursor on the twentieth point of the series In this case the 20th point is x 1 9 sec and y 0 587785 The first point of the series corresponds to point and not 0 NPUT does not display point values use CURSORON or the F9 key to activate the cursor CURPOS CURSORON MOVE NMOVE PUT NULL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Computes an orthogonal basis for the Null space of an array NULL a a An input array An orthogonal array of n columns where n is the Null space size a Stl sy 23 F 4 5 6 Ers 85 94 b null a b returns 0 408248 0 816497 0 408248 b b returns 1 ea 0 returns 1 332268E 015 8 881784E 016 0 0 NULL uses SVD to compute the orthogonal basis The number of output columns is the dimension of the Null space The number of output rows is the number of input columns Ifb nul1 a exists the output columns of b are orthogonal and have a norm of 1 such that conj b b eye numcols b the identity matrix NORM ORTH RANK SVD NUMCOLS Purpose Returns the number of columns in a Window or DADiSP expre
375. fore DDEINITIATE DMLERR_DLL_USAGE An application that is not a DDE server has attempted server operations DMLERR_EXECACKTIMEOUT A request for a synchronous execute operation has timed out DMLERR_INVALIDPARAMETERR A parameter failed to be validated by the DDEML DMLERR_LOW_MEMORY An application has created a prolonged race condition where the server application outruns the client causing large amounts of data to be consumed 175 DMLERR_MEMORY_ERROR A memory allocation failed DMLERR_NOTPROCESSED An operation failed DMLERR_NO CONV_ESTABLISHED A client s attempt to establish a conversation has failed DMLERR_POKEACKTIMEOUT A request for a synchronous poke transaction has failed DMLERR_POSTMSG FAILED An internal call to the PostMessage function has failed DMLERR_REENTRANCY An application instance with a synchronous operation already in progress attempted to initiate another synchronous operation DMLERR_SERVER_DIED A server side operation was attempted on a conversation that was terminated by the client or the server terminated before completing an operation DMLERR_SYS_ERROR An internal error has occurred in the DDEML DMLERR_UNADVACKTIMEOUT A request to end an advise operation has timed out DMLERR_UNFOUND_QUEUE_ID An invalid identifier was passed to a DDEML function OK No error See Also DDEINITIATE DDETERMINATE Purpose Terminates a DDE Conversation Format DDETER
376. fore computing the average MOVAVG2 does not pad in such a way MOVAVG2 MOVMAX MOVMIN 501 MOVAVG2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MOVE Purpose 502 Performs a moving average with end point padding MOVAVG2 s n s An input series n Aninteger The number of points to average as the series is processed A series Wis 1310 W2 movavg Wl1 3 W3 movavg2 W1 3 W2 contains the series 1 0 1 5 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 9 5 10 0 and W3 contains the series 1 333 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 9 667 The standard moving average ramps the average up and down at the end points whereas MOVAVG2 pads the endpoints MOVAVG2 is an adjusted moving average The standard MOVAVG function performs a stepped up average at the start of the series and a stepped down average at the end MOVAVG2 pads the end points with the initial and final values before calculating the moving average MOVAVG Moves the cursor by an offset x axis units from the current cursor position Format MOVE offset offset Distance to move in x axis coordinates must be positive or negative integer or real number Example W1 gsin 100 01 move 5 0 moves the cursor 5 0 x axis units so in this case the cursor moves 50 points Remarks This function moves the cursor by x axis units whereas NMOVE moves cursor by number of datapoints See Also CURPOS CURSORON NMOVE NPUT P
377. from target to focus use 1 as the argument to TEXTANN If the box_fl1g is ON then its background will be filled with the background color and its edges will be drawn as solid lines in the foreground color If legend_flg is ON then the x y parameters refer to the lower left corner of the first symbol in the legend block not to the lower left corner of the first line in the text block Each next line in the legend refers to the next overplot for color line style and symbols Also the interline spacing in legends is greater than in the no legend symbol case 773 See Also ADDWFORM TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE TEXTCUR Purpose Brings up a free roaming crosshair cursor in the middle of the Window Format TEXCUR target fg_clr bg_clr font box_flg legend_fig stretch_flg margin_flg focus target Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the text to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window 2 GLASS WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area 4 GLASS _ WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area fg_clr Optional An integer specifying color of series in the Window Defaults to color of primary seri
378. ful for debugging and testing SPL functions Local variables can be verified via the status line The WAITKEY can be used to suspend the execution of the SPL routine in order to verify results MESSAGE PRINTF SPRINTF Permits point by point editing of the y axis values of a series or table EDIT series series Optional Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Defaults to the current Window edit W2 returns a table of points the index x values and y values of W2 and puts a cursor on the first point The arrow and Page keys will move the cursor through the list of values To change a value move the cursor to that point type the new y value at the command line and press Enter To delete a value press the Del key To return the old value before pressing Enter press Esc To leave the EDIT function press Esc This will plot the new series in the current Window The EDIT function replaces the Window formula with EDIT EXTRACT PROTECT TABLE TABLEVIEW 211 EFFBIT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References 212 Calculate the number of effective bits possible at a given frequency for a quantizing device EFFBIT s freq fs s A series the input Sinusoid freq A real the known frequency of the input sinusoid fs Optional A real the full scale input amplitude of the device being tested Defaults to abs max s min s
379. g clipboard text This function can only be used in the MS Windows Version of DADiSP If a Window is copied the series of the Window is copied as ASCII data and the plot of the series is copied as a bitmap and a Enhanced Metafile PASTEDATA COPY DATASET Purpose Format Returns Example Copies a Series from a Dataset COPYDATASET srcdname desdname verbose overwrite srcdname A string The source Dataset to copy from The name can also contain a path and Labbook specifier desdname Optional a string The destination Dataset to copy to Defaults to the same Dataset name in srcdname verbose Optional an integer Verbose flag 1 display error messages and warnings 0 do not display messages Defaults to 1 overwrite Optional an integer Overwrite flag 1 overwrite existing destination Dataset if it already exists 0 do not overwrite Defaults to 0 An integer 1 if the source Dataset is successfully copied to the destination Dataset else 0 copydataset Dirl Book1 RUN1 1 Dir2 Book2 Job 2 0 copies the Dataset RUN1 1 in the Book1 Labbook located in the Dir1 sub directory to the Dataset Job 2 in the Book2 Labbook located in the Dir2 sub directory The copy is performed silently 135 Remarks See Also copydataset Demo4 RUN1 1 copies the Dataset RUN1 1 from the Demo4 Labbook to the Dataset RUN1 1 in current Labbook The specified Dataset names are case sensitiv
380. g area 4 GLASS _WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area Optional An integer specifying color of series in the Window Defaults to color of primary series Optional An integer specifying the background color of the annotated text Defaults to Window background color Optional An integer specifying font Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are NORM_FONT SMALL FONT STATLINE_FONT POPBOX FONT WINLABEL FONT TOOLBAR FONT LISTBOX FONT MENU FONT USERI FONT USER2 FONT USER3 FONT PANEL FONT E E e OAMANDMNABRWNKH 1 0 1 Optional An integer specifying presence or absence of solid line box surrounding the text with margin if legend_flg is ON otherwise no margin 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 1 Optional An integer specifying whether legend symbols are present or absent 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 Optional An integer specifying whether to stretch the annotation to fit the rectangular region where the text block resides 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 0 Optional An integer specifying margin to be adjusted Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 No Margin Adjustment 0 Top Margin 1 Right Margin 2 Bottom Margin 3 Left Margin Example Remarks focus Optional An integer specifying focus for PAPER annotations Defaults to 1 s1 sN At least one string is required Additional strings are optional This is the text that will be printed at the specified x and y coordinat
381. g 1 1 tums on y axis log scaling with labeled sub tics setylog 0 turns off y axis log scaling SETXLOG YSUBTIC Sets the tic spacing on the y axis SETYTIC Window ytic Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window ytic Areal the desired Y tic interval setytic 01 sets the y tic interval on the current Window to 0 01 Example Remarks See Also SETZ Purpose Format Example setytic 1 sets the ytic interval of the current Window to the default values The GETXTIC and GETYTIC functions return the current tic intervals setytic W3 0 5 getytic shrinks the y tic interval of W3 by a factor of 2 If you do not specify an interval or if you specify a negative interval the tic intervals are scaled automatically GETXTIC GETYTIC SETXTIC SETXY SETY XTIC YTIC Specifies the z axis coordinate range of a Window SETZ Window zbottom ztop Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window zbottom Areal Bottom 3D axis boundary ztop Areal Top 3D axis boundary W1 xyz grand 10 1 grand 10 1 grand 10 1 setz 3 0 3 0 creates a 3D series and sets the Z axis range from 3 0 to 3 0 705 Remarks See Also SETZTIC Purpose Format Example Remarks 706 setz min W1 max W1 sets the z axis range from the minimum value of the series to the maximum value of the series Use SETZTIC to set the tic sp
382. g from light red to yellow through light green The number of shades created depends on machine resources available SETSHADING sets the shading scheme for the entire Worksheet but each Window can use either the smooth shades or its private palette of discrete colors see SETPALETTE For any given Window the discrete colors are in effect by default until SETSHADING is used in that Window SETPALETTE SHADEWITH 683 SETSYMBOL Purpose Places a specified symbol on the chosen data points of a series Format SETSYMBOL Window symbol ser_num interval offset Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window symbol Optional An integer Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are Description Macro Equivalent Integer Value No symbol DOTS 0 Box SQUARE 1 Triangle TRIANGLE 2 Upside Down Triangle INV_TRIANGLE 3 CROSS 4 X XCROSS 5 Empty Up Arrow CLR_UP_ARROW 6 Empty Down Arrow CLR_DN_ARROW 7 Filled Up Arrow UP_ARROW 8 Filled Down Arrow DN_ARROW 9 Empty Diamond CLR_DIAMOND 10 Empty Square CLR_SQUARE 11 Empty Triangle CLR_TRIANGLE 12 Empty Upside Down CLR_INV_TRI 13 Triangle Filled Circle CIRCLE 14 Empty Circle CLR_CIRCLE 15 Numeric Values 16 ser_num Optional Series number Defaults to the primary series interval Optional Data point interval for symbol Defaults to 1 offset Optional Start point for symbol Defaults to 1 Example setsymbol 1 2 sets a box as the symbol that surrounds every data point
383. gger stops in myfunc DBSTACK shows the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 At this point the LOCALS command shows that the local variable x is set to 20 the value set by the calling mycall function 156 Remarks See Also DBSTATUS Purpose Format Returns Example The DBUP command moves up the call stack to the mycall function Now the LOCALS command shows x has the value 10 the value specified when mycall was executed Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBDOWN DBCONT DBQUIT DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTEPI DBSTEPO DBSTOP DBUP LOCALS VARS Displays the status of the debugger DBSTATUS The status of the debugger Consider the following SPL routine myfunc x local y y X x return y 157 Remarks See Also DBSTEP Purpose Format 158 Now consider the following debugger session Q bstop myfunc bcont Q y func 10 bstatus bstep bstatus Qa Q sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called The DBSTATUS command indicates the debugger stopped at line 5 Next DBSTEP executes the next line and DBSTA
384. h no input arguments uses the current Window VMIN is an SPL routine that accepts a variable number of input arguments ARGV MAX MAXVAL MIN MINVAL VMAX References the current Window wo A Window setx WO 1 0 2 0 sets the x range of the current Window WO can only be used with functions that affect Window attributes CURRENT 81 WAITKEY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 812 Pauses execution of an SPL function until a key is pressed WAITKEY Assume the following function definition power is loaded raise x to the n th power for n gt 0 power x n for p 1 n gt 0 n echo p waitkey p p x return p Then type the following at the command line power 2 8 The value 1 is returned and the power function pauses until any key is pressed Pressing the spacebar after each new value is displayed steps through the loop and displays the following series of intermediate values for the variable p 1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 256 2 raised to the 8th power i e 2 8 equals 256 The WAITKEY function is useful for debugging and testing custom SPL functions The WAITKEY function is similar to the command file keyword WAITKEY PAUSE in Command File Functions DEBUG PAUSE WATERFALL Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also WFSET Purpose Display several series in waterfall format WATERFALL series1 seriesN seriesl
385. h substring of a string STRGET num string delimit num An integer The number of the substring to return string String to search in quotes delimit Optional A string specifying the characters used to separate substrings in quotes Defaults to a space delimiter character 755 Returns Example See Also STRJUL Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 756 A string strget 2 YOR 12 3 XINC 1 0 YREF 120 0 returns XINC 1 0 because that is the second substring By default substring is delimited by spaces You may optionally specify your own delimiter characters strget 2 YOR 12 3 XINC 1 0 YREF 120 0 returns 12 3 XINC because the is the separator character STRCAT STRCMP STREXTRACT STRFIND Converts a Julian date integer into a date string STRJUL julian julian An integer Julian date A string strjul 2436215 returns 1 11 58 JULSTR STRLEN Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also STRLIST Purpose Format Returns Returns the length of a specified string STRLEN String string A string or expression returning a string in quotes An integer strlen I did it my way returns 15 W1 1 124 strlen strcat The maximum is strnum max W1 returns 20 All characters including whitespaces are counted STRCAT STRNUM Converts a list of several strings into one long string with
386. hat every nth intersecting contour will be labeled Defaults to 1 1 spline2 rand 20 4 2 contour Wl 6 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 5 contour W1 6 0 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 5 shows contents of W1 as a 6 level contour with labels drawn wherever the contour lines cross an Imaginary line with endpoints of 0 0 0 0 and 20 0 20 0 i e a diagonal line The background of the plot is not filled and every 5th intersecting contour is labeled W3 contour W1l 6 1 0 0 0 0 20 0 20 0 5 Same as above except the background of the contour is filled based on the magnitude of the data and the current color map Remarks See Also Up to two axes eight real numbers specifying a total of four coordinates can be specified for labeling CONTOUR can be obtained by pressing F7 or executing SETPLOTTYPE 2 DENSITY MAPPALETTE SETPALETTE SETPLOTTYPE SETSHADING SHADEWITH TABLEVIEW WATERFALL CONTOURSET Purpose Format Example Specifies how a contour plot is to be displayed CONTOURSET levels incolor labeling interval levels Optional An integer The number of contour levels Defaults to 10 incolor Optional An integer 0 OFF or no color 1 ON or color Defaults to 0 labeling Optional 4 or 8 real numbers representing end points of labeling axes Label points are interpreted as a list of x y pairs either as x1 yl x2 y2 or xl yl x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 If four label points
387. hat the two strings are the same stremp Hello hello 1 performs a case dependent comparison and returns 1 a negative number signifying the first string is less than the second Non alphabetic characters are assigned lexicographic positions based on their ASCII codes 749 When a non zero number is returned the exact number that is returned is the difference in ASCII codes between the characters in the first position that are different Leading and trailing blanks are significant Case is not significant if the optional case sensitivity flag is unspecified or 0 If the case sensitivity flag is nonzero a case sensitive comparison is performed The operator performs a case dependent comparison that returns either 1 or 0 For example Hello hello returns 0 See Also STREXTRACT STRFIND STRGET STRCOLOR Purpose Returns the name of the color corresponding to the input argument Format STRCOLOR color color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP Returns A string Example strcolor 1 returns the string BLUE strcolor getwcolor Wl returns the color of Window 1 as a string See Also GETWCOLOR WINCOLOR 750 STRESCAPE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Converts special escape characters in a string STRESCAPE string string A text string in quotes A string fopen TEST TXT w fputs str
388. he axis label rotation Set the axis label rotation Set the default rotation for x axis labels Set the default rotation for y axis labels Set horizontal units Set line style Set thickness of line in graph Specify method to use when drawing plots Specify plot style Specify plot type Specify symbol to mark data points Set the x tic label orientation Set the y tic label orientation Set the x tic label rotation Set the y tic label rotation Set the default rotation for x tic labels Set the default rotation for y tic labels Set vertical units Copy attributes of one window to another Specify x axis coordinate range Set the x axis label Set the y axis label Turn on off log scales for x axis of current window Set starting point of series Set tic interval on x axis Specify y axis coordinate range Specify y axis coordinate range Turn on off log scales for y axis of current window Set tic interval on y axis Specify the z axis coordinate range of a Window Set the tic spacing on the z axis Turn staggered scales on or off Turn staggered scales on or off Set syne mode that controls scaling and scrolling Set attributes of a waterfall plot Return scale which matches the described property parameter Set subtic labeling for log X axis Set subtic labeling for log Y axis Query Functions BUILTINS List all built in functions available in DADiSP CHILDREN Return number of children for the window CLOCK Return the current executio
389. he input series is zero before the first sample and after the last sample The auto correlation is used to determine how similar a series is to itself or if a series is periodic FACORR performs correlation by computing the FFT of the input series The output length L is L 2 lJength s 1 The zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the length of the input series See Also FACOV Purpose Format Returns Example The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M i 1 1 where i is the index of the result See ACORR for the time domain implementation ACORR CONV FACOV FCONV FXCORR Calculates the auto covariance using the FFT method FACOV series norm series A series table or expression resulting in a series or table norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 acov W1 performs the auto covariance of a sinewave The peaks of the result indicate the waveform is very similar to itself at the time intervals where the peaks occur i e the waveform is periodic W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 facov W1 1 W4 facov W2 1 235 Remarks See Also FACTORS Purpose 236 W3 displays the auto covariance of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the normal
390. he left mouse button The text block then disappears You may delete multiple blocks of text with TEXTDEL Press the right mouse button or ESC when you are finished deleting text blocks All visible text blocks in the current window and worksheet margin will be marked by handles for possible deletion To make titles and legends visible call SCREENOPT 1 1 before using TEXTDEL TEXT TEXTCUR TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE Edits text annotation created by TEXT or TEXTCUR TEXTEDIT Remarks See Also You can edit any text block by moving the mouse cursor over any line in the block and pressing the left mouse button After a line has been selected it is surrounded by line handles one at each corner and the chosen line of text is placed in its unevaluated form with curly braces around DADiSP expressions to be evaluated in the command line buffer You may edit the line in the line buffer and indicate that you are done by pressing the left mouse button RETURN or the up or down arrow keys You can leave the line you are editing and move to the line above or below by pressing the up or down arrow keys When you do the line handles also move up and down and the current line appears in the command buffer Pressing the right mouse button or the ESC key aborts the line that you are editing At this point you may place the mouse cursor on a new line of text and resume inputting text When you ve completed your text block editing pressing
391. he rest have 75 points each merge W3 W8 will merge the series in Windows 3 through 8 and pad the series in W4 to W8 with zeros to the length of 100 points MERGE operates on any number of input series Input series can be Real or Complex MERGE returns a Complex series if any of the input series are Complex If the merged series have different lengths DADiSP will pad series with zeros to the length of the longest series Setting the optional pad argument to 0 suspends the padding function CONCAT DECIMATE INSERT REMOVE REPLICATE UNMERGE 489 MESHGRID Purpose Creates 2D XY values from X and Y input series Format x y MESHGRID xser yser xser A series the x range yser A series the y range Returns Two arrays of X and Y values Example x y meshgrid 2 0 2 2 2 0 2 2 cos x y setplottype 4 rainbow generates an interesting 2D cosine plot W1 cos x y setplottype 4 rainbow 2 Remarks See FXYVALS to generate XY value from scalar parameters 490 See Also FXYVALS GLINE RAVEL SETPLOTTYPE MESSAGE Purpose Format Returns Example Displays a message box with an OK Cancel Yes and or No buttons MESSAGE label message type label Optional string to label the top of the message box message A string for the message within the box type An optional integer Specifies icon and buttons within the box Defaults to 3 Valid argument
392. iSP checks the overplot index match the fourth argument If an overplot index is specified DADiSP draws all polylines using the color that corresponds to the index If the color argument is 1 and the overplot index is 1 or omitted DADiSP draws the polylines using the color of the primary series ADDWFORM LINECOPY LINECUR LINEDEL LINEDRAW LINEMOVE LINECOPY Purpose Format Remarks Copies a polyline created with LINECUR or LINEANN LINECOPY LINECOPY places handles at each polyline point in the Window and allows you to copy the line by holding down the left mouse button and dragging the line anywhere within the Window You can copy any of the polylines multiple times during a single LINECOPY session Press the right mouse button or ESC to indicate that you are finished copying lines 439 See Also LINECUR Purpose Format 440 LINEANN LINECUR LINEDEL LINEDRAW LINEMOVE Brings up a freehand line drawing cursor in a Window LINECUR color style target i focus color Optional An integer specifying the color of the series in the Window Defaults to color of primary series style Optional Integer specifying line style of series in the Window Defaults to solid line Valid arguments are 1 Solid 2 Dashed 3 Dotted target Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the line to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the
393. ies series Optional Any valid series If no series is specified the system date is returned 297 Returns Example See Also GETENV Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 298 A string containing the series date or the current date in mm dd yy format getdate returns the system date getdate wl returns the date of the series in Window 1 GETTIME SETDATE SETTIME Returns the setting of a specified environment parameter GETENV envstr envstr An environment string in quotes A string getenv PATH returns the definition of PATH the current search path string The environment string envstr must contain a text string that is identical to a defined operating system environment variable PUTENV GETFOCUS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns an integer corresponding to number of the curve in focus in the specified Window GETFOCUS Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window An integer W1 gsin 100 01 overlay grand 10 5 LRED focus 2 getfocus W1 returns the value 2 the light red series of random noise is in focus GETFOCUS is useful when maneuvering in Windows with many overlayed series FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES GETGCOLOR Purpose Format Returns Returns the global DADiSP color as listed in the file dspcolor GETGCOLOR color_param color param Opti
394. ies 1 1 1 535 Remarks See Also ONPLOT Purpose Format Returns Example 536 ones 3 returns the 3x3 array becki TR Ely Age LES ily fle kh ones size A returns a array of all ones with same dimension as A GLINE RAVEL SIZE ZEROS Executes statements when a Window is plotted ONPLOT statements statements Any valid SPL expressions separated by semicolons Nothing executes the statement list whenever the Window is plotted W1 gnorm 100 01 onplot setwlike W1 W2 1 1 W2 gnorm 100 01 When W1 is scrolled or sized W2 also scrolls or sizes W2 is graphically linked to W1 However in this case changing W2 causes W1 to update since W1 explicitly depends on W2 from the ONPLOT expression W1 gnorm 100 01 onplot eval setwlike W1 W2 1 1 W2 gnorm 100 01 Same as above except EVAL removes the explicit dependency of W1 on W2 W2 automatically scrolls or sizes when W1 scrolls or sizes but W1 does not update when W2 changes Remarks See Also W1 gnorm 100 01 onplot eval setwlike W1 W2 1 1 W2 gnorm 100 01 onplot eval setwlike W2 W1 1 1 W1 scrolls or sizes when W2 scrolls or sizes and W2 scrolls or sizes when W1 scrolls or sizes EVAL removes the circular dependencies of W1 and W2 Any valid statements can be used Multiple statements are delimited by the semicolon EVAL PLOTMODE SETWLIKE OPENLABBOOK Purpose Format Returns Ex
395. ies 27 30 33 defmacro d1 getdate 3 returns the string 6 21 2003 if today s date is June 21 2003 183 Remarks See Also DEFVAR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 184 DEFMACRO provides a method to create and store constants derived in a Worksheet Macros are fully expanded before the statements are evaluated If you redefine a macro and use it within the same statement you must EVAL the macro before using it For example defmacro x 2 eval x W1 Quotes determine how the macro is defined and interpreted and what is returned after it is evaluated DEFMACRO or DEFINE is extremely useful for short algorithmic abbreviations or constants Use SPL to create more sophisticated functions or procedures DEFINE MACROS Sets the value of a variable if the variable is undefined DEFVAR vname val vname A string The name of the variable value The value to assign if the variable is undefined Nothing Defines and sets the variable if it is undefined defvar myvar 10 If myvar is undefined myvar is set to 10 0 DEFVAR is used by several panels and SPL routines to create variables that behave similar to C C static variables SETVARIABLE DEG Purpose Macro Returns degrees per radian 360 2 pi Format DEG Returns A scalar Expansion 57 2957795 1308232087680 Example pi 4 deg yields 45 the value of 7 4 in degrees See Also E GAMMA
396. ies 3 5 5 0 6 7 0 0 4 0 8 0 Example See Also setnavalue curr 100 sets all NA values in the current Window to 100 ISNAVALUE NAVALUE READTABLE SETPALETTE Purpose Format Example Remarks Sets an ordered list of colors to use in shading SETPALETTE color color Series color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP W1 plot3d spline2 rand 10 4 setshading setpalette yellow Igreen Iblue Ipurple lred white sets a palette of six colors for use by plots which employ shading In a surface plot for example points falling within the first sixth of the range of the data are colored YELLOW those in the next sixth are LGREEN and so on The range of colors available is machine dependent The color names shown in the example are actually pre defined macros representing some of the colors available on any color machine Each Window can have its own palette of colors See the discussion on color in the User Manual and the palette mac file for a list of default colors for your machine See SETPMAP to set the palette colors of a DENSITY plot Because SETPMAP sets a colormap it is usually preferred over SETPALETTE 675 See Also GETPALETTE MAPPALETTE SETCOLORMAP SETPMAP SETSHADING SHADEWITH Purpose Determines which method to use when drawing plots Format SETPLOTMETHOD method method An integer 0 Horizon Method 1 Painter s Method Remarks Wa
397. ies depending on method action_key Optional An integer Returns a single character code to the application Keys are integer key codes based on ASCII Non ASCII keys are private to the application Action_keys are used internally in the application and are mentioned here for completeness but command strings below are the preferred method of customization label A string to label the button under the WRITTEN rendering For BIT_MAPPED this is the path to a loadable bitmap file command A string This is the action taken when the button is pressed Valid strings include any commands that can be executed in the current state of the application message Optional A string This help message is displayed on the status line when the mouse is held over the button Defaults to the button label 783 Example Remarks TOUPPER Purpose Format Returns 784 Add a button called Stats to the main worksheet toolbar which pops up the Summary Statistics menu toolbar 1 8 4 RED Stats _MF statsum men Likewise you can convert the style button to a menu of choices toolbar 1 5 2 _MF gviews men Command if present overrides action_key An empty command string will allow the action_key if any to take precedence BIT MAPPED rendering may not be available on all platforms It is possible to install buttons that are inappropriate to the state of the
398. ies in W1 to 10 0 If you do not specify a Window DADiSP uses the current Window 699 Remarks See Also SETXPAL Purpose Format Returns Remarks 700 To set the offset of W1 to the offset of W2 setxoffset W1l xoffset W2 Functions such as AUTOCOR CROSSCOR and AMPDIST display the correct X axis values EXTRACT also sets the offset For example to extract 128 points at index 100 and set a zero x offset use extract W1 100 128 0 0 The Import Utilities recognize the optional header keyword X_OFFSET so you can specify the offset when importing data files DELAY SETDELTAX SETX Sets the color index to correspond to the indicated palette color SETXPAL cindex cpal cindex An integer the color index cpal An integer the palette color A series or table The color index is the internal color number that other functions use to refer to a color For example wincolor BLUE is equivalent to wincolor 1 because BLUE is a macro that expands to the number 1 and 1 is the color index that initially is set to get a color from the device that the developers regard as a pleasing shade of blue On a PC default color indices are in the range 0 15 on workstations the default color indices are in the range 0 31 Remarks SETXTIC Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also The palette color is the color number that the graphics library uses to get the color from the display
399. imum length restriction SETXLABEL and SETYLABEL allow the user to set an axis label which can be more than 15 characters long and which is independent of units so that the automatic translation of units can continue to operate In both interactive and printed output an axis label if set will cover whichever units label has been defined for the axis If the user has set an axis label then units will not appear Axis labels apply to the current focus so to apply axis label functions to an overlay use FOCUS to set the current focus to the desired overlay before calling any axis label functions CLEARXLABEL CLEARYLABEL GETXLABEL GETYLABEL SETHUNITS SETVUNITS Turns the log scales on off for the x axis of the current Window Format Example See Also SETXLOG mode subtic mode Optional An integer 1 On set log axis 0 Off set linear axis default subtic Optional An integer 1 label sub tics 0 do not label sub tics default setxlog 1 tums on x axis log scaling setxlog 1 1 tums on x axis log scaling with labeled sub tics setxlog 0 turns off x axis log scaling SETYLOG XSUBTIC SETXOFFSET Purpose Format Example Specifies the x offset of a series SETXOFFSET series xoffset series Optional Any series or table Defaults to the current Window xoffset Areal the desired starting X value of the series setxoffset Wl 10 0 sets the offset of the ser
400. indow Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window cursor_num Optional An integer specifying the cursor number 1 First Cursor 2 Second Cursor Defaults to 1 417 Returns Remarks See Also ITEMTY PE Purpose Format 418 The item number in the specified window where the cursor was most recently placed If the cursor was never activated in the specified window the item number returned is 1 Changes in cursor position do not propagate through the Worksheet If you want to update a window dependent on a new cursor position use the Line Editor F3 key to re enter the line so that the cursor position is re evaluated A series or an XY plot is considered an item DADiSP remembers the last position of the cursors when a cursor is placed on the series it is drawn at the most recent location which may mean that the window is redrawn to display that x or y range To disable this feature use setconf item_memory O COLNPUT COLPOS CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON ITEMCOL ITEMCOUNT ITEMNPUT Returns the item type of a composite series ITEMTYPE ser ser Optional A series or expression evaluating to a series Defaults to the series in the current Window Returns Example Remarks See Also An integer The following itemtypes are defined Series XY series List Error Bar Reserved Reserved Symbol Plot XYZ Plot a gsin 100 01 4
401. indow to 10 of the plotting area SETALLWMARGIN SETWSCURSOR Purpose Format Sets the type of Window information shown at the Worksheet Formula line SETWSCURSOR level level Optional Integer specifying the display level Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Show Window formula default 1 Show Window label 2 Show nothing 695 Example Remarks See Also SETWSIZE Purpose Format Example 696 setwscursor 1 sets the display at the command line to the Window label SETWSCURSOR is helpful in command files and when generating screen dumps as long Window formulae at the command line can be distracting GETWINCURSORINFO SETWINCURSORINFO Sets the size of a Window SETWSIZE Window xl yt width height drawmode Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window xl Areal the left location yt Areal the top location width Areal the new Window width height Areal the new Window height drawmode Optional An integer the redraw option Defaults to 0 Valid arguments 0 Redraw Worksheet default 1 Do not Redraw 2 Clear display of all Windows setwsize Wl 0 0 5 5 resizes W1 to be 1 4 the size of the worksheet If xl yt height width 1 0 the Window is autosized For example setwsize Wl 1 1 1 1 resets all the Windows to autosize mode DISPLAYALL and adding Windows also reset the Windows to aut
402. ing the string could not be converted using the g format control SSCANF uses a control string in the format of the C C language sscanf and sprintf functions For more detailed information see a C C language function reference NUMSTR PRINTF SPRINTF Creates a vertical stacked bar from the values of a series or multi series table STACK Example Remarks See Also 10 25 33 11 5 20 stack creates a vertical stacked bar of the six values and labels the right side of the bar STACK operates on the current Window It does not accept arguments If the current Window contains a table STACK displays as many vertical bars as number of columns in the table The color of each segment in the vertical stacked bar is dependent upon the Window color The COLOR_INDEX of the Window color is the starting index the color for each segment is incremented from the starting index by 1 That is if the Window color is set to 1 BLUE the colors of the vertical stacked bar in the above example are STRCOLOR 2 STRCOLOR 3 STRCOLOR 4 STRCOLOR 7 HISTOGRAM SETPLOTSTYLE STAGGERX STAGGERY Purpose Format Example Remarks Staggers the x or y axis scale display and locates the scale in a region which is farther away from the plotting area than the regions taken by any preceding scales on the same side of the specified window STAGGERX Window onoff STAGGERY Window onoff Window Optional Win
403. ing to a series or table A new series or table containing the x values of the series Wl grand 5 2 xvals Wl returns the series 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 xvals Wl returns a series that consists of the x values of W1 Use IDX to return the indices of a series or array IDX XY YVALS Creates an XY plot in a Window XY xseries yseries xseries Series to be used as X values yseries Series to be used as Y values An XY series Example Remarks See Also XYDT Purpose Format Returns Examples W1 gcos 100 01 10 3 W2 xy W1l gsin 100 01 10 creates an XY graph in the current Window where the X values are identical to the Y values of W1 and the Y values of the XY plot are obtained from the specified GSIN function xy 1ogl0 xvals W1 0001 1o0g10 W1 returns a log log plot of W1 Use XYINTERP to convert an XY series into an interval series for processing by standard series operations XYINTERP XVALS XYZ YVALS Creates an XY plot from Date Time and Y series XYDT date time y date A series of date values time A series of time values y Aseries of y values An XY series Wl julstr 1 1 99 julstr 1 10 99 julstr 4 2 99 W2 todstr 12 00 todstr 14 00 todstr 9 35 W3 1 2 5 setvunits V W4 xydt wl w2 w3 843 The series in W4 consists of the values 1 01 99 12 00 1 0 1 10 99 14 00 2 0 4 02 99 09 35 0 5 R
404. intopt 1 1 0 0 0 leaves legends and titles in the printouts of the Worksheet and disables the printing of Window bars borders and margins printopt 1 1 1 leaves all the settings as they currently are and enables the printing of the Window bars PRINTOPT and SCREENOPT are particularly useful in formatting the Worksheet display for presentations demonstrations printouts and custom applications All parameters are optional integer arguments defaulting to current values Use 1 to leave a parameter unchanged Changes made to print options are stored as configuration parameters in the dadisp ses file and will be the default settings in the next session LAYOUT PRINTING AND PLOTTING FUNCTIONS PRINT PREVIEW FUNCTIONS SCREENOPT PRINT PREVIEW FUNCTIONS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Expands a Window all Windows a Window with an information box or the Worksheet as currently displayed to full screen for print preview FUNCTION arguments see list below The following printing and plotting functions are supported by DADiSP PREVIEW Window title PREVIEWALL PREVIEWINFO Window title PREVIEWWS Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window title Optional The string to be printed on the Window formula line in quotes preview W7 FFT OF ACOUSTIC 2 expands Window 7 to full screen print preview with the title FFT OF ACOUSTIC 2 previewall consecutively
405. ion Results of Analysis onto the Worksheet at 0 0 1 W1 grand 100 0 01 addwksform Label Random Series puts a label on W1 using the text Random Series Worksheet formulas cannot be set like Window formulas The primary use for ADDWKSFORM is for annotations to the Worksheet background that do not belong to specific Windows Once a command is added to the Worksheet formula the only way to delete it is to start anew Worksheet A new Worksheet starts with no Worksheet formula ADDWFORM REDRAWALL SETWSIZE TEXT Returns 1 if all elements of the input are non zero ALL val val A series scalar or string input The scalar 1 0 or 0 0 or a row array if the input is an array with more than row and column al1 3 returns 1 0 al1 0 0 1 0 returns 0 0 Remarks See Also all ones 3 1 returns 1 0 all ones 3 3 returns the 1x3 array 1 0 1 0 1 0 The input is cast to a series if it is a scalar or a string ANY FIND ONES ZEROS ALLFUNCTIONS Purpose Format Remarks See Also Displays a list of all available functions defined within the current Worksheet Lists function names arguments and definitions and allows functions to be created edited and deleted ALLFUNCTIONS Displays all functions including those beginning with the underscore character _ When a list of available functions is generated using the FUNCTIONS command functions whose names begin with the unders
406. ion resulting in a series One or more scalars W2 gsin 100 0 01 minloc W2 returns 0 75 the x location of the minimum mx my minloc w2 mx 0 75 my min W2 0 0 my returns the x location of the minimum while my returns the y location of the minimum See MINIDX to obtain the index of the minimum COLMAX FIND FMAX FMIN MAXIDX MAXVAL MIN MINIDX Returns the minimum of one or two input arguments Format Returns Example Remarks See Also MMULT Purpose MINVAL val1 val2 vall A series or numeric argument val2 A series or numeric argument A real or series minval 10 20 returns 10 minval 1l 2 3 0 4 2 returns the series 0 2 2 Lett 2a Shs 445 95 Obs 47 0 85 OF 2 minval W1 2 1 2 3 the minimums of each column of W1 The built in MIN function is equivalent to MINVAL See VMIN to compare more than two values COLMIN MAX MAXVAL MIN VMIN Multiplies two matrices MINVAL with no input arguments uses the current Window 497 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 498 MMULT matrix1 matrix2 matrixn Any matrix A matrix WI 1 3 4 tEn age Os 8 9 12 W2 1 3 2 2 4 5 1 2 0 mmult W1 W2 11 23 17 28 61 45 38 84 61 mmult W2 W1 32 42 55 62 79 104 tL TAn 22h The number of columns in matrix1 must be equal to the number of ro
407. ional An integer 0 prompt user before overwriting 1 overwrite existing output file Defaults to 0 A 1 if export is successful otherwise it returns a 0 exportfile RUN1 1 ANALOG1 exports the series RUN1 1 ANALOGI in ASCII format to the file export dat exportfileC RUN1T 1 ANALOG1 myfile bin 7 exports the series RUN1 1 ANALOGI in binary DOUBLE format to the file myfile bin EXPORTFILE is simply a non GUI version of the built in export facility IMPORTFILE READA READB WRITEA WRITEB EXPORTWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns 230 Saves the current Worksheet to an external Worksheet File DWK EXPORTWORKSHEET wname wname The name of the Worksheet to save in quotes A 1 if saved correctly otherwise 0 Example Remarks See Also EXTRACT Purpose Format Returns Example exportworksheet My Worksheets Runl dwk saves the current Worksheet under the name Run1l dwk inthe My Worksheet sub directory This Worksheet can be retrieved using the IMPORTWORKSHEET command The wname argument is case sensitive If no extension is provided the dwk extension is automatically appended IMPORTWORKSHEET NEWWORKSHEET SAVESERIES Extracts a portion of a series or table EXTRACT series start length offset series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table start An integer value for the starting point length An integer value for
408. is periodic ACOV performs covariance by computing the direct convolution of the input series The output length L is L 2 lJength s 1 The zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M i 1 1 where i is the index of the result See FACOV for the frequency domain implementation See Also ACORR CONV FACORR FACOV FCONV FXCORR FXCOV XCORR Purpose Activates the specified Window Format ACTIVATE Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Remarks Equivalent to pressing Enter carriage return in the Window See Also UNACTIVATE WINSTATUS 35 ADDWFORM Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 36 Adds to the formula in the Window without causing a complete re evaluation ADDWFORM Window formula Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window formula Any valid DADiSP formula in quotes A formula can be any DADiSP command function or macro The following are examples of valid formula types 1 Any expression evaluating to a series or scalar e g W1 W1 2 Commands that return nothing but manipulate a series or Window display e g EXPANDH 2 FREAK CURSORON or PLOTMODE 0 3 DADiSP or user defined functions or macros e g AUTOCOR or PSD W1 gno
409. it A typical value for TOL is EPS See 1 for further details Matrix Multiply Vv EPS MMULT QR SVD 1 Press Flannery Teukolsky Vetterling Numerical Recipes in C Cambridge Press 1988 pp 407 552 Sets the sync mode that controls scaling and scrolling of series and Window axes 765 Format Example Remarks See Also TABLE Purpose Format 766 SYNC Window sync_type Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window sync_type Integer Valid arguments are Integer Expansion amp Expansion Compression Compression amp Scrolling 0 1 X 2 Y 3 X amp Y 4 X 5 y 6 X amp Y Assuming the current Window has an overlay in it sync 4 tells DADiSP to expand or compress the X axis in sync while keeping the scrolling independent SYNC is meaningful only for Windows with overlays FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES Lists the x and y values of a series This allows you to scroll through point values TABLE series series Optional Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table Defaults to the current Window Example Remarks See Also TABLES Purpose Format Example table W4 returns a table of point values for the series in Window 4 The maximum number of columns displayed is 6 To change point values in any series use the EDIT or TABLEVIEW functions When the table is displayed press the F2 key to write the table to
410. ity matrix A 1 inv A the matrix inverse A l A Given matrix A and scalar p For pa positive integer Ap is equivalent to A AX AN A LL S A p times For p a negative integer A p is equivalent to the positive case except the inverse of A is multiplied For p a real or complex number the function computes the matrix power using eigenvectors and eigenvalues as follows v d eig A A p v d p 4 v For p A the matrix power is calculated as v d eig A v diag p diag d v If neither p nor A are matrices defaults to the standard operator For example 4 3 64 If both p and A are matrices an error occurs See the operator to raise each element of an array to a power Matrix Multiply Arithmetic Operators INVERSE LU MDIV MMULT QR A Matrix Solve Purpose Divides one matrix by another Format matrix1 matrix2 matrix A non singular usually square matrix matrix2 Any matrix Returns A matrix that produces matrix2 when multiplied by matrix1 Example Wi 1 4 7 idee BaB ey 3 6 OF W2 I 2 3 W3 W1 W2 30 36 15 W4 Wl W3 l 23 3 W4 solves the following system of equations x 4y 7z 30 2X 5y 8z 36 3x 6y 15 x 1 y 2 z 3 23 Remarks 24 Now consider A il 4 7 1255 55 BY 335 63 Oss 1 25 1 x 30 36 15 2 y A Db y 30 3
411. iversity of Vienna Gusshausstrasse 25 389 A 1040 Vienna AUSTRIA 825 See Also READBMP Purpose Writes the configuration table to an ASCII file Format WRITECNF fname fname Optional A string the filename Defaults to config txt Returns 1 if successful Example writecnf viewfile config txt writes the current configuration table to config txt and displays the table in a pop up box See Also FCLOSE FOPEN FPUTS Purpose Creates a header file based upon user input Format WRITE_HEADER fname fname A string The path and filename for the desired header file Returns An ASCII header file 826 Remarks See Also WRITEHED SPL contains a number of functions to support the automatic import header file creation capabilities DOSINGLE and DOMULT1 are the main calling functions to create a header file for Single and Multi channel data files Note these functions only create a header file This file must be loaded in the Import Utilities dialog box or specified in a call to the IMPORTFILE function The header file is an ASCII text file which can be edited in any text editor WRITE_HEADER relies on global variables to output the header information to the specified header file These variables are set in the menus called by DOSINGLE and DOMULTI WRITE_HEADER is not intended for stand alone use DOMULTI DOSINGLE WRITETABLE Purpose Format Writes a multi series table in ASCII format directly
412. ix is decomposed into an orthogonal matrix Q and an upper triangle matrix R such thatM Q R For an over determined or under determined system of equations of the form A x b The operator automatically uses QR decomposition such that A b returns the best solution for x in the least squares sense Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve CHOLESKY HESS LLU MMULT SVD QUANTIZE Purpose Format Returns Example 588 Quantizes an input series to N levels QUANTIZE s levels xl xh yl yh s An input series or scalar levels Optional An integer the number of quantization levels Defaults to 256 xl Optional A real the low value input range Defaults to min s xh Optional A real the high value input range Defaults to max s yl Optional A real the low value output range Defaults to xl yh Optional A real the high value output range Defaults to xh A series or real quantize 1 100 10 returns a 100 points series with quantize values of 1 12 23 34 45 56 67 78 89 100 Example W1 gcos 100 01 2 W2 quantize W1 2 4 The cosine is quantized to 16 levels ranging from 1 to 1 W3 quantize W1 2 4 min W1 max W1 0 2 4 1 The cosine is quantized to 16 levels ranging from 0 to 15 W1 gcos 100 01 2 setlinewidth 2 shadewith W2 rainbow W2 quantize W1 10 plotmode W1 1 gcos 100 01 2 setlinewidth 2 shadewith W2 rainbow
413. ized auto covariance of random noise The normalized maximum of both results 1 0 at time t 0 indicating the expected perfect covariance at time t 0 true for all series The waveform of W4 displays only one distinct peak at t 0 indicating that W2 is not correlated with itself and is non periodic Both waveforms display a triangular envelope due to the assumption that the input series is zero before the first sample and after the last sample The auto covariance is used to determine how similar a series is to itself or if a series is periodic FACOV performs covariance by computing the FFT of the input series The output length L is L 2 lJength s 1 The zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M 7 1 1 where i is the index of the result See ACOV for the time domain implementation ACORR ACOV CONV FACORR FCONV FXCORR Returns the prime factors of a scalar Format Returns Example Remarks See Also FCLOSE Purpose Format Returns FACTORS int int An integer or an expression which returns an integer A series factors 357 returns the series 3 7 17 factors 1975 returns the series 5 5 79 factors 19 returns the series 19 19 is a prime number so there is only one point in the resulting series
414. ject An integer if successful else 0 word CreateObject word application word visible 1 Release word Starts an instance of Word as an ActiveX server makes it visible then releases the word object Release is not required on object handles that fall out of scope For example wtest local word word createobject word application word visible 1 RELEASE is not required in the above SPL routine because the local variable word falls out of scope when the routine terminates However RELEASE is useful for explicitly terminating ActiveX connections CREATEOBJECT GETOBJECT REM Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Determine the remainder from a division REM num den num A scalar series or table The numerator value den A scalar series or table The denominator value A scalar series or table rem 5 3 returns 2 W1 1 10 W2 ravel W1 5 rem W1 5 returns the series 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 rem W2 5 returns the 5x2 array tit 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 0 0 rem 12 3 3 returns 0 3 rem 12 3 3 returns 0 3 mod 12 3 3 returns 2 7 rem a b has the same sign as a and mod a b has the same sign as b Both are equal if the inputs have the same sign but differ by b if the signs differ i e rem a b mod a b b REM works for scalars series and tables 611 See Also REMOVE Purpose Format
415. l Integer representing the text color Defaults to the series color or 1 bg_color Optional Integer representing the background color Defaults to the Window s color or 1 427 Returns Example Remarks 428 font Optional Integer specifying a font type Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are NORM FONT SMALL FONT STATLINE FONT POPBOX FONT WINLABEL_ FONT TOOLBAR_FONT LISTBOX_FONT MENU_FONT USERI FONT USER2 FONT 0 USER3_ FONT 1 PANEL FONT er OAANANDNAHWNF 1 box Optional Integer 0 OFF 1 ON Draws a box around the legend text Defaults to 1 margin flag Optional Integer Margin to be adjusted Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 No Margin Adjustment 0 Top Margin 1 Right Margin 2 Bottom Margin 3 Left Margin focus Optional Integer In a Window with overlays the desired series A legend associated with the various series in the Window legcur 1 12 1 0 0 1 1 returns a legend in the current Window that does not scroll with the Worksheet has light red text against a background the same color as the window with small font with the default margin style and that has as focus the first series overlayed into the window If the Window in which you have inserted a legend with LEGCUR evaluates often you might want to try using LEGEND instead Because LEGCUR is a plot time function every time the Window is reevaluated LEGCUR inserts
416. l s2 s3 multireadb merged dat double 3 same as above except the series are loaded into the variables s1 s2 and s3 510 Remarks See Also NAFILL Purpose Format Returns Example The file name must be in quotes or otherwise specified as a string Specify the binary data as in READB The number of series in the file is specified in num_series Use this only if the data in the file is interlaced MULTIREADB puts each series in a Window starting with the current Window The slope islope yoffset and iyoffset parameters provide methods for scaling the data If all scaling parameters are specified the scaling occurs as follows Yout slope islope Yintiyoffset yoffset where is ope Yin is an integer multiplication iyoffset is an integer addition and slope and yoffset are floating point multiplications and additions FREADB FWRITEB MERGE READB WRITEB Replaces NA values based on other known data points NAFILL series method series A series multi series table or expression evaluating to a series or table method An integer Method used to fill NA values Valid arguments are 0 No fill retain NA values 1 Fill forward using the last known value 2 Fill forward then backward 3 Fill backward using the next known value 4 Fill backward then forward A series or table nafill curr 1 replaces each NA value with the preceding known value 511 Remarks Se
417. l number above below which the peak valley will be found width Optional An integer minimum width Defaults to 1 FPEAK Sets the crosshair cursor to the first peak above the threshold FPEAKN Sets the crosshair cursor to the next peak above the threshold FPEAKP Sets the crosshair cursor to the previous peak above the threshold FVALL Sets the crosshair cursor to the first valley below the threshold FVALLN Sets the crosshair cursor to the next valley below the threshold FVALLP Sets the crosshair cursor to the previous valley below the threshold FVALL must be executed before FVALLN FVALLN must be executed before using FVALLP FPEAK must be executed before using FREAKN FPEAKN must be executed before using FPEAKP The threshold argument is optional for FPEAKN FPEAKP FVALLN and FVALLP If no threshold argument is specified for these functions the last threshold value is used by default These functions set the cursor position but do not display point values nor do they provide an active cursor Use CURSORON to activate the cursor CURPOS CURSORON FMAX FMIN GETPEAK GETVALLEY MAX MIN FINDMAX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Returns the X and Y value of the maximum of a series FINDMAX s x y Z FINDMAX s s A series or expression resulting in a series An XY series or separate scalars b findmax s returns an XY or XYZ series x y findmax s returns the X and Y val
418. labels The default settings are 90 degree rotation for x axis labels 90 degree rotation for y axis labels on left and bottom sides 270 degree rotation for y axis labels on right and top sides FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETAORIX SETAORIY SETAROTX SETAROTY SETTORIX SETTORIY SETTROTX SETTROTY SETTVDEFX SETTVDEFY SETBUFSIZE Purpose Format Returns Examples Remarks See Also Sets the number of points in a series that DADiSP will keep in main memory before using the disk for further storage SETBUFSIZE size size An integer Number of points per series to buffer An integer the previous buffer size orgsize setbufsize 1024 1024 a integ gnorm 1024 1024 1 setbufsize orgsize The previous buffer size is stored in orgsize and the buffer size is temporarily set to IMB A 1MB series is generated and saved to variable a and the original buffer size is restored Defaults to 32768 points There is a trade off between buffer size and the number of series a Worksheet can process If you are working with long data series raising this parameter will improve throughput but may cause an out of memory condition for Worksheets with very large numbers of long series Increasing the buffer size generally increases speed of calculation for long series at the expense of available memory Reducing the buffer size decreases calculation speed but enables a greater number of long series to be processed If a
419. le COLMAXIDX table unravel table Any series or expression resulting in a table unravel Optional An integer indicating if unraveled i e sequential indices should be returned 0 Normal indices default 1 Unraveled indices A row series Wie Tala 25 cy trols Sas e 25 D W2 colmaxidx w1 W2 3 1 1 a colmaxidx Wl 1 b colmax W1 c WlLa a 3 4 7 b c 3 2 3 COLMAXIDxX finds the index of the maximum value for each column in an array If more than one maximum exists per column the first index found is returned COLMAXIDX table 1 returns the indices in sequential unraveled order This form is useful in array reference expressions Use MAXIDX to find the index of the overall maximum See Also COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMIN COLMINIDX FIND FMAX FMIN MAX MAXIDX MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINLOC COLMEAN Purpose Format Returns Example See Also Produces a row of the means of each column of the input table COLMEAN table table Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table A one row table with the same number of columns as the input table colmean ravel 2 4 6 8 10 12 returns 4 10 COL COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLSTDEV TRANSPOSE 103 COLMEDIAN Purpose Produces a row of the medians of each column of the input table Format COLMEDIAN table table Any series table
420. le or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table Try setting up a three Window Worksheet W1 gsin 128 0 01 1 0 W2 ifft Wl W3 idft W1 Windows 2 and 3 will produce the same results however the IDFT will be considerably slower The IDFT returns the same result as an IFFT Although the IDFT is a more straightforward method than the IFFT is for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform it is also a much slower algorithm DFT IFFT Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 IDX Purpose Returns the indices of a series or array Format IDX table unravel table Any series or array unravel Optional An integer indicating if unraveled i e sequential indices should be returned 0 Normal indices 1 Unraveled indices default Returns An array or series Example W1 gnorm 5 1 W2 idx W1 W2 1 2 3 4 5 W1 1 2 3 te leros Pa Aaa ak W2 idx w1 W2 1 4 7 tAn a Of Ee 3 6 9 a idx W1 0 dR VoL 12s Ry Fa C3 SH IF Remarks By default IDX a returns the indices in sequential unraveled order This form is useful in array reference expressions idx a 0 colidx a Use XVALS to return the X axis values 375 See Also IF Purpose Format Returns Example 376 COLIDX COLLENGTH XVALS Evaluates a
421. le named RTDATA DAT An ASCII value of 1 0 is also written to the text file GATE TXT to indicate new data is available New data is not written to RTDATA DAT until an ASCII value of 0 0 is detected in GATE TXT The second DADiSP polls GATE TXT Ifthe value is 1 0 the file RTDATA DAT is read and the result is placed in W1 A value of 0 0 is then written to GATE TXT to indicate that the new data was read Both the RTREAD and RTWRITE are performed in the background via RTTINIT ASCALE RTTINIT RTTTERM RTWRITE Spins a 3D plot in Real Time RTSPIN win inc win Optional Window that contains a 3D plot Defaults to the current Window inc Optional An integer Spin increment in degrees Defaults to 3 degrees A value of 0 terminates the current rtspin Nothing spins the 3D plot 635 Example Remarks See Also RTITINIT Purpose Format Returns Example 636 W1 XYZ gsin 100 01 4 gcos 100 01 4 0 0 01 0 99 scalesoff rtspin spins the spiral 3 degrees in each direction Because the spin routine is automatically executed in the background DADiSP is still responsive to user input while the plot spins W1 XYZ gsin 100 01 4 gcos 100 01 4 0 0 01 0 99 scalesoff rtspin wl 8 same as above except the spin increment is 8 degrees Use rtspin 0 to terminate the real time spin RTSPIN automatically adds itself to the real time task list using RTTINIT Currently only
422. lect units from a pop up list Display sampling rate of the series Return the largest positive real number Return the smallest positive real number Return an array of row numbers Count number of series in window or matrix Return length of series Return 1 0 or 1 based on the sign of the input Return a 2 point series containing the dimensions of an array Return the Color Name for specified Color Index Return the number of seconds since the internal timer started Display unit selections Return the status of the current window Write the configuration table to an ASCII file Return the x offset of a series or table Return x tic interval Return y tic interval Return z tic interval Read real time data from a file Spin a 3D plot in Real Time Place a real time task in the queue for execution Pause a real time task in the queue Remove a real time task from the queue Read real time data from a file Relational Operators lt lt gt gt EQUAL GREATER GREATEREQUAL LESSER LESSEREQUAL NOTEQUAL Conditional operators Determine if two expressions are equal Determine if one expression is greater than another expression Determine if one expression is greater than or equal to another Determine if one expression is less than another Determine if one expression is less than or equal to another Determine if two expressions are not equal Series and Scalar Math ARITHMETIC 4 ARITHMETIC 4 AR
423. les dspum hlp Remarks See Also HESS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also If the specified topic does not exist in the help file the help system will display a topic search listbox with alphabetized entries the closest entry to the specified topic will be highlighted The specified filename can include the entire path to the help file HELP Computes the Hessenberg form of a table HESS matrix matrix A Real or Complex square matrix A matrix x 1 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 hess x 1 0 4 982 0 424 9 434 17 506 1 809 0 0 0 19101 0 49438 If a matrix is an upper Hessenberg then elements in the matrix below the first subdiagonal are all zero LU MMULT QR SCHUR SVD TRANSPOSE 365 HIDE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also HILB Purpose Format Returns 366 Hides a range of Windows HIDE Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window If your Worksheet contained 10 Windows hide W2 W4 W7 W9 would hide Windows 2 4 7 8 and 9 and display the remaining Windows HIDE will retain the custom Worksheet layout Hidden Windows still automatically recalculate To redisplay all of the Windows use DISPLAYALL DISPLAY ALL DISPLAY Calculates a simple Hilbert transform of a real series HILB s s The input series real A complex series or array Example
424. linear correlation between the two input series The result ranges from 1 to 1 Pearson assumes X and Y have the same number of points AUTOCOR CROSSCOR PFIT TREND Performs Least Squares Polynomial fitting with error statistics PFIT series order mode form coef R2 Se res PFIT series order mode form series The input series order An integer the polynomial order mode Optional An integer Defaults to 1 Valid options are 0 no statistics 1 return R 2 and Se Standard Error of Estimate form Optional An integer form of the polynomial coefficients 0 ascending powers 1 decreasing powers Defaults to 0 A series or table coef R2 Se res pfit series order mode form returns the polynomial coefficients residual squared standard error and residual in separate variables W1 gsin 100 0 01 0 8 W2 pfit Wl 2 W3 polygraph col W2 1 xvals W1 overplot W1 1red 555 W4 gsin 100 0 01 0 8 W2 pfit W1 2 154 He pace 1 Coeff 2 R 2 3 Se 0 54 Va i 1 0 349702 0 896020 0 232544 J 2 2 744303 0 5 4 be 3 4 769116 1 5 4 f W3 polygraph col W2 1 xvals W1 overplot W1 Ired 0 0 1 0 2 0 3 0 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 W2 contains the table Coeff R2 Se 0 349702 0 896020 0 232544 2 744303 4 769116 W3 contains the fitted result with an overplot of the original data W4 pfit W1 4 W4 con
425. llisecond precision from a time string Convert string to lowercase Convert string to uppercase XXX Table Manipulation COL COLEXTRACT COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMEAN COLMEDIAN COLMIN COLREDUCE COLSTDEV COLSUM DELETECOL DELETEROW FLIPLR FLIPUD GETSERIES GRADE ISNAVALUE LOOKUP NAN NAVALUE NUMCOLS NUMEL NUMITEMS NUMROWS RAVEL REGION REORDER REPMAT RESHAPE ROW ROWREDUCE SERCOUNT SETCOLHEADER SETMATRIX SORT TABLE TABLES TABLEVIEW UNMERGE UNRAVEL XXxil Extract a column of a table Extract a portion of each column of a table Number of samples in each column Maximum value in each column Mean value for each column Median value for each column Minimum value for each column Apply REDUCE function to each column Standard deviation of each column Produce a row of the sums of each column of the input table Delete one or more columns from a table Delete one or more rows from a table Reverse the elements of each row of an array Reverse the elements of each column of an array Return the nth column of table corresponding to nth overplot Rank table values Binary series based on NA values in input series Pick selected points by table The value used to represent NAs in numeric data Null data value Return the number of columns in a Window or DADiSP expression Return the total number of array elements Count number of items in window or matrix Return the number of rows in a Window or DADiSP expression Create
426. lobal variable Return the type of data stored in the variable List all the SPL variables that have been defined in the current Worksheet Return the x values from a window Generate an XY plot in a window Linearly interpolate an XY series Interpolate Y values from a series given arbitrary X values Return the y values from a window Range Specifier Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Generates a series consisting of a range of numbers start increment end start Areal Starting value for the range increment Optional A real Step size for the range Defaults to 1 0 end Areal Ending value for the range A series Le25 returns a series consisting of the values 1 2 3 4 5 14028545 returns a series consisting of the values 1 1 8 2 6 3 4 4 2 5 Syl returns a series consisting of the values 5 4 3 2 1 t 2 0 01 2 f 3 Wl sin 2 pi f t W1 contains 401 samples of a 3 Hertz sinewave over the range 2 lt t lt 2 The acts as a numeric range specification and can be used in array references For example the following statements 2 4 6 8 10 12 al2 6 a 2 2 6 Elsiz a 6 1 2 to o l assign the values to the variables a b c d and f as shown below 2 4 6 8 10 12 4 6 8 10 12 4 8 12 2 4 6 8 10 12 12 10 8 6 4 no om o I i The following statements ravel 1 16 4 ull 3 2
427. lso EPS INF REALMIN REALMIN Purpose Returns the smallest positive real number Format REALMIN Returns A real the smallest positive value Example realmin lt eps returns 1 0 Remarks Any operation resulting in a value less than REALMIN is an underflow See Also EPS INF REALMAX 605 REDRAW Purpose Format Remarks See Also Redraws all the Windows in a Worksheet REDRAW Does not redraw toolbar or Worksheet margins REDRAWALL REDRAWALL Purpose Format Remarks See Also 606 Redraws the entire DADiSP screen REDRAWALL mode mode Optional An integer Specifies actions for redraw Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Redraw entire screen default 1 Re initialize graphics and redraw 2 Re initialize fonts re initialize graphics and redraw 3 Re initialize Windows re initialize graphics and redraw 4 Re initialize system colors re initialize graphics and redraw REDRAWALL is useful for restoring a disrupted DADiSP screen REDRAW REDUCE Purpose Format Inserts an operator between every observation of a series evaluating it to an expression and reducing it to a scalar REDUCE series op opcode series op Optional A string the binary operator in quotes Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table opcode Optional An integer the binary operator function code The following functio
428. lts to 1 centered y Optional The y coordinate in text columns Defaults to 1 centered text_color Optional The color of menu text Defaults to white bg_color Optional The background color of menu Defaults to red filename Filename of the menu file in quotes menufile 0 0 WHITE LBLUE MENU1 MEN reads the menu file MENU1 MEN and returns a white on light blue menu in the upper left corner of the Worksheet menufile 1 1 MSG MEN reads the menufile MSG MEN and displays a white on red menu in the center of the Worksheet The upper left hand corner of the screen is the origin with coordinates of x 0 y 0 The screen has dimensions of 80 columns by 24 rows The bottom right hand corner of the screen has coordinates x 80 y 24 To center the menu set x and y to 1 ECHO INPUT MENUCLEAR MENULIST MENUPRINT VIEWFILE MENULIST Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Generates a pop up menu at the Worksheet level of DADiSP in accordance with the specified parameters MENULIST x y text_color bg_color option_1 option_n x Optional The x coordinate in text columns Defaults to 1 centered y Optional The y coordinate in text rows Defaults to 1 centered text_color Optional The color of menu text Defaults to white bg_color Optional The background color of menu Defaults to red option_1 Menu selection option 1 in quotes option_n Menu selection optio
429. lts to 1 Example beep 1 turns error beeper on BESTPOW2 Purpose Finds the power of 2 greater than or equal to the input value or length of the input series Format BESTPOW2 s s An input series or real number Returns A real number Example bestpow2 30 returns 32 bestpow2 64 returns 64 W1 1 200 bestpow2 W1 returns 256 Remarks If the input is a series or table the return value is the next power of 2 greater than or equal to the length of the series See Also FFT LOG2 NEXTPOW2 60 BETAI Purpose Format Example Calculates the incomplete beta function BETAI x a b x Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table where each element is between 0 and 1 inclusive a Areal number greater than 0 b Areal number greather than 0 betai 3 4 5 returns 0 440684 betai 0 0 0 5 1 0 0 1 0 2 returns the incomplete beta function values 0 0 0 67057 1 0 Wl betai 0 0 01 1 8 10 setxlabel x setylabel 1Ix 8 10 scales 2 griddot gridhv betai 0 0 01 1 8 10 He ee any 06 2 52 222 Yee tee ee e te Ix 8 10 ee en ae ae Ge ee te ie returns a series consisting of the incomplete beta function for 101 values of x between 0 and 1 witha 8andb 10 l Remarks See Also BILINEAR Purpose Format 62 betai x a b Ix a b 1 I1 x b a GAMM JN YN Performs a bili
430. lue is segsize int interval deltax s where s is the input series The segments are non overlapping See Also STATS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also STDERR Purpose COLMEAN RMS Calculates and displays the arithmetic mean and the standard deviation STATS series first number series Optional An expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window first Optional An integer The first series point to include in the calculation of statistics Defaults to the first point number Optional An integer The number of points to take for the calculation Defaults to the number of points from first to the end of the series A string stats gsin 100 0 1 10 50 returns Mean 9 50 E 016 Standard Deviation 0 7143 Cannot be used in DADiSP expressions Strictly a calculator function Use MEAN and STDEV in expressions MEAN STDERR STDEV Calculates the standard error of a series or table 743 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also STDEV Purpose Format Returns 744 STDERR series series An input series or table A series or table W1 gsin 100 01 0 8 stderr W1 returns 0 071384 The standard error of series s is equal to stdev s sqrt length s If the input is a table STDERR calculates the standard error of each column STATS STDEV Calculates the standard deviation of a series
431. mber of samples Defaults to 1000 f Optional A real the frequency Defaults to 8 Hz Places new series in W1 639 Example Remarks See Also RUN Purpose 640 Start first DADiSP to simulate a real time data source rttinit rtwrite Start second DADiSP to read real time data rttinit rtread The series generated by the first DADiSP is read synchronously by the second DADiSP The real time data appears in W1 of the second DADiSP rttinit rtwrite 300 2 Same as above but the series contains 300 points with a frequency of 2 Hz The first DADiSP writes a binary series to the file named RTDATA DAT An ASCII value of 1 0 is also written to the text file GATE TXT to indicate new data is available New data is not written to RTDATA DAT until an ASCII value of 0 0 is detected in GATE TXT The second DADiSP polls GATE TXT Ifthe value is 1 0 the file RTDATA DAT is read and the result is placed in W1 A value of 0 0 is then written to GATE TXT to indicate that the new data was read Both the RTREAD and RWRITE are performed in the background via RTTINIT RTREAD RTTINIT RTTTERM Runs an external program from an open Worksheet Format Example Remarks RUN filename wait showmode filename A string the filename of the program to run wait Optional A negative integer 1 runs the specified program without displaying it and waits until the program has terminat
432. me type as the higher of the two expressions 1 TRUE 0 FALSE Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer lt Real yields a Real Integer lt Series yields a Series Integer lt Integer yields an Integer Real lt Complex yields a Complex Real lt Series yields a Series Complex lt Real Series yields a Complex Series String lt String yields a String lesserequal max W1 30 returns a if the maximum value of W1 is less than or equal to 30 0 or 0 if the maximum value of W1 is not less than or equal to 30 0 lesserequal 1 3 4 0 5 2 returns a series 0 1 0 LESSEREQUAL a b is equivalent to a lt b String comparisons use STRCMP amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators GREATER LESSER LEVELCROSS Purpose 434 Creates a series with 1 0 TRUE where the input series crosses the level and 0 0 FALSE elsewhere Format Returns Example Remarks LEVELCROSS series level edgedetect edgeout series Any series multi series table or expression evaluating to a series or table level Scalar Level crossing threshold edgedetect Optional An integer for crossing definition Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Detect both rising and falling edges d
433. mean W1 isnumber gain returns 0 since the macro gain is defined as the string mean W1 a 12 b 12 isnumber a returns 1 isnumber b returns 0 NUMSTR 411 ISREAL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ISSTR Purpose Format 412 Returns 1 if input parameter is real ISREAL val val A series scalar or string input The scalar 1 if the input is real or a real series else 0 isreal 3i returns 0 isreal string returns 0 isreal mag fft 1 2 3 4 returns 1 If the input series is empty isreal returns 0 ISCOMPLX ISSTR Returns if the input is a string ISSTR a a Any input Returns Example Remarks See Also ISUNIT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks An integer 1 if the input is a string else 0 a 1 b cje isstr a returns 0 isstr b returns 0 isstr c returns 1 ISSTR always returns an integer ISCOMPLX ISREAL Returns 1 if string is a recognized engineering unit else 0 ISUNIT str str A string An integer 1 if str is a unit else 0 isunit Volts b isunit xxx o II a 1 b 0 The recognizable unit list can change if units were defined with the SETHUNITS SETVUNITS or SETZUNITS function 413 See Also SETHUNITS SETVUNITS SETZUNITS ISVARIABLE Purpose Determines whether a variable or function is defi
434. mension Defaults to 2 3 which makes the series appear 3 2 of its original size To return the Window to its original display use the reciprocal ratio of your original argument COMPRESSV with the same argument or press CTRL HOME The default argument accomplishes the same result as hitting CTRL PGUP when the current Window is active COMPRESSH COMPRESSV EXPANDH Fits y x A exp B x using linearization EXPFIT s s Input series or array A series W1 10 exp 1 100 0 5 W2 expfit wl overplot wl lred overplots the original data with the calculated exponential fit 227 Remarks See Also EXPM Purpose Format Returns Example 228 fit coef expfit wl fit is the same series as in W2 coef 10 0 0 5 EXPFIT fits an exponential curve of the form y A e b x The fit is accomplished by fitting a line to the following equation In y In A b x Note that y must be positive The fitted exponential curve fit coef expfit s returns both the fit and the coefficients as a series The fitted exponential curve fit A b expfit s returns the fit as a series and the coefficients as separate scalars POLYFIT POWFIT TREND Calculates the exponential of a matrix EXPM matrix matrix Real or Complex square table A matrix Wl ravel 1 2 3 4 2 Tableview W2 expm W1 produces the following matrix in W2 51 968956 112 104847 74
435. mn size Defaults to numcols a A complex array ifftp2 fft2 1 2 3 4 returns the complex polar array 1l exp i 0 2 exp i 0 3 exp i 0 4 exp i 0 Since IFFTP2 returns a complex result the result can be converted into real form using the REAL function If the input data is a series i e a single column a 1D IFFT is performed FFT2 FFTP FFTP2 IFFT2 IFFTP Grids irregular XYZ data to a uniform grid using the inverse distance method Format Returns Example IGRID x y z gridsize interp weights radius x A series X or horizontal range A series Y or vertical range A series Z or height data gridsize Optional An integer or series the size of output grid Defaults to sqrt length x interp Optional An integer the cubic spline smoothing factor Defaults to 1 no smoothing weights Optional A series the weights of distance function Defaults to 0 0 1 1 1 radius Optional A real the maximum radius to include in the interpolation Defaults to all An array x grand 100 1 2 1 y grand 100 1 2 1 Z cos x y xyz igrid x y Z grids the function cos x y over the range 1 to 1 with an interpolated grid of 11x11 381 Remarks See Also 382 xyz2 igrid x y z 20 Same as above but the interpolated grid is 20x20 xyz2 igrid x yl zl 20 30 3 Same as above but the interpolated grid is 20x30 and the
436. moves one or more overlayed series UNOVERLAY Window ser_num Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window ser num Optional An integer Specifies one or more series to remove unoverlay W7 removes all overlayed series and leaves the original waveform in Window 7 unoverlay 3 5 removes the third and fifth overlayed series from the current Window Series are numbered increasingly in the order in which they were added The first overlayed series is number 1 etc UNOVERLAY does not remove overplotted series Unlike UNOVERPLOT UNOVERLAY removes overlayed axes OVERLAY OVERPLOT UNOVERPLOT 799 UNOVERPLOT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Removes one or more overplotted or overlayed series UNOVERPLOT Window sernum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window sernum Optional An integer Specifies one or more series to remove unoverplot W7 removes all overplotted and overlayed series and leaves the original waveform in Window 7 unoverplot 3 5 removes the third and fifth overplotted series from the current Window Series are numbered increasingly in the order in which they were added The first overplotted or overlayed series is number 1 etc See UNOVERLAY to remove the axes of an overlayed plot OVERLAY OVERPLOT UNOVERLAY UNPOPWINDOW Purpose Format 800 Unzooms the specified Window UNPOPWINDOW Window
437. mp bitor Bit Operators Moves the cursor by the stated number of points from the current position NMOVE points points An integer Number of points to move the cursor W1 gsin 100 01 nmove 5 moves the cursor backwards 5 points so in this case the cursor moves backward 0 5 x units This function moves by number of data points whereas MOVE moves by x axis units CURSORON CURPOS MOVE NPUT PUT 521 NONLIN2D Purpose Format Returns Example See Also NOP Purpose Format 522 Peforms nonlinear 2D filtering with a kernel of size KSIZE on a square image matrix NONLIN2D table type ksize table Any image table or expression evaluating to a table type An integer The filter type Valid arguments are 0 Median Filter 1 Minimum Filter 2 Maximum Filter ksize Optional An integer Kernel size must be odd Defaults to 3 A table Wl readb baboon dat UBYTE W2 ravel W1l 128 setmatrix 1 setplottype 3 W3 nonlin2d W2 0 3 setmatrix 1 setplottype 3 filters the baboon image with a 3x3 median filter kernel CONV2D SOBEL Performs No operation NOP Remarks NORM Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks A no operation function The name of this function includes a leading space and it cannot be entered into a Window or macro or evaluated from a string NOP is used internally as a function placeholder Calculates the n
438. mple See Also QR Purpose Format 586 CURPOS CURSORON MOVE NMOVE NPUT Sets an operating system environment variable PUTENV string string Full environment variable string to set in quotes putenv PATH C C DOS C DSP sets the path to C C DOS C DSP GETENV Calculates the QR decomposition of a matrix QR matrix otype q r QR matrix matrix A square or rectangular matrix Optional An integer specifying the type of matrix to return Defaults to 11 Valid arguments are otype 01 R the Upper triangular matrix 10 Q the Orthogonal matrix 11 Combined upper and orthogonal matrix default Returns Example A matrix q r qr matrix returns the q and r components in separate variables Wis HAL Ae Py 2 5 8 3 6 9 W2 qr W1 01 3 74 8 55 13 36 0 00 1 96 3 93 0 00 0 00 0 00 W3 qr W1 10 0 27 0 87 0 41 0 53 0 22 0 82 0 80 0 44 0 41 W4 W3 W2 1 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 Another example QS til 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 q r qr a q 0 267261 0 872872 0 408248 0 534522 0 218218 0 816497 0 801784 0 436436 0 408248 r 3 741657 8 552360 13 363062 0 000000 1 963961 0 000000 0 000000 pS qi eo or b l 4 7 2 5 8 3 6 9 3 927922 0 000000 587 Remarks See Also The input matr
439. n clock in seconds COLNOS Return an array of COL numbers DELTAX Display delta x value 1 sample rate DIRPATH Return the directory component of a path string FINITE Return 1 for each element that is not infinite inf or NA nan GETCOMMENT Get comment string for first series in a window GETCONF Get value of configuration parameter GETDATE Get system date GETGCOLOR Get global color parameter GETGRIDCOLOR Get color of the grids GETHOME Get the path to DADiSP s home directory GETHUNITS Get horizontal units GETLABEL Get the label of the specified window GETLABNAME Get the name of current Labbook GETLABPATH Get the path to the current Labbook GETPALETTE Return a series of the color indices used in palette GETSYMBOL Return the type of symbol used for the specified series GETTIME Get the system time GETVUNITS Get vertical units GETWCOLOR Get the color of a window GETWCOUNT Get the number of series in a window GETWFORMULA Get the formula for a window in string form GETWINCURSORINFO Return the setting for the level of information displayed in a Window formula line GETWMARGIN Get percentage of margin for window GETWNUM Get the number of the current window GETWORKSHEETNAME Get the name of the current Worksheet GETWSIZE Get the window dimensions GETXL Get leftmost x coordinate GETXR Get rightmost x coordinate GETXTIC Get x axis tic interval GETYB Get bottom y coordinate GETYT Get top y coordinate GETYTIC Get y axis tic interval
440. n codes are supported Code OONDOABRWDND Operator AV gt gt FLIPFLOP ATAN2 amp lt lt gt gt BITXOR MAKECART MAKEPOLAR MAX MIN Function ADD SUB MULT DIV GREATEREQ LESSEQ EQUAL NOTEQUAL AND OR XOR FLIPFLOP ATAN2 BITAND BITLSHIFT BITRSHIFT BITOR MOD BITXOR BITCOMP MAKECART MAKEPOLAR MAX MIN Description add subtract multiply divide raise to power greater than less than greater or equal to less or equal to equal to not equal to logical and logical or logical exclusive or dual pad flip flop inverse tangent bit and bit shift left bit shift right bit or modulo bit exclusive or bit complement convert to cartesian convert to polar maximum minimum 607 Returns Example Remarks See Also REFRESH Purpose Format Remarks 608 A scalar reduce 2 4 6 expands to the expression 2 4 6 which evaluates to the scalar result 48 reduce 2 4 6 expands to the expression 2 4 6 which evaluates to the scalar result 12 reduce 2 4 6 1 returns 12 Binary operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR The function also accepts an explicit function code instead of an operator string Either an operator string or function code must be supplied amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators COLREDUCE INTERPOSE IN
441. n factors are expressed as a fraction which is multiplied by the range of the data and added in to the starting point of the trace Defaults are 0 03 and 0 03 which shift each trace up by three percent and over by three percent Typically a Waterfall plot is created and WFSET is then used to change its plot attributes WATERFALL WHICH Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns the path to an SPL file or filename WHICH splfile WHICH splfile splfile Name of the SPL file to display A string The full path to the file or the string Built in Function or the string Global Macro which trapz returns DSPHOME sp1 math trapz sp1 where DSPHOME is installation directory which trapz Same as above accept WHICH is specified in command form which fft returns Built in Function since the FFT routine is built in WHICH is a quick way of locating an SPL file DADiSP automatically searches all of the directories returned by the GETSPLPATH function to locate the SPL file WHICH can also locate other files when an extension is provided e g which dadisp cnf GETSPLPATH HELP VIEW VIEWFILE 815 WHICHSCALES Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 816 Returns integer corresponding to the scale which matches described property parameters WHICHSCALES yvis ymax yaxis xvis xmax xaxis An integer specifying if y axis scales should be visible 1 visi
442. n n in quotes menulist 0 0 WHITE LBLUE min min W1 max max W1 pops up a white on light blue menu in the upper left corner of the screen There are two selections in the menu Selecting MIN prints the minimum value of Window 1 at the bottom of the screen Pressing the down arrow key moves the menu cursor to the selection MAX and pressing Enter prints the maximum value of Window 1 at the bottom of the screen menulist 2 min printf Min of W1 g min W1 pops up a menu centered on the x axis and 2 rows down in the default colors white text red background with one selection MIN Pressing Enter causes the line after the tilde to be executed This line writes MIN of W1 nat the bottom of the screen where n is evaluated to the value of the minimum of W1 Pressing Esc clears any menu The upper left hand corner of the screen is the origin with coordinates of x 0 y 0 The screen has dimensions of 80 columns by 24 rows The bottom right hand corner of the screen has coordinates x 80 y 24 To center the menu set x and y to 1 ECHO INPUT MENUCLEAR MENUFILE MENUPRINT OBJECTLIST VIEWFILE 487 MENUPRINT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also MERGE Purpose Format 488 Reads a menu file and prints the menu to a file rather than the screen MENUPRINT lt x y filename x Optional The x coordinate in text columns Defaults to 1 centered y Optional The y coor
443. n of the sinc sinx x function For non periodic waveforms sinx sin interpolation produces the same result as sinx x interpolation to within a few percent ZINTERP also works on arrays FZINTERP FSINTERP INTERPOLATE POLYFIT SPLINE ZOOM Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also ZPFCOEF Purpose Format Enlarges the current Window to fill screen ZOOM Activate a Window with a series by pressing the Enter key Type zoom to enlarge the Window display You must activate the Window before enlarging it using ZOOM ACTIVATE POPWINDOW UNPOPWINDOW UNZOOM WINSTATUS Designs a digital filter from a set of analog s domain zeros and poles ZPFCOEF z p K Fs Fp z A series consisting of the zeros of the analog filter transfer function in Hertz p A series consisting of the poles of the analog filter transfer function in Hertz K Optional A real the filter gain Defaults to 1 0 Fs Optional A real the sample rate of the digital filter Defaults to 1 0 Fp Optional An integer the warping frequency The magnitude to the digital filter at Fp matches the magnitude of the analog filter defaults to Fs 857 Returns Example 858 A series The coefficients of the digital filter in cascade form 0 1 10000 w 2 pi f s i w W1 5 s 40 2 pi s 30 2 pi s 20 2 pi s 300 2 pi W2 20 10g10 mag W1 setxlog 1 W3 zpfcoef 40 30 20 300 5 1000
444. n parameter to return A string getconf beep returns 1 if the beeper is ON 0 if the beeper is OFF GETCONF always returns a string If the configuration parameter does not exist a zero length string is returned dadisp cnf configuration file SETCONF GETCRANGE Purpose Format 296 Gets color shading range GETCRANGE valflag loval hival set GETCRANGE valflag Optional A real which value to return 0 get loval 1 get hival If not specified returns if color range set else 0 loval Areal Lowest shade value hival Areal Highest shade value set Areal Returns 1 if color range set else 0 Returns Example Remarks See Also GETDATE Purpose Format A real as determined by valflag loval hival set getcrange returns color range and setting flag x y fxyvals 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 W1 cos x y setplotstyle 0 setplottype 4 setcrange 0 5 2 W2 Wl rainbow lo hi getcrange lo 0 5 hi 2 0 W2 contains a shaded 3D surfaces The color range is scaled to Z values from 0 5 to 2 0 The surface in W2 shows the portion of the color map that corresponds to the Z values of W2 GETCRANGE returns the color range specified by SETCRANGE See SETCRANGE to specify a constrained color range COLORBAR COOL GETCOLORMAP HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETCRANGE SETSHADING Returns the system date or the creation date of a series GETDATE ser
445. n the Worksheet without removing the Window formulae Save this Worksheet as a compact template When loaded use UPDATE to recalculate the Worksheet CLEARALLDATA is useful for creating compact Worksheet templates by preserving the formulae but not saving the Window data CLEAR CLEARALL CLEARDATA UPDATE CLEARDATA Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Clears the data from one or more Windows without removing Window formulae CLEARDATA W1 WN W1 WN Optional A range or list of Windows Defaults to the current Window cleardata W1 clears the data from Window 1 without removing its Window formula cleardata Wl clears the data from all Windows in the Worksheet without removing the Window formulas Save this Worksheet as a compact template When loaded use UPDATE to recalculate the Worksheet cleardata integ W1 removes the data from the current Window thus freeing any memory used by the data and then calculates the integral of W1 CLEARDATA is useful for creating Worksheet templates by preserving the formulae but not saving the data of the cleared Windows CLEARDATA can be helpful during large calculations DADiSP normally does not remove old data from a Window until a new calculation has completed Using CLEARDATA the old data is removed immediately and more memory is available to perform calculations CLEAR CLEARALL CLEARALLDATA UPDATE 89 CLEAROPL Purpose Format E
446. n the direction with the most variability The output X and Y ranges x1 yi are determined from the data if not specified IGRID SPLINE SHADEWITH Purpose Format Example Adds a fourth shading dimension to various three dimensional plots of table data SHADEWITH srewin targwin srewin Any Window that contains a table The shading data targwin Optional The target Window Defaults to the current Window shadewidth W2 If the current Window contains a rectangular table of data shown as a meshed waterfall plot and W2 contains the columnwise derivative of that data the data in W2 representing the rate of change of W1 will be mapped onto the surface of W1 using the shading scheme currently in effect W1 spline2 rand 10 8 setplottype 4 sethatch 0 hot W2 deriv wl Now set the current Window to W1 and use shadewith W2 pon The surface in W1 is shaded with its derivative producing the effect of a light source illuminating the surface from the left W1 peaks 50 copper sethatch 0 W2 deriv wl shadewith W2 W1 pon 709 See Also SHELL Purpose Format Example 710 peaks 50 copper sethatch Q Oo 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 3 SETPALETTE SETSHADING Exits DADiSP temporarily via the DADiSP shell to the operating system at the current working directory SHELL pause pause Optional An integer 1 forces DADiSP to pause before returning to the last Worksheet screen
447. n used with table input CASTSTRING operates on the first column of the table CASTCOMPLEX CASTINTEGER CASTREAL CASTSERIES SPRINTF STRCHAR STRCHARS STRNUM CASTVARIANT Explicitly casts the input to a Variant of a specified type for Automation CASTVARIANT expr vtype Purpose Format expr vtype Returns Description nothing 2 byte integer 4 byte integer 4 byte float 8 byte double currency date binary string error boolean variant unknown char unsigned char unsigned short unsigned int 8 byte integer 8 byte unsigned machine int unsigned machine int void C style array null terminated string wide null terminated string A scalar series table string or expression returning a scalar series table or string Optional An integer specifying the Variant type If not specified defaults to the original type of the input Valid conversions are as follows VARTYPE VT_EMPTY VTR VT 4 VT R4 VT R8 VT CY VT DATE VT BSTR VT ERROR VT_ BOOL VT_VARIANT VT UNKNOWN VTI VT_UIl VT_UR VT_UI4 VT I8 VT_UI8 VT_INT VT_UINT VT_VOID VT_CARRAY VT_LPSTR VT_LPWSTR The input value The input is marked so that it is converted to the specified type when used with ActiveX Automation 77 Example Remarks See Also xl createobject Excel Application xl workbooks add xl range Al value 1 11 58 range B1l value castvariant 1 11 58 7 visible 1
448. nated to itself A series equal in length to n times the original series replicate 1 2 3 returns the series 1 2 1 2 1 2 replicate W2 5 concatenates five copies of the series from Window 2 If the original series is 100 points long the resultant will be 500 points long replicate gline 10 1 1 1 5 concatenates 5 lines of 10 points each REPLICATE is a special version of CONCAT REPLICATE can be abbreviated REP See REPMAT to replicate both rows and columns CONCAT EXTRACT MERGE RAVEL REPMAT 617 REPMAT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 618 Replicates an array down and across REPMAT m d a m An input array d An integer the number of times to replicate the columns downward a Optional An integer the number of times to replicate the rows across Defaults tod An array of replicated columns and rows WI il 2 3 4 5 6 WO DEF W2 repmat W1l 2 3 We SS ths 23 By ol 25235 15 240 SE tA Be Oe cA Bs 65 Maa be 6 5 Ae Op OG Ts o Oso oo Og Os Ely Cay By len 25 Sys Ly Aer STS tta Ba Oy Ay BS Oy Bs Sa OF lig B 5 Di Pe B50 Os a By OEY a repmat 10 size W1 a 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10 REPMAT m a d is equivalent to REPMAT m a d REPMAT scalar size array returns an array where each element is the scalar value and the output dimensions are the same as the input array RAVEL RE
449. nd form DSPMACREAD MACREAD MACROS DYDX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Purpose Format Returns MACWRITE VIEW Calculates the derivative of XY data DYDX ysig xsig ysig An input XY series xsig Optional A series The explicit xvalues An XY series W1 xy gexp 100 01 gline 100 01 1 0 W2 dydx W1 W2 contains the first derivative of the XY data in W1 DYDxX is similar to DADiSP s built in RDERIV function and DYDX defaults to RDERIV for non XY series input DERIV LDERIV RDERIV Macro Computes Euler s number e LN e 1 209 Expansion Example See Also ECHO Purpose Format Returns Example 210 A scalar 2 71828 18284590452353602874 e 3 returns 20 08553692 DEG GAMMA LN PHI PI SETDEGREE Prints text on the status line ECHO val val A string scalar or any expression evaluating to a string or scalar A string echo hi prints hi on the status line W1 10 20 echo strcat MIN W1 strnum min W1 prints MIN W1 10 0 on the status line printf Min val 2 2f Max Val 2 2f min max prints Min val x Max val y where x and y evaluate to the minimum and maximum values of the current Window Note that echo is not needed here since printf returns a string Remarks See Also EDIT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also The ECHO function is use
450. ndard deviation of 1 randn 20 5 10 3 same as above except the mean is 10 0 and the standard deviation is 3 0 randn returns a single random real value chosen from a set of normally distributed random values with a mean of 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 Remarks See Also RANK Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also RANDN uses GNORM to generate the random values The SEEDRAND function determines the initial seed of the random number generator RANDN with no input arguments returns a scalar GNORMAL GRANDOM RAND SEEDRAND Estimates the number of independent rows or columns of an array RANK m tol m An input array Defaults to the current series tol Optional Real Singular value tolerance Defaults to max of rows or cols max singular values eps An integer the estimated rank W1 rand 3 W2 ravel W1 W1 W3 rand 6 rank w1 returns 3 rank w2 returns 6 rank w3 returns 3 RANK use SVD to compute the singular values of an array COND NORM SVD 593 RATE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also RAVEL Purpose Format 594 Returns the sampling rate of a series RATE series series Optional Any series or expression evaluating to a series Defaults to the current Window A scalar W1 grand 100 0 001 3 6 rate returns 1000 0 RATE is the inverse of DELTAX DELTAX SETDELTAX Creat
451. near transformation with optional frequency prewarping Zd Pd Kd BILINEAR Z P K Fs Fp Z A series containing the zeros of the transfer function P A series containing the poles of the transfer function K Areal The gain constant Fs Areal The sampling frequency in Hertz Fp Optional A real the frequency in Hertz specifying at which point the frequency responses before and after mapping match exactly Each of the three forms of BILINEAR accepts this optional additional input argument Ad Bd Cd Dd BILINEAR A B C D Fs Fp A B C D Matrices containing the state space representation of the filter to be transformed b a BILINEAR NUM DEN Fs Fp NUM Series containing the numerator transfer function coefficients in descending powers of s DEN Series containing the denominator transfer function coefficients in descending powers of s Returns Example Remarks See Also In the first case two series and a constant Zd is the vector of zeros Pd is the series of poles and Kd is the gain constant In the second case Ad Bd Cd and Dd are the state space representations of the z transform discrete equivalent filter In the third case b and a are series containing numerator and denominator transfer function coefficients Zd Pd Kd bilinear Z P K Fs creates the series of zeros the series of poles and the gain constant for the z transform discrete equivalent of the filter defined by Z P
452. ned as the specified type Format ISVARIABLE name vartype name The name of the variable or function in quotes vartype Optional An integer The type of argument Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 Global Variable default 2 Local Variable 3 User Function 4 Hot Variable 5 Formal Variable Returns A 1 if the function or variable exists as specified else returns a 0 Example a grand 100 0 01 b max a isvariable a returns the value 1 isvariable b returns the value 1 isvariable b 4 returns the value 1 isvariable b 2 returns the value 0 Remarks Note that all hot variables are global variables 414 The following macros are defined in system mac isglobal v isvariable v 1 islocal v isvariable v 2 isspl v isvariable v 3 ishotvar v isvariable v 4 isformal v isvariable v 5 ISVARIABLE and ARGC are useful in detecting optional arguments to an SPL function ISVARIABLE can be abbreviated ISVAR See Also ARGCOUNT ISMACRO VALUETYPE ITEMCOL Purpose Returns the column number where the specified item starts relative to the starting column in the window Format ITEMCOL Window item Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 Remarks If the specified item is greater than the number of items in the window ITEMCOL returns 0 See Also COL ITEMCOUNT IT
453. next loop test expression is evaluated CONTINUE CountIt n local a j a 0 for j 1 j lt n j if a gt 10 continue at j return a In the SPL function Countlt if a is greater than 10 then nothing more will be added to it The CONTINUE statement will break out of the FOR loop and after j n will return the value CONTINUE is for use in SPL files BREAK FOR IF LOOP RETURN SPL DADiSP s Series Processing Language WHILE CONTOUR Purpose Displays table data as a contour plot 125 Format Example 126 CONTOUR table levels incolor labeling factor table Any multi series table or expression resulting in a table levels Optional An Integer The number of contour levels to draw Defaults to 10 incolor Optional An integer Designates whether plot will be in color or not 0 OFF or no color 1 ON or color Defaults to 0 labeling Optional 4 or 8 Real numbers representing end points of labeling axes Label points are interpreted as a list of x y pairs either as x1 yl x2 y2 or xl yl x2 y2 x3 y3 x4 y4 If four label points are entered labels are drawn on an axis from x1 y1 to x2 y2 If eight label points are entered labels are drawn on two axes one axis from x1 y1 to x2 y2 and the second axis from x3 y3 to x4 y4 Defaults to no labels factor Optional integer specifying the contour label factor The factor specifies t
454. nfirmation flag 1 confirm deletion 0 do not confirm Defaults to 1 An integer 1 if successful else lt 0 deletelabbook MyBook deletes the Labbook MyBook with confirmation deletelabbook O1dBooks Book1 0 deletes the Labbook Book1 in the OldBooks directory without confirmation The Labbook name can contain a path The currently opened Labbook cannot be deleted First open a different Labbook then delete the desired Labbook See Also DELETEDATASET DELETEWORKSHEET LOADDATASET LOADSERIES OPENLABBOOK SAVESERIES Purpose Deletes one or more rows from a table Format DELETEROW series rows series Aseries table or expression resulting in a series or table rows A series of integers specifying the rows to remove Returns A series or table Example W1 ravel 1 16 4 W2 deleterow W1l 2 W2 contains the table 1 5 9 13 435 Ty L415 4 8 12 16 W3 deleterow Wl 1 4 2 W3 contains the single row series 3 7 11 15 Remarks The rows to removed specified by the rows series can be in any order Values can also be deleted by assigning the empty series For example a ravel 1 16 4 a 2 a 1 5 9 13 3 7 11 15 4 8 12 16 See DELETECOL to delete columns 191 See Also DECIMATE DELETE DELETECOL EXTRACT MERGE RAVEL REMOVE Purpose Deletes one or more Series from a Dataset Format DELETESERIES sname1 sname
455. nometric functions to radians Operating System Interface DOS UNIX VMS GETENV GOTOURL PATHCHAR PUTENV RUN SHELL VIEWFILE Temporarily exit DADiSP to operating system Get the value of an environment parameter Start Web browser and opens the specified URL Macro for path character in DOS UNIX or VMS Set the value of an environment parameter Run an external program from a worksheet Exit to operating system from shell Display contents of ASCII file xxi Output INFOPLOT INFOPLOTALL INFOPRINT INFOPRINTALL INFOPS INFOPSALL PLOT PLOTALL PLOTWS PREVIEWALL PREVIEWINFO PREVIEWWIN PREVIEWWS PRINT PRINTALL PRINTOPT PRINTWS PRNSCREEN PS PSALL PSWS SCREENOPT Peak Analysis COLIDX COLMAXIDX COLMINIDX FINDMAX FINDMIN FINDVAL FMAX FMIN FPEAK FPEAKN FPEAKP FVALL FVALLN xxii Plot window and series information box Plot all windows each with its series information box Print window and series information box Print all windows each with its series information box Create PostScript plot of window and series information box Create PostScript plot of all windows each with info box Plot a window Plot all windows Plot Worksheet as displayed Preview a PRINTALL of the current Window Preview an INFOPRINT of the current Window Preview a PRINT of the current Window Preview a PRINTWS of the current Window Print a window Print all windows Select Worksheet elements to be visible or hidden in a dis
456. nteger the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series Example Remarks See Also W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 fxcorr W1 W2 performs the cross correlation of two sinewaves The peaks of the result indicate the two waveforms are very similar at the time intervals where the peaks occur W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 fxcorr W1 W1 1 W4 fxcorr Wl W2 1 W3 displays the cross correlation of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the cross correlation between a sinewave and random noise The normalized maximum of W3 is 1 0 indicating perfect correlation at time t 0 Although the waveform of W4 displays some peaks the normalized maximum is roughly 0 04 indicating little correlation between W1 and W2 For a graphical representation overplot W4 in W3 The cross correlation is used to determine how similar two series are to each other FXCORR performs correlation by computing the FFT s of the input series The output length L is L length s1 length s2 1 For series of equal lengths and offsets the zeroth lag component is the mid point of the series The BIASED normalization divides the result by M the maximum length of the input series The UNBIASED normalization divides the result by M abs M i 1 1 where i is the index of the result See XCORR for the time domain implementation
457. o A1 the first cell bookname Optional A string in quotes or a string variable the Excel Workbook name Defaults to empty indicating use current Workbook sheet Optional An integer or string the Excel Sheet number or sheet name Defaults to 1 the first sheet if bookname is specified else the current sheet A series string or scalar if a single value is requested 1 rand 10 3 xl put Al C10 W1 2 xlget Al C10 1 W2 is all ones that is W1 and W2 are equivalent The data is retrieved from the current Sheet of the current Workbook 1 rand 10 3 xTput A1l C10 W1 Book2 2 2 xlget Al C10 Book2 2 1 W2 is all ones that is W1 and W2 are equivalent The data is retrieved from the second Sheet of Workbook Book2 If Excel is already running XLGET attempts to connect to the running instance of Excel otherwise XLGET connects to a new instance of Excel Numeric data is transferred as double precision values XLCLEAR XLINIT XLPUT XLINIT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Starts an ActiveX connection to Excel for XLGET or XLPUT XLINIT filename filename Optional A string in quotes or a string variable The name of an XLS file to open Defaults to the current running Excel Worksheet A 1 if a connection is established else 0 xlinit W1 rand 10 3 xlput A1 C10 W1 W2 xlget A1 C10 xlclear W1 W2 is all one
458. of input arguments The above routine returns the maximum of two or more expressions ARGC returns the total number of input arguments and GETARGV obtains a particular variable argument ARGV can be used in combination with specified arguments For example func1 a b c argv creates a function that accepts 3 specified arguments and any number of variable arguments See Also ARGC GETARGV ISVARIABLE OUTARGC ARGTYPE Purpose Returns the data type of the input argument Format ARGTYPE arg arg Any value Returns An integer representing the data type The following return values are possible 1 Integer 2 Real 3 Complex 4 String 5 Series 6 Window Examples a 10 b 12 57 c text argtype a returns 1 argtype a 1 1 returns 2 argtype b returns 3 argtype c returns 4 49 Remarks See Also ASCALE Purpose Format Returns 50 argtype 1l 2 returns 5 argtype W1 returns 6 myfun x local type type argtype x if type 5 type 6 error myfun series required else return integ x x ARGTYPE is useful in checking for the proper type of arguments in SPL functions See the include file SERIES H for helpful macros that use ARGTYPE VALUETYPE Sets Window autoscaling ASCALE win on_off win Optional A Window Defaults to the current Window on_off An integer Defaults to 1 Valid inputs a
459. of one or more inputs vmax argv local i s 0 or 1 arg case if argc lt 2 if argc lt 1 s maxval else s maxval getargv 1 else initialize s maxval getargv 1 getargv 2 compare input args for i 3 i lt argc i s maxval s getargv i returns s vmax 2 3 1 5 4 returns 5 the maximum of the input arguments ARGV in the argument list of an SPL routine specifies a variable number of input arguments The above routine returns the maximum of two or more expressions ARGC returns the total number of input arguments and GETARGV obtains a particular variable argument Remarks The input for GETARGV specifies the index of the variable argument so getargv 2 refers to the second variable argument Consider fact2 a b argv local f i f a b for i 1 i lt argc 2 i f getargv i return f 293 See Also fact2 2 3 4 5 6 7 5040 FACT2 is an SPL routine that accepts 2 specified arguments and any number of variable arguments The result is the product of all the arguments The expression getargv 7 returns the ith variable argument ARGC ARGV ISVARIABLE OUTARGC GETCOLORMAP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 294 Returns the colormap for density and shaded plots GETCOLORMAP win win Optional Window reference Defaults to the system colormap An Nx3 array of r
460. of the area containing specified points Return the colormap for density and shaded plots Get color shading range Get global color parameter Get color of the grids Return a series of the color indices used in palette Return the separate RGB components of an image Generate a black amp white colormap Set grid color Set the color of 3D cross hatching Generate a colormap of black red yellow white Sets color palette for density plot Generate a colormap of the visible color spectrum Reset the colormaps of all Windows containing an image Save and automatically restores the Worksheet colormap Specify series color only Set series color Set the colormap for density and shaded plots Set color shading to a specific range Set global color parameter Define ordered list of shading colors Convert palette color to colormap values Select the range of shading colors Set RGB value for color index Display the current colormap as a density plot Return the Color Name for specified Color Index Specify background window and series color Complex Conversions ANGLE CARTESIAN CONJUGATE IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE MAKECARTESIAN Extract Angular portion Convert to Cartesian Generate Complex Conjugate Calculate real component of imaginary series Return magnitude component of series Combine two input expressions into complex Cartesian Real Imaginary form Vil MAKEPOLAR PHASE POLAR REAL Control Flow BREAK CONTINUE FOR GOTO
461. of the second series in the current Window 684 Example Remarks See Also SETTIME Purpose Format Example Remarks setsymbol W2 1 2 does the same for the second series in W2 setsymbol W2 3 4 5 6 sets an upside down triangle every fifth point starting at the sixth point for the fourth series in W2 Numeric values can be added to the symbols by adding 1000 to the symbol type For example setsymbol 1014 create a symbol plot with circles and numeric values The size of the symbol can be set with the SYMBOL _SIZE configuration parameter SETSYMBOL can be abbreviated SETSYM OVERLAY OVERPLOT SETPLOTSTYLE Sets the time for a series SETTIME Window time Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window time String representing new time Use hh mm ss format settime W3 14 00 sets the time of the series in W3 To verify the change press F2 to display the information box To save the change save the series with the updated time 685 See Also GETDATE GETTIME SAVESERIES SETDATE SETTORIX SETTORIY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 686 Sets the orientation of the labels associated with the tic marks on axes SETTORIX Window orient SETTORIY Window orient Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window orient An integer value 1 Horizontal 2 Vertical Defaults to 1 W1 gsin
462. ok2 2 W2 xlget A1 C10 Book2 2 W1 W2 is all ones that is W1 and W2 are equivalent The data is transferred to the second Sheet of Workbook Book2 If Excel is already running XLPUT attempts to connect to the running instance of Excel otherwise XLPUT connects to a new instance of Excel Numeric data is transferred as double precision values XLCLEAR XLGET XLINIT XOFFSET Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also XOR Purpose Format Returns the x offset of a series or table XOFFSET series series Optional Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Defaults to the current Window A real xoffset gsin 20 05 returns 0 0 the offset of the series Wl gsin 20 05 W2 extract wl 10 1 xoffset w2 returns 0 55 the offset produced by extracting the data prior to the first sample When referencing a table XOFFSET returns the x offset of the first column in the table RATE SETDELTAX SETXOFFSET Performs the logical XOR exclusive OR of two expressions XOR exp1 exp2 expl Any expression evaluating to a real series or table exp2 Any expression evaluating to a real series or table 839 Returns Example See Also XSUBTIC Purpose Format Returns 840 A real series or table xor W1 W2 returns a series or table with zeros at points where both W1 and W2 are zero and non zero and on
463. ompatibility therefore one must specify a 1 to indicate the end of the collist READTABLE can be abbreviated READT See Also READTB Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also EXPORTFILE IMPORTFILE READA WRITEA WRITETABLE Reads a binary table READTB filename filename Astring A filename in quotes A series or array writetb bin dat SINT 1 2 3 4 5 6 mydata readtb bin dat writes the 2x3 array 1 2 3 4 5 6 to the file bin dat as signed integers and reads the array into the variable mydata READTB does not currently handle DELTAX XOFFSET or Units READA READB WRITEA WRITEB WRITETB 603 REAL Purpose Format Returns Example See Also Returns the Real component of a Complex expression REAL expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table real 42 1 returns 42 1 real 3 2 4 7i returns 3 2 real W8 returns a new series in the current Window which is the Real part of W8 ANGLE IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE PHASE REALMAX Purpose Format Returns 604 Returns the largest positive real number REALMAX A real the largest positive value less than inf Example realmax realmax returns inf realmax gt inf returns 0 0 Remarks Any operation resulting in a value greater than REALMAX lt is an overflow and will return INF See A
464. on for axis labels on x and y axis Format Example Remarks See Also SETAROTX Window rotation SETAROTY Window rotation Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window rotation An integer Valid arguments are 0 No Rotation 1 90 degree rotation of entire string 2 180 degree rotation i e upside down 3 270 degree rotation i e 90 degrees clockwise 4 Horizontal characters laid out in vertical sequence Horizontal leftmost letter becomes vertical topmost letter W1 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 0 setarotx 0 label No Rotation W2 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 1 setarotx 1 label 90 deg Rotation W3 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 2 setarotx 3 label 270 deg Rotation W4 gsin 100 01 4 scales 3 settrotx 3 setarotx 4 label Character Rotation Shows the x axis tic labels and axis labels in various modes of rotation The combination of orientation SETAORIX SETAORIY and vertical default rotation SETAVDEFX SETAVDEFY covers most cases desired by users Setting rotation explicitly via SETAROTX SETAROTY rotation functions is meant for users who want to fine tune a plot presentation for printing It is recommended that you use the SETTORI SETAORI SETTVDEF and SETAVDEF functions SETAROTX and SETAROTY apply to the scales associated with the current focus of the specified Window If scales change via execution of the SCALES command
465. on off Return number of children for the window Check the file integrity of a Labbook CLEAR CLEARALL CLEARALLDATA CLEARDATA CONFORMITY CURRENT DELETEWORKSHEET DISPLAY DISPLAYALL EXIT GETCONF GOTOURL GOTOWINDOW LOADWORKSHEET MESSAGELOG MOVETO NEWWORKSHEET NUMWINDOWS PARENTS REDRAW REDRAWALL REFRESH REMOVEWINDOW SAVEWORKSHEET SETBUFSIZE SETCONF SETWSCURSOR TIC UPDATE VERSION wo WRITECNF Clear window and formula Clear all windows and formulas Clear data in all windows without clearing window formulas Clear data in the window without clearing window formula Set conformity for series operations Reference the current window Delete one or more Worksheets from a Labbook Display specified windows Display all windows Exit DADiSP Get value of configuration parameter Start Web browser and opens the specified URL Move cursor to specified window Load a specified Worksheet Write status line messages to text file Move cursor to specified window Create a new empty Worksheet Return total number of windows in Worksheet Return number of parents of the window Redraw screen Redraw screen Recalculate windows Remove windows from Worksheet Save the Worksheet Set number of points of series to keep in memory Set a configuration parameter Set display for Worksheet cursor Start the internal timer Re evaluate and recalculate the entire Worksheet Report full version information of DADiSP Alternate reference for
466. onal An integer Corresponds to the color related parameters in the file dspcolor An integer 299 Example getgcolor 17 returns the number corresponding to the color of the 17th parameter Window color in the file dspcolor strcolor getgcolor 17 returns the color as a string See Also dspcolor file SETGCOLOR STRCOLOR GETGRIDCOLOR Purpose Returns the current color of the grid Format GETGRIDCOLOR Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Returns An integer Example gridcolor W2 BLACK getgridcolor W2 returns a 0 indicating the grid color of Window 2 is black See Also dspcolor file GRIDCOLOR SETCOLOR SETGCOLOR STRCOLOR 300 GETHOME Purpose Format Returns Example See Also Returns the drive and directory from which DADiSP is being run GETHOME A string viewfile gethome dadisp cnf shows the configuration file in the home directory GETLABNAME GETLABPATH GETWORKSHEETNAME GETHUNITS Purpose Format Returns Example Returns the horizontal units of the primary series in a Window GETHUNITS Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A string gethunits W3 returns the horizontal units of Window 3 message sprintf The units of Window 4d are s per s getwnum getvunits gethunits displays a message box with the text The units of Window 1 are Volts per
467. ond series The point values isolated by this method are then plotted in the current Window LOOKUP series1 series2 factor offset series A series or table containing point numbers to be selected from series 2 Points in this series must be integers because they refer to point numbers and not y values series2 Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table factor Optional A multiplicative factor for series 1 the table of point numbers Defaults to 1 offset Optional An offset added to the table after multiplying by the factor argument Defaults to 0 A series or table W1 gline 10 0 1 2 1 W2 1 2 4 5 W3 lookup W2 W1 return the series 1 1 2 1 6 1 8 This is equivalent to using the array index syntax W1 W2 lookup W2 W1 2 1 yields the series 1 4 1 8 2 6 0 0 The final 0 0 occurs because the fourth value in the lookup table is 5 which when multiplied by 2 and added to 1 yields 11 There is no 11th point in the target series so the default y value is 0 Use factor and offset arguments to adjust the x axis units GRADE REORDER SORT LOOP Purpose Format Example Executes simple FOR Loop iterative statements LOOP var array statements LOOP var array statements var A variable used as the iteration index array A series or array If array is a single column series var is assigned the next row element of array after every it
468. one RTSPIN function is active per real time session ROTATE3D RTTINIT RTTTERM SPIN XYZ Places a real time task in the queue for execution RTTINIT rttaskname rttaskname A string The name of the real time task An integer task number for use in subsequent RTT functions Start first DADiSP to simulate a real time data source rttinit rtwrite Start second DADiSP to read real time data rtnum rttinit rtread The series generated by the first DADiSP is read synchronously by the second DADiSP The real time data appears in W1 of the second DADiSP Terminate the reading task rttterm rtnum Remarks The first DADiSP writes a binary series to the file named RTDATA DAT An ASCII value of 1 0 is also written to the text file GATE TXT to indicate new data is available New data is not written to RTDATA DAT until an ASCII value of 0 0 is detected in GATE TXT The second DADiSP polls GATE TXT Ifthe value is 1 0 the file RTDATA DAT is read and the result is placed in W1 A value of 0 0 is then written to GATE TXT to indicate that the new data was read Both the RTREAD and RTWRITE are performed in the background via RTTINIT See Also ASCALE RTREAD RTTPAUSE RTTTERM RTWRITE RTTPAUSE Purpose Pauses a real time task in the queue Format RTTPAUSE tasknum mode tasknum An integer The task number returned by RTTINIT mode Optional An integer Valid inputs are 1 pause 0 continu
469. one way to export a series to a file although it does not export a header with series information like the Export Utilities EXPORTFILE IMPORTFILE READA READB READTABLE WRITEB WRITETABLE Writes a series to disk directly from the Worksheet in binary format without a file header as created by the EXPORT routine WRITEB filename filetype overwrite byteswap series filename Name of output file in quotes If no path is given WRITEB puts file in the current working directory filetype The binary format type of the data file to store described by either its name or integer code Valid arguments are 823 Example Remarks 824 Filetype Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10 37 to 10438 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 4 byte Unsigned 0 to 4 294 967 295 Integer overwrite Optional An integer overwrite flag 0 verify before overwriting default 1 overwrite file if it exists without verification 2 append data to file byteswap Optional An integer Swap the order of the bytes read 1 swap 0 do not swap default series Optional Any series or expression evaluating to a series Defaults to the current Window writ
470. ons with data type arguments DOUBLE FLOAT LONG READB WRITEB SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT ULU Purpose Computes an upper triangular table in LU decomposition Format ULU matrix matrix A Real or Complex square matrix Returns A matrix Example XS 2h aTa 4 5 6 7 8 10 ulu x 105 8805 10 0 0 0 0 85714 1 5714 0 0 0 0 0 5 Remarks For the LU decomposition of a matrix A A llu A ulu A also A lu A 0 1 Iu A 1 1 See Also LLU LU MMULT Purpose Deactivates the specified Window 795 Format UNACTIVATE Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Remarks Equivalent to pressing the ESC key in an activated Window See Also ACTIVATE WINSTATUS UNITS Purpose Returns the list of axis unit strings understood by DADiSP Format UNITS The following is a list of the units that DADiSP recognizes Unit Name Abbreviation No units NU Real Time s Sec Seconds Volts V Amps A Degrees C C Watts W Hertz Hz Raw Binary bit Percent Meters m Kilograms kg Joules J Coulombs C G G Newtons N Pascals Pa 796 Unit Name mSec uSec nSec kiloHertz MegaHertz GigaHertz Counts DB Minutes Hours Business Day Minutely Weekly Monthly Quarterly Daily Hourly Yearly Years Ohms Webers Farads Henrys Teslas Micrometers Millimeters Centimeters Kilometers Inches Feet Yard Miles Pounds Smoots Horsepower Nerd Power
471. open files Flush a buffer to the file Get a string from an open file Open a file Perform formatted output to a file Put a string in an open file Read ASCII data from an open file Read binary data from an open file Advance file pointer to specified byte in open file Return selected information about a file Return the byte of file pointer in open file Write ASCII data to an open file Write binary data to an open file Perform formatted output to the screen Format a list of strings Produce an output string in the format of the C C language printf function Convert an input string by applying a C C style format control string Fourier Transform and Related Functions ACORR ACOV AUTOCOR AVGFILT BESTPOW2 BILINEAR BITQUANT BITSCALE CCEPS CLOGMAG CONV CONV2D COVM CPHASE CROSSCOR DCT DECONV DEMEAN DEMODFM DFT EFFBIT ENDFLIP FACORR FACOV FACTORS FCONV FDECONV FFT FFTP FFTSHIFT FILTEQ FIRSAMP FREQSAMP FXCORR FXCOV FZINTERP HAMMING HANNING HILB ICCEPS IDCT Auto correlation using the convolution method Auto covariance using the convolution method Auto correlation time domain Filter a series using the average of the N neighboring points Find the power of 2 greater than or equal to the input value Bilinear transformation with optional frequency pre warping Quantize an input series to 2 bits levels Convert raw AD counts to scales engineering values Calculate the complex cepstrum Evaluate the
472. or complex square table Defaults to the current Window A real WI 1 3 4 15505 Fh 8 9 12 det W1 returns 15 199 Remarks See Also DFLOOD Purpose Format Remarks See Also 200 a 4015 23 315 4 5 6 7 8 9 det a returns 0 indicating the INVERSE of matrix a does not exist A determinant of 0 indicates the matrix is singular to machine precision and the matrix inverse cannot be found XA INVERSE MMULT PINV TRANSPOSE Changes the color of the colored area containing the specified point DFLOOD x y color x X coordinate of point in colored area y Y coordinate of point in colored area color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP For a list of supported colors use the macros function DFLOOD is usually used for changing the internal color of a polygon The flood algorithm looks at the old color of the indicated point and continues to change the color of surrounding points until it meets a point which has a different color from the initial old color This function is available only on PCs DLNABS DPTABS DFT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References Directly calculates the discrete Fourier Transform of any table or series expression in Real Imaginary form DFT series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series o
473. or W3 Ired 2 setcolor W3 Ired 1 2 sets the second series in W2 and W3 to light red W2 contains two items the original series and the overplotted series The statement setcolor W2 lred 2 sets the color of the second item the overplot W3 contains one item that is comprised of two columns of data The statement setcolor W3 lred 1 2 sets the color of the second series in the first item Le column 2 setcolor W2 lgreen setcolor W3 Igreen The first or primary series of W2 is set to light green Because W3 is comprised of one multi column item all the series of W3 are set to light green The range of colors available is machine dependent The color names shown in the example are actually pre defined macros representing some of the colors available on any color machine For a list of colors use the MACROS function SERCOLOR WINCOLOR SETCOLORMAP Purpose Format Sets the colormap for density and shaded plots SETCOLORMAP map map An array of RGB triples 66 Returns Nothing Example all 0 255 255 zip zeros 255 1 mapl ravel all all all map2 ravel all zip all map3 ravel all all zip setcolormap mapl showcmap creates and displays a black to white colormap setcolormap map2 showcmap creates and displays a black to magenta colormap setcolormap map2 showcmap creates and displays a black to yellow colormap Remarks The colormap must
474. orm of a series or array NORM m mode m An input series or array Defaults to the current Window mode Optional Type of norm calculation Defaults to 2 the largest singular value Valid inputs can be any positive integer or 1 l norm The maximum of the column sum 2 Largest singular value inf Maximum of the row sum inf Minimum of the row sum fro Froenius norm A real representing the norm value a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 norm a returns 16 848103 norm a 1 returns 18 norm a 2 returns 16 848103 norm a inf returns 24 norm a inf returns 6 norm a fro returns 16 881943 The mode parameter specifies the following norm calculations 523 Mode Series Input Array Input 1 sum mag m max colsum mag m 2 max svd m max svd m N sum mag m N 1 N undefined inf max mag m max colsum mag m inf min mag m min colsum mag m fro undefined sqrt sum diag m m See Also COND RANK SVD Purpose Performs a logical NOT Format NOT expr expr Any expression evaluating to a table series or scalar Returns A scalar series or table Example not W1 returns a table or series with ones where W1 contains zeros and zeros where W1 contains non zero values not 1l 2 0 returns 0 0 1 Remarks The NOT function can also be performed using the character The expression not W1 is identical in effect to W1 However NOT is particularly useful
475. ormap take effect on an existing density or 2D plot COOL HOT SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING SHOWCMAP Generates a uniformly distributed random array with values between 0 0 and 1 0 RAND numrows numcols numrows An integer The number of output rows numcols Optional An integer the number of output columns Defaults to numrows A scalar series or array rand 20 5 generates a 20 row by 5 column array of uniformly distributed random numbers with values between 0 0 and 1 0 rand 20 generates a 20 x 20 random array rand returns a single random real value between 0 0 and 1 0 59 Remarks See Also RANDN Purpose Format Returns Example 592 RAND uses GRAND to generate the random values The SEEDRAND function determines the initial seed of the random number generator RAND with no input arguments returns a scalar GNORMAL GRANDOM RANDN SEEDRAND Generates a normally distributed random array RANDN numrows numcols mean std numrows An integer The number of output rows numeols Optional An integer the number of output columns Defaults to numrows mean Optional A real the mean of the distribution Defaults to 0 0 std Optional A real the standard deviation of the distribution Defaults to 1 0 A scalar series or array randn 20 5 generates a 20 row by 5 column array of normally distributed random numbers with values between 0 0 and 1 0 and a mean of 0 and sta
476. os that can be nested inside each other Format SETMACDEPTH level level An integer Number of levels A setting of 0 disables all macros See Also MACROS Purpose Forces column oriented operations on a table Format SETMATRIX onoff onoff Optional An integer 1 ON 0 OFF Defaults to 1 673 Example Remarks See Also setmatrix 1 forces column oriented operations for each column of the table If the matrix attribute is off serial functions of the Window are performed only on the first column If the matrix attribute is on serial functions of the Window are performed on each column in the Window with the columns of the resultant Window being the result of applying the serial function to each column of the source Window The following functions default to setmatrix ON RAVEL READTABLE OUTERPROD The following functions default to setmatrix OFF OVERPLOT OVERLAY XY ERRORBAR RAVEL READTABLE OVERPLOT OVERLAY SETNAVALUE Purpose Format Returns Example 674 Replaces the NA values in a Window with user defined input SETNAVALUE series value series Optional Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table Defaults to the current Window value A scalar value that replaces all NAs in the specified Window A series or table W1 3 5 5 0 6 7 navalue 4 0 8 0 setnavalue Wl 0 sets all NA values in W1 to 0 0 resulting in the ser
477. osition of a matrix Calculate the trace of an array the sum of the diagonal elements Transpose a matrix Return the lower triangle of a matrix Return the upper triangle of a matrix Upper triangular matrix in LU decomposition Return the upper triangle of a matrix including the main diagonal Return the upper triangle of a matrix excluding the main diagonal Compute the SCHUR form of an input matrix Menu Functions ECHO GETSTRING HELP HELPFILE INPUT MENUCLEAR MENUFILE MENULIST MENUPRINT MESSAGE MESSAGELOG PICKFILE PICKLIST PICKUNITS VIEWFILE Print text at the bottom of the screen Prompt for textual input via input panel with OK and Cancel buttons Accesse the on line help file dspfun hlp Accesse on line help files Allow the user to input values to functions Clear menus from the screen Generate a pop up menu at the worksheet level Display a specified menu from the screen Send menu text to file Display a message box with an OK button and or a Cancel button Write status line messages to text file Use a native GUI dialog box to select a file Display a list and returns the item selected by the user Select units from a pop up list Display ASCII text file Numerical Formatting SETDEGREE SETFORMAT SETPRECISION SETRADIAN Change mode of trigonometric functions to degrees Set display type for numerical values Set number of significant digits after the decimal point to display Change mode of trigo
478. osized Remarks See Also SETX Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also The size is specified in terms of a normal coordinate system where 0 0 0 0 is the upper left corner of the Worksheet and 1 0 1 0 is the lower right corner COLLAYOUT GETWSIZE LAYOUT MOVEWIN ROWLAYOUT Specifies the x axis coordinate range of a Window SETX Window xleft xright Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window xleft Areal Left hand Window boundary xright Areal Right hand Window boundary setx 10 0 11 0 sets the left hand side of the Window to 10 0 and the right hand side to 11 0 setx 0 0 100 deltax configures the Window to display the first 100 points of the current series SETX will expand or compress the current units scale To refresh the Window and redraw appropriate scales toggle the F5 key or Scales toolbar button GETXL GETXR GETYT GETYB SETXY SETY 697 SETXLABEL SETYLABEL Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also SETXLOG Purpose 698 Sets the x axis or y axis label independently of Units SETXLABEL Window label SETYLABEL Window label Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window label A string the axis label in quotes setxlabel Variability Total sets the x axis label in the current Window to display Variability Total Horizontal and Vertical units have a 15 character max
479. othing The colormap is saved to a global variable and automatically restored when the Worksheet is loaded W1 spline2 rand 10 4 setplottype 3 rainbow savecmap creates a density plot in W1 by interpolating a grid of 10x10 random values The image is shaded with the RAINBOW colormap and the colormap is saved with the Worksheet When the Worksheet is reloaded the RAINBOW colormap is automatically restored SAVECMAP uses RESETMAP to restore the colormap If set the color range as specified by SETCRANGE is also restored GETCOLORMAP RESETMAP SETCOLORMAP SETCRANGE SAVESERIES Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Saves a series or list of series to a list of series names SAVESERIES W 1 Wn ser1 serN overwrite W1 Wn Optional A list of Windows with series to save Defaults to the current Window serl serN List of series names to save in quotes Must have the format dataset version series overwrite Optional An integer overwrite flag 1 overwrite existing saved series 0 Do not overwrite Defaults to 0 saveseries MYSERIES 1 SERIES saves the series in the current Window to MYSERIES 1 SERIES saveseries W1 W4 W5 D 1 S1 D 1 82 D 1 S83 saves the series in W1 W4 WS to D 1 S1 D 1 S2 and D 1 S3 respectively saveseries W1 W4 D 1 S1 D 1 S2 D 1 83 D 1 S4 1 saves the series in W1 through W4 and automatically overwrites the previous se
480. ourl www dadisp com Opens the Web browser and loads the www dadisp com homepage GOTOURL uses the current running browser if available else it starts the browser as specified by the system RUN 343 GOTOWINDOW Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also GRADE Purpose Format Returns Example 344 Moves the Worksheet cursor to the specified Window GOTOWINDOW Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window gotowindow W3 moves the Worksheet cursor to Window 3 Unlike MOVETO GOTOWINDOW can move to hidden Windows MOVETO POPWINDOW Ranks the indices of a series in ascending or descending order GRADE series order series Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table order An integer 0 descending order 1 ascending order Defaults to 0 Series that contains the indices i e sample numbers of the sorted input series W1 6 2 4 1 8 W2 grade W1 returns athe series 5 1 3 2 4 the indices of W1 in descending order See Also LOOKUP REORDER SORT GRADIENT Purpose Calculates the 2D derivative of an array Format GRADIENT array array A multi column series Returns An array Example x y fxyvals 2 2 1 2 2 1 Z cos x y g gradient z calculates the surface derivative of cos x y W1 plot3d g W2 plot3d z shadewith W1 shades the original surface with its gra
481. ouserotate activates the mouse driven rotation of the plot To select the axis of rotation keep the left mouse button pressed while moving the mouse across the desired axis Once selected the XYZ axes will rotate as the mouse is dragged and the left button remains pressed To redraw the graph release the left button To quit the mouse rotation press Esc or press the right mouse button MOUSEROTATE can be abbreviated MOUSEROT PLOT3D ROTATE3D RTSPIN SPIN MOVAVG Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Smooths a series or table by averaging around each point MOVAVG series points rampflag series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table points Number of points to average as the series is processed rampflag Optional An integer 0 down 1 up Defaults to 1 A series or table movavg 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 returns the series 4 0 3 5 3 2 1 67 2 3 3 5 4 movavg 4 3 2 1 2 3 4 3 0 returns the series 1 33 2 33 3 0 2 0 1 67 2 3 2 33 In particular movavg S 3 returns the series SE1J 1 S01d S 21 2 S 1I S 21 S 3 3 S02I S 3I S 4 3 S n 2 S n 1 S n 3 S n 1 S n 2 S n 1 Works on Real and Complex series Output series is longer than original one by the number of points averaged minus 1 This causes a phase shift in the screen display MOVAVG pads the series with zeros at the beginning and end be
482. output columns is limited to the RANK of the input array NORM NULL RANK SVD OUTARGC Purpose Format Returns Example 540 Returns the number of output arguments expected by the current multi value assignment of an SPL function OUTARGC An integer Consider my function defined as follows myfunction x if outarge gt 1 return x X x else return x Remarks See Also a b myfunction 10 assigns a the value 10 and b the value 100 a myfunction 10 only assigns a The parentheses s are required for multi value assignments Ifa function returns N values but only N P variables are supplied on the left hand side of the assignment the remaining return values are discarded Likewise if a function returns N values and N P assignment variables are supplied only N assignments occur This allows multi value functions to be more efficient by testing whether a particular return value even needs to be calculated ARGCOUNT OUTERPROD Purpose Format Returns Example Computes the outerproduct of two series OUTERPROD series1 series2 op series Any series or expression evaluating to a series series2 Any series or expression evaluating to a series i i op Binary operator in quotes A table with as many rows as series and as many columns as series2 outerprod 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 returns the following array 2 4 8 16
483. p 299 wait for command file to finish While DADiSP Execute ComfileStatus Wend The While statement effective pauses the Visual Basic program until the execution of the DADiSP command file is completed 115 See Also LOAD COMMAND FILE FUNCTIONS Purpose Special functions used in command files Function BEEP CALL HIGHLIGHT_MESSAGE LOAD MESSAGE PAUSE PRINT_SCREEN SUSPEND SUSPEND_NOPASS UNPOP WAIT WAITKEY RETURN See Also COMMAND FILE KEYSTROKES Description Causes your computer to emit an audible beep Executes another command file a specified number of times Displays a line message in reverse video Loads a command file Displays a message in normal video Forces a timed pause in command file execution unless a key is pressed Sends a screen dump to the default printer Allows user input in a running command file Last key pressed is passed to DADiSP Allows user input in a running command file Last key pressed is not passed to DADiSP Clears a specified pop up box from the screen Forces a timed pause in command file execution regardless of any keystrokes Halts command file processing until a key is pressed Returns control Discussion of Command Files in DADISP Worksheet Manual 116 COMMAND FILE KEYSTROKES Purpose Special characters to represent non standard keystrokes in command files Keystrokes BACK_SPACE CNTL_DN CNTL_
484. pans from coordinates 0 09 0 04 to 0 9 0 5 The following lines accomplish the same result gtri 100 0 01 2 addwform lineann purple 2 1 1 0 09 0 04 0 9 0 5 pon In general the newer LINEDRAW function replaces LINEANN To use LINEANN from the command line you must enclose a call to LINEANN ina string passed tt ADDWFORM manually or append it to the current Window formula See Also This adds the command to the Window formula You must then call PON to see the effect Because it is a plottime function LINEANN is reevaluated on every redraw To use the default value for any integer parameter from target to focus use 1 as the argument to LINEANN All polylines created with a single call to LINEANN or LINECUR are displayed in the same color Specify the color explicitly for a polyline by using the color argument or by supplying an overplot index number The overplot index match lets you associate a polyline annotation with a specific overplot by guaranteeing that the polyline color will be the same as the overplot color When setting an index match use 1 to refer to the color of your primary series use 2 to refer to the color of your first overplot 3 for your second overplot etc The rules for determining the drawing color used for LINEANN or LINECUR follow If a color is supplied as the first argument that color will be used to draw all polylines If 1 is specified as the first argument DAD
485. pear You may then enter lines of text at the command line Each newly entered text line immediately follows the most recently completed text line on the screen as the next row of the text block Pressing RETURN ends editing of the current line At this point you can position the cursor anywhere else in the Window and continue to input blocks of text Or you can press the right mouse button or ESC to complete your text editing Pressing the right mouse button pressing ESC or moving the crosshair cursor completes the previous text block To evaluate functions or macros and have their scalar or string return value s displayed as a text annotation surround the function name by curly braces For example max evaluates max and displays the maximum value of the current series in the text annotation To erase single lines of text while in the input mode use CTRL X use TEXTDEL to erase blocks of text TEXTCUR does not work in an empty Window Use SETPRECISION to control display of numeric values returned from DADiSP functions that you have embedded in text 775 See Also TEXTDEL Purpose Format Remarks See Also TEXTEDIT Purpose Format 776 LEGCUR TEXT TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE Deletes a block of text created with TEXT or TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTDEL surrounds each text block in a Window with four handles one at each corner Position the mouse cursor over your text block and press t
486. pears at least one digit appears before it The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits Precision specifies the maximum number of significant digits printed If specified as 0 is treated as 1 Precision specifies the maximum number of characters to be printed Type is a required character that determines whether the associated argument is interpreted as a character string or a number Unsigned decimal integer Unsigned hex integer using abcdef or ABCDEF Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits Identical to the e format except that E rather than e Signed value printed in f or e format whichever is more compact or the given value and precision The e format is used only when the exponent of the value is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision argument Trailing zeros are truncated and the decimal point appears only if one or more digits Identical to the g format except that G rather than g Type Characters Output Format d I Signed decimal integer u O x X f digits e and sign is or E introduces the exponent 8 follow it G introduces the exponent c Single character s String Characters printed up to the first null character or until the precision value is reached 73
487. play Print Worksheet as displayed Print a snapshot of the screen Create PostScript file of current window Create PostScript file of all windows Create PostScript file of the Worksheet as displayed Select Worksheet elements to be visible or hidden in display Return the indices for each column of the input table Return a row of indices for the maximums of each column of the input table Return a row of indices for the minimums of each column of the input table Return X and Y value of the maximum of a series Return X and Y value of the minimum of a series Return X and Y values of a series from a specified Y value Find and go to maximum of series Find and go to minimum of series Find first peak Find next peak Find previous peak Find first valley Find next valley FVALLP GETPEAK GETPT GETVALLEY LEVELCROSS MAX MAXIDX MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINIDX MINLOC MINVAL REALMAX REALMIN VMAX VMIN Plot Attributes CLEARXLABEL CLEARYLABEL GETPLOTSTYLE GETPLOTTYPE GRIDCOLOR GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL GRIDV INHSERSTYLE INHWINSTYLE PLOTMODE SCALES SCALES SCALESOFF SCALESON SCROLLD SCROLLL SCROLLR Find previous valley Find peaks of series Display value of nth point Find valleys of series Determine where series crosses level Find maximum of series Find the index of the maximum value of a series Find the location of the maximum value of a series Return the maximum of one or two input
488. played in bar chart format W1 W2 W3 W4 grand 10000 1 gnorm 10000 1 histogram wl 30 histogram w2 30 grand 10000 1 0 24 T T T T T T 0 2000 4000 6000 histogram w1 30 T T 8000 T 400 300 5 200 100 100 T T T T T T 1200 1000 800 600 4004 200 5 200 gnorm 10000 1 ji T T 0 2000 T T T 6000 T T T T 4000 8000 histogram w2 30 W3 and W4 graphically demonstrate the distributions of uniform random noise and normally distributed random noise For display purposes the number of bins should be a fairly small number The histogram is displayed as a bar chart HISTOGRAM can be abbreviated HIST 369 See Also AMPDIST HOT Purpose Generates a colormap of black red yellow white Format HOT len len Optional An integer the colormap length Defaults to the length of the current colormap Returns A table of RGB triples suitable for the SETCOLORMAP function Example clen length getcolormap density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen hot density ravel rep 0 clen 1 32 clen hot 250 4 200 4 150 5 100 4 50 4 0 1000 2000 3000 4000 5000 6000 7000 8000 creates a table of 32 x N where N colormap length RBG values and displays the resulting colors The resulting image is a vertical plot of colors ranging from black lowest to r
489. plished using the SaveAs ActiveX method of Microsoft Word The resulting HTML file can be displayed with any Web Browser WS2HTM requires MS Word CREATEOBJECT MSWORD MSWORD2 Returns x value for a given density function and confidence level XCONF pdens c interp pdens A series The probability density function or histogram series c Areal The confidence level or percentile 0 0 lt c lt 1 0 interp Optional An integer the interpolation flag Linearly interpolate x value 0 No 1 Yes Defaults to 1 Returns Example Remarks See Also XCORR Purpose Format Returns A real W1 gnorm 10000 1 10 W2 histogram W1 1000 xconf W2 0 5 returns 10 022808 the approximate mean of the original series The input density function or histogram is automatically normalized between 0 and 1 XCOMF returns NA if the confidence level is out of range Unless specified XCONF automatically performs linear interpolation to find the best X value for a given confidence level if an exact match is not found CONFX FIND GNORMAL GRANDOM INTEG Calculates the cross correlation using the convolution method XCORR s1 s2 norm s1 An input series s2 An input series norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series 831 Example Remarks 832 W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gsin 1000
490. presented by the time string Example todstr 12 00 00 returns 43200 Remarks A value of 0 seconds represents midnight Since the total number of seconds in a day is 86400 todstr 12 00 00 is 43200 or noon Use TODMSECSTR to handle milliseconds Use STRTOD to convert seconds into a time string See Also STRJUL STRTOD STRTODMSEC TODMECSTR Purpose Converts a string to lower case Format TOLOWER string string Any string expression Returns A string Example tolower MYFILE DAT returns myfile dat See Also 782 TOUPPER TOOLBAR Purpose Edits the properties of a DADiSP toolbar Format TOOLBAR which_toolbar which_button method fg bg action_key label command message which_toolbar An integer Valid arguments are 1 Main Worksheet toolbar 2 Activated Window toolbar 3 Data cursor toolbar which_button An integer The location counted from left starting from 1 Set to 1 to place a button as the last button on the toolbar method An integer This is the method for rendering the buttons on the screen Valid arguments are 1 BIT MAPPED Button is rendered using either its pre installed bitmap or the label 2 DRAWN Button is rendered using its pre installed drawn figure 4 WRITTEN Button is a string supplied by label 8 NONE The button is removed from the screen fg bg Optional An integer Foreground and background colors Color mapping var
491. produces a 91x91 array of interpolated values plotted as a density image plot The interpolated result from SPLINE2 always passes through the original data points See INTERP2 for 2D linear interpolation See IGRID to interpolate irregular XYZ data to a uniform grid CONTOUR IGRID INTERPOLATE INTERP2 PLOT3D RAVEL SPLINE WATERFALL Compiles and reads an external SPL file into the Worksheet SPLLOAD filename overwrite expand verbose filename String The filename of the SPL file in quotes or a string variable Function form overwrite Optional An integer 0 do not replace macro of same name 1 replace macro if it exists Defaults to 1 expand Optional An integer 0 do not include source code in the OPL file 1 include source code Defaults to 1 Optional An integer 0 do not provide error messages 1 display compile errors Defaults to 1 verbose Example Remarks See Also SPLLOAD filename filename The name of the external SPL file without quotes Command form splload splfiles testdata spl compiles and reads the testdata sp1 file from the sp1 files subdirectory The OPL file contains the source code and a macro by the same name is replaced if it exists splload splfiles testdata spl Same as above but expressed in the easier to type command form An SPL file is a simple ASCH text file you can create with any text editor The file contains SPL functions which you can use
492. quency in Hertz p Optional A real the phase in radians Defaults to 0 0 rt Optional A real the rise time in seconds Defaults to 0 1 A series 355 Example grtsqr 100 01 3 0 04 generates 100 points of a 3 Hz squarewave with a rise time of 0 04 seconds grtsar 100 01 3 0 04 0 8 0 6 4 0 44 0 24 0 2 mil T T T T T T T T T Remarks Filters an ideal squarewave with a single pole lowpass analog filter to produce a squarewave with a specified rise time The rise time is defined as the time required for a step to go from 10 to 90 of final value The desired rise time t specifies the low pass cutoff frequency of the filter as follows Fo 2 2 2nt The squarewave is normalized with an amplitude of 0 0 to 1 0 Volts The single pole analog lowpass filter is implemented in the digital domain using the impulse invariance technique See Also IIR SLP 356 GSERIES Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GSQRT Purpose Generates a Real series from the specific values GSERIES val1 val2 valn valn Areal or complex integer or scalar A series gseries 0 0 0 1 1 1 generates a 3 point square wave delayed by 3 points gser 1 1 2i 3 returns 1 07 1 21 3 0i i e a complex series gser 1 2 3 returns 1 2 3 i e areal series Delta x is fixed at 1 0 Use SETDELTAX to change the spa
493. r series or table lt expr2 gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Returns Example Remarks If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer Integer yields an Integer Integer Real yields a Real Integer Series yields a Series Real Complex yields a Complex Real Series yields a Series Complex Real Series yields a Complex Series 128 13 29 displays the real result 141 29 W1 1 2 0 4 5 4 W1 multiplies each element of the series by a factor of four and produces the new series 4 8 0 16 20 3 1 8 displays the complex result 5 844884 4 246557i 12 5 returns 2 the remainder when 12 is divided by 5 The right divide operator performs division such that a b b 1 a For example 10 5 5 1 10 0 5 A division by zero produces a default value of 0 This default value can be specified with the DEFAULT_MATH_VALUE configuration parameter The operator can return a complex result if the first expression is negative and the second expression has a non zero fractional part See Matrix Multiply to perform matrix multiplication See Matrix Power to raise a matrix to a power See Matrix Solve for solve a system of equations See Matrix Right Division to perform matrix right division See Matrix Transpose to transpose a matrix amp amp
494. r LINEANN are displayed in the same color You may specify the color explicitly for a polyline by using the color argument or by supplying an overplot index number i Using an overplot index lets you associate a polyline annotation with a specific overplot by guaranteeing that the polyline color will be the same as the overplot color When setting an index 7 use 1 to refer to the color of your primary series use 2 to refer to the color of your first overplot 3 for your second overplot etc The rules for determining the drawing color used for LINECUR or LINEANN follow Ifa color is supplied as the first argument that color will be used to draw all polylines If 1 is specified as the first argument DADiSP checks the overplot index i the fourth argument If an overplot index is specified DADiSP draws all polylines using the color that corresponds to the index If the color argument is 1 and the overplot index is 1 or omitted DADiSP draws the polylines using the color of the primary series LINEANN LINECOPY LINEDEL LINEDRAW LINEMOVE Deletes polylines created with LINEANN or LINECUR 44 Format Remarks See Also LINEDEL LINEDEL puts handles at each polyline point You can delete any line either by crossing it with the mouse cursor while holding down the left mouse button or by placing the mouse cursor anywhere on the line and then clicking the left mouse button LINEANN LINECOPY LINECUR LINEDRAW LINE
495. r W1 W2 returns a series or table with zeros at points where both W1 and W2 contain a zero and ones where either W1 and W2 have nonzero values ort 2555 Thy 0 returns a series 0 1 1 1 OR can also be performed using the infix operator The function or W1 W2 is identical to the expression W1 W2 See Also ORTH Purpose Format Returns Example lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators AND FLIPFLOP NOT XOR Computes an orthonormal basis of an array using SVD ORTH a a An input array An orthonormal array of n columns where n rank a W1 1 3 Lae sok 3 1h W2 orth W1 W2 0 666667 0 447214 0 666667 0 000000 0 333333 0 894427 Since W2 is an orthonormal basis for W1 col w2 1 col w2 1 returns 1 i e orthonormal col w2 1 col w2 2 returns 1 665335E 016 i e orthogonal w2 w2 returns 1 0 i e identity 0 1 Now construct a new series that is a linear combination of the original series W3 2 col wl 1 5 col wl 2 returns 13 6 11 539 Remarks See Also W3 can also be expressed as a linear combination of W2 the orthonormal basis a w3 col w2 1 a2 w3 col w2 2 W4 al col w2 1 a2 col w2 1 al 9 0 a2 15 652476 W4 13 6 11 ORTH uses SVD to compute the orthonormal basis The number of
496. r XYZ data MAXIDX returns the index in unraveled form such that zEmaxidx z max z See MAXLOC to obtain the location of the maximum See COLMAXIDX to find the indices of the maximums for each column of a table 479 See Also COLMAX COLMAXIDX COLMINIDX FIND FMAX FMIN MAX MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINIDX MAXLOC Purpose Finds the location of the maximum value of a series Format x y z MAXLOC series series Any series or expression resulting in a series Returns One or more scalars Example W2 gsin 100 01 maxloc W2 returns 0 25 the x location of the maximum mx my maxloc w2 mx 0 25 my max W2 1 0 mx returns the x location of the maximum while my returns the y location of the maximum Remarks See MAXIDX to obtain the index of the maximum 480 See Also COLMAX FIND FMAX FMIN MAX MAXIDX MAXVAL MIN MINLOC Purpose Returns the maximum of one or two input arguments Format MAXVAL val1 val2 vall A series or numeric argument val2 A series or numeric argument Returns A real or series Example maxval 10 20 returns 20 maxval l 2 3 0 4 2 returns the series 1 4 3 Lettls 2p Ste Ady Sy Obs tle 8 Ot 2 maxval W1 2 7 8 9 the maximums of each column of W1 Remarks MAXVAL with no input arguments uses the current Window 48 See Also MDIV Purpose Format Returns Example 482 The built in MAX fun
497. r appears numeric Although SETCONF overrides settings contained in the dadisp cnf configuration file it does not alter dadisp cnf in any way dadisp cnf configuration file GETCONF SETCRANGE Purpose Format Returns Example 664 Sets color shading to a specific range SETCRANGE loval hival loval Areal the lowest shade value hival A real the highest shade value Nothing x y fxyvals 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 W1 cos x y setplotstyle 0 setplottype 4 setcrange 0 5 2 W2 W1l rainbow W3 2 W1l rainbow W1 cos x y setplotstyle O W2 W1 rainbow W3 2 W1 rainbow W2 and W3 contain a shaded 3D surfaces The color range is scaled to Z values from 0 5 to 2 0 The surface in W2 shows the portion of the color map that corresponds to the Z values of W2 Since the Z values of W3 are different from W2 a different set of colors is displayed Remarks See Also SETDATE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also By default a surface is shaded such that all the colors of a color map are used SETCRANGE sets a restricted range of colors to be mapped such that the same Z values of different surfaces are mapped to the same color Use setcrange no arguments to remove the color range See GETCRANGE to return the color range COLORBAR COOL GETCOLORMAP GETCRANGE HOT RAINBOW SETCOLORMAP SETSHADING Sets the date for a series SETDATE Window date Window Op
498. r table W1 gsin 256 1 256 1 0 W2 dft W1 W3 fft W1 The DFT and FFT functions produce the same results The FFT will compute the answer much faster than the DFT since the number of points 256 is a power of 2 The DFT returns the same result as an FFT Although the DFT is a more straightforward method than the FFT for calculating the Discrete Fourier Transform it is also a much slower algorithm FFT IDFT SPECTRUM Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 201 DIAGONAL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 202 Computes a matrix diagonal DIAGONAL series n series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table n Optional Defaults to 0 Integer specifying diagonal number Valid arguments are 0 Main diagonal default gt 0 Above main diagonal lt 0 Below main diagonal A series or table Wl 1 2 3 W2 diagonal W1 returns 1 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 3 W3 diag W2 returns 1 2 3 W4 diag W2 1 returns 0 0 diagonal series returns a square matrix where the diagonal of the resulting matrix has the same values as the input series diagonal matrix n returns a single column series where the values are the diagonal of the input matrix n specifies the optional diagonal number
499. r triangular matrix use Ju matrix 0 0 LU MMULT ULU Calculates the natural logarithm of the specified expression LN expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table 449 Example Remarks See Also LOAD Purpose Format Example Remarks 450 In W2 creates a new series from the contents of Window 2 and places the result in the current Window The value of each point in the new series will be the natural logarithm base e of the corresponding point in Window 2 1n 1 returns 0 the natural log of 1 LN and LOG are identical See LOG10 for log base 10 LOG LOG10 Loads and executes a command file directly from a Worksheet LOAD filename filename Name of the command file to load in quotes load mycfile dsp loads and executes the command file MYCFILE DSP The specified command file will be loaded into the current Worksheet Be sure your command file is meant to run in an open Worksheet Within a command file use CALL and LOAD to CALL or LOAD other sub command files in order to have control returned to the originating command file after the execution of the sub command file To create a conditional split in the original command file use CALL or LOAD as they do not return to the command file in progress For example in the originating command file include a statement such as if length W1 gt 600 load x dsp
500. r two expressions 477 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 478 MAX series val idx MAX series MAX expr1 expr2 series Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window expri Any integer real or series expression expr2 Any integer real or series expression A scalar MAX expr1 expr2 can return a series val idx MAX series returns both the maximum value and the index of the maximum W1 gsin 100 01 max W1 returns 1 0 v idx max W1 v 1 0 idx 26 ax 10 20 returns 20 ax 2 3 4 3 returns the series 3 3 4 ax l 2 3 0 4 2 returns the series 1 4 3 COLMAX can be used to find the maximums of array columns See VMAX to compare more than two expressions See MAXLOC to obtain the location of the maximum COLMAX COLMAXIDX COLMINIDX FIND FMAX FMIN See Also MAXIDX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks MAXIDX MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINIDX Finds the index of the maximum value of a series MAXIDX series series Any series or expression resulting in a series An integer W2 gsin 100 01 maxidx W2 returns 26 the index of the location of the maximum W2Emaxidx w2 max W2 1 0 verifies that maxidx returns the index of the maximum x y fxyvals 2 2 1 2 2 1 z sin x y mi maxidx z mi 296 z mi max z 0 999942 For tabular o
501. ration eliminates conflicts between local variables and functions or macros SETLOCALVARIABLE Displays current SPL local variables LOCALS Displays local variables at the current call depth Example Remarks Assume the following two SPL routines mycall x local y y x x y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y Now consider the following debugger session dbstop myfunc dbcont ycall 10 dbstack locals dbup locals A breakpoint is set the routine myfunc and the function mycall is executed Since mycall calls myfunc the debugger stops in myfunc DBSTACK shows the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 At this point the LOCALS command shows that the local variable x is set to 20 the value set by the calling mycall function The DBUP command moves up the call stack to the mycall function Now the LOCALS command shows x has the value 10 the value specified when mycall was executed Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached 455 See Also LOG Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 456 DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP D
502. rator is equivalent to transpose For example a transpose b a b are equivalent Matrix Multiply Matrix Solve Macros in matrix mac MMULT RAVEL Integrates using the trapezoidal rule TRAPZ series series An input series A series Example Remarks See Also TREND Purpose Format Returns Example Wl 0 2 4 6 8 10 W2 integ W1 W3 trapz W1 3 963 1620 252 3 5 OOS TOO 25 50 W2 0 0 1 3 4 0 0 0 4 0 W3 0 W2 contains the integrated series using Simpson s rule W3 contains the integrated series using the Trapezoidal rule For series S the trapezoidal rule calculates the running sum of deltax S i 1 S i 2 INTEG Fits a line to a series TREND series series An input series A series W1 integ gnorm 1000 1 W2 trend W1 overp W1 lred W2 contains the least squares best linear fit of the data The resulting line is plotted with the original data W3 xy W1 deriv W1 W4 trend W3 overp W3 lred W4 contains the best linear fit to the XY data in W3 787 Remarks fit coeff trend s returns both the resulting fit and the linear coefficients a0 al of the equation y a0 al x See Also INTERPOLATE LFIT PFIT POLYFIT POLYGRAPH TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS Purpose Calculates the trigonometric functions of a Window Format FUNCTION expr expr Any expression evaluating to
503. ray 631 See Also Applies the REDUCE function to each row of a table COLNOS LOTRI LOTRIX UPTRI UPTRIX ROWREDUCE Purpose Format ROWREDUCE table op opcode table Any table or expression evaluating to a table op Optional A string the binary operator in quotes opcode Optional An integer the binary operator function code The following 632 g a OOMONDOARWNDN function codes are supported Operator FLIPFLOP ATAN2 amp lt lt gt gt BITOR Function ADD SUB MULT DIV ADD GREATER LESS GREATEREQ LESSEQ EQUAL NOTEQUAL AND OR XOR FLIPFLOP ATAN2 BITAND BITLSHIFT BITRSHIFT BITOR MOD Description add subtract multiply divide raise to power greater than less than greater or equal to less or equal to equal to not equal to logical and logical or logical exclusive or dual pad flip flop inverse tangent bit and bit shift left bit shift right bit or modulo Returns Example Remarks See Also Code Operator Function 22 BITXOR BITXOR 23 BITCOMP 24 MAKECART MAKECART 25 MAKEPOLAR MAKEPOLAR 26 MAX MAX 27 MIN MIN Table with one column and as many rows as the input table W1 W2 W2 W3 W3 l 2 2 3 135 4 rowreduce Wl A 2 6 12 rowreduce Wl1 3 n 2 6 12 Description bit exclusive or bit complement convert to cartesian convert to polar maximum minim
504. re 0 autoscale off 1 autoscale on default Nothing Example Remarks See Also W1 gsin 1000 1 1000 4 ascale 0 turns off autoscaling in W1 ascale Wl1 1 turns on autoscaling for W1 ASCALE is useful for data in real time Windows RTTINIT AUTOCOR Purpose Format Returns Expansion Example Macro Performs a time domain auto correlation of a series AUTOCOR series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table CONV S REVERSE S 2 SERSIZE S W1 gsin 128 1 128 4 0 W2 autocor W1 calculates the auto correlation of a sine wave W1 grand 128 1 128 W2 autocor W1 calculates the auto correlation of the random series 51 Remarks See Also AVGFILT Purpose Format Returns 52 AUTOCOR is often used to indicate how similar a waveform is to itself The auto correlation of the above sine wave shows several distinct peaks indicating that the series at time t is similar to the series at time t T The auto correlation of the random series shows only one distinct peak indicating that the series is correlated at time 0 as are all series and dissimilar elsewhere Use ACORR to specify normalization factors ACORR ACOV CONV CROSSCOR FACORR FFT PEARSON Filters a series using the average of the N neighboring points AVGFILT s n gval Ival Ss An input series or array n Optional
505. re defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP 818 Example Remarks See Also wincolor green blue sets the current Window s series color to blue and background Window color to green wincolor lred changes the Window color to light red without altering the series color For a list of supported colors use the MACROS function GETWCOLOR SERCOLOR SETCOLOR WINFUNC Purpose Format Returns Multiplies a series with a spectral window WINFUNC func s ampflag func Aninteger The windowing function Valid inputs are 0 Hamming 1 Hanning 2 Rectangular 3 Kaiser s A series or array ampflag Optional An integer 0 do not correct amplitude default 1 correct amplitude 2 correct RMS amplitude A series or array 819 Example Remarks See Also W1 gsin 1000 001 45 W2 spectrum winfunc 0 W1 W3 spectrum winfunc 0 W1 1 The MAX of W2 0 539 and the MAX of W3 1 0 The amplitude of the spectrum in W3 has been corrected to take into account amplitude effects of the Hamming window WINFUNC is the core routine for the Hamming Hanning and Kaiser SPL functions If fixamp 1 the correction factor is the mean of the spectral window This assures that the spectrum of a sinusoid of amplitude A has a peak of A If fixamp 2 the correction is applied as follows w winfun s rms s rms winfun s where winfun is Hamming Hanning or K
506. red and displayed as solid circles Executing the statement a rand creates a new polynomial that is automatically updated in W3 POLYROOT calculates the roots of a polynomial by finding the eigenvalues of the companion matrix for the corresponding characteristic polynomial polyroot a or polyroot a 0 finds the roots of all al2 x a 3 x 2 a N x N 1 this is the same form as POLYFIT and POLYGRAPH where the polynomial coefficients are ordered from lowest power to highest power polyroot a 1 finds the roots of a 1 x N 1 al2 x N 2 alN 1 x alN where the coefficients are ordered from highest power to lowest power PFIT POLY POLYFIT POLYGRAPH POPWINDOW Purpose Format Example 572 Zooms the specified Window POPWINDOW Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window popwindow W3 zooms Window 3 Remarks See Also POWFIT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks Unlike ZOOM POPWINDOW can zoom hidden Windows POPWINDOW also works whether the specified Window is activated or not MOVETO UNPOPWINDOW UNZOOM WINSTATUS ZOOM Fits y x A x B using linearization POWFIT s s Input series or array A series W1 10 1 100 0 5 W2 powfit wl overp wl lred overplots the original data with the calculated power fit fit coef powfit w1 fit is the same series as in W2 coef 10 0 0 5
507. ribution function See Also A2STD CNF2STD CONFX ERF GNORMAL INVPROBN PROBN RANDN XCONF 552 PEAKS Purpose Format Returns Example Generates a Gaussian function of two variables z f x y PEAKS n PEAKS x y n Optional An integer n x n output array size x Optional A real the X value y Optional A real the Y value peaks n returns an array peaks x y returns a scalar Wl peaks W2 peaks 20 W1 contains the default 49 x 49 surface W2 contains a 20 x 20 surface W2 peaks 20 roa U DERNONADO 553 peaks 1 1 returns 2 433789 the value of Z at X 1 0 Y 1 0 Remarks Peaks generates a Z surface of scaled and translated Gaussians The function of X and Y is Z 3 1 x 2 exp x 2 yt1 2 10 x 5 X y 5 exp x 2 y 2 1 3 exp x 1 2 y where the default X and Y range is 3 1 8 3 See Also FXYVALS PEARSON Purpose Calculates Pearson s Linear Correlation Coefficient Format PEARSON x y x An input series y An input series Returns A number the correlation coefficient Example 1 gsin 100 01 4 2 gsin 100 01 4 pi 3 pearso W2 returns 0 5 pearso W1 returns 1 0 pearso W1 2 returns 1 0 pearso W1 returns 1 0 554 Remarks See Also PFIT Purpose Format Returns Example Pearson returns the degree of
508. rier Transform method By default the resulting series contains 1ength s1 length s2 1 data points If start lt 0 start defaults to 1 If length lt 0 length defaults to length sl length s2 start As demonstrated by the first example convolution is equivalent to polynomial multiplication where the terms of the polynomials are arranged in descending powers 129 See Also AUTOCOR CONV2D CROSSCOR DECONV FCONV FDECONV FFT References Oppenheim and Schafer Digital Signal Processing Prentice Hall 1975 Digital Signal Processing Committee Programs for Digital Signal Processing LE E E Press 1979 CONV2D Purpose Convolves two matrices Format CONV2D matrix1 matrix2 row1 col1 row2 col2 matrix A matrix or expression resulting in a matrix matrix2 A matrix or expression resulting in a matrix rowl Optional The start row in matrix1 Defaults to 1 coll Optional The start column in matrix1 Defaults to 1 row2 Optional The end row in matrix1 Defaults to the number of image table TOWS col2 Optional The end column in matrix1 Defaults to the number of image table columns Returns A convolved table Example Wl 4 8 2 fle Ts OS 3 2 23 130 Remarks See Also References COOL Purpose Format W2 contains a filter kernel table W2 1 3 3 2 conv2d W1l W2 4 20 26 6 13 36 28 13 6 16 19 12 9 12 10 4 conv2d W1 W2 2 2
509. ries info Optional An integer 0 OFF the line is plotted immediately 1 ON the line s slope y intercept and standard error are displayed in an info window and after the OK button is pressed the line is plotted Defaults to 0 W1 gsin 25 01 W2 linreg2 3 W1 1 W1 1 displays y 3 000x 1 000 Standard error 0 0 and after the OK button is pressed plots the line that best fits the data linreg2 3 W1 1 W1 plots the line that best fits the data immediately Argument order affects line generated The length of the shorter series determines number of points to be used and the length of the generated line See PFIT to fit a polynomial with error statistics See Also LINSCALE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also LINREG PFIT POLYFIT POLYGRAPH Linearly rescales an input series LINSCALE xi xl xh yl yh clipflag xi An input series or scalar xl Areal The low value input range xh Areal The high value input range yl Areal The low value output range yh Areal The high value output range clipflag Optional An integer Defaults to 1 Valid inputs are 1 clip input to xl and xh default 0 do not clip A series or real linscale 10 0 100 1 1 returns 0 8 the corresponding output for an input value of 10 0 on a 0 to 100 input range and a corresponding 1 0 to 1 0 output range linscale 0 100 0 0 100 5 5 returns
510. ries if they exist If a specified series name already exists SAVESERIES by default prompts the user for overwrite permission SAVESERIES also accepts an optional overwrite flag to automatically overwrite existing Datasets without prompting The Dataset and Series names are case sensitive Use COPYSERIES to copy individual series from different Labbooks COPYSERIES LOADDATASET LOADSERIES 643 SAVEWORKSHEET Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also SBYTE Purpose Format Expansion Example 644 Saves the current Worksheet in the current Labbook SAVEWORKSHEET wname wname The name of the Worksheet to save in quotes A 1 if saved correctly otherwise 0 saveworksheet runl saves the current Worksheet under the name run1 This Worksheet can be retrieved using the LOADWORKSHEET command The wname argument is case sensitive EXPORTWORKSHEET NEWWORKSHEET SAVESERIES Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying signed byte data type SBYTE writeb MYFILE SBYTE writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 8 bit signed byte point values ranging from 128 to 127 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 1 Remarks See Also SCALES Purpose Format SBYTE is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments
511. rks Returns the current Window number GETWNUM An integer If you are working in Window 2 getwnum 1 returns 1 eval sprintf deriv W4d getwnum 1 performs a derivative of Window 1 GETWNUM is useful in SPL routines and command files where the current Window number may not be obvious 323 See Also NUMWINDOWS STRWIN WINNAME GETWORKSHEETNAME Purpose Returns the current Worksheet name Format GETWORKSHEETNAME Returns A string See Also GETHOME GETLABNAME GETLABPATH GETWSIZE Purpose Returns a string containing the size of a specified Window Format GETWSIZE Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Example If W1 is 1 2 the size of the Worksheet getwsize Wl returns the following string setwsize 0 0 1 0 5 324 Remarks The string returned contains the SETWSIZE command which you can use to set the Window to the current size The size is specified in terms of a normal coordinate system where 0 0 0 0 represents the upper left corner of the Worksheet and 1 0 1 0 represents the lower right corner of the Worksheet See Also MOVEWIN SETWSIZE GETXL Purpose Returns the leftmost x coordinate in a Window Format GETXL Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Returns A real number Example setx 2 getxl 2 getxr doubles the x range See Also GETXR GETYB GETYT SETX SETXY SET
512. rksheet If not specified defaults to the configuration parameter NUM_DEFAULT_WINDOWS verify Optional An integer 1 default ask to save the current Worksheet if changed 0 do not ask or save the current Worksheet 1 if Worksheet created 0 if error Example newworksheet 2 creates a two Window Worksheet and prompts to save the current Worksheet if it has changed See Also REMOVEWINDOW SAVEWORKSHEET NEXTPOW2 Purpose Determines the exponent for the next power of 2 greater than or equal to the input value Format NEXTPOW2 s s Areal value or a series or table Returns An integer Example nextpow2 55 returns 6 2 6 64 nextpow2 64 returns 6 2 6 64 nextpow2 100 returns 7 2 7 128 Wl 1 1024 nextpow2 wl returns 10 The length is 1024 2 10 1024 Remarks If the input is a series or table the return value is the next power of 2 greater than or equal to the length of the series 517 See Also BESTPOW2 FFT LOG2 NFORMAT Purpose Formats a list of scalars Format NFORMAT control arg1 arg2 argn control Format control string containing only scalar number field specifiers Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications The ordinary characters are copied to the output string in order of their appearance Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash
513. rm Optional An integer form of the polynomial coefficients 0 ascending powers 1 decreasing powers Defaults to 0 Returns Example A real or complex series the roots of the polynomial polyroot 0 2 1 returns 2 0 therootsof 0 2 x x 2 r polyroot l 1 1 1 r 1 618034 0 618034 r 1 phi returns 1 i e positive root of x 2 x 11s PHI the Golden Mean a rand x 10 0 01 10 W1 polyroot a 1 1 1 1 W2 xy W1 zeros length W1 1 points setsym 14 W3 a x 3 x 2 x ljoverp W2 lred W1 polyroot a 1 1 1 1 W2 xy W1 zeros length W1 1 points s 1 55 1 57 1 1 0 54 05 04 09 J 0 5 4 4 0 5 4 464 2 15 27 16 4 0 0 4 0 8 1 2 1 6 2 1 6 1 2 0 8 0 4 0 04 08 W3 a x 3 x 2 x 1 overp W2 Ired 10004 7 i 7 i i T 800 55 h ee ete ee l ee l ee te ee d a OO a3 ee FS a aie ste SR ea Fe Se ey SP Co Sancta atte eA Eh Ks ae a AOD HEE Sa Bee Race hs chy oy BP eee ES oe Ee eee SAP et i i 1 i i EL A 2004 ee ee Sete SrA ats 2004 ee ee joge a a AO tape oom enc Ha ee Neat aa eg Sali Alon Macatee anal ah gS athe eae ede gy ah paa A E E E oS E A E E EEE E E Ened E 800 4 r i r i i i 10 8 6 4 2 0 2 4 6 8 10 571 Remarks See Also W3 displays a cubic of the form a x 3 x 2 x 1 over the range 10 lt x lt 10 The roots of the cubic are overplotted in
514. rm 1000 1 W2 W1 W1 addwform W2 overplot W1 lred This example adds the overplot and sets the Window s formula to W1 W1l overplot W1 lred without re evaluating the formula W1 W1 This function is useful when editing the formula line would cause an unwanted or lengthy recalculation ADDWFORM can be abbreviated ADDWF Hot Variable Assignment ADDWFORM GETWFORMULA SETWFORM ADDWINDOW Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Adds the indicated number of Windows to the Worksheet after the current Window ADDWINDOW win n win Optional Window Reference The Window after which new windows are added Defaults to the current Window n An integer representing the number of Windows to be added to the Worksheet The total number of Windows in the Worksheet addwindow 3 adds three Windows after the current Window If Window 6 is current three Windows will be added after Window 6 addwindow W2 4 adds four Windows after Window 2 The current Window is indicated by the position of the cursor ADDWINDOW can be abbreviated ADDWIN REMOVEWINDOW ADDWKSFORM Purpose Format Adds a command to the Worksheet formula ADDWKSFORM command command A command to annotate the Worksheet background 37 Example Remarks See Also ALL Purpose Format Returns Examples 38 addwksform text 0 0 1 4 Results of Analysis redrawall puts the annotat
515. rmat whichever is more compact or the given value and precision The e format is used only when the exponent of the value is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision argument Trailing zeros are truncated and the decimal point appears only if one or more digits follow it G Identical to the g format except that G rather than g introduces the exponent A string nformat Max 4 2F Min 44 2F max min returns a string like Max 47 20 Min 22 03 NFORMAT is a variation of the SPRINTF function that is constrained to scalars See any standard C C language reference for further information SFORMAT SPRINTF Extracts a 4 bit nibble from a value NIBBLE val num bitpos val An input series or number num Optional An integer the nibble to retrieve Defaults to 1 the first four bits bitpos Optional An integer Bit position bitpos 1 then num refers to starting LSB BIT position else num refers to 4 bit nibble boundary Defaults to 0 A series or number Example Remarks See Also NMOVE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also nibble 7 16 returns 7 the value of the first 4 bits nibble 7 16 2 returns 1 the value of the second 4 bits nibble 7 1l6 2 1 returns 11 the value of the 4 bits starting at the 2nd bit where the 2nd bit is the least significant bit i e the value of bits 2 through 6 Nibble also operates on series gt gt lt lt a
516. rmula integ gnorm 1000 1 label Test Data to Window 1 just as if the formula was entered from the command line The and operators are interchangeable for Window assignments See to compare two expressions Variable Assignment Window Assignment Conditional Operators Assignment Operators SETHOTVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SETWFORM Window Assignment Purpose Format Returns 12 Assigns a formula to a Window Window lt formula gt Window A Window lt formula gt Any formula evaluating to a scalar series table or string Nothing the formula is assigned to the Window Example Remarks See Also W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 integ W1 assigns the Window formulae to W1 and W2 Use to group multiple statements for a Window assignment in an SPL routine For example setwl W1 Cinteg gnorm 1000 1 label Test Data The setwl routine assigns the formula integ gnorm 1000 1 label Test Data to Window 1 just as if the formula was entered from the command line The and operators are interchangeable for Window assignments Hot Variable Assignment Variable Assignment Conditional Operators SETHOTVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SETWFORM A Arithmetic Operators Purpose Format Add subtract multiply divide exponentiate two expressions lt expr1 gt op lt expr2 gt lt expril gt Any expression evaluating to a scala
517. rocal ratio of the argument you chose before b the EXPANDV with the same argument or c CTRL HOME when window is active The default argument accomplishes the same result as pressing CRTL DNARROW when the current Window is active See Also COMPRESSH EXPANDV EXPANDH CONCAT Purpose Concatenates any number of series or tables Format CONCAT series1 series2 seriesN seriesl seriesN Any number of series referenced by a Window number or expressions evaluating to series Returns A table or series whose length is the end to end sum of the input lengths 120 Example Remarks See Also COND Purpose Format W1 1 2 3 W2 concat W1l rev W1 W2 contains the series 1 2 3 3 2 1 concat W1 W2 W6 gcos 100 0 1 creates a new series by appending the series in Window 1 Window 2 and Window 6 and a generated cosine wave end to end concat W3 W8 concatenates the series in Windows 3 through 8 CONCAT concatenates tables on a column by column basis CONCAT operates on any number of series CONCAT operates on both Real and Complex series and returns a complex series if any of the input series are Complex See the operator to combine scalars and or series Range Specifier Array Construction EXTRACT INSERT MERGE RAVEL REPLICATE Estimates the condition number of a matrix COND a a An input array Defaults to the current series 12 Returns
518. rrent Window WINSTATUS attrib attrib Optional Integer value indicating the window attribute to query Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 Window number default 1 Active status 2 Zoomed status 3 Hidden status For attribute 0 WINSTATUS returns the current window number For attributes 1 3 WINSTATUS returns 0 or 1 In a four window worksheet with window 2 current and zoomed winstatus 2 returns a indicating the current window W2 is zoomed WINSTATUS returns a real number WINSTATUS is useful when writing code that interacts with a worksheet especially when there is no prior knowledge of the status of the worksheet GETWNUM STRWIN ZOOM Writes a series as an ASCII file directly to disk from the Worksheet without a file header as created by the EXPORT routine Format Example Remarks See Also WRITEB Purpose Format WRITEA filename series overwrite filename Name for output file in quotes If no path is given WRITEA puts the file in the current working directory series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window overwrite Optional 0 prompt before overwriting file 1 overwrite file if it exists without prompting 2 append data to the specified file Defaults to 0 writea SINETEST gsin 20 0 1 puts the generated sine wave into an ASCII text file named SINETEST without a header WRITEA is
519. rrent focus of the specified Window The commands restrict a scale on the x or y axis to the intersection of the range given by the min and max endpoints and the range covered by the plotting area of the specified Window Use SETXY to set the range full span covered by the plotting area Use the mouse to drag the curve with its scales in the plotting area or the toolbar buttons to expand contract the x and y axis span FOCUS OVERLAY SCALES SETXY STAGGERX STAGGERY SPECGRAM Purpose Format Returns 724 Calculates the 2D Spectrogram as an image SPECGRAM series len lap fftlen swin series An input series len Aninteger The segment length Defaults to 512 lap Optional An integer the overlap length Defaults to len 2 fftlen Optional An integer the length of the FFT Defaults to len swin Optional An integer the windowing function Valid arguments include 0 Hamming default 1 Hanning 2 Rectangle none 3 Kaiser A table of Amplitude values in Frequency vs Time format Example W1 gsin 300 01 20 gsin 300 01 40 gsin 300 01 30 W2 spectrum W1 W3 specgram W1 128 rainbow W1 consists of three concatenated sinusoids of 20 40 and 30 Hertz W2 shows the frequency spectrum with peaks at 20 40 and 30 Hertz W3 divides W1 into columns of 128 points that overlap by 64 points The Spectrum i e magnitude of the FFT of each column is calculated and the result is display
520. rst index found is returned COLMINIDX table 1 returns the indices in sequential unraveled order This form is useful in array reference expressions Use MINIDX to find the index of the overall minimum COLLENGTH COLMAX COLMAXIDX COLMIN FIND FMAX FMIN MAXLOC MAXVAL MIN MINIDX MINLOC COLNMOVE Purpose Format Remarks 106 Moves the column cursor position by a specified number of columns from the current cursor location COLNMOVE Window delta item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window delta An integer The number of columns to move the cursor item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a column cursor in the item Defaults to 1 If the sum of delta and the cursor is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the sum of delta and cursor is greater than the number of columns in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of columns in the item See Also COLNOS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks COLNPUT COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON Returns an array of column numbers COLNOS m m An array An array of size m W1 ones 3 W2 colnos W1 W2 l 2 3 LigAdy Sts 1 2 3 W1 zeros 3 2 W2 colnos W1 W2 1 2 diy 2h ILa c2 EF COLNOS is used by
521. rtial product y of a series x is equal to the following y 1 x 1 for i 2 ie length x i yLi x i 1 y i 1 1 1 REDUCE 547 PARTSUM Purpose Calculates the cumulative sum of a series Format PARTSUM series series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table Returns A series or table Example partsum 20 15 30 10 25 returns a new series containing the cumulative sums 20 35 65 75 100 Remarks The nth value of the output series is equal to the sum of the first n points of the input series PARTSUM calculates the cumulative sum of a series PARTSUM differs from integration in that the de tax information is not incorporated into the calculation See Also INTEG SUM PASTEDATA Purpose Copies the data from the MS Windows clipboard into a DADiSP Window Format PASTEDATA Window format Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window format Optional An integer specifying the format of data to paste Defaults 0 ASCII table or 2 Bitmap depending on what is stored in the clipboard 0 ASCII table 1 Excel Table 2 Bitmap 3 String 548 Example Remarks See Also pastedata W2 copies the data from the clipboard into W2 a pastedata 3 copies the string from the Clipboard to variable a This function can only be used with the MS Windows version of DADiSP COPYDATA PATHCHAR Purpo
522. rtical units of the primary series in a Window GETVUNITS Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A string message sprintf The units of Window 4d are s per s getwnum getvunits gethunits displays a message box with the text The units of Window 1 are Volts per Second Especially useful in custom menu and report panels When using GETVUNITS without the Window argument GETVUNITS returns the vertical units of the series in focus 319 See Also FOCUS GETHUNITS SETHUNITS SETVUNITS UNITS GETWCOLOR Purpose Format Returns Example See Also 320 Returns the color of a Window or its data series GETWCOLOR Window sernum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window sernum Optional An integer designating the series number Defaults to 0 no series An integer representing a color getwcolor returns the number corresponding to the inner Window color getwcolor W4 2 returns the number corresponding to the color of the second series in Window 4 strcolor getwcolor W4 2 returns the color name SETGCOLOR STRCOLOR WINCOLOR GETWCOUNT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Returns the number of series in a Window GETWCOUNT Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window An integer getwcount W1 returns the number of series in Window 1 If
523. s flags width precision type Flags are optional character s that control justification of output Flag Meaning Left justify Width is an optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output Precision specifies the maximum number of characters to be printed Type is a required character that specifies that the associated argument is interpreted as string 707 Returns Example Remarks See Also SGRID Purpose Format Returns 708 Type Characters Output Format s String Characters printed up to the first null character or until the precision value is reached A string sformat Comment s getcomment returns a string like Comment IBM SFORMAT is a variation of the SPRINTF function that is constrained to strings only See any standard C C language reference for further information NFORMAT SPRINTF STRCAT Grids XYZ data using spline interpolation SGRID x y z xi yi x Aseries X or horizontal range y Aseries Y or vertical range z Aseries Z or height data xi Optional A series the output X range yi Optional A series the output Y range An array Example Remarks See Also x y fxyvals 10 10 2 10 10 2 z cos x y xyz sgrid xL J YEs Ty z0 10 0 5 10 10 0 5 10 grids the function cos x y over the range 10 to 10 interpolated with an increment of 0 5 SGRID first interpolates i
524. s mycall x local y FS OG y myfunc y return y myfunc x local y y X X return y Now consider the following debugger session Q bstop myfunc bcont Q ycall 10 dbstack locals dbup locals A breakpoint is set in the routine myfunc and the function mycall is executed Since mycall calls myfunc the debugger stops in myfunc DBSTACK shows the debugger stepped through mycall at line 6 and myfunc at line 5 At this point the LOCALS command shows that the local variable x is set to 20 the value set by the calling mycall function Remarks See Also DCT Purpose Format Returns Example The DBUP command moves up the call stack to the mycall function Now the LOCALS command shows x has the value 10 the value specified when mycall was executed Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBSTATUS for information on the current breakpoint Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached DBCLEAR DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBSTOP LOCALS VARS Calculates the Discrete Cosine Transform DCT series n series An input series or array n Optional An integer the transform length Defaults to length s A series or array dct gcos 100 1 100 20 returns a series with a peak at
525. s strnum max W1 displays a pop up message 747 Remarks See Also The operator also combines strings For example String Le String 2 is equivalent to strcat Stringl String2 and yields Stringl String2 SPRINTF STRCHAR STRCHARS STREXTRACT STRFIND STRNUM STRCHAR STRCHARS Purpose Format Returns Example 748 Converts numerical input into 8 bit ASCII characters STRCHAR expr STRCHARS expr expr Any real series or expression resulting in a real or series A character or string strchar 88 displays the character X strchars 88 89 90 displays the string XYZ See Also STRCMP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks CHARSTR CHARSTRS STRCAT Compares two strings STRCMP string1 string2 caseflag string1 A string or expression returning a string string2 A string or expression returning a string caseflag Optional An integer the case sensitivity flag 0 case not significant 1 case is significant Defaults to 0 An integer Returns a negative number if string is less than string2 0 if they are the same and a positive number if string is greater than string2 stremp test testl performs a case independent comparison and returns 1 a negative number signifying the first string is less than the second stremp Hello hello performs a case independent comparison and returns 0 indicating t
526. s or table lt expr2 gt Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the same type as the higher of the two expressions 1 True 0 False Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer gt Real yields a Real Integer gt Series yields a Series Integer gt Integer yields an Integer Real gt Complex yields a Complex Real gt Series yields a Series Complex gt Real Series yields a Complex Series max W1 lt 10 0 returns a if the maximum value of W1 is less than or equal to 10 0 or 0 if the maximum value of W1 is not less than or equal to 10 0 If W1 contains a series then W1 gt 10 0 returns a series the same length as W1 containing a 1 for each observation that is greater than 10 and 0 for each observation that is less than or equal to 10 0 The returned series of ones and zeros is called a Binary Series amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators GREATER GREATEREQUAL LESSER LESSEREQUAL NOTEQUAL gt gt lt lt amp bitor Bit Operators Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Bit left shift bit right shift bit and bit complement bit or operators lt expr1 gt op lt expr2 gt lt expril gt Any expression evaluating to a sc
527. s that is W1 and W2 are equivalent A new instance of Excel is started and the data is retrieved from the current Sheet of the current Workbook The Excel connection is then terminated xlinit C my documents dsp xls Wl xlget Al C10 W1 contains the data from cells A1 through C10 from the XLS file C my documents dsp xls XLINIT closes any previous connection established by XLGET XLPUT or a previous call to XLINIT and starts a new instance of Excel Use XLGET or XLPUT without XLINIT to connect to a running instance of Excel XLCLEAR closes the connection XLCLEAR XLGET XLPUT 837 XLPUT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 838 Transfers a range of values to Excel via ActiveX Automation XLPUT rangestr value bookname sheet rangestr A string Excel input range Defaults to A1 the first cell value A series string or scalar to transfer bookname Optional A string the Excel Workbook name Defaults to empty indicating use current Workbook sheet Optional An integer or string the Excel Sheet number or sheet name Defaults to 1 the first sheet if bookname is specified else the current sheet A 1 if successful else an error W1 rand 10 3 xlput A1 C10 W1 W2 xlget A1 C10 W1 W2 is all ones that is W1 and W2 are equivalent The data is transferred to the current Sheet of the current Workbook W1 rand 10 3 xlput A1 C10 W1 Bo
528. s a debugger breakpoint DBCLEAR function DBCLEAR lineno DBCLEAR function DBCLEAR lineno function Name of the SPL routine lineno Optional An integer the line number Nothing dbstop myfunc dbcont myfunc 10 dbclear myfunc dbcont sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called and the debugger stops at the first executable line dbclear then clears the breakpoint Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can be executed once a breakpoint has been reached Both the command form dbclear function and functional form dbclear function are supported 15 See Also DBCONT DBDOWN DBQUIT DBSTACK DBSTATUS DBSTEP DBUP LOCALS VARS DBCONT Purpose Starts or continues the debugger Format DBCONT Returns Nothing Example dbstop myfunc dbcont myfunc 10 dbstop 7 dbcont sets a breakpoint in the SPL routine named myfunc and starts debugging The myfunc routine is then called and a new breakpoint is set at line 7 DBCONT continues the debugger until line 7 is reached or the routine exits Remarks Use DBCONT to start the debugging process Use DBSTEP or DBCONT to resume execution after a breakpoint has been reached Use DBQUIT to exit debugging Any DADiSP command or function can b
529. s a legend in the upper right margin of W1 gsin 100 01 setsym SQUARE 1 10 1 comment Sine NY Sinewave j P cosine Se pra Remarks The standard legend uses the comment field retrieved via GETCOMMENT to describe each item Revising the comments via SETCOMMENT or COMMENT followed by a PON will revise the standard legend All GLASS coordinates are normalized to the specified rectangular regions in the Window or Worksheet where the upper left corner is 0 0 0 0 and the lower right corner is 1 0 1 0 GLASS annotations stick to the Window like the viewfinder in a camera while PAPER annotations scroll with the data See Also COMMENT GETCOMMENT LEGCUR SETCOMMENT TEXT TEXTANN TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT TEXTMOVE 431 LENGTH Purpose Format Returns Expansion Example Remarks See Also LESSER Purpose Format 432 Macro Returns the length of a series LENGTH series series Optional Any series or expression resulting in a series Defaults to the current Window An integer SERSIZE length 4 5 6 returns 3 the length of the generated series The LENGTH Macro is a renaming of the SERSIZE Worksheet function COLLENGTH should be used with tables LENGTH of an empty Window or variable returns 0 COLLENGTH NUMEL SERSIZE SIZE Determines the lesser of two scalars LESSER expr1 expr2 expri Any e
530. s a new series by applying CEILING to each series element of Window 2 The integer value returned by CEILING is converted to a floating point value Remarks CEILING can be abbreviated CEIL Use ROUND to round the value up See Also FIX FLOOR INT ROUND Purpose Finds the ASCII code for the specified character Format CHARSTR char char Any ASCII character enclosed in quotes Returns An integer Example charstr X returns the number 88 See Also CHARSTRS STRCHAR STRCHARS Purpose Finds the ASCII codes for the specified string 82 Format CHARSTRS string string An ASCII text string enclosed in quotes Returns A series Example charstrs XYZ returns the series 88 89 90 See Also CHARSTR STRCHAR STRCHARS Purpose Returns the number of Windows that depend on a specified Window i e the number of its children Format CHILDREN Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Returns An integer Example For the following Worksheet Wl 2 4 5 W2 grand length W1 1 W3 xyplot W1 W2 children W1 returns a 2 at the bottom of the screen This indicates that W1 has two dependent Windows See Also PARENTS 83 CHKFILES Purpose Checks the file integrity of a Labbook Format CHKFILES mode mode Optional An integer 1 delete orphaned files 0 do not delete Defaults to 1 Returns Nothing Renames unreferenced Labbook files
531. s are A question mark icon OK and Cancel buttons An exclamation point icon OK and Cancel buttons An I information icon and OK button A stop sign icon and OK button A question mark icon Yes and No buttons default Yes An exclamation point icon Yes and No buttons A question mark icon Yes No and Cancel buttons An exclamation point icon and OK button 9 A question mark icon Yes and No buttons default No 10 A question mark icon Yes Yes to All No and Cancel buttons AANADNABWNKR 1 default Yes For types 1 and 2 1 OK 1 Cancel For types 3 4 and 8 1 OK For types 5 6 and 9 1 Yes 0 No For type 7 1 Yes 0 No 1 Cancel For type 10 1 Yes 2 Yes to All O No 1 Cancel message Test Message pops up a message box with an T sign 49 Remarks See Also message sprintf Max g Min g max min pops up a message box that displays the maximum and minimum of the current window To make multiple lines use the STRESCAPE function message strescape sprintf Max g n Min g max min same as above except the maximum and minimum are reported on two lines message Warning Value out of Range 4 pops up a warning message with a stop sign and a single OK button MESSAGE is useful in SPL files and Command files when automating processes ECHO PRINTF SPRINTF STRESCAPE MESSAGELOG Purpose Format 492 Writes status line messages to text file MESS
532. s from the original series in WS For complex series CLIP operates on the REAL or MAGNITUDE part only If only one threshold argument is given DADiSP assumes it is the maxthresh If no threshold arguments are given DADiSP will use the MAX and MIN values of the series as default arguments and CLIP will return an exact copy of the current series CLIP does not eliminate any points from a series although it can be used to modify the value of points in a series lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators DECIMATE DELETE MAX MIN REMOVE Returns the current execution clock in seconds CLOCK Returns Example See Also A real indicating the total number of seconds since invocation a clock fft wl b clock sprintf FFT execution time g seconds b a prints the approximate time required to calculate and display the FFT of W1 GETTIME TIC TOC CLOGMAG Purpose Format Returns Example Evaluates the log magnitude squared of Cascade form filter coefficients CLOGMAG c N r m p CLOGMAG c N r c Aseries The filter coefficients in cascade format N Optional An integer the number of output samples Defaults to 2048 r Optional A real the sample rate of the data Defaults to rate of filter A real series The log magnitude squared frequency response of the filter m p CLOGMAG c N r returns both the log magnitude squared m and the phase response p W1
533. s off grids over the series in the current Window This is equivalent to using the F6 key toggle GRIDOFF 353 Example griddash gridh displays horizontal dashed grids when a series is displayed Use gridoff to turn the grids off See Also GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDSOL GRIDV GRIDSOL Purpose Places a solid grid over the series in the current Window This is equivalent to using the F6 key toggle Format GRIDSOL Returns A solid grid in the Window display Example gridsol displays solid grids gridv displays vertical solid grids Remarks To turn grids on press the F6 key or specify horizontal grids vertical grids or both by using GRIDH GRIDV or GRIDHV respectively via the menus or command line See Also GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDV 354 GRIDV Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also GRTSQR Purpose Format Returns Sets grid orientation vertical GRIDV griddot gridv displays vertical dotted grids when a series is displayed GRIDV does not automatically set the grids to be visible GRIDV must be used in conjunction with GRIDSOL GRIDDASH GRIDDOT the menus or the F6 toggle key GRIDDASH GRIDDOT GRIDH GRIDHV GRIDOFF GRIDSOL Generates a square wave with a specified rise time GRTSQRilen dx f p rt len An integer the number of samples dx A real the sample interval f Areal the squarewave fre
534. s or expression resulting in a series Optional Window in which series is to be overlayed Defaults to the current Window Optional integer Color of overlayed series Optional integer Sync mode Defaults to 0 no sync Integer oar WDNY O Expand Expand amp Scroll X Y X amp Y X Y X amp Y 543 Example Remarks See Also W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 integ wl overlay W1 lred overlays the series in W1 onto the series in Window 2 The two series can be scrolled and scaled independently preserving their own frames of reference Each overlay in a Window has its own set of scales In order for an overlay to be updated automatically when the Window is updated it must be part of the Window formula Use UNOVERLAY to remove an overlayed series and axes FOCUS SCALES SYNC OVERPLOT UNOVERLAY UNOVERPLOT OVERPLOT Purpose Format Example 544 Overplots a series in the current or active Window OVERPLOT series color series Any series expression evaluating to a series color Optional Color of overplotted series W1 gsin 100 01 W2 wl wl overplot wl lred plots W1 on top of the series in W2 The overplotted series will be displayed in light red and plotted using the coordinates of W2 unoverplot removes all overplots and overlays in the current Window Remarks See Also PADFILT Purpose Format Returns Example All overplots in the Window are linked
535. s the sinewave minus the mean or gsin 100 0 01 Remarks DEMEAN removes the mean or DC value of your data This is useful when looking at the spectrum of your data See Also MEAN SPECTRUM DEMODFM Purpose Demodulates an FM waveform using the Hilbert Transform Format DEMODFM series series A series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Returns A series or array Example W1 gtriwave 1000 001 4 W2 W1 100 20 W3 cos integ 2 pi W2 W4 demodfm W3 196 Remarks See Also W1 gtriwave 1000 001 4 W2 W1 100 20 1 24 1404 14 1204 0 8 4 1007 0 6 oj 0 4 604 0 2 404 04 20 0 24 T T T T T T T T 07 T T T T T T T T T 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 W3 cos integ 2 pi W2 W4 demodfm W3 1 54 140 4 Hl Wt Hl iL 4 Ht i paa i Ih i Hie Hil WWM 204 i i i i il il al i 0 5 i MW Hil HN if i i J Iii l i Hi 40 a4 il A MN IT pil 1 5 T T T T T T T T T 0 T T T T T T T T T T 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 W2 represents the scaled information signal and W3 is the resulting frequency modulated signal The amplitude of W2 determines the instantaneous frequency of W3 The instantaneous frequency of W3 ranges from min w3 20 Hz to max w3 120 Hz W4 is the demodulated waveform DEMODFM uses HILB to calculate the Hilbert Transform HIL
536. se Format Returns Example Remarks Returns the separator character used in the file path names by the operating system On DOS machines this character is in UNIX it is in VMS it is PATHCHAR A string define DSPMACREAD S macread strcat DSP pathchar macros S defines the macro DSPMACREAD to read in macro file S from the macros subdirectory of DSP PATHCHAR is helpful when you are setting up subdirectories for your menus and macros 549 PAUSE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 550 Pauses execution of an SPL function PAUSE seconds mode break_on_key seconds Areal Number of seconds to pause mode Optional An integer Background processing mode 0 do not process background events 1 process events Defaults to 0 break_on_key Optional An Integer 0 do not break when a key is pressed 1 break when a key is pressed Defaults to 0 Nothing echo Paused pause 10 echo Done The Paused message is displayed on the status bar All processing is suspended for 10 seconds then the Done message is displayed on the status bar echo Paused pause 10 1 echo Done Same as above accept background processing is enabled e g the clock continues to tick break_on_key requires mode to be set to 1 When used in conjunction with ECHO or PRINTF PAUSE is helpful for checking intermediate values of variabl
537. se 0 The PLOTMODE function can be very useful in a vertical bar construction if you do not want DADiSP to plot the intermediate steps in the command string For example if Window 1 contained a test series W2 plotmode 0 W1 W1 setdeltax 01 lexpandh 2 plotmode 1 displays only the squared and expanded waveform However PLOTMODE is generally not required For example the above expression can be written as W2 W1 W1 setdeltax 01 expandh 2 DADiSP automatically suppresses intermediate plots between each semicolon delimited expression until the entire statement has been evaluated Separating multiple statements by semicolons is preferred POFF a macro is equivalent to plotmode 0 and disables plotting PON a macro is equivalent to plotmode 1 and enables plotting and forces an immediate re plot Vertical Bar CALC ONPLOT PROTECT 565 POINTS Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also POLAR Purpose Format Returns Example 566 Displays the data points of a series or table rather than connecting the points with a continuous curve POINTS gsin 100 0 01 points generates a sine wave and displays the data points of the series as points POINTS is equivalent to the second mode of the F7 key and SETPLOTSTYLE 1 BARS LINES SETPLOTSTYLE STEPS STICKS TABLEVIEW Converts the input value to magnitude phase form POLAR expr expr Any expression evaluating to a
538. series Cast input as a string Explicitly casts the input to a variant of a specified type Explicitly converts a series to an array of variants Specify double precision data file type Specify floating point data file type Calculate integer value of expression Convert date string to Julian date integer Convert a series of yymmdd values to Julian dates Specify long integer data file type Specify signed byte data file type Specify signed integer data file type Convert Julian date integer to date string Specify unsigned byte data file type Specify unsigned integer data file type Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying unsigned long integer data type Create an XY plot from Date Time and Y series Clear a debugger breakpoint Start or continues the debugger Move down the debugger callstack Quit the debugger Show the status of the debugger callstack Display debugger status Step the debugger to the next executable line Step into the next SPL routine Step out of the current SPL routine Set a debugger breakpoint Move up the debugger callstack Debugger summary Display current SPL local variable xi Display and Manipulation ACTIVATE ADDWFORM ADDWKSFORM ASCALE BARCTR BARGAP BARS BARSTYLE BARTOP CALC CLEAR CLEARALL CLEARALLDATA CLEARDATA COMPRESSH COMPRESSV DISPLAY DISPLAYALL EXPANDH EXPANDV FOCUS GETFOCUS GETPLOTSTYLE GETPLOTTYPE GETSCALES GETXLABEL GETYLABEL HIDE HILO INHSERSTYLE
539. series is larger than the buffer size only one buffer of data is kept in memory at a time However each column of a multi column series or table has a buffer assigned to it If a series is smaller than the buffer size the series buffer is automatically reduced to the actual series length Use setbufsize no arguments to return the current buffer size GETCONF SETCONF 659 SETCOLHEADER Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also Sets the text of a column header in a Window SETCOLHEADER Window text colnum Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window text Astring the column header text colnum An integer the number of the column to set setcolheader My Data 2 sets the column header of the 2 column in the current Window to My Data The column header can also be set by left clicking the header when the Window is displayed in TABLEVIEW SERCOLOR WINCOLOR SETCOLOR Purpose Format 660 Sets the color of a series in a Window SETCOLOR Window color item index Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window color Any pre defined macro name or integer for a color supported by DADiSP item Optional Item to set Defaults to 1 the primary series index Optional Series to set Defaults to 1 the first series Example Remarks See Also W1 gnorm 100 1 W2 wl wl overplot wl W3 ravel W1 w2 setcol
540. set of the resulting columns Defaults to the x value of the starting points Returns A table Example 1 integ gnorm 100 1 2 integ gnorm 200 1 3 ravel W1 W2 4 colmaxidx wW3 5 colextract W3 W4 10 ones numcols W3 1 20 1 6 Wl overp col w5 1 lred 7 W2 overp col W5 2 lred W1 integ gnorm 100 1 W2 integ gnorm 200 1 6 AA i ies 2 N oo W JN 6 vs A is 104 T T T T T T T T 1 5 T T T T T T T T T T 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 W3 ravel W1 W2 W4 colmaxidx W3 W5 colextract W3 W4 1 1 No Units 74 1 75 000000 Ba i 2 139 000000 34 7 7 i V 10 1 4 0 20 40 60 80 64 68 72 76 80 W6 W1 overp col w5 1 Ired W7 W2 overp col W5 2 Ired 6 2N ETS 41 An 101 i 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 W6 and W7 highlight in light red a 20 point window around the maximum values of the original series in W1 and W2 97 Remarks See Also COLIDX Purpose Format Returns 98 1 2 3 v Il 145 By OF 5 Th Oe O54 3 4 5 b colextract a 1 2 3 3 2 1 De 4tlg 55 Ot 4 8 5 7 Here COLEXTRACT implies the following Starting at the first point extract 3 points from column 1 Starting at the second point extract 2 points from column 2 Starting at the third point extract to the end of column 3 If start is negative
541. sets the data and the formula of W1 The operator performs a standard variable assignment Standard variables do not propagate changes For example a 5 b ax a a 10 The variable b retains the original value 25 Use the operator to create hot variables Hot variables propagate changes For example a 5 b a a a 10 See Also The operator creates hot variables a and b Variable b now automatically updates whenever a changes thus b has the value 100 See to compare two expressions Hot Variable Assignment Window Assignment Conditional Operators Assignment Operators SETHOTVARIABLE SETVARIABLE Hot Variable Assignment Purpose Format Returns Example Assigns a formula to a hot variable or Window variable lt formula gt variable A hot variable or Window lt formula gt Any formula evaluating to a scalar series table or string Nothing the formula is assigned to the hot variable a 5 b a a b returns 25 a 10 b returns 100 W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 integ W1 assigns the formulae to W1 and W2 Remarks See Also See the operator to perform a standard variable assignment Standard variables do not propagate changes Use to group multiple statements for a hot variable assignment in an SPL routine For example setwl W1 integ gnorm 1000 1 label Test Data The setwl routine assigns the fo
542. several of the matrix dissection routines to select specific regions of an array 107 See Also COLNPUT Purpose Format Remarks See Also 108 LOTRI LOTRIX ROWNOS UPTRI UPTRIX Resets the column cursor position COLNPUT Window index item cursor Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window index An integer The number of the column in the item item Optional A positive integer The index to the item in the Window Defaults to 1 cursor Optional A positive integer The index to a column cursor in the item Defaults to 1 If the index is less than one then the cursor will be set to one If the index is greater than the number of columns in the item then the cursor will be set to the number of columns in the item COLNMOVE COLPOS CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURNPUT CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON COLORBAR Purpose Format Returns Examples Adds a vertical color bar to a Window COLORBAR w fs w Optional A Window to obtain colormap Defaults to the current Window or the system colormap if the current Window is empty fs Optional An Integer the color scale mode 0 autoscale scale color range to Window values default 1 use full scale color range Overlays a vertical colorbar to the right of the current Window x y fxyvals 1 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 W1 cos x y setplotstyle 0 setplottype 4 W2 2 Wl rainbow colorbar cos x y setplots tyle 0
543. single input A B C D Tf2ss Num Den Num A Matrix Must contain the numerator coefficients with as many rows as there are outputs y Den A series Must contain the coefficients of the denominator in descending powers of s The A B C D matrices of the state space transformation in controller canonical form A B C D tf2ss Num Den creates the A B C D matrices of the state space transformation in controller canonical form This calculation also works for discrete systems See Also TIC Purpose Format Returns Example See Also TILE Purpose To avoid confusion when using this function with discrete systems always use a numerator polynomial that has been padded with zeros to make it the same length as the denominator BILINEAR Starts the internal timer TIC Nothing the timer is restarted tic fft wl b toc sprintf FFT execution time g seconds b prints the approximate time required to calculate and display the FFT of W1 W1 gnorm 1024 32 1 W2 tic fft wl label strnum toc W2 is labeled with the approximate time to calculate the FFT of W1 CLOCK GETTIME TOC Arranges the screen into equal sized windows 779 Format Example See Also TOC Purpose Format Returns Example 780 TILE mode mode Optional Aninteger Defaults to 0 0 Auto tile default 1 Tile vertically 2 Tile horizontally 3 Tile equal size newworksheet
544. sive Format LOGSPACE lo hi n lo Optional A real the start range Defaults to 0 0 hi Optional A real the end range Defaults to 3 n Optional An integer the number of samples Defaults to 100 Returns A series of n logarithmically spaced values Example 458 1og2 1024 returns 10 log2 2 4 8 16 returns the series 1 2 3 4 logspace 1 5 5 returns 10 100 1000 10000 100000 logspace 0 5 5 returns 1 17 783 316 228 5623 413 100000 Remarks See Also LONG Purpose Format Expansion Example Remarks See Also The DELTAX values of the resulting series is 10 hi 10 10 n 1 and the XOFFSET is set to 10 1o Range Specifier GLINE LINSPACE Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying long integer data type LONG writeb MYFILE long writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 32 bit signed integer point values ranging from 2147483648 to 2147483647 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 5 LONG is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB and WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments DOUBLE FLOAT READB WRITEB SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT ULONG 459 LOOKUP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 460 Selects data points from one series according to a table of point numbers contained in a sec
545. spacing factor offset points Number of points in the curve spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis measured in seconds factor Optional A multiplicative factor to expand or contract the waveform along the x axis Defaults to 1 offset Optional Operand used to adjust the position of the waveform specified in radians DADiSP supports the following trigonometric function generators GACOS Generate ArcCosine GACOSH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCosine GACOT Generate ArcCotangent GACOTH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCotangent GACSC Generate ArcCosecant GACSCH Generate Hyperbolic ArcCosecant GASEC Generate ArcSecant GASECH Generate Hyperbolic ArcSecant GASIN Generate ArcSine GASINH Generate Hyperbolic ArcSine 789 See Also TRIL Purpose Format Returns Example 790 GATAN Generate Arctangent GATANH Generate Hyperbolic ArcTangent GCOS Generate Cosine GCOSH Generate Hyperbolic Cosine GCOT Generate Cotangent GCOTH Generate Hyperbolic Cotangent GCSC Generate Cosecant GCSCH Generate Hyperbolic Cosecant GSEC Generate Secant GSECH Generate Hyperbolic Secant GSIN Generate Sine GSINC Generate SINC function sin x x GSINH Generate Hyperbolic Sine GTAN Generate Tangent GTANH Generate Hyperbolic Tangent SETDEGREE SETRADIAN TRIGONOMETRIC FUNCTIONS Returns the lower triangle of a matrix TRIL m d m An array d Optional An integer the diagonal on and below which to include array elements
546. spline interpolation SPLINE series n series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table n An integer Interpolation factor Interpolated time domain series W1 6 5 8 11 6 W2 spline W1 10 W3 W2 overplot W1 RED setsymbol SQUARE 2 compare the spline fit with the original data red curve with square symbols The cubic spline interpolation is smoother SPLINE is also useful for XY plots For example W1 1 5 8 10 15 W2 2 6 4 8 10 W3 xy W1 W2 W4 xy xyinterp W1 10 spline W2 10 Remarks See Also SPLINE2 Purpose Format Returns Example SPLINE effectively fits a third order polynomial between adjacent samples and uses the polynomial equation to calculate the interpolated values INTERPOLATE INTERP2 POLYFIT SGRID SPLINE2 XYINTERP Performs two dimensional cubic spline fitting SPLINE2 array numrows numcols array An input array to interpolate numrows An integer the row interpolation factor numcols Optional An integer the column interpolation factor Defaults to numrows An array W1 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 W2 spline2 W1 4 80 60 40 20 0 si 0 2 4 6 8 0123 4567 89 731 Remarks See Also SPLLOAD Purpose Format 732 W1 ravel gnorm 100 1 10 W2 spline2 W1 4 W2 contains a 37x37 array of interpolated values W1 density spline2 rand 10 10
547. ssion 527 Format Returns Example See Also NUMEL Purpose Format Returns Example 528 NUMCOLS series series Optional Window reference or DADiSP expression evaluating to a series or multi series table Defaults to the current Window An integer numcols rand 10 3 returns 3 the number of columns created by RAND COL GETWCOUNT LENGTH NUMITEMS NUMROWS SERCOUNT SIZE Returns the total number of array elements NUMEL a a Optional An array defaults to the current Window An integer the total number of array elements a rand 20 3 numel a 60 b 4 1 10 2 1 2 numel b 13 Remarks For a series nume s length s See Also LENGTH SIZE Purpose Returns the total number of data items in a Window Format NUMITEMS Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to current Window Returns An integer Example W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 integ wl overp w1 numitems W2 returns 2 W3 xy wl w2 numitems W3 returns 1 numcols w2 returns 2 Remarks See NUMCOLS to count all columns See Also ITEMCOUNT NUMCOLS SIZE 529 NUMROWS Purpose Returns the number of rows in a Window or DADiSP expression Format NUMROW G series series Optional Window reference or DADiSP expression evaluating to a series or multi series table Defaults to the current Window Returns An integer Example numrows rand 10
548. st deletes the function test from the current Worksheet Remarks The CLEAR function also deletes a function clear test See Also DEFFUN CLEAR CLEAROPL DELALLFUNCTIONS FUNCTIONS SPLREAD SPLWRITE DELTAX Purpose Returns the delta x increment of a series or table i e the inverse of the sampling rate Format DELTAX series series Optional Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Defaults to the current Window Returns A scalar Example deltax gsin 20 05 returns 0 05 the inverse of the sampling rate 194 Remarks When referencing a table DELTAX returns the delta x increment of the first column in the table See Also RATE SETDELTAX Purpose Deletes the specified variable associated with the current Worksheet Format DELVARIABLE variable_name variable name The name of the variable to delete Example delvariable B deletes the variable B from the current Worksheet Remarks Use SPLREAD to restore variables in SPL files DELVARIABLE can be abbreviated DELVAR The CLEAR function can also delete a variable clear b See Also CLEAR DELALLFUNCTIONS DELALLVARIABLES DELFUN GETVARIABLE SETVARIABLE SPLREAD 195 DEMEAN Purpose Removes the mean or DC value from a series Format DEMEAN series series A series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Returns A series or a table Example demean gsin 100 0 01 23 return
549. string to the cells in row 1 column 1 through row 100 column 1 DDEPOKE always converts the data into an appropriate string format DDELINK DDEREQUEST DDEREQUEST Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 174 Retrieves a string item from a DDE conversation DDEREQUEST chan item chan An integer specifying the DDE channel number item A string specifying the item to retrieve A string representing the value of the item requested chan ddeinit Excel Sheet1 dderequest chan R1C1 ddeterm chan establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cell in row 1 column 1 as a string and then terminates the conversation DDEREQUEST always returns a string Use DDEGETDATA to obtain a series See Also DDEGETDATA DDELINK DDEPOKE Purpose Reports the error status of the last DDE operation Format DDESTATUS Returns A string indicating the status of the last DDE operation Example chan ddeinit DummyAPP DummyTopic ddestatus returns DDE STATUS DMLERR_ NO CONV_ESTABLISHED indicating the conversation could not be established Remarks The following DDE errors are reported DMLERR_ADVACKTIMEOUT A request for a synchronous advise operation has timed out DMLERR _ BUSY The responding application is busy DMLERR_DATAACKTIMEOUT A request for a synchronous data operation has timed out DMLERR_DLL_NOT_INITIALIZED A DDE function was called be
550. sult by M abs M i 1 1 where i is the index of the result See FXCORR for the frequency domain implementation ACORR CONV FACORR FCONV FXCORR Calculates the cross covariance using direct convolution XCOV s1 s2 norm s1 An input series s2 An input series norm Optional An integer the normalization method Valid inputs are 0 None Default 1 Unity 1 to 1 2 Biased 3 Unbiased A series W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gsin 1000 001 4 W3 xcov W1 W2 performs the cross covariance of two sinewaves The peaks of the result indicate the two waveforms are very similar at the time intervals where the peaks occur 833 W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 W3 xcov Wl W1 1 W4 xcov Wl W2 1 W1 gsin 1000 001 4 W2 gnorm 1000 001 0 5 5 J 2 14 YU YU V V 3 1 5 T T T T T T T T T T 4 T T T T T T T T T i 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 0 0 2 0 4 0 6 0 8 1 W3 xcov W1 W1 1 W4 xcov W1 W2 1 W3 displays the cross covariance of a sinewave normalized to 1 and 1 W4 shows the cross covariance between a sinewave and random noise The normalized maximum of W3 is 1 0 indicating perfect covariance at time t 0 Although the waveform of W4 displays some peaks the normalized maximum is roughly 0 04 indicating little covariance between W1 and W2 For a graphical representation overplot W4 in W3 Remarks The
551. t in the sine wave is a Complex number in Real Imaginary form where the imaginary part is Zero cartesian 1 returns the Complex scalar 1 0 0i Remarks CARTESIAN returns a Complex value regardless of the input value For series CARTESIAN always returns a Complex series See Also IMAGINARY PHASE POLAR REAL Purpose Casts the values of a series to a new data type Format CASTBYTE series datatype swapflag series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table datatype An integer code number or name specifying the data type Name Code Data Type Range SBYTE 1 Signed Byte 128 to 127 UBYTE 2 Unsigned Byte 0 to 255 BYTE 2 same as UBYTE 0 to 255 SINT 3 Signed Integer 32768 to 32767 UINT 4 Unsigned Integer 0 to 65536 LONG 5 4 byte Signed Integer 2 147 483 648 to 2 147 483 647 FLOAT 6 4 byte Floating Point 10437 to 10438 DOUBLE 7 8 byte Floating Point 10 307 to 10 308 ULONG 8 4 byte Unsigned Oto 4 294 967 295 Integer swapflag Integer 0 No swap 1 Swap byte order Defaults to 0 Returns A series or table 71 Example Remarks See Also castbyte W1 UBYTE converts the values into unsigned bytes ranging from 0 to 255 All of the data types listed above are macros that are described in this manual BYTESWAP CASTCOMPLEX Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 72 Explicitly casts the input to a complex scalar CAS
552. t Schur and Schur components in separate variables x l 3 4 155 05 ohh 8 9 12 schur x 19 964 4 353 2 2431 0 0 1 4739 0 1399 0 0 0 0 0 50976 uschur x 0 25387 0 96612 0 046551 0 50456 0 17334 0 84579 0 82521 0 19124 0 53147 For matrix A SCHUR and USCHUR produce matrixes such that A uschur A schur A transpose uschur A If the matrix is Real SCHUR returns the Real Schur form which has the Real Eigenvalues on the diagonal and the Complex Eigenvalues in 2 by 2 blocks on the diagonal If the matrix is Complex SCHUR returns the Complex Schur form which is upper triangular with the Eigenvalues of the table on the diagonal MMULT TRANSPOSE USCHUR 647 SCREENOPT Purpose Format Example Remarks 648 Selects Worksheet elements to be visible on or hidden from the screen display SCREENOPTilegends titles wbar wborder wmargin legends Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Legends are text annotations in the Windows Defaults to 1 titles Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Titles are text annotations on the Worksheet Defaults to 1 wbar Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Wbar specifies the text for the Window number Window formula and or Window label Defaults to 1 wborder Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep
553. t Window clear clears the current Window clear W1 W5 W9 clears Windows 1 5 and 9 Remarks See Also clear W3 W8 clears Windows 3 through 8 clear W1 clears Window 1 using the shorter command form Only one Window at a time can be cleared using this syntax A cleared Window propagates throughout the entire Worksheet If W2 depends on W1 and W1 is cleared DADiSP will clear the data in W2 and display the symbol NA not available in the center of W2 The Window formula in W2 is not cleared To prevent losing important Windows use PROTECT CLEAR can also delete variables For example a 10 clear a deletes variable a CLEARALL CLEARDATA CLEAROPL PROTECT WINLOCK CLEARALL Purpose Format Example Clears all Window contents and formulas from every Window in the Worksheet Be careful using this function CLEARALL clearall removes all series and formulas from every Worksheet Window 87 Remarks See Also Consider saving your Worksheet before using CLEARALL CLEARALL does not effect functions or variables See CLEARALLDATA to remove the data from all Windows while preserving the Window formulae CLEAR CLEARALLDATA CLEARDATA CLEARALLDATA Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 88 Clears the data from every Window in the Worksheet without removing the Window formulae CLEARALLDATA clearalldata clears the data only from each Window i
554. t Window s z axis range to be the same as that of Window 2 GETZT SETZ SETZTIC Returns the top z coordinate of a Window GETZT Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number setz 2 getzb 2 getzt doubles the z range GETZB SETZ SETZTIC GETZTIC Purpose Format Returns Example See Also GEXP Purpose Format Returns the z axis tic interval of a Window GETZTIC Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window A real number setztic 2 getztic W2 sets the current Window s ztic interval to be two times that of Window 2 SETXTIC SETYTIC SETZTIC XTIC YTIC Generates an exponential curve in accordance with the specified parameters GEXP points spacing factor offset points Number of points in the waveform spacing Spacing between each point on the x axis factor Optional A multiplicative factor to expand or contract the waveform along the x axis Defaults to 1 offset Optional An operand to adjust the x position of the waveform specified in radians Defaults to 0 331 Returns Example See Also A series gexp 100 0 1 2 5 creates an exponential curve shifted 5 x units along the x axis and compressed by a factor of 2 The first half of this series is equivalent to taking every second point from a gexp 100 0 1 series LOG GHAMMING Purpose Format Returns
555. t least one digit appears before it The value is rounded to the appropriate number of digits Precision specifies the maximum number of significant digits printed If specified as 0 is treated as 1 Precision specifies the maximum number of characters to be printed Type is a required character that determines whether the associated argument is interpreted as a character string or a number Type Characters Output Format d I u O x X f Signed decimal integer Unsigned decimal integer Unsigned hex integer using abcdef or ABCDEF Signed value having the form dddd dddd where dddd is one or more decimal digits Signed value having the form d dddd e sign ddd where d is a single decimal digit dddd is one or more decimal digits ddd is exactly three decimal digits and sign is or Identical to the e format except that E rather than e introduces the exponent 575 Returns Example Remarks See Also 576 A string Signed value printed in f or e format whichever is more compact or the given value and precision The e format is used only when the exponent of the value is less than 4 or greater than or equal to the precision argument Trailing zeros are truncated and the decimal point appears only if one or more digits follow it Identical to the g format except that G rather than g introduces the exponent Single character String Characters printed up to the first null
556. t worksheet level Define macro string or scalar constant Read macro definitions from file in the MACROS subdirectory View an ASCII text file from the MACROS subdirectory Evaluate string expression Evaluate to a string Display list of available functions Return information about a macro Determine whether a macro is defined Jump to a label in a macro Load a command file Read an external file of macro definitions List current macros defined in worksheet Write current macro list to an external file Write status line messages to text file Perform no operation Macro returning integer 0 Macro returning integer 1 Set maximum depth for nesting macros Display contents of ASCII file Create a series or multiple column array Multiply two matrices Raise a matrix to a scalar power or a scalar to a matrix power Divide one matrix by another Performs matrix right division Swap the rows and columns of a specified table Complex conjugate of the matrix transpose Balance a matrix Compute the Cholesky factorization of a square matrix Return an array of COL numbers Estimate the condition number of a matrix Calculate matrix determinant Get the main diagonal of a matrix Compute the Eigenvalues and Eigenvectors of a square matrix Get Eigenvalues of a matrix Get Eigenvectors of a matrix Calculate the exponential of a matrix Reverse the elements of each row of an array xix FLIPUD HESS INTERPOSE INNERPROD INVERSE KRON LLU
557. table If you pass CASTINTEGER a table it will only operate on the first point in the first column of the table CASTINTEGER can abbreviated CASTINT CASTCOMPLEX CASTREAL CASTSERIES CASTSTRING INT 73 CASTREAL Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Explicitly casts the input to a real value CASTREAL expr expr A scalar series table or expression returning a scalar series or table A real value castreal 1 returns the value 1 0 castreal 0 2 8i returns the value 0 2 CASTREAL is helpful when writing SPL functions that require an explicit real input and the type of the variable passed into the function may not be real If the input to CASTREAL is a series it will only operate on the first point of the series If the input to CASTREAL a table it will only operate on the first point in the first column of the table CASTCOMPLEX CASTINTEGER CASTSERIES CASTSTRING CASTSERIES Purpose 74 Explicitly casts the input to a series Format Returns Example Remarks See Also CASTSERIES expr expr A scalar series table string or expression returning a scalar series table or string A series castseries 8 returns a one point series with the value 8 This is equivalent to 8 castseries 8 231 returns a series with one complex value 8 231 This is equivalent to 8 23i castseries string Equivalent to string and re
558. tains the table Coeff R2 Se 0 044900 0 999201 0 020604 6 293248 6 989869 12 180623 12 057509 The increase in R2 and the corresponding decrease in Se indicates the 4th order fit performs better in the least squares sense than the previous 2nd order fit 556 Remarks See Also PHASE Purpose pfit series N performs a least squares fit of a series to y afl a 2 x a 3 x 2 a N 1 x N where y is the input series and N is the order of the fit PFIT returns the coefficients a k of the above power series If form is 1 then y a 1 x N al2 x N 1 a N x a N 1 R2 sometimes called the Coefficient of Determination is an indication of how the fit accounts for the variability of the data R2 can be thought of as variability of model variability of data An R2 of indicates the model accounts for ALL the variability of the data An R2 of 0 indicates no data variability is accounted for by the model The Standard Error of Estimate Se can be thought of as a normalized standard deviation of the residuals or prediction errors Residuals Y Yestimate Se sqrt sum Residuals 2 length Y order 1 As the model fits the data better Se approaches 0 POLYFIT POLYROOT STDEV Macro Calculates the phase angle of a Complex expression 557 Format Returns Expansion Example Remarks See Also PHI Purpose Format Expansion Remarks 55
559. tarting from the item where the first cursor was last placed colpos Wl 1 2 returns the item number of the second cursor location for the first item in W1 Changes in cursor position do not propagate through the Worksheet If you want to update a Window dependent on a new cursor position use the Line Editor F3 key to re enter the line so that the cursor position is re evaluated A series or an XY plot are considered an item DADiSP remembers the last position of the cursors when a cursor is placed on the series it is drawn at the most recent location which may mean that the Window is redrawn to display that x or y range To disable this feature use setconf CURSORL_MEMORY 0O and setconf CURSOR2_MEMORY 0 To disable DADiSP from remembering the column number of the last cursor location use setconf ITEM_MEMORY 0Q COLNMOVE CURMOVE CURNMOVE CURPOS CURPUT CURSORON dadisp cnf configuration file NUMITEMS COLPROD Purpose Format Calculates the product of each column of an array COLPROD x x An input array 111 Returns Example See Also A series a 1 2 3 4 5 6 Ad jo Oe OE on i colprod a ion 28 80 162 PROD SUM COLREDUCE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 112 Applies the REDUCE function to each column of a table COLREDUCE table op opcode table Any table or expression evaluating to
560. tation Freehand line drawing cursor in window Delete line annotation Draw a polyline between specified coordinates Move line annotation Format a list of numbers Set the comment for any window overlays and overplots Format a list of strings Draw a left justified block of text at a given point Annotate graph with text at specified coordinates Freehand text annotation cursor in window Delete text annotation Edit text annotation Move text annotation Logical Operators Conditional operators Logical AND Eliminate points based on condition Determine if two expressions are equal Combine binary series inputs Determine if one expression is greater than another Determine if one expression is greater than or equal to another Return 1 for each element that is a NA value Determine if one expression is less than another Determine if one expression is less than or equal to another Logical NOT Determine if two expressions are not equal Logical OR Replace values in a series based on a logical condition Logical XOR Colors COLORBAR COOL COPPER DFLOOD GETCOLORMAP GETCRANGE GETGCOLOR GETGRIDCOLOR GETPALETTE GETRBG GRAY GRIDCOLOR HATCHCOLOR HOT MAPPALETTE RAINBOW RESETMAP SAVECMAP SERCOLOR SETCOLOR SETCOLORMAP SETCRANGE SETGCOLOR SETPALETTE SETPMAP SETSHADING SETXPAL SHOWCMAP STRCOLOR WINCOLOR Display the current colormap Generate a colormap of shades of blue Generate a copper colormap Change the color
561. te out of range values default 1 clip out of range values to end points 2 set out of range values to NA An XY series where the Y values are the interpolated output result WES Tyo 2a Spy 2 W2 xylookup wl 0 2 1 5 2 4 W3 Wl overp w2 1red setsym 14 2 setplotstyle 1 2 W1 contains the source series W2 linearly interpolates W1 at X 0 2 1 5 2 4 to produce an XY series with Y values of 1 2 2 5 2 6 W3 displays the original series with the interpolated values overplotted as red circles W4 xylookup wl 0 2 1 5 2 4 spline 1 Same as above except cubic spline interpolation is performed and out of range values are clipped to the first or last point of W1 W5 xylookup xvals wl yvals wl 1 0 2 4 spline interpolates W1 over the range 1 to 4 using cubic splines Explicit X and Y input series are specified Remarks See Also XYZ Purpose Format Returns If the desired X values lie outside the X range of the input series the resulting output values depend on the RANGE parameter If RANGE is 0 or unspecified out of range output values are computed by applying the interpolation method on the first two or last two points of the input series and extrapolating to the new X value If RANGE is 1 out of range output values are set to the first or last point of the input series If RANGE is 2 out of range output values are set to NA If METHOD is none out of range values
562. ted you can operate on it with any DADiSP function For example fft xyinterp W1 The X values of the XY series should be monotonic i e either steadily rising or falling Non monotonic values are ignored INTERPOLATE POLYFIT SPLINE XY XVALS YVALS XYLOOKUP Purpose Format Interpolates Y values from a series given arbitrary X values XYLOOKUP series xi method range series A series The input series to interpolate from xi A series The desired output X values method Optional A string the interpolation method none return nearest neighbor no interpolation linear use linear straight line interpolation default spline use cubic spline interpolation 845 Returns Example 846 range Optional An integer the out of range method 0 interpolate out of range values default 1 clip out of range values to end points 2 set out of range values to NA Alternative format XYLOOKUP xseries yseries xi method range xseries A series The input X series to interpolate from yseries A series The input Y series to interpolate from xi A series The desired output X values method Optional A string the interpolation method none return nearest neighbor no interpolation linear use linear straight line interpolation default spline use cubic spline interpolation range Optional An integer the out of range method 0 interpola
563. teger 0 causes DADiSP to save the last screen image to disk rather than store it in memory Saving the screen to disk frees up a considerable amount of memory for external programs especially if you are running in color mode SHELL DOS UNIX and VMS are pre defined Macros equivalent to running the Pipeline command SHELL as noted in the Macro Expansion above To return to DADiSP from the operating system type exit If you have trouble escaping to the operating system from a Worksheet on an MS DOS machine try typing DOS 0 RUN SHELL Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying double precision data type DOUBLE writeb MYFILE DOUBLE writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 64 bit IEEE standard double precision floating point values The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 7 DOUBLE is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments See Also DPTABS Purpose Format Remarks See Also When writing a file using DOUBLE as the file type be sure to read the file back into the Worksheet using the same binary format FLOAT LONG READB SBYTE SINT UBYTE UINT ULONG WRITEB Draws a point in the current Window at the indicated coordinates DPTABS x y color style x X coordinate of point Defaults to 1 y Y coordinate of point Defaults to 1
564. terfall and related surface mesh plots have two methods to be drawn These are called the Painter s method 1 and Horizon method 0 By default 1 DADiSP will dynamically decide which to use In general DADiSP uses the Painter s method except when sending output to a pen plotter By default surfaces are drawn with cross hatches at each observation The lines are drawn using the grid color and then filled using the data series color See Also PLOT PLOTALL WATERFALL Purpose Allows you to set a plot style 676 Format Example Remarks SETPLOTSTYLE Window n Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window n An integer Valid arguments are 0 Lines 1 Points 2 Sticks 3 Bars 4 Table View 5 Hilo 6 Reserved 7 Stack 8 Percent Stack 9 Steps 10 Stem setplotstyle W3 2 sets the graph style in Window 3 to sticks a gnorm 100 1 setplotstyle a 9 sets the style of a to steps If a is placed in an empty window it will automatically be displayed as a step plot If the plot style of a Window has not been set the series will be displayed in the style of the series If the window style has been set the series will be displayed in the style of the Window For example W1 1 100 bars a gnorm 100 1 setplotstyle a 10 Wl a W2 a The plotting style of W1 is set to bars and all series placed in W1 will be displayed as bars The variable a plots as bars in W1 ev
565. th of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer gt Real yields a Real Integer gt Series yields a Series Integer gt Integer yields an Integer Real gt Complex yields a Complex Real gt Series yields a Series Complex gt Real Series yields a Complex Series String gt String yields a string greater max W1 20 returns a if the maximum value of W1 is greater than 20 0 or 0 if the maximum value of W1 is less than or equal to 20 0 greater 3 5 1 10 8 returns a series 0 0 0 1 greater a b is equivalent toa gt b String comparisons use STRCMP lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators GREATEREQUAL LESSER GREATEREQUAL Purpose Format Determines if one expression is greater than or equal to another expression GREATEREQUAL expr1 expr2 exprl Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table 349 Returns Example Remarks See Also A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the same type as the higher of the two expressions 1 TRUE 0 FALSE Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer gt Real yiel
566. the Nyquist frequency 727 See Also SPIN Purpose Format Returns Example 728 The SPECTRUM is calculated by the FFT and has the following form spectrum s 2 mag fft s length s with frequency values from 0 to Fs 2 Hz where Fs is the sampling rate of the data i e rate s The first value DC component and the last value at Fs 2 the Nyquist frequency are not scaled by 2 to preserve Parseval s theorem See PSD to compute the Power Spectral Density See SPECGRAM to compute a joint time frequency distribution Beginning with Version 3 01D SPECTRUM is implemented as a built in function rather than a macro DFT FFT PSD SPECGRAM Spins a 3D plot SPIN xdegree ydegree zdegree num xdegree Optional A real the X rotation increment Defaults to 3 degrees ydegree Optional A real the Y rotation increment Defaults to 3 degrees zdegree Optional A real the Z rotation increment Defaults to 3 degrees num Optional A real the number of times to rotate Defaults to 300 Nothing W1 xyz gsin 100 01 4 gcos 100 01 4 0 0 01 0 99 scalesoff spin spins the spiral 3 degrees in each direction 300 times Remarks See Also spin 2 2 3 200 spins the spiral 2 degrees in the X and Y directions 3 degrees in the Z direction 200 times The default spin angle is 3 degrees and the default total number of times to spin is 300 See RTSPIN to spin the plot in background mode RTSP
567. the average of the previous and next point if it is less than the average by 20 AVGFILT uses the convolution function to calculate the neighbor averages For n 1 the kernel is simply 1 0 1 2 CONV Creates a new series that is the arithmetic mean of any number of input series 53 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also AVGS series seriesN seriesl seriesN Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table A series or table We 33053 a O SF W2 9 8 4 2 1 W3 avgs W1 W2 creates a new series 6 0 6 5 5 5 5 5 2 0 in W3 by averaging the series in the listed Windows i e W1 W2 2 0 avgs W1 W2 W6 W7 W9 creates a new series by averaging the series in the listed Windows i e W1 W2 W6 W7 W9 5 0 avgs W3 W8 averages Windows 3 through 8 i e W3 W4 W5 W6 W7 W8 6 0 AVGS operates on Real or Complex input and returns Complex output if any of the input is Complex If the input series are of different lengths all series are padded with point values of 0 0 to the length of the longest series MEAN SUMS BALANCE Purpose 54 Balances a table to improve its conditioning Format Returns Example Remarks See Also BARCTR Purpose BALANCE table table A Real or Complex square table A table whose row and column norms are approximately equal WI 1 8 3
568. the current Window Optional The string to be printed in the Window formula bar colormode Optional An integer 0 Black amp White 1 Color Defaults to 0 hpfile Optional The HPGL output filename or printer port in quotes Defaults to hpgl out psfile Optional The PostScript output filename or printer port in quotes Defaults to post eps See Also PRINTOPT PRINT PREVIEW FUNCTIONS SCREENOPT 577 PRINTOPT Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 578 Selects Worksheet elements to be visible on or hidden from printouts PRINTOPT legends titles wbar wborder wmargin legends Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Legends are text annotations in the Windows Defaults to 1 titles Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Titles are text annotations on the Worksheet Defaults to 1 wbar Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Wbar specifies the text for the Window number Window formula and or Window label Defaults to 1 wborder Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Wborder specifies the outer border outline of each Window Defaults to 1 wmargin Optional An integer value 1 ON 0 OFF 1 Keep current setting Wmargin specifies the border outline on the inner Window separating the inner Window from the Window plotting margin Defaults to 1 pr
569. the current Window sums W3 W8 sums Windows 3 through 8 and places the result in the current Window SUMS operates on both Real and Complex series returns a Complex series if any of the input series are Complex Shorter series are padded with 0 0 to the length of the longest series AVGS MEAN SUM Calculates the singular value decomposition of an array SVD a mode u w v SVD a a The input array mode Optional An integer the type of output matrix 00 W Singular values as a column default 01 V Right singular value matrix 10 U Left singular value matrix 11 Combined U W V matrix Returns Example Remarks SVD a returns a series containing the singular values of a u w v SVD a returns u w and v as three separate matrices WI 441 2 3h5 14 5 6 7 8 9 W2 svd wl W2 1 6848E 001 1 0684E 000 1 9637E 016 W2 contains the singular values of W1 as a single column series The singular values are ranked from largest to smallest u w v svd wl u 0 2148 0 8872 0 4082 0 5206 0 2496 0 8165 0 8263 0 3879 0 4082 w 1 6848E 001 0 0000E 000 0 0000E 000 0 0000E 000 1 0684E 000 0 0000E 000 0 0000E 000 0 0000E 000 1 9637E 016 v 0 4797 0 7767 0 4082 0 5724 0 0757 0 8165 0 6651 0 6253 0 4082 u w vi 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 The input matrix A is de
570. the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area fg clr Optional An integer specifying color of series in the Window Defaults to 1 the color of the primary series bg clr Optional An integer specifying the background color of the annotated text Defaults to 1 the Window background color 429 Example 430 font box_flg margin flg focus sl M oan sn G W1 gsin 100 W2 gcos 100 legend W2 1 Optional An integer specifying a font type Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are NORM FONT SMALL FONT STATLINE_FONT POPBOX FONT WINLABEL FONT TOOLBAR FONT LISTBOX FONT MENU FONT USER FONT USER2 FONT 0 USER3_ FONT 1 PANEL FONT er OAANANDNHRWNF 1 Optional 1 ON 0 OFF Draws a box around the legend text Defaults to 1 Optional An integer specifying margin to be adjusted Defaults to 1 Valid arguments are 1 No Margin Adjustment 0 Top Margin 1 Right Margin 2 Bottom Margin 3 Left Margin Optional An integer specifying focus for PAPER annotations Defaults to 1 Optional The text that will be printed at coordinates x and y above Annotation lines are in top to bottom order If not specified the text defaults to the series comment 01 setsym SQUARE 1 10 1 comment Sine 01 setsymb 9 1 10 5 comment Cosine 8 1 puts a legend in the bottom left corner of W2 legend wl 8 2 2 1 1 1 1 1 Sinewave place
571. the pertinent SPL statements word CreateObject Word Application start Word doc word Documents get Doc object range doc Add Range get Range object range InsertAfter str insert string word Visible 1 show on screen See Also CREATEOBJECT GETPROPERTY SETPROPERTY 508 MSWORD2 Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Inserts a metafile of a Worksheet into MS Word using ActiveX MSWORD2 Nothing It creates and inserts a Worksheet into MS Word msword2 creates a new example Worksheet in DADiSP then starts MS Word and inserts the metafile of the Worksheet into the current Word document MSWORD2 is a simple example of how to invoke an external application MS Word as an ActiveX server using SPL SPL uses an ActiveX syntax similar to C and Visual Basic Here are the pertinent SPL statements copyworksheet copy DADiSP Worksheet into the clipboard word createobject Word Application start Word doc word Documents get Doc object range doc Add Range get Range object word Visible 1 show on screen See MSWORD for an example of copying text into CREATEOBJECT GETPROPERTY MSWORD SETPROPERTY MULTIREADB Purpose Reads an interlaced multi channeled binary file and places it in a series of Windows 509 Format MULTIREADB filename vunits hunits filetype numseries start offset byteswap Windows deltax
572. the right mouse button or ESC a second time indicates that you re done TEXTEDIT allows you to edit single lines of text It does not however allow you to erase single lines of text Use TEXTDEL to delete text blocks Cursoring through lines of text to edit causes the surrounding box to be partially erased The box can be redrawn with the PON command All visible text blocks in the current Window and Worksheet margin are marked by handles for possible editing To make titles and legends visible call SCREENOPT 1 1 before using TEXTEDIT TEXT TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTMOVE TEXTMOVE Purpose Format Remarks Moves a block of text created with TEXT or TEXTCUR TEXTMOVE TEXTMOVE surrounds each text block in a Window with four handles one at each corner You may choose a text block by moving the mouse cursor from within a text block while pressing the left mouse button When you begin moving your text all handles disappear and a rubberband box replaces the handles around the chosen text block Releasing the mouse button completes the move 777 See Also TF2SS Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 778 You may move multiple blocks of texts during a single TEXTMOVE session To leave TEXTMOVE press the right mouse key or ESC TEXT TEXTCUR TEXTDEL TEXTEDIT Calculates the state space representation x Ax Bu y Cx Du of the system NUM s H s DEN s from a
573. the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 8 bit unsigned byte point values ranging from 0 to 255 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 2 UBYTE is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments DOUBLE FLOAT LONG READB SBYTE SINT UINT ULONG WRITEB Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying unsigned integer data type UINT writeb MYFILE UINT writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 16 bit unsigned integer point values ranging from 0 to 65535 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 4 UINT is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB WRITEB and other functions with data type arguments 793 See Also ULONG Purpose Format Expansion Example Remarks See Also 794 DOUBLE FLOAT LONG READB SBYTE SINT UBYTE ULONG WRITEB Macro Provides an argument for functions specifying unsigned long integer data type ULONG writeb MYFILE ulong writes the series in the current Window to a file named MYFILE as 32 bit signed integer point values ranging from 0 to 4294967295 The above example is equivalent to writeb MYFILE 8 ULONG is not a stand alone Worksheet function It can only act as an argument for functions such as READB and WRITEB and other functi
574. there is more than one series in a Window i e overplots or overlays each series appears as a separate column Without a Window reference tab evi ew is equivalent to setplotstyle 4 To change point values press F9 in an active Window to display a cursor Select the point values to edit using the arrow keys Type the new value and press Enter to overwrite the old value EDIT SETPLOTSTYLE SETPLOTTYPE TABLE TABLES TEXT Purpose Format Draws a left justified block of text at a given point TEXT win x y target fg_clr bg_clr font box_flg legend_fig stretch_fig margin_flg focus s1 SN win X y target fg_clr bg_clr font Optional Target Window Defaults to the current Window Real numbers that designate the upper left anchor coordinate pair for annotation text Optional An integer specifying the relationship of the text to the Window Defaults to 0 Valid arguments are 0 PAPER Text on the graph paper in the Window within the coordinate system of the data 1 GLASS Text within the plotting area of Window 2 GLASS _WMARGIN Text within the area of the entire Window 3 GLASS_WPMARGIN Text within the vertical dimensions of a Window and within the horizontal dimensions of the plotting area 4 GLASS _WSMARGIN Text within the entire Worksheet area Optional An integer specifying color of series in the Window Defaults to 1 the color of the primary s
575. ties increased by 10 Unlike standard images a 24 bit image does not reference a separate colormap Instead each pixel of the image is comprised of a composite 24 bit RED GREEN BLUE value packed into a long integer 4 bytes Use r g b getrgb image to retrieve the separate red green and blue values from a composite 24 bit image image rgbimage r g b to construct a 24 bit composite image from separate RGB values Because 24 bit color images do not require a colormap the colors are implicit the image can be saved and restored automatically with the correct colors RGBIMAGE is a built in function See Also RMS Purpose Format Returns Expansion Example See Also ROOTS Purpose DENSITY GETCOLORMAP GETRGB IMAGE24 IMINTERP INTERP2 SPLINE2 Macro Calculates the root mean square of a series or scalar expression RMS series series Any scalar series or expression resulting in a scalar or series A scalar SQRT MEAN ARG ARG W1 gsin 100 01 rms W1 returns 0 707107 MEAN MOVRMS SORT Generates a series containing the n Complex roots of unity 627 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also ROOTS n n An integer Number of roots to generate Series or table with n points roots 3 returns the complex series 1 0i 0 5 0 86601 0 5 0 86601 ROOTS is used internally but you are welcome to find a use for it See POLYROOT
576. tion Flag Meaning Left justify Explicit sign or before number If width is prefixed with 0 zeros are added until the minimum width is reached If 0 and appear the 0 is ignored If 0 is specified with an integer format i u x X 0 d the 0 is ignored blank Insert blank before positive number When used with the o x or X format the prefixes any nonzero output value with 0 0x or 0X When used with the e E of f format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases When used with the g or G format the forces the output value to contain a decimal point in all cases and prevents the truncation of trailing zeros Width is an optional number that specifies the minimum number of characters output Precision is an optional number that specifies the maximum number of characters printed for all or part of the output field or minimum number of digits printed for integer values Types d I u o x X e E g G Behavior Precision specifies the minimum number of digits to be printed If number of digits in the argument is less than precision the output value is padded on the left with zeros The value is not truncated when the number of digits exceeds precision Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point The last printed digit is rounded Precision specifies the number of digits to be printed after the decimal point If a decimal point appears a
577. tional Window reference Defaults to the current Window date String representing new date in quotes Must be in the form MM DD YY or MM DD YYYY setdate W3 6 12 2003 sets the date of the series in W3 To verify the change press F2 to display the information box To save the change save the series after its date has been changed GETDATE GETTIME SAVESERIES SETTIME 665 SETDEGREE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also A global system operation changing the mode of DADiSP trigonometric functions to degrees SETDEGREE setdegree sin 90 returns 1 setradian sin 90 returns 0 89399666 By default trigonometric calculations are in radians OFF ON SETRADIAN SETDELTAX Purpose Format Example 666 Modifies the spacing between points on the horizontal axis SETDELTAX series newdeltax series Optional Any series table or expression evaluating to a series or table Defaults to the current Window newdeltax A real the new deltax setdeltax 0 2 sets the current DELTAX to 0 2 a sampling rate of 5 per second if the units are seconds Remarks See Also When referencing a table SETDELTAX changes the deltax of each column of data to the newdeltax For example ravel l 3 5 grandom 3 0 1 setdeltax 0 5 sets the current deltax of the generated series in column as well as the generated random series in column 2 to 0 5 DELTAX RATE
578. to 0 01 a 99 confidence level A real or series The standard deviation range for the given confidence level s a2std 0 01 returns 2 5758 the standard deviation range for a confidence level of 99 W1 0 01 0 02 0 03 0 04 0 05 W2 a2std Wl W2 2 5758 2 3263 2 1701 2 0537 1 9600 the standard deviation ranges for confidence levels 99 98 97 96 and 95 A2STD uses the built in INVPROBN function to lookup a Z value for a given probability See Also ABS Purpose Format Returns Example INVPROBN CNF2STD PDFNORM PROBN Produces the absolute value of any expression ABS expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table abs 3 returns 3 abs 3 27 returns 3 605551 0 000000i a complex scalar mag 3 2i returns 3 605551 a real scalar abs mean W7 returns a scalar which is the absolute value of the mean of the series in Window 7 To rectify a sine wave type abs gsin 100 0 1 1 This new sine wave contains only positive values in the y domain 3 Remarks See Also ACORR Purpose Format Returns Example 32 ABS always returns a complex result where the imaginary part is always 0 for a complex input Use MAG to return a purely real result IMAGINARY MAGNITUDE PHASE REAL Calculates the auto correlation using the convolution method ACORR s norm s An input series
579. to add usecolor Optional Color flag 1 load series with different colors 0 load series using the default color Defaults to 0 451 Example Remarks See Also loaddataset RUN1 1 loads all the series in Dataset RUN1 1 into the Windows starting from the current Window If a version number is not specified it is defaulted to version 1 loaddataset W4 RUN1 1 loads the data into the specified Window W4 The specified Dataset name is case sensitive If a specified Window already contains a series LOADDATASET by default prompts the user for overwrite permission LOADDATASET also accepts an optional overwrite flag to automatically overwrite existing series in a Window without prompting DELETEDATASET IMPORTFILE LOADSERIES OPENLABBOOK SAVESERIES LOADSERIES Purpose Format Example 452 Loads Series1 SeriesN from a Dataset into a list of Windows LOADSERIES W Wn seri serN overwrite W1 Wn Optional List of Windows to load series into serl serN List of series to load in quotes overwrite Optional Overwrite flag 1 overwrite any existing series in a Window 0 do not overwrite Defaults to 0 loadseries MYSERIES 1 SERIES loads the series MYSERIES 1 SERIES into the current Window loadseries W1 W4 W5 D 1 S1 D 1 S2 D 1 S3 loads D 1 S1 D 1 S2 and D 1 S3 into W1 W4 and W5 respectively Remarks See Also loadseries W1
580. to find the roots of a polynomial POLYROOT RTHROOT ROTATE3D Purpose Format Example 628 Rotates a 3D graph in the current Window ROTATE3D xa ya Za xa ya za Angles for X Y and Z rotation Wl xyz gsin 200 01 5 gcos 200 01 5 1 200 creates a 200 point spiral rotate3d 60 45 15 rotates the spiral 60 degrees in the X direction 45 degrees in the Y direction and 15 degrees in the Z direction rtspin spins the spiral Use rtspin 0 to halt spinning Remarks See Also ROUND Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also The PLOT3D or SETPLOTTYPE function must be performed on the table before ROTATE3D is used ROTATE3SD sets the rotation matrix of a 3d surface by performing rotations first around the x axis then the y axis and finally the z axis from an initial front view which is perpendicular to the xy plane x is horizontal y is vertical and z is depth invisible SETRADIAN and SETDEGREE determine whether rotation is in radians or degrees Defaults to degrees MOUSEROTATE PLOT3D RTSPIN SPIN Rounds input to nearest integer value ROUND expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table round 5 73 returns the integer value 6 round W1 returns a new series by applying ROUND to each value of the W1 series Use INT to truncate to the smallest integer CEILING FLOOR INT 629
581. topic Optional A string specifying the topic name item Optional A string specifying the item name server Optional A string specifying the name of server executable autostart Optional An integer 1 Start server 0 Don t start Defaults to 0 A positive integer representing the channel number for subsequent DDE operations If the DDE conversation cannot be established a value of 0 is returned chan ddeinit Excel Sheetl dderequest chan R1C1 ddeterm chan establishes a DDE conversation with Excel returns the value of the cell in row 1 column 1 as a string and then terminates the conversation To automatically start Excel if it is not already running try chan ddeinit Excel Sheetil C excel excel 1 The app optional topic and optional item strings can also be placed in one string of the following format app topic item For example chan ddeinit Excel Sheet1 DADiSP supports the Commands and System topics when acting as a DDE server The Commands topic is for normal interaction with DADiSP The System topic supports the following items SysItems All items under the System topic Topics All topics Formats Supported Clipboard formats DDELINK DDETERMINATE 171 DDELINK Purpose Retrieves a series item from a DDE conversation whenever the item changes The DDE channel number is managed internally Format DDELINK app topic item
582. tring The string to be converted by applying the control string control Format control string Conforms to C C language printf specifications Control strings may contain ordinary characters escape sequences and format specifications The ordinary characters are copied to the output in order of their appearance Escape sequences are introduced by a backslash Format specifications in the control string are introduced by a percent sign and are matched to the specified arguments in order If there are more arguments than there are format specifications the extra arguments are ignored See SPRINTF for further details varN Optional One or more variables Each variable is set to the result of the string conversion If no variables are specified sscanf returns the result of the conversion The result of the conversion a string or scalar if no variables are specified else the number of variables successfully processed 739 Example Remarks See Also STACK Purpose Format 740 sscanf 123 d returns the integer 123 sscanf 123 g returns the real 123 0 a b ce Q0 sscanf 10 Units Oxff d 4s x a b Cc returns 3 indicating that 3 variables were successfully converted The variables are set as follows a 10 b Units c 255 a 0 sscanf 123 4g a returns 1 anda 123 a 0 sscanf alpha g a returns 0 indicat
583. ts Find the index of the minimum value of a series Find the location of the minimum value of a series Return the minimum of on or two input arguments Determine the remainder from a division Calculate the arithmetic negative Extract a 4 bit nibble from a value Macro The golden mean 1 5 2 Macro Provides value of Calculate the product of all values of a series or array Apply operator to all values Determine the remainder from a division Replace values in a series based on a logical condition Generate Complex roots series Round input to nearest integer value Generate Complex root scalar Square root Calculate the sum of a series Sum n series Return the maximum of one or more input arguments Return the minimum of one or more input arguments Alternate reference for CURRENT window Series Processing Language SPL INCLUDE ARGCOUNT ARGTYPE ARGV CLEAROPL ERROR GETARGV GETSPLPATH GETSTRING ISFUNC ISVARIABLE OUTARGC PAUSE RETURN xxviii Include macro files in other macro files Return the number of arguments specified in an SPL function Return the data type of the input argument Specify variable arguments in an SPL routine Delete all OPL files located on the SPLPATH Abort an SPL routine and optionally displays a message Return a variable argument from an SPL routine Return the directory path to search for SPL files Prompt for textual input via input panel with OK and Cancel buttons Return 1 i
584. tshift phase W2 produces interesting 2D magnitude and phase images W1 cos x y setplottype 3 rainbow W2 fft2 W1 2 15 1 05 0 05 1 15 2 012 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 W3 fftshift log 10 mag W2 W4 fftshift phase W2 FFT2 is often used in image processing applications Use FFTSHIFT to flip the output so th e 0 frequency is in the center of the plot If the input data is a series 1 e a single column a 1D FFT is performed FFT IFFT2 FFTP Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also References Calculates the Fast Fourier transform of a series in polar Magnitude Phase form FFTP series len series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table len Optional An integer FFT length Defaults to the length of the input series If len gt length series the series is padded with zeros A complex series or table in Polar form W1 gsin 1000 0 001 50 W2 fft wl 1024 W3 fftp wl 1024 Although W2 and W3 are identical in terms of the complex result W2 contains the FFT result in Cartesian form a b i while W3 represents the result in polar form M exp i theta For plotting purposes W2 displays the real part of the FFT and W3 displays the magnitude part The FFTP result is complex polar and DADiSP plots the magnitude of the resultant series DADiSP uses a mixed radix FFT FFTP uses the same
585. turns a series with the ASCII codes for the characters in the string string 115 116 114 105 110 103 castseries DADISP returns a series with the ASCII codes for the characters in the string DADiSP 68 65 68 105 83 80 CASTSERIES is helpful when writing SPL functions that require an explicit series input and the type of the variable passed into the function may not be a series The also cast the input into a series When used with table input CASTSERIES operates on the first column of the table and returns it as the series When used with string input CASTSERIES functions like CHARSTRS Array Construction CASTCOMPLEX CASTINTEGER CASTREAL CASTSTRING CHARSTRS GSERIES 75 CASTSTRING Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 76 Explicitly casts the input to a string CASTSTRING expr expr A scalar series table string or expression returning a scalar series table or string A string caststring 8 returns the string 8 caststring 2 3i hello returns the string 2 0000 3 0000i hello W1 gsin 100 01 caststring max W1 returns the string 1 Wl 68 65 68 105 83 80 caststring W1 returns the string DADiSP CASTSTRING is helpful when writing SPL functions that require an explicit string input and the type of the variable passed into the function may not be a string When used with integer input CASTSTRING functions like STRCHARS Whe
586. ues as separate scalars x y z findmax s returns the X Y and Z values as separate scalars a HVtly Tes Oy Ske b findmax a x y findmax a 0 b xy 1l 12 x 1 0 y 12 0 W1 gnorm 100 1 overp findmax curr lred setsym CIRCLE 2 marks the MAX of W1 with a red circle FINDMAX returns an XY series with the same units as the input series If the series is XYZ or a LIST i e Z surface density or contour FINDMAX returns an XYZ series x y findmax s returns the first occurrence of the maximum in s 255 See Also FINDMIN Purpose Format Returns Example 256 FIND FINDMIN FINDVAL MARKMAX MARKMIN MAXVAL MINVAL Returns the X and Y value of the minimum of a series FINDMIN s x y z FINDMIN s s A series or expression resulting in a series An XY series or separate scalars b findmin s returns an XY or XYZ series x y findmin s returns the X and Y values as separate scalars x y z findmin s returns the X Y and Z values as separate scalars foe 2 es Og 5 findmin a x y findmin a 0 a ool b xy 1 12 x 1 0 y 12 0 W1 gnorm 100 1 overp findmin curr lred setsym CIRCLE 2 marks the MIN of W1 with a red circle Remarks See Also FINDVAL Purpose Format Returns Example FINDMIN returns an XY series with the same units as the input series If the series is XYZ or a LIST i
587. uld display the first 100 points of the current series falling between the values of 0 0 and the maximum y value of the entire series SETXY will expand or compress the current units scale To refresh the Window and redraw appropriate scales toggle the F5 key or Scales toolbar button GETXL GETXR GETYB GETYT SETWLIKE SETX SETY SETY Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also SETYLOG Purpose Specifies the y axis coordinate range of a Window SETY Window ybottom ytop Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window ybottom Areal Bottom Window boundary ytop Areal Top Window boundary sety 1 0 1 0 sets the bottom of the Window to 1 0 and the top to 1 0 sety min W1 max W1 sets the y axis range from the minimum value of the series to the maximum value of the series SETY will expand or compress the current units scale To refresh the Window and redraw appropriate scales toggle the F5 key or Scales toolbar button GETXL GETXR GETYB GETYT SETX SETXY Turns log scales On Off for the y axis of the current Window 703 Format Example See Also SETYTIC Purpose Format Example 704 SETYLOG mode subtic mode Optional An integer 1 On set log axis 0 Off set linear axis default subtic Optional An integer 1 label sub tics 0 do not label sub tics default setylog 1 tums on y axis log scaling setylo
588. um Binary operators include the arithmetic and logical operators The Exclusive OR operator is represented by the string XOR The function also accepts an explicit function code instead of an operator string Either an operator string or function code must be supplied amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators COLREDUCE INNERPROD INTERPOSE OUTERPROD REDUCE 633 RTHROOT Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also RTREAD Purpose Format Returns 634 Returns the principal Complex rth root of unity RTHROOT r r Real number A Complex scalar e 27 i r rthroot 2 0 returns mag 1 angle 3 14159 180 rthroot 6 9 returns mag 1 angle 0 91061 52 17391 Returns Complex number in polar form Use cartesian rthroot r to see the root in Cartesian form Use rthroot r n to see the other rth roots of unity See POLYROOT to find the roots of a polynomial POLYROOT ROOTS Reads real time data from a file RTREAD Places new series in W1 Example Remarks See Also RTSPIN Purpose Format Returns Start first DADiSP to simulate a real time data source rttinit rtwrite Start second DADiSP to read real time data rttinit rtread The series generated by the first DADiSP is read synchronously by the second DADiSP The real time data appears in W1 of the second DADiSP The first DADiSP writes a binary series to the fi
589. urn length of series Determine linear regression Linear regression of two or more series Calculate max Calculate mean Calculate median Moving Average Moving average with end point padding Perform n point moving maximum calculations Perform n point moving minimum calculations Calculate the moving RMS of a series Calculate the moving standard deviation of a series Calculate Partial sum Return the probability density function for a normal distribution Calculate Pearson s Linear Correlation Coefficient Find the roots of a polynomial using the companion matrix Calculate the probability of X lt z for a normal distribution Calculate derivative from right Root Mean Square Apply REDUCE function to each row of a matrix Return length of series Grid XYZ data using spline interpolation Perform two dimensional cubic spline fitting Display statistics STDEV and ERROR Calculate the standard error of a series or table Calculate Standard Deviation Generate Singular Value Decomposition of a matrix Solve for x in A x b using singular value decomposition Integration using the trapezoidal rule Fit a line to a series Calculate x value for a given density function and confidence level String Manipulation ANYFORMAT CHARSTR CHARSTRS DIRPATH FPRINTF GETSTRING ISNUMBER NFORMAT NUMSTR NUMSTRS PATHCHAR PRINTF SFORMAT SPRINTF SSCANF STRCAT STRCHAR STRCHARS STRCMP STRESCAPE STREXTRACT STRFILE STRFIND S
590. urns the array Hie tir Tea doy eoa 4 1 0O REORDER is similar to LOOKUP but much faster on larger series GRADE LOOKUP SORT 615 REPLACE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also 616 Replaces values in a series based on a logical condition REPLACE series condition newval series Any series multi series table or expression resulting in a series or table condition A binary series or logical expression resulting in a binary series or table to determine which points to replace newval Areal or series the value to replace with A series or table Wiles SLs W2 replace W1l WI gt 3 1 W2 contains the series 1 2 3 1 1 Any value of W1 that is greater than 3 is replaced with the value 1 W1 gnorm 1000 1 W2 gnorm 1000 1 W3 replace W1l W2 gt W1 W2 The series in W3 contains the point by point maximum of W1 and W2 REPLACE uses a binary series to detect and replace values The existing value is preserved where condition 0 and the value is replaced by newval where condition 0 DELETE DELETECOL DELETEROW DECIMATE INSERT REMOVE REPLICATE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also Concatenates a series or table with itself REPLICATE series n series Any series table or expression resulting in a series or table n An integer value equal to the number of times the specified series should be concate
591. urpose Format Returns Example Remarks Combines two input expressions into complex Cartesian Real Imaginary form MAKECARTESIAN expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Complex scalar series or table in Real Imaginary form makecartesian 1 2 returns the scalar 1 2i makecartesian 1 5 2 returns the complex series 1 21 2 21 3 21 4 21 5 2i makecartesian Wl W2 is equivalent to W1 W2 i for W1 and W2 real series Returns a Complex value regardless of the input value If at least one of the input arguments is a series MAKECARTESIAN returns a Complex series makecartesian a b is equivalent toa b i For complex inputs makecartesian a b is equivalent to real a real b i 473 See Also CARTESIAN IMAGINARY MAKEPOLAR PHASE POLAR REAL MAKEPOLAR Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks 474 Combines two input expressions into complex Polar Magnitude Phase form MAKEPOLAR expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Complex scalar series or table in Magnitude Phase form makepolar 1 2 returns the scalar 1 2a 0 416147 0 909297i makepolar 1 5 2 returns the complex series 1 2a 2 2a 3 2a 4 2a 5 2a makepolar W1 W2 is equiv
592. ut full scale input range is to 100 The resulting output now shows only 4 distinct levels since the actual input series only ranges from 1 to 100 about half the full scale input range BITQUANT always outputs integer values See QUANTIZE to quantize a series to an arbitrary number of levels BITSCALE LINSCALE QUANTIZE BITSCALE Purpose Format Returns Example Remarks See Also BREAK Purpose Format Converts raw AD counts to scaled engineering values BITSCALE xi numbits yl yh xi An input series or scalar numbits An integer The number of AD converter bits yl Areal The low value output range yh Areal The high value output range A series or real bitscale 4096 16 2 5 2 5 returns 0 312543 the corresponding output for input 4096 of a 16 bit converter with an output range of 2 5 bitscale 128 127 8 0 0 10 0 returns a series ranging from 0 0 to 10 0 BITSCALE assumes offset binary input data i e the input data ranges from 2 numbits 2 to 2 numbits 2 1 BITSCALE does not automatically clip out of range values LINSCALE Terminates the immediately enclosing FOR or WHILE loop BREAK 65 Example Remarks See Also ValChk s local ns ival ns S ival max deriv ns while ival lt 10 ns deriv ns ival max ns if ival lt 0 break return ival In the SPL function Val Chk if ival the max of th
593. variance of 1 P X lt 0 0 0 5 probn 2 1 2 probn 0 1 2 returns 0 382925 the probability that a value is less than or equal to 2 and greater than or equal to 0 0 for a normal distribution with a mean of 1 0 and a standard deviation of 2 0 In probabilistic terms given the normal distribution N 1 4 i e mean of 1 variance of 4 P 0 0 lt X lt 2 0 0 382925 1 probn 5 returns 0 30853754 the probability that a value is greater than 0 5 for a normal distribution with a mean of 0 0 and a standard deviation of 1 0 probn invprobn 3 returns 0 3 indicating that PROBN and INVPROBN are inverse functions Remarks See Also PROD Purpose Format Returns Example probn 3 0 01 3 displays the normal cumulative distribution function from 3 to 3 PROBN uses the built in ERF function to evaluate the area under the normal distribution curve Note that probn z returns the area from negative infinity to z See INVPROBN to calculate the inverse normal cumulative distribution function PROBN and INVPROBN are inverse functions See PDFNORM to generate the normal density function A2STD CNF2STD CONFX ERF INVPROBN PDFNORM XCONF Calculates the product of all values of a series or array PROD x x An input series or array Defaults to the current Window A scalar prod 5 9 2 0 5 returns 45 a 1 2 3 14 5 6 7 8 9 prod a returns 362880 58
594. ve sampled at 64 Hz W2 produces a 253 point interpolated 3 Hz sine wave with a sample rate of 64 4 256 Hz W3 fzinterp W1 3 5 produces a 221 point interpolated 3 Hz sinewave with a sample rate of 64 3 5 224 Hz FZINTERP is identical to ZINTERP except that the interpolation factor i e the multiple of the original sampling rate is specified instead of the new rate Although the interpolation factor N is NOT required to be an integer for an output length L the relation N L length s must hold so the actual interpolation factor might differ from N See ZINTERP for algorithm details FSINTERP INTERPOLATE POLYFIT SPLINE ZINTERP Executes the gamma function a generalization of factorial for the domain of real numbers 289 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also GAMMA Purpose Format Expansion Remarks See Also 290 GAMM expr expr Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table A scalar series or table gamm 1 2 3 4 returns series 1 1 2 6 The gamma of n is the factorial of n 1 In practice it is often advisable to use the natural log version of GAMM GAMMLN because GAMM will exceed the maximum floating point representation for arguments greater than about 171 62 GAMMA GAMMLN Macro Returns the scalar GAMMA constant GAMMA 0 5772 1566490153286061 Use GAMM to compute the gamma function DEG E GAMM LN PHI PI SETDEGRE
595. verts a date string into a Julian date integer JULSTR date date Date in dd mm yy format in quotes An integer julstr 1 11 58 returns 2436215 JULYMD STRJUL Converts a series of YYMMDD values to Julian dates JULYMD dtser format dtser Aseries of date time values format Optional An integer Valid inputs are 0 YYMMDD default 1 YYYYMMDD A series or array of Julian integers W1 980101 980102 980103 980112 W2 julymd W1 W3 xy W2 1 2 3 4 42 Remarks See Also JUMP Purpose Format Example Remarks 422 W2 contains the series 2450815 2450816 2450817 2450826 Each value is the Julian representation of the original date time values of W1 In this case W1 is specified in YYMMDD format W1 19980101 19980102 19980103 19980112 W2 julymd W1 W3 xy W2 1 2 3 4 Same as the first example but the date time format is YYYYMMDD JULYMD attempts to recognize the YY YYMMDD and YYMMDD date time formats and returns a 0 for any date time values that cannot be converted JULSTR Performs logical branching in macros i e jumping to a particular point in the macro JUMP cond label cond Logical condition that must be true if the jump is to occur label Label to jump to if condition is true in quotes or string form fft W1 jump mean phase curr NEG echo Positive jump 1 END NEG echo Negative END label Mean Phas
596. with the extension ORF and optionally deletes them Example chkfiles Examines each Worksheet Dataset and Channel file in the current Labbook and automatically deletes any unreferenced files Remarks CHKFILES checks if any Labbook files are no longer referenced by Labbook objects For example temporary files will not be deleted if the machine improperly shuts down while a Labbook is open These temporary files will be unreferenced in the next DADiSP session and CHKFILES can be used to automatically remove and recover the file space See Also EVAL RUN CHOLESKY Purpose Computes the Cholesky factorization of a square matrix Format CHOLESKY a eflag C p CHOLESKY a a An expression evaluating to a real or complex matrix eflag Optional An integer flag 0 report errors 1 suppress errors Defaults to 0 84 Returns Example An upper triangular matrix the Cholesky factor of the input matrix C p cholesky a returns both the Cholesky factor C and p the number of Nulls if the input is not positive definite or 0 if the input is positive definite If p is non zero a is not positive definite and C is not fully computed v Il 3 2 3 105 AS OES 3 2 43 C cholesky a C 1 73205 1 1547 1 73205 0 1 63299 2 71948e 016 0 0 1 Matrix a is positive definite and C represents the Cholesky factor conj c C 3 2 3 2 4 2 3 2 43 eig a
597. worksheet e g a button to fetch new data which would be fine on the main Worksheet toolbar would be inappropriate to the data cursor toolbar If your functions contains quotes use double quotes then surround the entire string with single quotes To make a toolbar button permanent add the toolbar function to the splmain routine in the file dadisp sp1 For example in dadisp spl splmain toolbar 1 8 4 RED Stats _MF statsum men The button now appears on the toolbar for every DADiSP session Converts a string to upper case TOUPPER string string Any string expression A string Example toupper Myfile dat returns MYFILE DAT See Also TOLOWER Purpose Calculates the trace of an array the sum of the diagonal elements Format TRACE a a An input array Defaults to the current series Returns A real the diagonal sum Example We 4415 25 35 4 5 6 7 8 9 trace wl returns 15 Remarks TRACE defaults to the current series if no input is supplied See Also DIAG SUM Purpose Swaps the rows and columns of a specified table 785 Format Returns Example Remarks See Also TRAPZ Purpose Format Returns 786 TRANSPOSE table table Any table or expression evaluating to a table A table W1 1 2 3 ANE S 1 2 3 W2 transpose W1 Wess 4915 Ly DY El ale OG Aig Oy oo by The postfix ope
598. ws in matrix2 The number of rows in the output matrix is equal to the number of rows in matrix1 and the number of columns in the output matrix is equal to the number of columns in matrix2 Matrix multiplication is not commutative the order of the arguments is important mmult a b is equivalenttoa b XA Matrix Solve INNERPROD INTERPOSE INVERSE MDIV OUTERPROD REDUCE TRANSPOSE MOD Purpose Determine the remainder from a division Format MOD num den num A scalar series or table The numerator value den A scalar series or table The denominator value Returns A scalar series or table Example mod 5 3 returns 2 W1 1 10 W2 ravel W1 5 mod W1 5 returns the series 1 2 3 4 0 1 2 3 4 0 mod W2 5 returns the 5x2 array 1 1 25 2 3 3 4 4 0 0 od 12 3 3 returns 2 7 rem 12 3 3 returns 0 3 od 12 3 0 returns 12 3 Remarks mod a b isequivalenttoa b mod a b has the same sign as b and rem a b has the same sign as a Both are equal if the inputs have the same sign but differ by b if the signs differ i e 499 See Also mod a b rem a b b MOD works for scalars series and tables CEILING FIX FLOOR REM ROUND MOUSEROTATE Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also 500 Activates a mouse driven rotation of a PLOT3D graph MOUSEROTATE W1 rand 5 W2 spline2 W1 5 setplottype 4 hot m
599. x y with light blue cross hatching HATCHCOLOR is distinct from the background GRIDCOLOR of a 3D plot GRIDCOLOR PLOT3D SETPLOTTYPE Accesses the on line help file dspfun hlp HELP helptopic HELP helptopic helptopic The help topic help movavg loads the help file dspfun h1p the DADiSP Function Reference Manual and displays the topic page for the MOVAVG function The shorter command form is also available help movavg 363 Remarks See Also HELPFILE Purpose Format Example 364 Functional form help helptopic Command form help helptopic The functional form is useful in SPL functions and menus The command form is easier to enter when used interactively HELPFILE VIEW VIEWFILE WHICH Accesses on line help files HELPFILE topic filename topic The help topic in quotes filename Optional The name of the help file in quotes Defaults to dspfun hlp helpfile movavg dspfun hlp loads the help file dspfun h1p the DADiSP Function Reference Manual and displays the topic page for the MOVAVG function helpfile Menus with Custom Help files dspum hlp loads the help file dspum h1p the DADiSP Worksheet Manual and displays the topic page for Menus with Custom Help Files To use HELPFILE in a custom dialog box or menu use the following syntax note the tilde character h helpfile topic filename For example h helpfile SPL Hot variab
600. xample Remarks See Also Deletes all OPL files located on the SPLPATH CLEAROPL memflag memflag Optional An integer 1 clear SPL functions from memory 0 do not clear functions from memory Defaults to 0 clearopl deletes all OPL files normally found on SPLPATH clearopl 1 same as above accept all SPL functions are also cleared from memory CLEAROPL is useful for resetting the compiled state of SPL routines CLEAROPL only removes files with extension OPL SPL files and any other files are not removed CLEAR DELALLFUNCTIONS GETSPLPATH CLEARXLABEL CLEARYLABEL Purpose Format 90 Clears the x axis or y axis label and resets the display to the horizontal x axis or vertical y axis units CLEARXLABEL Window CLEARYLABEL Window Window Optional Window reference Defaults to the current Window Example Remarks See Also CLIP Purpose Format Returns Example clearxlabel clears the definition of the x axis label on the current window and displays the horizontal units Once the x axis or y axis label is cleared the units label will reappear as usual Horizontal and Vertical units have a 15 character maximum length restriction SETXLABEL and SETYLABEL allow the user to set an axis label which can be more than 15 characters long and which is independent of units so that the automatic translation of units can continue to operate GETXLABEL GETYLABEL SETHUNITS
601. xample Remarks Sets a global variable SETVARIABLE name value name A string The name of the variable value Any scalar series table or expression resulting in a scalar series or table setvariable DcOffset mean curr sets the variable DcOffset to the value which is the mean of the current Window Variables set with SETVARIABLE are global to the session Use VARS to view variables in the worksheet SETVARIABLE can be abbreviated SETVAR Variables can also be assigned with the operator DcOffset mean curr 689 See Also DEFVAR DELALLVARIABLES DELVARIABLE GETVARIABLE SETLOCALVARIABLE SETHOTVARIABLE SPLREAD VARS SETVPORT Purpose Format Returns Examples 690 Sets the viewport of the current Window to the input Window SETVPORT srewin deswin srewin A Window The template Window deswin Optional A Window the Window to modify Defaults to the current Window Nothing W1 gnorm 1000 01 setx 2 5 W2 W1 W1 setvport wl The squared data in W2 is displayed with the same X and Y range as W1 setvport wl w2 Same as above but the destination window W2 is explicit W3 gnorm 100 1 onplot eval setvport w3 w4 W4 gsin 100 1 02 The viewport of W4 is linked to the viewport of W3 W4 will scroll expand or compress whenever W3 scrolls expands or compresses ONPLOT The ONPLOT function uses EVAL to prevent W3 from referring to itself Remarks
602. xpression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table Returns Example Remarks See Also A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the same type as the higher of the two expressions 1 TRUE 0 FALSE Integer is the lowest type Real is next and Complex is the highest type If one or both of the expressions is a series then a series results The following is a list of type conversion rules Integer lt Real yields a Real Integer lt Series yields a Series Integer lt Integer yields an Integer Real lt Complex yields a Complex Real lt Series yields a Series Complex lt Real Series yields a Complex Series String lt String yields a String lesser 4 max 2 4 6 returns a value of 1 lesser 4 2 4 6 returns the series 0 0 1 LESSER a b is equivalent toa lt b String comparisons use STRCMP amp amp AND OR NOT XOR Logical Operators lt lt gt gt Conditional Operators GREATER LESSEREQUAL LESSEREQUAL Purpose Format Determines if one expression is less than or equal to another expression LESSEREQUAL expr1 expr2 expri Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table expr2 Any expression evaluating to a scalar series or table 433 Returns Example Remarks See Also A scalar series or table containing the value 1 or 0 of the sa
603. ype CALC 1 to reset the Worksheet to automatic mode DADiSP will automatically update each Window as needed CALC 2 steps through cyclical calculations that are mutually dependent A progress message is displayed in the status area Press the space bar to step to the next iteration CALC 3 turns on auto calculation but does not immediately evaluate changed Windows The Windows will re evaluate after a formula has been entered PLOTMODE PROTECT REFRESH UPDATE Calls a command file n times 69 Format Example Remarks See Also CALL comfile n comfile The name of the command file in quotes n Optional An integer specifying the number of times to call the command file Defaults to 1 call MYFILE DSP 2 executes MYFILE DSP two times from within the current Worksheet CALL is useful for creating loops in a command file Within a command file use CALL and LOAD to CALL or LOAD other sub command files so that control is returned to the originating command file after the execution of the sub command file LOAD CARTESIAN Purpose Format Returns Example 70 Converts an expression to Real Imaginary form in Cartesian coordinates CARTESIAN expr expr Any scalar or series in integer Real Complex or polar coordinate form Complex scalar series or table cartesian gsin 20 05 1 0 creates a Hz sine wave of 20 points spaced 0 05 seconds apart The value of each poin
604. ystem and 5 build date 807 Remarks VIEW Purpose Format Example Remarks See Also VIEWFILE Purpose 808 Have this information ready when speaking to DSP s Technical Support staff Display the contents of an SPL file VIEW splfile VIEW splfile splfile Name of the SPL file to display view trapz displays the SPL file trapz spl view trapz Same as above accept VIEW is specified in command form VIEW is a quick way of inspecting the source code of an SPL file DADiSP automatically searches all of the directories returned by the GETSPLPATH function to locate the SPL file VIEW can also display other files when an extension is provided e g view dadisp cnf GETSPLPATH VIEWFILE WHICH Returns the contents of an ASCII file on the screen Format Example Remarks See Also VMAX Purpose Format Returns VIEWFILE x y filename start end tabs lineno x Optional The x coordinate in text columns y Optional The y coordinate in text rows filename Name of file to display in quotes start Optional An integer Starting line in file Defaults to 1 the first line end Optional An integer Last line to display Defaults to 1 last line in file tabs Optional An integer Expand tabs Defaults to 0 tabs not expanded lineno Optional An integer Display line numbers Defaults to 0 do not show line numbers viewfile dadisp cnf

Function Reference Manual - DSP Development Corporation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents